B6J Jog Lever Switch Data Sheet

Subminiature DIP Switch for High-Density Packaging ■ Subminiature size (10 x 10 x 7.5 mm), ideal for high-density packaging ■ Completely sealed construction prevents flux entry during automatic flow soldering ■ BCD and hexadecimal types available (each complement type also available) ■ Position switching operation possible with a turn of a screwdriver from either top and side; the screwdriver slot on the top can rotate in either direction for desired setting ■ Thumbwheel and extended shaft type also available

Ordering Information

Part numbers No. of switching Standard Flat Extended Shaft Thumbwheel Output code type positions type type type type BCD 1-2-4-8 10 A6A-10R A6A-10RF A6A-10RS A6A-10RW BCD 1-2-4-8 complement only 10 A6A-10C A6A-10CF A6A-10CS A6A-10CW Hexadecimal 1-2-4-8 16 A6A-16R A6A-16RF A6A-16RS A6A-16RW Hexadecimal 1-2-4-8 16 A6A-16C A6A-16CF A6A-16CS A6A-16CW complement only

Important note: Switches cannot be water-washed.

191 A6A A6A

Specifications ■ CHARACTERISTICS

Switching capacity 1 to 100 mA, 5 to 28 VDC Carry current 100 mA, 50 VDC (max.) Contact resistance 200 MΩ max. Insulation resistance 10 MΩ min. (at 250 VDC) Dielectric strength 500 VAC for 1 minute between current-carrying metal part and ground 250 VAC for 1 minute between terminals of same polarity Operating force 120 to 250 g-cm Vibration Malfunction durability 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude Shock Malfunction durability Approx. 300 m/s2 (30 G) Materials Base/Cover PBT (Polybutylene terephthalate) Dial/Rotor Polyacetal O-ring Acryl nitril butadiene rubber Movable contact Phosphor bronze plated with Ag/Au clad Terminal Beryllium copper Ambient temperature -10° to 70°C Humidity 45% to 85% RH Service life Mechanical 10,000 detent operations min. Electrical 2,000 detent operations min. Weight A6A-10R(S) Approx. 0.8 g, A6A-10W Approx. 1.1 g

Note: Data shown are of initial value. Dimensions Unit: mm (inch) ■ A6A-10R, A6A-10C ■ A6A-16R, A6A-16C

■ A6A-10RF, A6A-10CF ■ A6A-16RF, A6A-16CF

192 A6A A6A

■ A6A-10RS, A6A-10CS ■ A6A-16RS, A6A-16CS

■ A6A-10RW, A6A-10CW ■ A6A-16RW, A6A-16CW

Terminal arrangement Mounting holes Internal connections (bottom view) (top view) (top view)

193 A6A A6A

NOTE: DIMENSIONS ARE SHOWN IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters to inches divide by 25.4.

OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC.OMRON ON-LINE OMRON CANADA, INC. One East Commerce Drive Global - http://www.omron.com 885 Milner Avenue Schaumburg, IL 60173 USA - http://www.omron.com/oei Scarborough, Ontario M1B 5V8 1-800-55-OMRONCanada - http://www.omron.com/oci 416-286-6465

Cat. No. GC SW6 04/01 Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in the U.S.A. DIP Switch A6C

Highly Reliable Subminiature DIP Switch I Precision rotary cam and contactor drive provide high reliability I Subminiature: 9 (W) x 6.6 (L) x 4.5 (H) mm I Molded base and rotor sealed by O-ring; eliminates the need for tape sealing

Ordering Information Part number Output code type No. of switching positions Top actuated Side actuated BCD 10 A6C-10R(N) A6CV-10R BCD Hexadecimal 16 A6C-16R(N) A6CV-16R

Important note: Switches cannot be water-washed. Specifications

I CHARACTERISTICS

Switching capacity 100 mA, 30 VDC Permissible load 10 µA, 3.5 VDC min. Carry current 100 mA max. Contact resistance 200 MΩ max. Insulation resistance 100 MΩ min. (at 250 VDC) Dielectric strength 500 VAC for 1 minute between current-carrying metal parts and ground 250 VAC for 1 minute between terminals of same pole Operating force 15 to 100 g-cm Vibration Malfunction durability 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude Shock Malfunction durability Approx. 300 m/s2 (30 G) Materials Base/Cover PPS (Polyphenylene sulfide) Rotor PBT (Polybutylene terephthalate) O-ring Acryl nitril butadiene rubber Movable contact SUS plate, gold-plated Terminal 42-alloy plate (nickel-iron alloy) Ambient temperature Operating -20° to 70°C Humidity 35% to 95% RH Service life Mechanical 10,000 operations min. Electrical 2,000 operations min. Weight A6C-10R, -16R: Approx. 0.4 g, A6CV-10R, -16R: Approx. 0.7 g

Note: Data shown are of initial value.

I CONSTRUCTION

The movable contactor is moved as the rotor rotates. The terminals are insert molded into the base. The rotor is secured by an O-ring and the case and the cover are made of plastic resin. Therefore, the internal mechanism is effectively sealed.

195 A6C A6C

Dimensions Unit: mm (inch) I A6C-10R(N) I A6CV-10R

I A6C-16R(N) I A6CV-16R

Terminal arrangement Mounting holes Internal connections (bottom view) PCB dimension (top view) (top view)

Hints on Correct Use

Refer to HINTS ON CORRECT USE under the General Information section.

196 A6C A6C

NOTE: DIMENSIONS ARE SHOWN IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters to inches divide by 25.4.

Cat. No. GC SW6 04/01 Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in the U.S.A. DIP Switch A6D/DR

Space-saving, Subminiature DIP Switch Offers Both Sealed and Unsealed Construction I Completely sealed units allow immersion-cleaning without taping I Designed to standards of DIL-IC; top actuated types are auto insertable I Bifurcated movable contacts I Subminiature size to save space by reducing the volume to 41% and mounting surface to 67% of conventional type I Smooth, sure switching action

Ordering Information

Part number Type No. of poles Top actuated Raised actuator Side actuated Sealed 2 A6D-2100 A6D-2103 A6DR-2100 4 A6D-4100 A6D-4103 A6DR-4100 6 A6D-6100 A6D-6103 A6DR-6100 8 A6D-8100 A6D-8103 A6DR-8100 10 A6D-0100 A6D-0103 A6DR-0100 Important note: Switches cannot be water-washed. Specifications I CHARACTERISTICS

Switching capacity 100 mA, 5 VDC; 30 mA, 30 VDC Permissible load 10 µA, 3.5 VDC min. Carry current 100 mA max. Contact resistance 100 MΩ max. Insulation resistance 100 MΩ min. (at 250 VDC) Dielectric strength 500 VAC for 1 minute Operating force A6D: 500 g max., A6DR: 500 g max. Vibration Malfunction durability 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude Shock Malfunction durability Approx. 300 m/s2 (30 G) Materials Base/Cover PBT (Polybutylene terephthalate) Actuator PPT (Polyphenylene terephthalate) Internal seal Acryl nitril butadiene rubber Movable contact Beryllium copper Terminal 42-alloy plate (nickel-iron alloy) Ambient temperature Operating -20° to 70°C Humidity 35% to 90% RH Service life Mechanical 5,000 operations min. Electrical 2,000 operations min. Weight A6D (Top actuated) 2-pin: 0.25 g, 3-pin: 0.35 g, 4-pin: 0.45 g, 5-pin: 0.55 g, 6-pin: 0.65 g, 7-pin: 0.75 g, 8-pin: 0.80 g, 9-pin: 0.90 g, 10-pin: 1.0 g A6DR (Side actuated) 2-pin: 0.4 g, 4-pin: 0.8 g, 6-pin: 1.2 g, 8-pin: 1.7 g, 10-pin: 2.2 g,

Note: Data shown are of initial value. 197 A6D/DR A6D/DR

Dimensions Unit: mm (inch)

I A6D-I100 (top actuated type) No. of Sealed poles Part number Dimensions A± 0.2 (0.008) 2 A6D-2100 7.1 (0.28) 3 A6D-3100 9.7 (0.38) 4 A6D-4100 12.2 (0.48) 5 A6D-5100 14.7 (0.58) 6 A6D-6100 17.3 (0.68) 7 A6D-7100 19.8 (0.78) 8 A6D-8100 22.4 (0.88) 9 A6D-9100 24.9 (0.98) 10 A6D-0100 27.4 (1.08)

I A6D-I103 (raised actuator type) Part number Dimensions A± 0.2 (0.008) A6D-2103 7.1 (0.28) A6D-3103 9.7 (0.38) A6D-4103 12.2 (0.48) A6D-5103 14.7 (0.58) A6D-6103 17.3 (0.68) A6D-7103 19.8 (0.78) A6D-8103 22.4 (0.88) A6D-9103 24.9 (0.98) A6D-0103 27.4 (1.08)

I A6DR-I100 (side actuated type) Part number Dimensions A± 0.2 (0.008) A6DR-2100 7.1 (0.28) A6DR-4100 12.2 (0.48) A6DR-6100 17.3 (0.68) A6DR-8100 22.4 (0.88) A6DR-0100 27.4 (1.08)

Internal connections (top view) Mounting holes (bottom view)

± 198 Note: Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of 0.4 mm applies to all dimensions. A6D/DR A6D/DR

NOTE: DIMENSIONS ARE SHOWN IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters to inches divide by 25.4.

Cat. No. GC SW6 04/01 Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in the U.S.A. R DIP Switch A6E/A6ER

DIP Switch H The sealed bottom prevents flux penetration H A variety of models including models with short or long levers are available

Ordering Information

No. of Flat actuated Raised actuator Side actuated (short-lever) Side actuated (long-lever) poles DIP terminal DIP terminal DIP terminal DIP terminal

2 A6E-2101 A6E-2104 A6ER-2101 A6ER-2104 3 A6E-3101 A6E-3104 A6ER-3101 A6ER-3104 4 A6E-4101 A6E-4104 A6ER-4101 A6ER-4104 5 A6E-5101 A6E-5104 A6ER-5101 A6ER-5104 6 A6E-6101 A6E-6104 A6ER-6101 A6ER-6104 7 A6E-7101 A6E-7104 A6ER-7101 A6ER-7104 8 A6E-8101 A6E-8104 A6ER-8101 A6ER-8104 9 A6E-9101 A6E-9104 A6ER-9101 A6ER-9104 10 A6E-0101 A6E-0104 A6ER-0101 A6ER-0104

Important note: Switches cannot be water-washed. A6E/A6ER A6E/A6ER

Specifications

J CHARACTERISTICS

Switching capacity 25 mA at 24 VDC Insulation resistance 100 MΩ min. (at 250 VDC) Contact resistance 200 mΩ max. (initial value) Dielectric strength 500 VAC for 1 min between terminals of same polarity, and between terminals of different polarity Vibration resistance Malfunction: 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude Shock resistance Malfunction: 300 m/s2 min. (approx. 30G min.) Life expectancy Mechanical 1,000 operations min. Electrical 1,000 operations min. Ambient temperature Operating --20°C to 70°C (with no icing) Ambient humidity Operating 35% to 90% Operating force 0.29 N min. (30 gf)

Dimensions

Unit: mm (inch) Note: Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ±0.4 mm applies to all dimensions.

J FLAT ACTUATED WITH PCB Dimensions DIP TERMINAL (Top View) A6E-j101 1.0±0.05 dia.

Flat Actuated Raised Actuator J RAISED ACTUATOR WITH DIP TERMINAL A6E-j104

No. of poles Part number A 2 A6E-2101 A6E-2104 6.64 3 A6E-3101 A6E-3104 9.18 4 A6E-4101 A6E-4104 11.72 5 A6E-5101 A6E-5104 14.26 6 A6E-6101 A6E-6104 16.80 7 A6E-7101 A6E-7104 19.34 8 A6E-8101 A6E-8104 21.88 9 A6E-9101 A6E-9104 24.42 10 A6E-0101 A6E-0104 26.96

200 A6E/A6ER A6E/A6ER

PCB Dimensions J DIP TERMINAL (Top View)

SIDE ACTUATED 1.0±0.05 dia. (SHORT-LEVER) A6ER-j101

Side Actuated Side Actuated (short-lever) (long-lever)

J SIDE ACTUATED (LONG-LEVER) A6ER-j104

No. of poles Part number A 2 A6ER-2101 A6ER-2104 6.64 3 A6ER-3101 A6ER-3104 9.18 4 A6ER-4101 A6ER-4104 11.72 5 A6ER-5101 A6ER-5104 14.26 6 A6ER-6101 A6ER-6104 16.80 7 A6ER-7101 A6ER-7104 19.34 8 A6ER-8101 A6ER-8104 21.88 9 A6ER-9101 A6ER-9104 24.42 10 A6ER-0101 A6ER-0104 26.96

201 A6E/A6ER A6E/A6ER

Installation

J INTERNAL CONNECTIONS (TOP VIEW)

Precautions

J CIRCUIT DESIGN Manual Soldering Soldering temperature: 350°C at the tip of the soldering iron. Use the DIP Switch within the rated voltage and current ranges, Soldering time: 3 s max. for a 1.6-mm thick, otherwise the DIP Switch may have a shortened life expectancy, single-side PCB radiate heat, or burn out. Set the pins of the DIP Switch to OFF before soldering the DIP Switch. J MOUNTING Before soldering the DIP Switch on a PCB, make sure that there is no unnecessary space between the DIP Switch and PCB. Do not operate the DIP Switch while mounting, soldering, or washing the DIP Switch, otherwise the DIP Switch may deform due the Before soldering the DIP Switch on a multilayer PCB, make sure heat of the solder, the DIP Switch may malfunction due to the pe- that the DIP Switch will not bedeformed bythe solderingheat onthe netration of the washing agent, or the machine incorporating the pattern or land of the multilayer PCB. DIP Switch may operate or be set incorrectly. Do not solder the DIP Switch more thantwice includingrectification An automatic insertion machine incorporating a body stopper is soldering. An interval of five minutes is required between the first available for mounting the DIP Switch. When usingan automaticin- and second solderings. sertion machine incorporating a half-lead stopper to mount the DIP Make sure that there is no flux rise on the surface of the PCB. Switch, make sure that the automatic insertion machine will not deform the terminals of the DIP Switch, otherwise the improper insertion of the DIP Switch may result. PCB surface

J SOLDERING Flux Observe the following conditions when soldering the DIP Switch. Automatic Soldering Bath Soldering temperature: 260°C max. Soldering time: 5 s max. for a 1.6-mm thick, single-side PCB J WASHING Reflow Soldering The A6E/A6ER DIP Switches are not washable.

J HANDLING Soldering temperature Donotapplyexcessiveoperatingforceto theDIP Switch,otherwise (°C) the DIP Switch may be damaged or deformed, thus causing the switch mechanism to malfunction as a result. Apply an operating force not exceeding 200% of the maximum rated operating force to the DIP Switch. Soldering time 2 minutes 20 seconds Set the DIP Switch incorporating slide pins with a tiny, rounded ob- max. max. ject, such as the tip of a ball-point pen or small screwdriver. Do not set the DIP Switch using tweezers or any other sharp object, which may damage the DIP Switch. Do not set the DIP Switch using the point of a mechanical pencil, otherwise lead powder or fragments may fall into the DIP Switch and internal circuit board, causing the DIPSwitchtomalfunctionand reducingthe dielectricstrength ofthe circuit board.

202 A6ER A6ER

NOTE: DIMENSIONSSHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters to inches divide by 25.4.

R OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC OMRON ON--LINE OMRON CANADA,INC. One East Commerce Drive Global -- http://www.omron.com 885 Milner Avenue Schaumburg,IL 60173 USA -- http://www.omron.com/oei Scarborough, Ontario M1B 5V8 1-800-55-OMRON Canada -- http://www.omron.com/oci 416-286-6465

Cat. No. GC SW6 04/01 Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in U.S.A. Half-pitch DIP Switch A6H

8OWUDORZ3URILOH+DOISLWFK 6XUIDFHPRXQWLQJ',36ZLWFK

I 9HU\ORZSURILOHRIPP I 0RXQWLQJVSDFHUHGXFHGE\%&FRPSDUHG ZLWKFRQYHQWLRQDOPRGHOV(

I :DVKDEOHVHDOWDSHPRGHOVDYDLODEOH I (PERVVHGWDSLQJPRGHOVDYDLODEOH

2UGHULQJ,QIRUPDWLRQ

'HVFULSWLRQ 3DUWQXPEHUV 0RGHOVZLWKVHDOWDSH 6WDQGDUGPRGHOV (PERVVHGWDSLQJPRGHOV 6WLFNPRGHOV &6HHQRWH( 1XPEHURISROHV

$+ $+ $+3 $+ $+ $+3 $+ $+ $+3 $+ $+ $+3 1RWH (PERVVHGWDSLQJPRGHOVDUHSDFNDJHGLQXQLWVRI2UGHUVVKRXOGEHSODFHGLQPXOWLSOHVRIDVGHOLYHU\LVQRWSRVVLEOH LQVPDOOHUXQLWV 6SHFLILFDWLRQV

I 5DWLQJV&KDUDFWHULVWLFV

P$DW9'& 6ZLWFKLQJFDSDFLW\ µ$&PLQLPXPFXUUHQW(DW9'& ,QVXODWLRQUHVLVWDQFH 0ΩPLQ&DW9'&( &RQWDFWUHVLVWDQFH PΩPD[&LQLWLDOYDOXH( 'LHOHFWULFVWUHQJWK 9$&IRUPLQEHWZHHQWHUPLQDOVRIVDPHSRODULW\DQGEHWZHHQWHUPLQDOVRIGLIIHUHQWSRODULW\ 9LEUDWLRQUHVLVWDQFH 0DOIXQFWLRQ WR+]PPGRXEOHDPSOLWXGH 6KRFNUHVLVWDQFH 0DOIXQFWLRQ PVPLQ 0HFKDQLFDO RSHUDWLRQVPLQ /LIHH[SHFWDQF\ (OHFWULFDO RSHUDWLRQVPLQ 2SHUDWLQJ ¤WR°&&ZLWKQRLFLQJRUFRQGHQVDWLRQ( $PELHQWWHPSHUDWXUH 6WRUDJH ¤WR°&&ZLWKQRLFLQJRUFRQGHQVDWLRQ( $PELHQWKXPLGLW\ 2SHUDWLQJ %WR% 2SHUDWLQJIRUFH WRJUDPV (QFORVXUHUDWLQJ (TXLYDOHQWWR,3 $+ $+ 'LPHQVLRQV

8QLWPP .H\ $ :LGWK&VHHWDEOHEHORZ( 3 1XPEHURISROHV

I 6WDQGDUG $+ 'LPHQVLRQVRI3&%SDG "7RS9LHZ'

± &( &( 6WDQGDUG :LWK6HDO7DSH &( I :LWK6HDO7DSH &( 6HDO7DSH&W ( $+ $+3 &( &( &( &(

1RWH 7KHUHLVDWROHUDQFHRI±PPIRUHDFKRIWKHDERYHGLPHQVLRQVXQOHVVRWKHUZLVHVSHFLILHGLQWKHGLDJUDPV 7KHYDOXHVRI$LQWKHDERYHGLDJUDPDUHJLYHQEHORZ

1RRISROHV3DUWQXPEHU $ :LGWK $+ $+ &( $+ $+ &( $+ $+ &( $+ $+ &( ,QVWDOODWLRQ

I ,QWHUQDO&RQQHFWLRQV"7RS9LHZ'

2 $+ $+ 3UHFDXWLRQV

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

'RQRWXVHIORZVROGHULQJRUPDQXDOVROGHULQJ 'HSHQGLQJRQWKHNLQGRIUHIORZEDWKXVHGWKHVROGHULQJFRQGL WLRQVDQGWKHWHPSHUDWXUHDURXQGWKH6ZLWFKPD\YDU\&RQILUP WKHFRQGLWLRQVEHIRUHKDQG :DVKLQJ 2QO\PRGHOVZLWKDVHDOWDSHFDQEHZDVKHG 7KH',36ZLWFKFDQQRWEHZDVKHGXVLQJXOWUDVRQLFFOHDQLQJ,WLV SRVVLEOHWRZLSHWKHVHPRGHOVRUGLSWKHPLQWRZDVKLQJDJHQWVIRU RQHPLQXWHPD[LPXP $SSO\IOXRURFDUERQRUDOFRKROLFVROYHQWVWRFOHDQZDVKDEOHPRG HOV'RQRWDSSO\DQ\RWKHUVROYHQWVRUZDWHUWRFOHDQDQ\ZDVK DEOHPRGHOEHFDXVHWKH\PD\GHWHULRUDWHWKHPDWHULDOVRU SHUIRUPDQFHRIWKH6ZLWFK :DVKLQJHTXLSPHQWLQFRUSRUDWLQJPRUHWKDQRQHZDVKLQJEDWK FDQEHXVHGWRFOHDQZDVKDEOHPRGHOVSURYLGHGWKDWWKHZDVK DEOHPRGHOVDUHFOHDQHGIRURQHPLQXWHPD[LPXPSHUEDWKDQG WKHWRWDOFOHDQLQJWLPHGRHVQRWH[FHHGWKUHHPLQXWHV 'RQRWLPSRVHDQ\H[WHUQDOIRUFHRQZDVKDEOHPRGHOVZKLOH $SSOLFDEOHPRGHOV$+ 3 ZDVKLQJ 6WDQGDUG &RQIRUPLQJWR(,$- 'RQRWFOHDQZDVKDEOHPRGHOVLPPHGLDWHO\DIWHUVROGHULQJ:DLW :UDSSLQJTXDQWLW\ SHUUHHO IRUDWOHDVWWKUHHPLQXWHVWRFOHDQZDVKDEOHPRGHOVDIWHUVROGHU LQJ 1RRISROHV 0RGHOVZLWKDVHDOWDSHFDQEHZDVKHGSURYLGHGWKDWWKHVHDO 'LPHQVLRQ WDSHLVQRWUHPRYHGRUSDVWHGEHIRUHZDVKLQJWKH',36ZLWFK %± & &( &( &( &( ' &( &( &( &(

3 $+ $+

$//',0(16,2166+2:1$5(,10,//,0(7(56 7RFRQYHUWPLOOLPHWHUVLQWRLQFKHVPXOWLSO\E\7RFRQYHUWJUDPVLQWRRXQFHVPXOWLSO\E\

20521(/(&7521,&6//& 2052121/,1( 20521&$1$'$3,1& 2QH(DVW&RPPHUFH'ULYH *OREDOKWWSZZZRPURQFRP 0LOQHU$YHQXH 6FKDXPEXUJ,/ 86$KWWSZZZRPURQFRPRHL 6FDUERURXJK2QWDULR0%9 20521 &DQDGDKWWSZZZRPURQFRPRFL

Cat. No. A117-E3-2 06SHFLILFDWLRQVVXEMHFWWRFKDQJHZLWKRXWQRWLFH 3ULQWHGLQ86$

4 Rotary DIP Switch A6R/A6RV

Low-Cost Rotary DIP Switches

• Series includes top-actuated, side-actuated, flat, and extended-shaft models. • The rotor has an O-ring sealed construction that prevents the ingress of dirt and dust. • Two different types of terminal arrangement are available for each model to allow flexibility of circuit design.

Ordering Information ■ List of Models

Type Top-actuated, flat Top-actuated, Side-actuated, flat Side-actuated, extended shaft extended shaft

Appearance

Number of Quantity Terminal Output code positions per stick arrangement

10 48 4 × 1 Real code A6R-101RF A6R-101RS A6RV-101RF A6RV-101RS 3 × 3 Real code A6R-102RF A6R-102RS A6RV-102RF A6RV-102RS 16 48 4 × 1 Real code A6R-161RF A6R-161RS A6RV-161RF A6RV-161RS 3 × 3 Real code A6R-162RF A6R-162RS A6RV-162RF A6RV-162RS Note: Switches are delivered in units of 48. Order in multiples of 48. Specifications ■ Ratings/Characteristics ■ Output Codes

Rating 25 mA at 24 VDC 10-position Models16-position Models Ambient operating −25° to 80°C (with no icing or condensation) Code Real code Code Real code temperature Position 1248Position 1248 Ambient operating 35% to 95% humidity 00 Insulation 100 MΩ min. (at 250 VDC) 1 ON 1 ON resistance 2 ON 2 ON Contact resistance 200 mΩ max. (initial value) 3 ON ON 3 ON ON Dielectric strength 250 VAC for 1 minute between terminals of the same 4 ON 4 ON polarity 5 ON ON 5 ON ON Vibration resistance Malfunction: 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude 6 ON ON 6 ON ON Shock resistance Malfunction: Approx. 300 m/s2 7 ON ON ON 7 ON ON ON Electrical life 5,000 steps min. 8 ON 8 ON expectancy 9 ON ON 9 ON ON Operating torque −2 1.96 × 10 N·m max. A ON ON Weight 4×1, top-actuated: 0.64 g B ON ON ON 3×3, top-actuated: 0.62 g 4×1, side-actuated: 0.8 g C ON ON 3×3, side-actuated: 0.83 g D ON ON ON (Add 0.13 g for the extended-shaft version of each model.) E ON ON ON F ON ON ON ON Note: “ON” indicates that the internal switch is ON.

Rotary DIP Switch A6R/A6RV 1 Dimensions Unit: mm Side-Actuated Flat Models with Top-Actuated Flat Models with 4x1 Terminal Arrangement 4x1 Terminal Arrangement A6RV-101RF A6RV-161RF A6R-101RF A6R-161RF

9.8 1

89A 5 6 7 B 4 9.8 6 7

5 C 3 1 6.64

8 D

4 2.9 9.9

E 3

F 2 1 0 0 1 89A 5 6 7 B 4 6 7

5 C 3

8 D

4 2.9 9.9

E A6R-161RF A6R-101RF 3

F 2 1 0 0 1

3.25 4.5 0.3 3.3

3.5 0.55 2.54 0.25 2.54±0.3 3.38 0.55 2.54 0.25 A6RV-161RF A6RV-101RF 7.62±0.5 Top-Actuated Extended-Shaft Models Top-Actuated Flat Models with with 4x1 Terminal Arrangement 3x3 Terminal Arrangement A6R-101RS A6R-102RF A6R-161RS

A6R-162RF 9.8 9.8 1 1 89A 5 6 7 B 4 6 7

89A 5 6 5 C 3 8

7 D

B 4 4 9.9

6 7 2 E 3

C 9

F 3 2

5 1 0

0 1

8 D

4 2.9 9.9

E 3

F 2 1 0 0 1 A6R-161RS A6R-101RS

A6R-162RF A6R-102RF 4 dia.

4.5 3.25 1.2 7.3

3.5 4.5 3.25 0.55 0.25 2.54 7.62±0.5 3.5

0.55 2.54 0.25 7.62±0.5

2 Rotary DIP Switch A6R/A6RV Top-Actuated Extended-Shaft Models Side-Actuated Flat Models with with 3x3 Terminal Arrangement 3x3 Terminal Arrangement A6R-102RS A6RV-102RF A6R-162RS A6RV-162RF

9.8 1

89A 5 6 7 B 4 6 7

5 C 3

8 D

4 9.9

F 2 1 0 0 1 9.8 1 6.64

A6R-162RS A6R-102RS 89A 5 6 7 B 4 6 7

4 dia. 5 C 3

8 D

4 2.9 9.9

E 3

F 2 1 0 0 1

1.2 7.3 0.3 3.3

0.55 0.25 4.5 3.25 2.54 2.54±0.3 3.38 3.5 A6RV-162RF A6RV-102RF

0.55 0.25 2.54 Side-Actuated Extended-Shaft Models 7.62±0.5 with 3x3 Terminal Arrangement Side-Actuated Extended-Shaft Models with 4x1 Terminal Arrangement A6RV-102RS A6RV-162RS A6RV-101RS A6RV-161RS

1.2

1.2 9.8 1 7.3 6.64

89A 5 6 9.8 7 B 4 6 7

1 7.3 6.64 5 C 3

8 D

4 9.9 4 dia.

E 3

F 2 1 0 0 1 89A 5 6 7 B 4 6 7

5 C 3

8 D

4 9.9 4 dia. 3.3

E 3

F 2 1 0 0 1 0.55 0.25 2.54 2.54 0.3 3.3 3.38 ± A6RV-162RS A6RV-102RS 0.55 2.54 0.25 2.54±0.3 3.38 A6RV-161RS A6RV-101RS Note: A tolerance of ±0.4 mm applies to the above dimensions unless otherwise specified.

Rotary DIP Switch A6R/A6RV 3 ■ PCB Cutout Dimensions

Top-Actuated Models Side-Actuated Models 4×1 Terminal Arrangement 3×3 Terminal Arrangement 4×1 Terminal Arrangement 3×3 Terminal Arrangement

2.54±0.1 Six, 0.9±0.1 dia. C 8 C 2 Five, 0.9±0.1 dia. C 2.54±0.1 8 C 2 ± Five, 0.9±0.1 dia. 7.62 0.1 Six, 0.9±0.1 dia. 7.62±0.1 8 4 2 1 1 C 4 4 8 2 1 1 C 4 P=2.54±0.1 2.54±0.1 2.54±0.1 P=2.54±0.1 2.54±0.1 2.54±0.1

Precautions

■ Cautions Manual Soldering Soldering temperature: 350°C at the tip of the soldering iron. Circuit Design Soldering time: 3 s max. for a 1.6-mm thick, single-side PCB Before soldering the switch on a PCB, make sure that there is no Use the switch within the rated voltage and current ranges, or the unnecessary space between the switch and PCB. switch may have a shortened life expectancy, radiate heat, or burn Before soldering the switch on a multilayer PCB, carry out a test to out. Use circuit constants that ensure operation within the rated confirm that soldering can be performed properly. The switch may be ranges. This particularly applies to the instantaneous voltages and deformed by the soldering heat on the pattern or land of the multi- currents when switching. layer PCB. The reliability and lifetime of the switch may vary with the type of load Do not solder the switch more than twice including rectification sol- and other conditions. It is recommended that the switch is used in dering. An interval of five minutes is required between the first and actual applications only after correct operation is confirmed under the second soldering. conditions in which it will be used. Washing Mounting The switch cannot be washed. Usually, the switch is set to 0. Do not change this setting throughout the mounting and soldering procedures. Wipe dirt off the switch surface using alcohol. Soldering Handling Observe the following conditions when soldering the switch. Do not apply excessive operating force to the switch, or the switch may be damaged or deformed, thus causing the switch mechanism Automatic Soldering Bath (Flow Soldering Bath) to malfunction as a result. Apply an operating force not exceeding 200% of the maximum rated operating force to the switch. Soldering temperature: 260°C max. Soldering time: 5 s max. for a 1.6-mm thick, single-side PCB Set the switch with a flat-blade screwdriver that fits into the screwdriver groove. Using a flat-blade screwdriver of inappropriate dimen- Confirm in advance that flux will not bubble up onto the side of the sions, or using a tool other than a flat-blade screwdriver may cause PCB to which the switch is mounted. Depending on the type, the flux damage to the groove, and it may become impossible to operate the may have an adverse effect on the switch if it enters the switch switch. interior.

ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters into inches, divide by 25.4

OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC OMRON CANADA, INC. OMRON ON-LINE One Commerce Drive 885 Milner Avenue Global - http://www.omron.com Schaumburg, IL 60173 Toronto, Ontario M1B 5V8 USA - http://www.omron.com/oei 847-882-2288 416-286-6465 Canada - http://www.omron.ca

Cat. No. A512-E3-1 3/03 Specifications subject to change without notice Printed in USA

4 Rotary DIP Switch A6R/A6RV R DIP Switch A6T/A6S

DIP Switch with Slide Pins

H Allows automatic mounting with DIP IC insertion machines H Washable models with seal tape are available H SMT (surface-mounted terminal) models are available with/without embossed tape

Ordering Information

No. Flat actuated Raised actuator Flat actuated Raised actuator of Standard With seal tape Standard Tape seal Tape seal in poles embossed tape DIP terminal DIP terminal DIP terminal SMT terminal SMT terminal SMT terminal SMT terminal

1 A6T-1101 A6T-1102 A6T-1104 ------2 A6T-2101 A6T-2102 A6T-2104 A6S-2101 A6S-2102 --- A6S-2104 3 ------A6S-3101 A6S-3102 --- A6S-3104 4 A6T-4101 A6T-4102 A6T-4104 A6S-4101 A6S-4102 A6S-4102-P A6S-4104 5 ------A6S-5101 A6S-5102 --- A6S-5105 6 A6T-6101 A6T-6102 A6T-6104 A6S-6101 A6S-6102 A6S-6102-P A6S-6104 7 ------A6S-7101 A6S-7102 --- A6S-7104 8 A6T-8101 A6T-8102 A6T-8104 A6S-8101 A6S-8102 A6S-8102-P A6S-8104 9 ------A6S-9101 A6S-9102 --- A6S-9104 10 A6T-0101 A6T-0102 A6T-0104 A6S-0101 A6S-0102 --- A6S-0104

Important note: Switches cannot be water-washed. A6T/A6S A6T/A6S

Specifications

J CHARACTERISTICS

Dimensions

Unit: mm (inch) Note: Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ±0.4 mm applies to all dimensions.

J FLAT ACTUATED WITH DIP TERMINAL STANDARD/WITH SEAL TAPE A6T-j101 A6T-j102

Flat Actuated With Seal Tape Raised Actuator Standard

Seal tape (t = 0.06)

J RAISED ACTUATOR No. of Part number A PCB Dimensions poles WITH DIP TERMINAL (Top View) A6T-j104 1.0±0.05 dia. 1 A6T-1101 A6T-1102 A6T-1104 3.48 2 A6T-2101 A6T-2102 A6T-2104 6.02 4 A6T-4101 A6T-4102 A6T-4104 11.10 6 A6T-6101 A6T-6102 A6T-6104 16.18 8 A6T-8101 A6T-8102 A6T-8104 21.26 10 A6T-0101 A6T-0102 A6T-0104 26.34

P: pole numbers

208 A6T/A6S A6T/A6S

J FLAT ACTUATED WITH SMTTERMINAL STANDARD/WITH SEALTAPE A6S-j101 A6S-j102

Flat Actuated With Seal Tape Raised Actuator Standard

Seal tape (t = 0.06)

0.7 (0.03) min.

J EMBOSSED TAPE A6S-j102-P

J RAISED ACTUATOR PCB Dimensions (Top View) WITH SMTTERMINAL A6S-j104

P: pole numbers

No. of poles Part number A 2 A6S-2101 A6S-2102 --- A6S-2104 6.02 (0.24) 3 A6S-3101 A6S-3102 --- A6S-3104 8.56 (0.34) 4 A6S-4101 A6S-4102 A6S-4102-P A6S-4104 11.10 (0.44) 5 A6S-5101 A6S-5102 --- A6S-5104 13.64 (0.54) 6 A6S-6101 A6S-6102 A6S-6102-P A6S-6104 16.18 (0.64) 7 A6S-7101 A6S-7102 --- A6S-7104 18.72 (0.74) 8 A6S-8101 A6S-8102 A6S-8102-P A6S-8104 21.26 (0.84) 9 A6S-9101 A6S-9102 --- A6S-9104 23.80 (0.94) 10 A6S-0101 A6S-0102 --- A6S-0104 26.34 (1.04)

209 A6T/A6S A6T/A6S

Installation

J INTERNAL CONNECTIONS (TOP VIEW)

Precautions

J CIRCUIT DESIGN Reflow Soldering Use the DIP Switch within the rated voltage and current ranges, otherwise the DIP Switch may have a shortened life expectancy, radiate heat, or burn out. Soldering temperature (°C) J MOUNTING

Do not operate the DIP Switch while mounting, soldering, or Soldering time washing the DIP Switch, otherwise the DIP Switch may deform 2 minutes 20 seconds due the heat of the solder, the DIP Switch may malfunction due max. max. to the penetration of the washing agent, or the machine incorporating the DIP Switch may operate or be set incorrectly. Manual Soldering An automatic insertion machine incorporating a body stopper is Soldering temperature: 350°C at the tip of the soldering iron. available for mounting the DIP Switch. When using an automatic Soldering time: 3 s max. for a 1.6-mm thick, insertion machine incorporating a half-lead stopper to mount the single-side PCB DIP Switch, make sure that the automatic insertion machine will not deform the terminals of the DIP Switch, otherwise the improp- Set the pins of the DIP Switch to OFF before soldering the DIP er insertion of the DIP Switch may result.eform the terminals of Switch. the DIP Switch, otherwise the improper insertion of the DIP Before soldering the DIP Switch on a PCB, make sure that there is Switch may result. no unnecessary space between the DIP Switch and PCB. Before soldering the DIP Switch on a multilayer PCB, make sure J SOLDERING that the DIP Switch will not bedeformed bythe solderingheat onthe pattern or land of the multilayer PCB. Observe the following conditions when soldering the DIP Switch. Do not solder the DIP Switch more thantwice includingrectification Automatic Soldering Bath soldering. An interval of five minutes is required between the first Soldering temperature: 350°C at the tip of the soldering iron. and second solderings. Soldering time: 3 s max. for a 1.6-mm thick, single-side PCB. Make sure that there is no flux rise on the surface of the PCB.

PCB surface

Flux

210 A6T/A6S A6T/A6S

NOTE: DIMENSIONSSHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters to inches divide by 25.4.

Cat. No. GC SW6 04/01 Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in U.S.A. Thumbwheel Switch A7BL

Reliable Thumbwheel Switch with Dustproof Construction and Easy Front Mounting

Locking switches cut down operating errors in control panels Internal contacts boost reliability

Ordering Information Note: A7BL switch units can be ordered with limited setting ranges. When ordering, include the range in the model number as shown in the following examples:

A7BL-206-S06 (Light gray A7BL with a range of 0 to 6) A7BL-206-S18-1 (Black A7BL with a range of 1 to 8)

1. Switch units 2. End caps 3. Spacer 4. Connectors

SWITCH UNITS

Part number Solder terminal Output code Type Light gray case Black case 06 (binary code) Locking A7BL-206 A7BL-206-1 07 (binary code w/diode provision) Locking A7BL-207 A7BL-207-1

Note: Switch units, end caps, spacers, and connectors must be ordered separately and are not factory-assembled for shipment.

ACCESSORIES

Part number Accessory Light gray Black End cap A7B-M A7B-M-1 Spacer A7B-PA A7B-PA-1 Connector Solder terminal A7B-C A7B-C PCB terminal A7B-CP A7B-CP

To order spacers marked with measurement units or symbols, select the unit or symbol from the table below and put its code letter in place of the final letter A in the model number.

Example: A7B-PK (light gray spacer with °C mark for A7BL)

Code letter A B C D E F G H J K L Q T U Marking Blank SEC MIN H g kg mm cm m °C PCS x10 SEC 0¥

213 A7BL A7BL

Specifications

CHARACTERISTICS

Switching capacity 50 VAC/28 VDC, 1 mA to 0.1A (resistive load) Carry current 1 A max. Contact resistance 200 mΩ max. Insulation resistance 10 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC) between nonconnected terminals 1,000 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC) between each terminal and noncurrent carrying part Dielectric strength 600 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between nonconnected terminals 1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between each terminal and noncurrent carrying part Operating force 550 g max. Vibration resistance 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude Shock resistance 500 m/s2 (approx. 50 G) min. Ambient temperature -10° to 65°C (no condensation) Storage temperature -20° to 80°C Humidity 45% to 85% Service life Mechanical 100,000 steps min. Electrical 50,000 steps min. Weight (per unit) Approx. 4.1 g

Note: Data shown are of initial value Dimensions

Unit: mm (inch) LOCKING SWITCHES A7BL-206(206-1) A7BL-207(207-1) Panel cutout

Number of A B C units (n) (n x 8 + 8) (n x 8 + 6) 1 16 (0.60) 14 (0.60) 14.4 (0.57) 2 24 (0.90) 22 (0.90) 22.4 (0.88) 3 32 (1.30) 30 (1.20) 30.4 (1.20) 4 40 (1.60) 38 (1.50) 38.4 (1.50) 548±0.8 (1.9±0.03) 46±0.8 (1.8±0.03) 46.8 (1.80) 656±0.8 (2.2±0.03) 54±0.8 (2.1±0.03) 54.8 (2.20) ± Note: 1. Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of 0.4 mm 764±0.8 (2.5±0.03) 62±0.8 (2.4±0.03) 62.8 (2.50) applies to all dimensions. 872±0.8 (2.8±0.03) 70±0.8 (2.7±0.03) 70.8 (2.80) 2. Each model number applies to a single switch unit and ± ± ± ± not to the switch assembly as shown in the drawings. 9800.8 (3.1 0.03) 78 0.8 (3.0 0.03) 78.8 (3.10) 3. Common terminal “C” is at the bottom when the switch 10 88±0.8 (3.5±0.03) 86±0.8 (3.4±0.03) 86.8 (3.40) is viewed from the front. 4. The asterisk “*” indicates a dimension of 32.5 mm for a switch unit with an output code pf 06 and 43.5 mm for one with an output code of 07. 214 A7BL A7BL

END CAPS A7B-M(-M-1) (left side) (right side)

Note: Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ±0.4 mm applies to all dimensions

SPACERS A7B-PA(-PA-1)

CONNECTORS A7B-C (for solder terminals) A7B-C (for PCB terminals)

Note: Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ±0.4 mm applies to all dimensions

215 A7BL A7BL

TERMINALS 06 Output code

A7BL Solder terminals

07 Output code

A7BL Solder terminals

Hints on Correct Use

Refer to HINTS ON CORRECT USE under the General Information section.

216 A7BL A7BL

NOTE: DIMENSIONS ARE SHOWN IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters to inches divide by 25.4.

Cat. No. GC SW6 04/01 Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in the U.S.A. Thumbwheel Switch A7BS

Reliable Thumbwheel with Easy-to-Mount Assembly I Dustproof construction ensures highly reliable performance at low voltage and very small current even under adverse environmental conditions I Plus (+) and minus (Ð) pushbuttons for positive forward and reverse rotation of each digital wheel

Ordering Information I SWITCH UNITS Part number Front mounting solder terminals Stopper pin provided Stopper pin not provided Output Code Light gray case Black case Light gray case Black case 03 (decimal code) Ð Ð A7BS-203 A7BS-203-1 06 (binary code) A7BS-206-S A7BS-206-S-1 A7BS-206 A7BS-206-1 (binary code w/+, Ð display) Ð Ð A7BS-206-PM A7BS-206-PM-1 07 (binary code w/diode provision) A7BS-207-S A7BS-207-S-1 A7BS-207 A7BS-207-1 19 (decimal code w/component adding provision) Ð Ð A7BS-219 A7BS-219-1 54 (binary code hexadecimal) Ð Ð A7BS-254 A7BS-254-1 55 (binary code hexadecimal, w/component adding provision) Ð Ð A7BS-255 A7BS-255-1

I ACCESSORIES Part number For front mounting type switch assembly terminals Accessory Light gray Black End Cap A7B-M A7B-M-1 Spacer A7B-PI A7B-PI-1 Connector Solder terminal A7B-C A7B-C PC terminal A7B-CP A7B-CP

Note: 1. When placing your order, please specify the model numbers and quantities of required switch units, end caps, and spacers, respectively. (Note that switch units and accessories are not factory-assembled for shipment.) 2. Type with a suffix -S in their type number are provided with two stopper pins (Type A7BS-S: used in pairs) as standard accessories. 3. Switch case, end cap, and spacer are made of polyacetal resin; however, the window plate is polycarbonate resin. 4. One of the following alphabetic codes must be filled into the boxed part of the model number to specify a legend to be hot stamped on the required spacer. 5. End caps come as a set -- left and right.

Code Legend Code Legend Code Legend A Hot stamp E g K oC not required F kg L PCS B SEC G mm Q x 10 SEC CMINHcm T0 217 DH J m A7BS A7BS

Specifications

I CHARACTERISTICS

Switching capacity 1 mA to 0.1 A, 50 VAC/28 VDC (resistive load) Carry current 1 A (max.) Contact resistance 200 mΩ max. Insulation resistance 10 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC) between nonconnected terminals 1,000 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC) between each terminal and noncurrent-carrying part Dielectric strength 600 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between nonconnected terminals 1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between each terminal and noncurrent-carrying part Operating force 550 g max. Vibration 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude Shock 500 m/s2 (approx. 50 G) Ambient temperature Operating -10o to 65oC Storage -20o to 80oC Humidity 45% to 85% RH max. Service life Mechanical 100,000 operations (steps) min. Electrical 50,000 operations (steps) min. Weight (per unit) Approx. 4.1 g

Note: Data shown are of initial value. Dimensions Unit: mm (inch)

I SWITCH UNITS A7BS-206(-1) A7BS-207(-1)

A7BS-20I-S(-1)

Note: Dimension * is 32.5 (1.28) for the switch with output code “06” [i.e., A7BS-206(-1)], and 43.5 (1.71) for the switch with output code “07” [i.e., A7BS-207(-1)]. 218 A7BS A7BS

I PANEL CUTOUT No. of A B D units (n) (8n + 8) (8n + 6) 1 16 (0.63) 14 (0.55) 14.4 (0.57) 2 24 (0.94) 22 (0.87) 22.4 (0.88) 3 32 (1.26) 30 (1.18) 30.4 (1.20) 4 40 (1.57) 38 (1.50) 38.4 (1.51) 5 48 ± 0.8 (1.89 ± 0.03) 46 ± 0.8 (1.81 ± 0.03) 46.8 (1.84) 6 56 ± 0.8 (2.20 ± 0.03) 54 ± 0.8 (2.13 ± 0.03) 54.8 (2.16) 7 64 ± 0.8 (2.52 ± 0.03) 62 ± 0.8 (2.44 ± 0.03) 62.8 (2.47) 8 72 ± 0.8 (2.83 ± 0.03) 70 ± 0.8 (2.76 ± 0.03) 70.8 (2.79) 9 80 ± 0.8 (3.15 ± 0.03) 78 ± 0.8 (3.07 ± 0.03) 78.8 (3.10) 10 88 ± 0.8 (3.46 ± 0.03) 86 ± 0.8 (3.39 ± 0.03) 86.8 (3.42)

Note: 1. Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ± 0.4 mm applies to all dimensions. 2. Each model number applies to a single switch unit and not to the switch assembly as shown in the drawings.

I END CAPS A7B-M(-1)

[right] [left]

Note: End caps are attached to each end of the switch assembly and used to secure the switch assembly to a mounting panel.

I STOPPER PINS A7BS-S

Note: Types with Suffix -S in their type numbers are provided with two stopper pins as standard accessories.

I SPACERS A7B-PI(-1)

219 A7BS A7BS

Unit: mm (inch)

I CONNECTORS

A7B-C A7B-CP

I TERMINALS

A7BS-206(-1) A7BS-207(-1)

Hints on Correct Use

Refer to HINTS ON CORRECT USE under the General Information section.

220 A7BS A7BS

NOTE: DIMENSIONS ARE SHOWN IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters to inches divide by 25.4.

Cat. No. GC SW6 04/01 Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in the U.S.A. Thumbwheel Switch A7CN

Easy-to-Assemble Thumbwheel Switch Designed Specially for Printed Circuit Boards I The transparent window plate fitted in the readout section protects dial characters from dust and prevents wear by incorrect handling I Plus (+) and minus (Ð) pushbuttons for positive forward and reverse rotation of each digital wheel I The contact section is of dust-proof construction I Switch units can be assembled simply by fitting the integral hook coupler of each unit into the mating unit, thus eliminating the need of nuts and bolts for assembly

Ordering Information

I SWITCH UNITS

Part number Back mounting PC board Front mounting PC board Output Code Light gray case Black case Light gray case Black case 06 (binary code) Ð A7CN-106-1 A7CN-206 A7CN-206-1

I ACCESSORIES

Part number For back mounting type switch assembly For front mounting type switch assembly Accessory Light gray Black Light gray Black End Cap Ð A7CN-1M-1 A7CN-2M A7CN-2M-1 Spacer Ð A7CN-1PI-1 A7CN-2PI A7CN-2PI-1

Note: 1. When placing your order, please specify the model numbers and quantities of required switch units, end caps, and spacers, respectively. (Note that switch units and accessories are not factory-assembled for shipment.) 2. Switch case, end cap, and spacer are made of polyacetal resin; however, the window plate is made of polycarbonate resin. 3. One of the following alphabetic codes must be filled into the boxed part of the model number to specify a legend to be hot stamped on the required spacer. 4. End caps come as a set -- left and right.

Code Legend Code Legend A Hot stamp not required H cm B SEC J m CMIN KoC D H L PCS E g Q x 10 SEC Fkg T0 Gmm 221 A7CN A7CN

Specifications

I CHARACTERISTICS

Switching capacity 1 mA to 0.1 A 50 VAC/28 VDC (resistive load) Carry current 1 A (max.) Contact resistance 200 mΩ max. Insulation resistance 10 MΩ min. (at 250 VDC) between nonconnected terminals 1,000 MΩ min. (at 250 VDC) between each terminal and noncurrent-carrying part Dielectric strength 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between nonconnected terminals 1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between each terminal and noncurrent-carrying part Operating force 450 g max. Vibration 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude Shock 490 m/s2 (approx. 50 g) Ambient temperature Operating -10o to 65oC Storage -20o to 80oC Humidity 45% to 85% RH max. Service life Mechanical 30,000 operations (steps) min. Electrical 20,000 operations (steps) min. Weight (per unit) Approx. 1.5 g

Note: Data shown are of initial value. Dimensions Unit: mm (inch)

I SWITCH UNITS

A7CN-206(-1) Panel cutout

No. of A B D units (n) (nx6 + 8) (nx6 + 6) 1 14 (0.55) 12 (0.47) 12.4 (0.49) 2 20 (0.79) 18 (0.71) 18.4 (0.72) 3 26 (1.02) 24 (0.94) 24.4 (0.96) 4 32 (1.26) 30 (0.18) 30.4 (1.20) 5 38 ± 0.8 (1.50±0.03) 36 ± 0.8 (1.42±0.03) 36.8 (1.45) 6 44 ± 0.8 (1.73±0.03) 42 ± 0.8 (1.65±0.03) 42.8 (1.64) 7 50 ± 0.8 (1.97±0.03) 48 ± 0.8 (1.89±0.03) 48.8 (1.92) 8 56 ± 0.8 (2.20±0.03) 54 ± 0.8 (2.13±0.03) 54.8 (2.16) 9 62 ± 0.8 (2.44±0.03) 60 ± 0.8 (2.36±0.03) 60.8 (2.39) 10 68 ± 0.8 (2.68±0.03) 66 ± 0.8 (2.60±0.03) 66.8 (2.63)

Note: 1. Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ± 0.4 mm applies to all dimensions. 2. Each model number applies to a single switch unit and does not apply to the switch assembly as shown in the drawings.

222 A7CN A7CN

A7CN-106-1

No. of A B C D units (n) (nx6 + 6) (nx6 + 11) (nx6 + 16) 1 12 (0.47) 17 (0.67) 22 (0.87) 12.4 (0.49) 2 18 (0.71) 23 (0.91) 28 (1.10) 18.4 (0.72) Panel cutout 3 24 (0.94) 29 (1.14) 34 (1.34) 24.4 (0.96) 4 30 (1.18) 35 (1.38) 40 (1.57) 30.4 (1.20) 5 36 ± 0.8 (1.42±0.03) 41 (1.61) 46 ± 0.8 (1.81±0.03) 36.8 (1.45) 6 42 ± 0.8 (1.65±0.03) 47 (1.85) 52 ± 0.8 (2.05±0.03) 42.8 (1.69) 7 48 ± 0.8 (1.89±0.03) 53 (2.09) 58 ± 0.8 (2.28±0.03) 48.8 (1.92) 8 54 ± 0.8 (2.13±0.03) 59 (2.32) 64 ± 0.8 (2.52±0.03) 54.8 (2.16) 9 60 ± 0.8 (2.36±0.03) 65 (2.56) 70 ± 0.8 (2.76±0.03) 60.8 (2.39) 10 66 ± 0.8 (2.60±0.03) 71 (2.80) 76 ± 0.8 (3.00±0.03) 66.8 (2.63)

223 A7CN A7CN

Unit: mm (inch) I END CAPS

A7CN-2M-1 [left] [right]

A7CN-1M-1 [left] [right]

Note: End caps are attached to each end of the switch assembly and used to secure the switch assembly to a mounting panel.

I SPACERS A7CN-2PI-1 A7CN-1PI-1

224 A7CN A7CN

I TERMINALS A7CN-106-1, A7CN-206

Hints on Correct Use

Refer to HINTS ON CORRECT USE under the General Information section.

225 A7CN A7CN

NOTE: DIMENSIONS ARE SHOWN IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters to inches divide by 25.4.

Cat. No. GC SW6 04/01 Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in the U.S.A. Thumbwheel Switch A7D

Economical Thumbwheel Switch with Space-Saving Mount Cost effectiveness and improved reliability achieved through insert-molding and fewer component parts Mounting space reduced to 85% of that of conventional switches to save space Plastic spring with minimal fatigue and a mechanical service life of 30,000 steps or operations Front mount, rear mount, and types with stopper pins are available

Ordering Information

SWITCH UNITS

Part number PC board Screw mounting (back mounting) One-touch mounting (front mounting) Output code Light gray case Black case Light gray case Black case 06 (binary code) A7D-106 A7D-106-1 A7D-206 A7D-206-1

ACCESSORIES

Part number For screw mounting (back mounting) For one-touch mounting (front mounting) Accessory Light gray Black Light gray Black End Cap A7D-1M A7D-1M-1 A7D-2M A7D-2M-1 Spacer A7D-1P A7D-1P-1 A7D-2P A7D-2P-1

Note: 1. When placing your order, please specify the model numbers and quantities of required switch units, end caps, and spacers, respectively. (Note that switch units and accessories are not factory-assembled for shipment.) 2. Types with stopper pins are also available. When placing orders for those, specify the stopper range in the two blank frames of the type number as follows: A7D-106-S(-1) A7D-206-S(-1) Example: A7D-106-S06... (The case color is light grey.) Specify the stopper range 0 to 6 in two digits with the first digit always 0. 3. One of the following alphabetic codes must be filled into the boxed part of the model number to specify a legend to be hot stamped on the required spacer. 4. End caps come as a set -- left and right.

Code Legend Code Legend Code Legend A Hot stamp F kg L PCS not required B SEC G mm P day C MIN H cm Q x 10 SEC DH J m T0 Eg KoCU¥ 227 A7D A7D

Specifications

CHARACTERISTICS

Switching capacity 1 mA to 0.1 A, 5 to 30 VDC (resistive load) Carry current 100 mA Contact resistance 200 mΩ max. Insulation resistance 10 MΩ min. (at 250 VDC) between nonconnected terminals 100 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC) between each terminal and noncurrent-carrying part Dielectric strength 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between nonconnected terminals 1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between each terminal and noncurrent-carrying part Operating force 350 g max. Vibration 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude Shock 500 m/s2 (approx. 50 g) min. Ambient temperature Operating -10° to 70°C Storage -20° to 80°C Humidity 35% to 85% RH Service life Mechanical 30,000 operations (steps) min. Electrical 20,000 operations (steps) min. Weight (per unit) 1.2 g

Note: Data shown are of initial value. Dimensions Unit: mm (inch) SWITCH UNITS

A7D-106 (-1) Panel cutout

No. of A B C D units (n) (nx5.1+3) (nx5.1+8.3) (nx5.1+13.3) 1 8.1 (0.32) 13.4 (0.53) 18.4 (0.72) 8.4 (0.33) 2 13.2 (0.52) 18.5 (0.73) 23.5 (0.93) 13.5 (0.53) 3 18.3 (0.72) 23.6 (0.93) 28.6 (1.13) 18.6 (0.73) 4 23.4 (0.92) 28.7 (1.13) 33.7 (1.33) 23.7 (0.93) 5 28.5 (1.12) 33.8 (1.33) 38.8 (1.53) 28.8 (1.13) 6 33.5 (1.32) 38.9 (1.53) 43.9 (1.73) 33.9 (1.33) ± Note: 1. Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of 0.4 mm 7 38.6 (1.52) 44.0 (1.73) 49.0 (1.93) 39.0 (1.54) applies to all dimensions. 8 43.7 (1.72) 49.1 (1.93) 54.1 (2.13) 44.1 (1.74) 2. Terminal C is the bottom terminal when the switch 9 48.8 (1.92) 54.2 (2.13) 59.2 (2.33) 49.2 (1.94) unit is viewed from the front. 10 53.9 (2.12) 59.3 (2.33) 64.3 (2.53) 54.3 (2.14) 3. The dimensions in the above table include the end caps on both sides of the switch unit. If a spacer is used, add 5.08 mm (.20) to A7D-106(-1) and 6 mm (.24) to A7D-206(-1), respectively, per spacer. 228 A7D A7D

A7D-206(-1) Panel cutout

No. of A B C units (n) (nx5.1+3) (nx5.1+5) (nx5.1+3.3) 1 8.1 (0.32) 10.1 (0.40) 8.4 (0.33) 2 13.2 (0.52) 15.2 (0.60) 13.5 (0.53) 3 18.3 (0.72) 20.3 (0.80) 18.6 (0.73) 4 23.4 (0.92) 25.4 (1.00) 23.7 (0.93) 5 28.5 (1.12) 30.5 (1.20) 28.8 (1.13) 6 33.5 (1.32) 35.5 (1.40) 33.9 (1.33) 7 38.6 (1.52) 40.6 (1.60) 39.0 (1.54) 8 43.7 (1.72) 45.7 (1.80) 44.1 (1.74) Note: 1. Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ± 0.4 mm applies to all 9 48.8 (1.92) 50.8 (2.00) 49.2 (1.94) dimensions. 10 53.9 (2.12) 55.9 (2.20) 54.3 (2.14) 2. Terminal C is the bottom terminal when the switch unit is viewed from the front. 3. The dimensions in the above table includes the end caps on both sides of the switch unit. If a spacer is used, add 5.08 mm (.20) to A7D-106(-1) and 6 mm (.24) to A7D-206(-1), respectively, per spacer.

END CAPS

A7D-1M(-1) [left] [right]

229 A7D A7D

Unit: mm (inch) A7D-2M(-1)

[left] [right]

Note: End caps are attached to each end of the switch assembly and are used to secure the switch assembly to the mounting plate.

SPACERS

A7D-1P (-1) A7D-2P (-1)

Note: Spacers are used to reserve space for switch units or to separate two switch units. The appearance and thickness of the spacers are the same as those of the switch units.

230 A7D A7D

NOTE: DIMENSIONS ARE SHOWN IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters to inches divide by 25.4.

Cat. No. GC SW6 04/01 Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in the U.S.A. Thumbwheel Switch A7DP

Reliable Thumbwheel Switch with Dustproof Construction and Easy Front Mounting

Pen-push switches are designed especially for use in portable equipment Internal contacts boost reliability

Ordering Information Note: A7DP switch units can be ordered with limited setting ranges. When ordering, include the range in the model number as shown in the following examples:

A7DP-206-S06 (Light gray A7DP with a range of 0 to 6) A7DP-206-S18-1 (Black A7DP with a range of 1 to 8)

1. Switch units 2. End caps 3. Spacer 4. Connectors

SWITCH UNITS Part number PCB terminal Output code Type Light gray case Black case 06 (binary code) Pen-push A7DP-206 A7DP-206-1

Note: Switch units, end caps, spacers, and connectors must be ordered separately and are not factory-assembled for shipment.

ACCESSORIES

Part number Accessory Light gray Black End cap A7D-2M A7D-2M-1 Spacer A7D-2PA A7D-2PA-1

To order spacers marked with measurement units or symbols, select the unit or symbol from the table below and put its code letter in place of the final letter A in the model number.

Example: A7D-2PK (light gray spacer with °C mark for A7DP)

Code letter A B C D E F G H J K L Q T U Marking Blank SEC MIN H g kg mm cm m °C PCS x10 SEC 0¥

231 A7DP A7DP

Specifications

CHARACTERISTICS

Switching capacity 1 mA to 0.1 A, 5 to 30 VDC (resistive load) Carry current 100 mA Contact resistance 200 mΩ max. Insulation resistance 10 MΩ min. (at 250 VDC) between nonconnected terminals 100 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC) between each terminal and noncurrent carrying part Dielectric strength 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between nonconnected terminals 1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between each terminal and noncurrent carrying part Operating force 350 g max. Vibration resistance 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude Shock resistance 500 m/s2 (approx. 50 G) min. Ambient temperature -10° to 70°C (no condensation) Storage temperature -20° to 80°C Humidity 35% to 85% Service life Mechanical 30,000 steps min. Electrical 20,000 steps min. Weight (per unit) Approx. 1.2 g

Note: Data shown are of initial value

Dimensions

Unit: mm (inch)

PEN-PUSH SWITCHES A7DP-206(206-1) Panel cutout

Number of A B C units (n) (n x 5.1 + 5) (n x 5.1 + 3) 1 10.1 (0.40) 8.1 (0.32) 8.4 (0.33) 2 15.2 (0.60) 13.2 (0.52) 13.5 (0.53) 3 20.3 (0.80) 18.3 0(.72) 18.6 (0.73) 4 25.4 (1.00) 23.4 (0.92) 23.7 (0.93) 5 30.5 (1.20) 28.5 (1.12) 28.8 (1.13) Note: 1. Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ±0.4 mm 6 35.5 (1.40) 33.5 (1.32) 33.9 (1.33) applies to all dimensions. 7 40.6 (1.60) 38.6 (1.52) 39.0 (1.53) 2. Each model number applies to a single switch unit and 8 45.7 (1.80) 43.7 (1.72) 44.1 (1.74) not to the switch assembly as shown in the drawings. 3. Common terminal “C” is at the bottom when the switch 9 50.8 (2.00) 48.8 (1.92) 49.2 (1.94) is viewed from the fron. 10 55.9 (2.20) 53.9 (2.12) 54.3 (2.14)

232 A7DP A7DP

END CAPS

A7D-2M(-2M-1) (left side) (right side)

SPACERS A7D-2PA(-2PA-1)

TERMINALS 06 Output code

A7DP PCB terminals

Hints on Correct Use

Refer to HINTS ON CORRECT USE under the General Information section.

233 A7DP A7DP

NOTE: DIMENSIONS ARE SHOWN IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters to inches divide by 25.4.

Cat. No. GC SW6 04/01 Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in the U.S.A. SCSI Thumbwheel Switch A7F

Compact Thumbwheel Switch with Pen-push Operation I Available in both vertical and horizontal models I Compact, thin, and space-saving I Pen-push type operation prevents mishandling I No panel mounting plates required I Built-in connector terminal connects to any device with ease

Ordering Information

Part number Horizontal Vertical Output code Type Enclosure Rating Black case Black case Binary (8 positions) Pen-push IP50 A7F-241-1 A7F-241-1-1 I ACCESSORIES

Accessory Contact Color Part number AMP MT connector — White 173977-5 (Insulation displacement type) — Light blue 2-173977-5 — Cream yellow 4-173977-5 — Black 6-173977-5 AMP CT (Crimp type) 175102-1 or 175161-1 — 175778-5

Specifications

I CHARACTERISTICS

Switching capacity 1 mA to 0.1 A, 5 VDC (resistive load) Carry current 1 A max. Contact resistance 1 Ω max. Insulation resistance 10 MΩ min. (at 250 VAC) between terminals of same polarity 100 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC) between each terminal and ground Dielectric strength 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 0.2 s between terminals of same polarity 1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 0.2 s between each terminal and ground Vibration resistance 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude Shock resistance 500 m/s2 (approx. 50 g) min. Life expectancy Mechanical 2,000 steps min. Electrical 2,000 steps min. Ambient temperature Operating -10°C to 70°C (with no icing) Storage -20°C to 80°C (with no icing) Ambient humidity Operating 85% max. (with no icing or condensation) Operating force 350 g max.

235 A7F A7F

Dimensions Unit: mm (inch)

A7F-241-1 Panel Cutout

Panel thickness A 0.5 to 1.5 mm (0.02 to 0.06) 14.7±0.1 (0.58±0.004) 1.5 to 2.0 mm (0.06 to 0.08) 14.9±0.1 (0.59±0.004)

A7F-241-1 Panel Cutout

Panel thickness A 0.5 to 1.5 mm (0.02 to 0.06) 14.7±0.1 (0.58±0.004) 1.5 to 2.0 mm (0.06 to 0.08) 14.9±0.1 (0.59±0.004)

Note: 1. When engaging the mounting hooks of the A7F with any panel mounting hole, the clearance of the panel mounting hole must not be 0.2 mm or more, otherwise the mounting hooks will not engage with the panel mounting hole. Make sure that the mounting hooks have engaged with the panel mounting hole securely before using the A7F. 2. Connect to AMP’s 5-pole CT Connector.

236 A7F A7F

Precautions

I ENVIRONMENT Static electricity while touching the operating switch may damage the circuitry of the A7F. To protect the circuitry from Do not use the A7F in places where there is ammonia gas, static electricity, a protection circuit is required. chlorine, or sulfur dioxide. Do not put wet, oily, or dirty fingers on the operation switches of I CIRCUIT EXAMPLE the A7F.

I HANDLING

The molded components of the A7F use polyacetal resin and Do not impose any force on the switch label side and the cover ABS resin. Carefully use alcohol to clean the molded of the A7F, otherwise the A7F will need an operation force that components so that alcohol will not penetrate into the interior of is greater than normal or the push buttons of the A7F will be the A7F. Do not use paint thinner to clean the molded locked. components. Do not impose external force on the top and bottom of the A7F Do not press the + and Ð push buttons of the A7F (as shown in the following illustration) when mounting. simultaneously. Press the setting switch with the tip of a ball-point pen. Do not use pencil point or mechanical pencil point to press the setting switch, otherwise the lead of the pencil or mechanical pencil may be broken and A7F malfunctions may result due to fragments of the broken lead.

237 A7F A7F

NOTE: DIMENSIONS ARE SHOWN IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters to inches divide by 25.4.

Cat. No. GC SW6 04/01 Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in the U.S.A. R Miniature Rocker Switch A8L

Rocker Switch for High Current Switching

H Withstands inrush currents up to 100 A due to a unique switching mechanism H Soft touch with firm switching action H Easy to mount by snap fitting H Contact gap of 3 mm minimum H UL and cUL approved and conforms to EN standards.

Ordering Information

Switch Part number Color of Marking SPST DPST caps and on caps cases Quick-connect/ PCB Right-angled Left-angled Quick-connect/ PCB Right-angled Left-angled (flanges) solder terminals PCB PCB solder terminals PCB PCB terminals terminals terminals terminals terminals terminals Black Without A8L-11-11N1 A8L-11-12N1 A8L-11-13N1 A8L-11-14N1 A8L-21-11N1 A8L-21-12N1 A8L-21-13N1 A8L-21-14N1 markings A8L-11-11N2 A8L-11-12N2 A8L-11-13N2 A8L-11-14N2 A8L-21-11N2 A8L-21-12N2 A8L-21-13N2 A8L-21-14N2

Specifications

J CHARACTERISTICS

Permissible operating frequency Mechanical 20 operations/min max. Electrical 7 operations/min max. Insulation resistance 100 MΩ min. (500 VDC) Dielectric strength 2,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz, for 1 min between terminals of the same polarity 2,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz, for 1 min between terminals of the different polarity 4,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz, for 1 min between charged metal parts and the ground terminal Vibration resistance Malfunction 1 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude (malfunction time of 1 ms max.) Shock resistance Malfunction 300 m/s2 (malfunction time of 1 ms max.) Destruction 500 m/s2 Life expectancy Mechanical 50,000 operations min. Electrical 10,000 operations min. Inrush current 100 A max. Ambient temperature Operating --20°C to 55°C (-4°F to 131°F) with no icing Storage --25°C to 60°C (-13°F to 140°F) with no icing Ambient humidity Operating 45% to 85% Storage 45% to 85% A8L A8L

J OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS No. of poles 1 2 Operate Force 220±120 gf 400±250 gf

J RATINGS Rateded loadoad Non-inductive Inductive Resistive load Lamp load Inductive load Inductive motor load 125 VAC 10 A 10 A 8 A 8 A 250 VAC 10 A 10 A 8 A 8 A

Note: 1. The non-inductive lamp load has an impulse current ten times the normal current. 2. The inductive load has a power factor of 0.4 minimum (AC). 3. The motor load has an impulse current 6 times the normal current. The above ratings were tested under the following conditions: 1. Ambient temperature: 20±2°C (68±35.6°F) 2. Ambient humidity: 65%±5% 3. Switching frequency: 7 times/min

J APPROVED SAFETYSTANDARDS

UL, cUL (File No. E41515) 10 A, 125 VAC; 10 A, 250 VAC EN61058-1 10 (8) A, 125 Vµ; 10 (8) A, 250 Vµ (AZCO certificate no. C9912501)

Dimensions

Unit: mm (inch) J A8L-11-11N1 A8L-11-11N2 A8L-21-11N1 A8L-21-11N2

21 (0.83)

15 (0.59) 10.8 2 (0.08) (0.43) 5.6 (0.22)

13 16.5 (0.51) 3.6 2 dia. (0.65) (0.14)

8.5 (0.33) 1.4 dia. 2.3 4.8 0.8 8.75 (0.09) 10 (0.19) (0.03) (0.39) (0.34) 19 12.5 (0.75) (0.49)

242 A8L A8L

J A8L-11-12N1 A8L-11-12N2 A8L-21-12N1 A8L-21-12N2 21 (0.83)

15 (0.59)

10.8 (0.43) 5.6 (0.22)

13 2 16.5 (0.51) (0.08) (0.65)

4 (0.16)

1.3 0.8 10 (0.05) (0.03) 8.75 (0.39) (0.34) PCB Cutout Dimensions 19 12.5 (Bottom View) (0.75) (0.49) Four, 1.8±0.1-dia. holes

87.5±0.1

10±0.1

J A8L-11-13N1 A8L-11-13N2 A8L-21-13N1 A8L-21-13N2

21 (0.83)

15 (0.59) 10.8 5.6 (0.43) (0.22)

2 (0.08) 16.5 13 2 0.8 (0.65)(0.51) (0.08) (0.03)

PCB Cutout Dimensions (Bottom View) 3.3 8 (0.13) 12.5 (0.31) Four, 1.8±0.1-dia. holes (0.49) 4 (0.16) 10 19 (0.39) (0.75) 8 ±0.1

243 A8L A8L

Unit: mm (inch)

J A8L-11-14N1 A8L-11-14N2 A8L-21-14N1 A8L-21-14N2 21 (0.83)

15 (0.59) 10.8 5.6 (0.43) (0.22)

2 13 2 (0.08) 0.8 (0.51) (0.08) 16.5 (0.03) (0.65)

3.3 (0.13) 8 12.5 PCB Cutout Dimensions (0.31) (0.49) 10 4 (Bottom View) (0.39) 19 (0.16) (0.75) Four, 1.8±0.1-dia. holes

8 ±0.1

J PANEL CUTOUT Play R

Panel thickness (mm) X (mm) Y (mm) 0.75 to 1.25 0 +0.1 19.2 ---0.1 12.9 0 Edge 1.26 to 2.5 +0.1 +0.1 19.4---0.3 12.9 0 Note: Be sure that play R is the operation side. Note: Recommended panel material: SPCC Consult your OMRON representative when using a panel with a thickness other than those listed here.

244 A8L A8L

NOTE: DIMENSIONSSHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters to inches divide by 25.4.

Cat. No. GC SW6 04/01 Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in U.S.A.

# # ! " " " " # # ! $ $ " ! " " " " " # " % " " ! " ! " & $ " " " ' # ( " % !" ) & $ ! " $ " % "$ ! $ '

* ! + ""#" , """"

* .! " + " , /! " &/0' ,1 ±2+3 4 5 &50' 2- 4 " & 6' 2- ±2 6 " 2-, ±2 # ! " + ,22$222 ! " " , $222$222 ! " " % " ! " ! +2 72° % " ! +2 7,° . " " "! $

% & " ! " " " " % % ■ ' (

) *

" 9

"""" . ! &!! ' . " &22,' " , &7 ' /! " ,1 ± 2+3 4 &/0' " "!

6$ -

" &, ' 6 " 9 22: 0 $ 5,

" "

""#" . ! &!! ' . " &22,' " + &7 ' /! " ,1 ± 2+3 4 &/0'

6$ - " "!

" &+ ' 6 " 9 22: 0 $ 5,

" "

## *=4.*/4. .>/?4 5= *4 *##*=6=5. 6 " " " $ % -,+

+' % -,-3' % $ ,, +' % %. %/ +' % % , %- /" 77, " " ;% !9<<" . % $ *# :218 6"$ /" ,@7 . !9<<"< 2)4 221 1122 )#0 120 0)0* " !9<<"

4 -=8- 8<28 .! " %A " " " " .

8 Tactile Switch B3F

Miniature, Space-Saving Tactile Switch Provides Long Service Life and Easy Mounting

Extended mechanical/electrical service life: 10 x 106 operations for 12 x 12 mm type and 1 x 106 operations for the 6 x 6 mm type Ideal for applications such as audio, office and communications equipment, measuring instruments, TVs, VCRs, etc. Taped radial type, vertical type, high force type, and gold-plated contact type are available as series versions Flux-tight base structure allows automatic soldering of the tactile switches onto a PC board

Ordering Information

B3F-1, B3F-3 6 x 6 mm type

Part number Switch Without ground terminal With ground terminal Type Plunger height x pitch Operating Force Bags Sticks* Bags Sticks* Standard Flat 4.3 x 6.5 mm General-purpose: 100 g B3F-1000 B3F-1000S B3F-1100 B3F-1100S 150 g B3F-1002 B3F-1002S B3F-1102 B3F-1102S High-force: 260 g B3F-1005 B3F-1005S B3F-1105 B3F-1105S 5.0 x 6.5 mm General-purpose: 100 g B3F-1020 B3F-1020S B3F-1120 B3F-1120S 150 g B3F-1022 B3F-1022S B3F-1122 B3F-1122S High-force: 260 g B3F-1025 B3F-1025S B3F-1125 B3F-1125S 5.0 x 7.5 mm General-purpose: 100 g — — B3F-1110 — Projected 7.3 x 6.5 mm General-purpose: 100 g B3F-1050 B3F-1050S B3F-1150 B3F-1150S 150 g B3F-1052 B3F-1052S B3F-1152 B3F-1152S High-force: 260 g B3F-1055 B3F-1055S B3F-1155 B3F-1155S

Vertical Flat 3.15 mm General-purpose: 100 g — — B3F-3100 — 150 g — — B3F-3102 — High-force: 260 g — — B3F-3105 — 3.85 mm General-purpose: 100 g — — B3F-3120 — 150 g — — B3F-3122 — High-force: 260 g — — B3F-3125 — Projected 6.15 mm General-purpose: 100 g — — B3F-3150 — 150 g — — B3F-3152 — High-force: 260 g — — B3F-3155 —

* Number of switches per stick: Without ground terminal ...... 90/stick With ground terminal ...... 75/stick 151 Important note: Switches cannot be water-washed. B3F B3F

B3F-4, B3F-5 12 x 12 mm type

Part number Switch Without ground terminal With ground terminal Type Plunger height x pitch Operating Force Bags Sticks* Bags Sticks* Standard Flat 4.3 x 12.5 mm General-purpose: 130 g B3F-4000 B3F-4000S B3F-4100 B3F-4100S

High-force: 260 g B3F-4005 B3F-4005S B3F-4105 B3F-4105S

Projected 7.3 x 12.5 mm General-purpose: 130 g B3F-4050 B3F-4050S B3F-4150 B3F-4150S

High-force: 260 g B3F-4055 B3F-4055S B3F-4155 B3F-4155S

Long service Flat 4.3 x 12.5 mm General-purpose: 130 g B3F-5000 B3F-5000S B3F-5100 B3F-5100S life

Projected 7.3 x 12.5 mm B3F-5050 B3F-5050S B3F-5150 B3F-5150S

High reliability Flat 4.3 x 12.5 mm B3F-5001 B3F-5001S B3F-5101 B3F-5101S gold-plated contact

Projected 7.3 x 12.5 mm B3F-5051 B3F-5051S B3F-5151 B3F-5151S

* Number of switches per stick: Without ground terminal ...... 45/stick With ground terminal ...... 40/stick Important note: Switches cannot be water-washed.

B3F-6 Taped Radial (Auto Insertion) 6 x 6 mm type

Part number Switch Without With Type Plunger height x pitch Operating Force ground terminal ground terminal B3F-6000 Flat 4.3 x 6.5 mm General-purpose: 100 g B3F-6000 B3F-6100 High-force: 150 g B3F-6002 B3F-6102 5.0 x 6.5 mm General-purpose: 100 g B3F-6020 B3F-6120 High-force: 150 g B3F-6022 B3F-6122 Projected 7.3 x 6.5 mm General-purpose: 100 g B3F-6050 B3F-6150 High-force: 150 g B3F-6052 B3F-6152

Note: The above switches must be ordered in units of 1,000. Important note: Switches cannot be water-washed.

152 B3F B3F

ACCESSORIES

Keycaps Keycap Keycap

Switch Switch Part number Applicable type: 6 x 6 mm 12 x 12 mm Keycap color Size: 4 x 4 mm 9 x 9 mm 12 x 12 mm Light gray B32-1000 B32-1200 B32-1300 Black B32-1010 B32-1210 B32-1310 Orange B32-1020 B32-1220 B32-1320 Yellow B32-1030 B32-1230 B32-1330 Blue B32-1040 B32-1240 B32-1340 Green B32-1050 B32-1250 B32-1350 White B32-1060 B32-1260 B32-1360 Light green B32-1070 B32-1270 B32-1370 Red B32-1080 B32-1280 B32-1380

Note: Keycaps are available in different sizes and colors for exclusive use of the 6 x 6 mm and 12 x 12 mm projected plunger versions of Model B3F.

PLUNGER IDENTIFICATION TABLE Use this table to determine tactile switch type by plunger color.

Plunger color Operating force Type Light gray 100 g B3F-1000, 1150, 3100, 6000, 6050 White 100 g B3F-1050, 1100, 3150, 4000, 4050, 4100 Black 100 g B3F-1020, 1110, 1120, 3120, 6020, 6120 Blue 130 g B3F-5000 Series Yellow 150 g B3F-1002, 1052, 1102, 3102, 3152, 4005, 4055, 4105, 4155, 6002, 6052 Medium gray 150 g B3F-1022, 1122, 3122, 6022 Orange 260 g B3F-1005, 1055, 1105, 3105, 6005, 6055 Pink 260 g B3F-1025, 1125, 3125, 6025

Specifications

CHARACTERISTICS

Part number B3F-1 B3F-3 B3F-4 B3F-5 B3F-6 Service life (see note 1) 1,000,000 operations 3,000,000 operations 10,000,000 operations 1,000,000 (300,000) [mechanical/electrical] minimum minimum minimum operations min. Weight (see note 2) Approx. 0.25 g Approx. 0.85 g Approx. 0.25 g Contact form SPST-NO Switching capacity 50 mA 24 VDC (resistive load) 5-24 VDC, 1-50 mA Permissible load 1 mA 5 VDC min. (resistive load) — Contact resistance 100 MΩ max. Insulation resistance 100 MΩ min. (at 250 VDC) Dielectric strength 500 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute Bounce time 5 ms max. Vibration Malfunction durability: 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude Shock Mechanical durability: 1,000 m/s2 (approx. 100 G) Malfunction durability: 100 m/s2 (approx. 10 G) Ambient temperature -25° to 70°C (with no icing) Humidity 35% to 85% RH

Note: 1. Figure in parentheses denotes the service life of high force type. 2. Denotes the weight of standard type. 153 3. Data shown are of initial value. B3F B3F

OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS

Part number B3F-1 / -3 B3F-4 / -5 B3F-6 General High force General High force General High force Characteristics purpose type type purpose type type purpose type type Operating force (OF) 100 ± 30 g 150 ± 50 g 130 ± 50 g 260 ± 70 g 100 ± 30 g 150 ± 50 g Release force (RF) min. 20 g 50 g 30 g 50 g 20 g 50 g +0.2 +0.2 +0.2 +0.2 +0.2 +0.2 Pretravel (PT) max. 0.25 /-0.1 mm 0.25 /-0.1 mm 0.3 /-0.1 mm 0.3 /-0.1 mm 0.25 /-0.1 mm 0.25 /-0.1 mm

CONSTRUCTION

Cover Plunger

Base Dome contact

Terminals Fixed contact

CONTACT FORM B3F-10 B3F-11 B3F-3 B3F-40 B3F-41 B3F-50 B3F-51

Engineering Data OPERATING FORCE VS STROKE (TYPICAL EXAMPLE) B3F-1/ -3

OF:150 gf

Operating force (g)

OF:100 gf

Stroke (mm)

154 B3F B3F

B3F-4 / -5 B3F-6

OF:260 gf

OF:130 gf

Operating force (gf) Operating force

Operating force (g) force Operating

Stroke (mm) Stroke (mm) Dimensions Unit: mm (inch) B3F-1000/-1002/-1005/-1020*/-1022*/-1025* B3F-1050/-1052/-1055

Terminal arrangement/ PCB mounting internal (top view) connections (top view)

B3F-1100/-1102/-1105/-1120**/-1122**/-1125** B3F-1150/-1152/-1155

Terminal arrangement/ internal connections (top view)

PCB mounting (top view)

Note: Terminal numbers are not indicated on this switch. With the switch turned over so that the logo mark “OMRON” is visible on the upper part of the rear side of the switch base, the terminal on the right of the logo mark is numbered “1” and that on the bottom right is “3.” Accordingly, two terminals on the left side are numbered “2” and “4” respectively. Note: Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ± 0.4 mm applies to all dimensions. 155 B3F B3F

Unit: mm (inch)

B3F-1110

Terminal arrangement/ PCB mounting internal (top view) connections (top view)

B3F-3100/-3102/-3105 B3F-3150/-3152/-3155 Terminal arrangement/ internal connections (top view)

PCB mounting (top view)

B3F-3120/-3122/-3125

PCB mounting Terminal (top view) arrangement/ internal connections (top view)

156 Note: Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ± 0.4 mm applies to all dimensions. B3F B3F

B3F-4000/-5000/-4005/-5001 B3F-4050/-5050/-4055/-5051 Terminal arrangement/ internal connections (top view)

PCB mounting (top view)

* Fit the projection of the switch into this hole to secure the switch.

B3F-4101/-5100/-4105/-5101 B3F-4150/-5150/-4155/-5151

Terminal arrangement/ internal connections (top view)

PCB mounting (top view)

* Fit the projection of the switch into this hole to secure the switch.

B3F-6000/-6002 TAPE-PACKAGING DIMENSIONS

Terminal arrangement/ internal connections PCB mounting (top view) (top view)

Note: The tape is random between surface A and surface B. 157 B3F B3F

Unit: mm (inch) B3F-6100/-6102 TAPE-PACKAGING DIMENSIONS

Terminal arrangement/ internal PCB mounting connections (top view) (top view)

B3F-6020/-6022 TAPE-PACKAGING DIMENSIONS

Terminal arrangement/ internal connections PCB mounting (top view) (top view)

B3F-6120/-6122 TAPE-PACKAGING DIMENSIONS

Terminal arrangement/ internal PCB mounting connections (top view) (top view)

158 Note: Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ± 0.4 mm applies to all dimensions. B3F B3F

B3F-6050/-6052 TAPE-PACKAGING DIMENSIONS

Terminal arrangement/ internal PCB mounting connections (top view) (top view)

B3F-6150/-6152 TAPE-PACKAGING DIMENSIONS

Terminal arrangement/ internal PCB mounting connections (top view) (top view)

KEYCAPS B32-100 B32-120 B32-130

159 Note: Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ± 0.4 mm applies to all dimensions. B3F B3F

Unit: mm (inch) PANEL CUTOUTS B32-100 B32-120 B32-130

Note: 1. Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ± 0.2 mm applies to all dimensions. 2. Keycaps are available in different sizes and colors for exclusive use of the 6 x 6 mm and 12 x 12 mm projected plunger versions of model B3F.

Hints on Correct Use

TAPED RADIAL (AUTO INSERTION) PACKAGING ¥ Tactile switches packed on tape are placed into packing ¥ Tape may be drawn from the box either from the top or from boxes as shown below. the bottom. ¥ Number of switches per box: 1,000

TAPING STRENGTH The tactile switches will not release from the tape when pulled in directions A and B at the following forces. A: 500 g B: 100 g

160 B3F B3F

NOTE: DIMENSIONS ARE SHOWN IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters to inches divide by 25.4.

Cat. No. GC SW6 04/01 Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in the U.S.A. R Tactile Switch (SMD) B3FS

Surface-mounting Switches Ideal for High-density Mounting

H Tape packing style also available H Allows reflow soldering H Incorporates a snap-action contact mechanism that ensures sharp switching operations

Ordering Information

Item Part number Type Plunger Height x pitch Operating force (OF) Bag (See Note 1.) Embossed tape (See Note 2.) Standard Flat 3.1 x 8.0 mm General-purpose: 100 gf B3FS-1000 B3FS-1000P 6 x 6 mm High-force: 150 gf B3FS-1002 B3FS-1002P

Projected 7.3 x 8.0 mm General-purpose: 100 gf B3FS-1050 -

High-force: 150 gf B3FS-1052 -

Note: 1. Orders must be made in units of 100 pieces. 2. Orders must be made in units of 3,000 pieces. For the packing style, refer to Key Switch Packing under Precautions section. Important note: Switches cannot be water-washed.

Specifications

J CHARACTERISTICS

Switching capacity 50 mA, 24 VDC (resistive load) Insulation voltage 30 VDC Contact form SPST-NO Contact material Silver plating Contact resistance 100 mΩ max. (initial value) (rated: 1 mA, 5 VDC) Insulation resistance 100 MΩ min. (at 100 VDC) Dielectric strength 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min Bounce time 5 ms max. Vibration resistance Malfunction: 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude Shock resistance Destruction: 1,000 m/s2 min. {approx. 100G min.} Life expectancy General-purpose type 1,000,000 operations min. High-force type 300,000 operations min. Ambient temperature Operating --40°C to 85°C (--40°F to 185°F) with no icing Ambient humidity Operating 35% to 85% Weight Approx. 0.2 g B3FS B3FS

Engineering Data

J OPERATING FORCE VS STROKE (TYPICAL EXAMPLE)

High-force type ) f g ( e c r o f g n i t a r e p O

General-purpose type

Stroke S (mm)

J OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS

Characteristics B3FS-1000 Series General-purpose High-force Operating force (OF) max. 100±30 gf 150±50 gf Releasing force (RF) min. 20 gf 50 gf

+0.2 Pretravel (PT) 0.25 -0.1 mm

Dimensions

Unit: mm (inch) J B3FS-1000 B3FS-1002 B3FS-1000P B3FS-1002P

3 PCB Pad Terminal Arrangement/ (0.12) (Top View) Internal Connection (4) dia. (3) (One-side PCB t= 1.6) (Top View)

6.3 4.5±0.2 (4) (3) 3.1 5.9 (0.25)(0.18±0.008) (0.12) (0.23)

(2) (1) 6.4 (2) (1) (0.25) 9.6 3.1 2.6 (0.38) (0.12) (0.10)

8 (0.31) 0.7 0.7 (0.03) (0.03)

162 B3FS B3FS

J B3FS-1050 B3FS-1052 6 (0.24) PCB Pad Terminal Arrangement/ (Top View) Internal Connection (One-side PCB t= 1.6) (Top View) 4.5±0.2 6.3 (0.18±0.008) (0.25)

1.8 2.4±0.1 5.9 (0.07) (0.09±0.004) (0.23)

7.3 6.4 3.1 (0.29) (0.25) (0.12) 9.6 (0.38)

2.6 8 0.7 0.7 (0.10) (0.31) (0.03) (0.03) 3.1 (0.12)

Precautions

No flux can be wiped or cleaned after soldering the Switch J OPERATION because the cleaning solvent will penetrate into the interior of the Do not repeatedly operate the Switch with high force, apply Switch together with the flux and dust on the PCB. As a result, additional force to the plunger once it has stopped moving, or the Switch may malfunction. operate the Switch with excessive force, otherwise the disc spring of the Switch may deform and the Switch may malfunction. Temperature (_C) Be sure to set the Switch so that the plunger will be pressed straight. A decrease in the life of the Switch may result if the plunger is pressed off-center or from an acute angle.

Preheating

J SOLDERING Room temperature Do not apply flow soldering, otherwise fragments of solder and flux may have a bad influence on the operation of the pushbutton. Time (s) Apply reflow soldering according to the optimum heating curve shown below. Reflow soldering equipment may have a high peak Note: The above curve is given on condition that the thickness value. Be sure to conduct a test before use. of the PCB is 1.6 mm. Soldering may be repeated only once at a minimum interval of five minutes if the Switch is not soldered properly.

163 B3FS B3FS

J TACTILE SWITCH PACKING Standard Conform to EIAJ standards Package 3,000 Switches Key Switches are packed on tape as shown below. Heat resistance 50°C for 24 hours (not be deformed) Label (18) The Switch is not of enclosed construction. Be sure to protect the Tape drawing direction Switch with an appropriate sheet when using the Switch in locations with excessive dust.

Key Top

Protection sheet 13 dia. Reel 380¦2 dia. Switch

+0.1 1.5 0 dia.

Tape drawing direction

164 B3FS B3FS

NOTE: DIMENSIONSSHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters to inches divide by 25.4.

Cat. No. GC SW6 04/01 Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in U.S.A. R Tactile Switch B3M

Designed for a Long Stroke and Positive Click

H Long stroke of 0.85 mm provides radically improved operability H Light touch with a minimum overstroke of 0.25 mm H Improved reliability with a service life of 2,000,000 operations

Ordering Information

Size Switch height X pitch Operating force (OF) Part number 6 x 6 mm type 7.3 x 5.0 mm 70±20gf B3M-6009

Important note: Switch cannot be water-washed.

Specifications

J CHARACTERISTICS

Switching capacity 50 mA, 12 VDC (resistive load) Contact form SPST-NO Contact resistance 500 mΩ max. (initial value) (Rated 5 VDC, 1 mA) Insulation resistance 100 MΩ min. (at 250 VDC) Dielectric strength 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min Bounce time 5 ms max. Vibration resistance 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude Shock resistance Destruction: 100 m/s2 min. (approx. 10G min.) Life expectancy 2,000,000 operations min. Ambient temperature Operating --25°C to 70°C (with no icing) Ambient humidity Operating 35% to 85% Weight Approx. 0.27 g

J OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS

Characteristics Operating force (OF max.) 70±20 gf Reset force (RF min.) 20 gf min. Pretravel (PT) 0.5 mm max. Overtravel (OT) 0.2 mm min. B3M B3M

Construction

Cap Case

Coil spring

Plunger Inverted spring

Base

Terminal (contact)

Note: No terminal numbers appear on the Switch. To orient a Switch in the “bottom view” position, turn it so that the terminals are on the right and left sides and the word OMRON is right-side up. (Bottom view)

Dimensions

Unit: mm (inch) J B3M-6009

6 ±0.2 (0.24 ±0.008) Example of Dimensions for Terminal Arrangement/ PCB Holes (Top View) Internal Connections (t = 1.6, Single-sided PCB) (Top View) 6 ±0.2 (0.24 ±0.008) Two, 1 +0.1 dia. 0

3.9 dia. (0.15 dia.) (1) (2) 3.1 (0.12) 5 ±0.1 (0.20 ±0.004)

7.3 ±0.2 (0.29 ±0.008) 6.5 (0.26) 4.8 (0.19)

3.5 (0.14) (1) (2)

0.6 0.3 (0.02) (0.01) 5 ±0.2 (0.20 ±0.008)

166 B3M B3M

Precautions

J HANDLING J SOLDERING Do not apply excessive force repeatedly on the Switch. The Use either automatic or manual soldering. round plate spring will deform and cause faulty operation if additional force or an excessive load is applied to the plunger Automatic: once it has stopped moving. Soldering temperature of 260°C max. within 5 sec (t=1.6, single-sided PCB) The Switch is not sealed. Use a resin sheet or other measures to protect the Switch during operation in dust-prone environments. Manual: Soldering iron tip temperature of 350°C max. within 3 sec (t=1.6 Top of the key single-sided PCB) Check multi-level or other non-standard PCBs prior to use because patterning and land areas may cause thermal deformation of the Switch. Plastic sheet Do not solder more than twice during repairs or other re-soldering Switch work, and always allow at least 5 minutes between the first and second applications of solder. Carefully control the amount of foam in the flux so the flux does J PCB not rise above components mounted on the PCB. A single-sided PCB with a thickness of 1.6 mm is recommended. Wipe flux away after soldering instead of washing it away. The Check other types of PCBs (other thickness or through holes) Switch will fail if cleaning solution, flux, or dirt from the PCB prior to use because a non-standard PCB may affect operation penetrates into the Switch. as well as the mounting and solder heat resistance characteristics of the Switch.

167 B3M B3M

NOTE: DIMENSIONSSHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters to inches divide by 25.4.

Cat. No. GC SW6 04/01 Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in U.S.A. Tactile Switch B3S

Surface Mount Tactile Switch for High- Density Packaging I Sealed construction allows immersion-cleaning of the PC board with the tactile switches mounted and soldered I Ground terminal available to protect against static electricity I Ideal for applications such as audio, office, and communications equipment, measuring instruments, industrial robots, VCRs, TVs, and vending machines I Tape packaging style also available: contact OMRON for details

Ordering Information

Part number Without ground terminal With ground terminal Switch height x pitch Operating force Bags Embossed Tape Bags Embossed Tape 4.3 x 9.0 mm General-purpose: 160 g B3S-1000 B3S-1000P B3S-1100 B3S-1100P High-force: 230 g B3S-1002 B3S-1002P B3S-1102 B3S-1102P

Important note: Switches cannot be water-washed. Specifications

I CHARACTERISTICS

Switching capacity 50 mA 24 VDC (resistive load) Contact form SPST-NO Permissible load 1 mA 5 VDC min. (resistive load) Contact resistance 100 MΩ max. Insulation resistance 100 MΩ min. (at 250 VDC) Dielectric strength 500 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute Bounce time 5 ms max. Vibration Malfunction durability 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude Shock Mechanical durability 1,000 m/s2 (approx. 100 G) Malfunction durability 100 m/s2 (approx. 10 G) Ambient temperature -25° to 70°C (with no icing) Humidity 35% to 85% RH Service life General-purpose type 500,000 operations min. [Mechanical/electrical] High-force type 300,000 operations min. Weight Approx. 0.30 g

Note: Data shown are of initial value.

169 B3S B3S

I OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS — B3S-1 SERIES

Characteristics General-purpose High-force Operating force (OF) max. 160 g 230 g Release force (RF) min. 20 g 50 g 0.2 0.2 Pretravel (PT) 0.25 + /-0.1 mm 0.25 + /-0.1 mm

I CONSTRUCTION

Plunger

Cover Spacer

Sealing rubber Dome contact

Terminals

Base Fixed contacts Engineering Data

I OPERATING FORCE VS STROKE (TYPICAL EXAMPLE)

Operating force (g)

Stroke (mm)

170 B3S B3S

Dimensions Unit: mm (inch) I B3S-1000, B3S-1002

Footprint (top view) Terminal arrangement/Internal connection (top view)

I B3S-1100, B3S-1102

Footprint (top view) Terminal arrangement/Internal connection (top view)

I TAPE PACKAGING DIMENSIONS

171 B3S B3S

Hints on Correct Use

I INFRARED REFLOW SOLDERING

Secure the thermocouple to the side of each switch terminal with solder having a high melting point. Then set the reflowing furnace so that the peak value of the terminal temperature becomes 230° ± 5°C. Take care that the peak value does not exceed 240°C. The temperature and the time conditions for the reflow soldering process are as shown in the chart at right.

Temperature (¼C) Temperature I WAVE SOLDERING

Dip the bottom of the PC board as follows: Room Ð Solder temperature: 250°C ± 5° max. Temperature Ð Exposure to molten solder: 5 s max. Do not dip solder the keyswitches more than twice. Time (s)

172 B3S B3S

NOTE: DIMENSIONS ARE SHOWN IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters to inches divide by 25.4.

Cat. No. GC SW6 04/01 Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in the U.S.A. Tactile Switch (SMD) B3SN

Compact Tactile Switch with Sealed Construction for Dusty or Humid Environments I Ideal tactile switch for surface mounting I Compact and more than 1 mm thinner than conventional tactile switches I Available with ground terminals for protection against static electricity I Sealed construction conforming to IP62 (IEC-529) provides high reliability in dusty or humid environments

Ordering Information

Part number Switch height x pitch Packaging Without ground terminal With ground terminal 3.1 x 4.6 mm Bulk B3SN-3012 B3SN-3112 Embossed tape B3SN-3012P B3SN-3112P

Note: Switches on embossed tape must be ordered in units of 3,000. Important note: Switches cannot be water-washed. Specifications

I CHARACTERISTICS

Switching capacity 1 to 50 mA, 5 to 24 VDC (resistive load) Contact form SPST-NO Permissible load 1 mA 5 VDC min. Contact resistance 100 MΩ max. Insulation resistance 100 MΩ at 250 VDC Dielectric strength 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between contacts of same polarity 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between each terminal and ground Vibration Malfunction durability 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude Shock Malfunction durability 1,000 m/s2 min. (approx. 100 G) Ambient temperature -25° to 70°C (-13° to 176°F) with no icing Humidity 35% to 85% RH Service life Mechanical/electrical 50,000 operations min. Weight Approx. 0.20 g

Note: Data shown are of initial value.

173 B3SN B3SN

I OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS Ð B3SN 3 SERIES

Characteristics Operating force (OF) 160 ± 50 g max. Release force (RF) 30 g min. Pretravel (PT) 0.25 ± 0.15 mm

I CONSTRUCTION

Film

Push button Plunger

Dome contact

Fixed contact

Base Terminals

Engineering Data I OPERATING FORCE VS. STROKE (typical example)

Operating force (gf)

Stroke S (mm)

Dimensions Unit: mm (inch) I B3SN-3012, B3SN-3012P Without Ground Terminal

Terminal PCB Mounting arrangement

174 B3SN B3SN

I B3SN-3112, B3SN-3112P With Ground Terminal

Terminal PCB Mounting arrangement

Note: Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ± 0.2 mm applies to all dimensions.

I TAPE-PACKAGING DIMENSIONS

Label Tape drawing direction

Reel 380 (15 in.)

Tape drawing direction

175 B3SN B3SN

Hints on Correct Use

I REFLOW SOLDERING

IR Method Attach a thermocouple to one side of the terminal with solder having a high melting point. Then set the reflow furnace to a peak terminal temperature of 250°C. The optimum heating curve is shown at right. VPS Method In the case of VPS-method soldering using fluorocarbon FC-70, the heating time must not exceed 30 seconds at a (¼C) Temperature temperature of more than 200°C Do not apply additional force to the plunger once it has stopped moving. Room Do not repeatedly press the plunger off-center or from an Temperature acute angle. B3SN switches are designed to allow submersed washing after Time (s) soldering. When washing, follow these guidelines: 1. Clean with alcohol solvents. Do not use chlorine solvents or Note: The above heating curve applies if the water. thickness of the circuit board is 1.6 mm. 2. When using ultrasonic cleaning in two- or three-tank systems, do not clean for more than one minute at a time or for more than three minutes. 3. Do not apply external force while washing. 4. Do not wash immediately after soldering. Allow components to stand for three minutes before washing. 5. The switch cannot be used where subject to direct contact with water.

176 B3SN B3SN

NOTE: DIMENSIONS ARE SHOWN IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters to inches divide by 25.4.

Cat. No. GC SW6 04/01 Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in the U.S.A. Tactile Switch B3W

Tactile Switch with Sealed Construction for Automatic Soldering Available in two sizes: 6 mm square and 12 mm square DomeÐshaped contact mechanism assures short key stroke and a sharp click to confirm actuation Ground terminal available to protect against static electricity Ideal for applications such as audio, office and communications equipment, measuring instruments, industrial robots, VCRs, TVs, and vending machines Stick packaging style available Sealed for CFC (Freon) cleaning

Ordering Information

Part number Switch Without ground terminal With ground terminal Type Plunger height x pitch Operating force Bags Sticks* Bags Sticks*

Standard Flat 4.3 x 6.5 mm General-purpose: 160 g B3W-1000 B3W-1000S B3W-1100 B3W-1100S 6x6 mm High-force: 230 g B3W-1002 B3W-1002S B3W-1102 B3W-1102S

Projected 7.3 x 6.5 mm General-purpose: 160 g B3W-1050 B3W-1050S B3W-1150 B3W-1150S

High-force: 230 g B3W-1052 B3W-1052S B3W-1152 B3W-1152S

Standard Flat 4.3 x 6.5 mm General-purpose: 200 g B3W-4000 B3W-4000S B3W-4100 B3W-4100S 12x12 mm High-force: 350 g B3W-4005 B3W-4005S B3W-4105 B3W-4105S

Projected 7.3 x 6.5 mm General-purpose: 200 g B3W-4050 B3W-4050S B3W-4150 B3W-4150S

High-force: 350 g B3W-4055 B3W-4055S B3W-4155 B3W-4155S

* Number of switches per stick: 6 x 6 mm Without ground terminal ... 80/stick With ground terminal...... 75/stick 12 x 12 mm Without ground terminal ... 45/stick With ground terminal...... 40/stick Important note: Switches cannot be water-washed.

177 B3W B3W

ACCESSORIES Keycaps

Part number Applicable type 6 x 6 mm 12 x 12 mm Keycap color Size 4 x 4 mm 9 x 9 mm 12 x 12 mm Light gray B32-1000 B32-1200 B32-1300 Black B32-1010 B32-1210 B32-1310 Orange B32-1020 B32-1220 B32-1320 Yellow B32-1030 B32-1230 B32-1330 Blue B32-1040 B32-1240 B32-1340 Green B32-1050 B32-1250 B32-1350 White B32-1060 B32-1260 B32-1360 Light green B32-1070 B32-1270 B32-1370 Red B32-1080 B32-1280 B32-1380

Note: Keycaps are available in different sizes and colors for exclusive use with the 6 x 6 mm and 12 x 12 mm projected plunger version of Model B3W. Plunger Identification Table Use this table to determine keyswitch type by plunger color.

Plunger color Operating force Type White 160 g B3W-1000, 1050, 1100, 1150 White 200 g B3W-4000, 4050, 4100, 4150 Yellow 230 g B3W-1002, 1052, 1102, 1152 Yellow 350 g B3W-4005, 4055, 4105, 4155 Specifications CHARACTERISTICS

Switching capacity 50 mA 24 VDC (resistive load) Contact form SPST-NO Permissible load 1 mA 5 VDC min. (resistive load) Contact resistance 100 MΩ max. Insulation resistance 100 MΩ min. (at 250 VDC) Dielectric strength 500 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute Bounce time 5 ms max. Vibration Malfunction durability 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude Shock Destruction durability 1,000 m/s2 (approx. 100 G) Malfunction durability 100 m/s2 (approx. 10 G) Ambient temperature Operating -25° to 70°C Humidity 35% to 85% RH Service life General-purpose type B3W-1 : 1,000,000 operations min. B3W-4 : 3,000,000 operations min. [mechanical/electrical] High-load type 300,000 operations min. 1,000,000 operations min. Weight B3W-1 : Approx. 0.30 g B3W-4 : Approx. 1.00 g

OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS

Part number B3W-1 B3W-4 Characteristics General-purpose High-force General-purpose High-force Operating force (OF) max. 160 g 230 g 200 g 350 g Release force (RF) min. 20 g 50 g 30 g 50 g +0.2 +0.2 +0.2 +0.2 Pretravel (PT) 0.25 /-0.1 mm 0.25 /-0.1 mm 0.3 /-0.1 mm 0.3 /-0.1 mm

178 B3W B3W

CONSTRUCTION

Plunger

Cover Spacer Sealing rubber Dome contacts

Terminal

Base Fixed contacts Engineering Data

OPERATING FORCE VS. STROKE (TYPICAL EXAMPLE) B3W-1 series B3W-4 series

Operating force (g) force Operating

Stroke (mm) Stroke (mm)

179 B3W B3W

Dimensions Unit: mm (inch)

6 MM SQUARE TYPES B3W-1000, B3W-1002 B3W-1100, B3W-1102

Mounting holes Terminal arrangement/ Mounting holes Terminal arrangement/ in PCB (top view) Internal connection in PCB (top view) Internal connection (top view) (top view)

Note: Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ± 0.2 mm applies to all dimensions.

180 B3W B3W

6 MM SQUARE TYPES B3W-1050, B3W-1052 B3W-1150, B3W-1152

Mounting holes Terminal arrangement/ Mounting holes Terminal arrangement/ in PCB (top view) Internal connection in PCB (top view) Internal connection (top view) (top view)

Note: Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ± 0.2 mm applies to all dimensions.

181 B3W B3W

Unit: mm (inch)

12 MM SQUARE TYPES B3W-4000, B3W-4005 B3W-4100, B3W-4105

Mounting holes Terminal arrangement/ Mounting holes Terminal arrangement/ in PCB (top view) Internal connection in PCB (top view) Internal connection (top view) (top view)

Note: Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ± 0.2 mm applies to all dimensions.

182 B3W B3W

12 MM SQUARE TYPES B3W-4050, B3W-4055 B3W-4150, B3W-4155

Mounting holes Terminal arrangement/ Mounting holes Terminal arrangement/ in PCB (top view) Internal connection in PCB (top view) Internal connection (top view) (top view)

Note: Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ± 0.2 mm applies to all dimensions.

183 B3W B3W

Unit: mm (inch)

KEYCAPS B32-100 B32-120 B32-130

Note: Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ± 0.2 mm applies to all dimensions.

184 B3W B3W

NOTE: DIMENSIONS ARE SHOWN IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters to inches divide by 25.4.

Cat. No. GC SW6 04/01 Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in the U.S.A. R Tactile Switch B3WN

Double-sealing Construction Assures Water-tight/Dust-tight Protection

H 8 x 8 mm compact size H Allows the use of radial-taping part insertion machines H Conforms to IEC529 IP67

Ordering Information

Size Switch height x pitch Operating force (OF) Part number 8 x 8 mm 13 x 5 mm 200 gf B3WN-6002

Note: Orders must be made in units of 1,000 pieces. Important note: Switch cannot be water-washed.

Specifications

J CHARACTERISTICS Switching capacity 50 mA, 12 VDC (resistive load) Contact form SPST-NO Insulation voltage 30 VDC Contact material Silver plating Contact resistance 100 mΩ max. (initial value) (rated: 1 mA, 5 VDC) Insulation resistance 100 MΩ min. (at 100 VDC) Dielectric strength 250 VAC, 50/60Hz for 1 min Bounce time 10 ms max. Vibration resistance Malfunction: 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude Shock resistance Destruction: 784 m/s2 min. {approx. 80G min.} Malfunction: 100 m/s2 min. {approx. 10G min.} Life expectancy 100,000 operations min. Ambient temperature Operating --25°C to 85°C (--13°F to 185°F) with no icing Ambient humidity Operating 35% to 85% Weight Approx. 0.7 g B3WN B3WN

Engineering Data

J OPERATING FORCE VS STROKE (TYPICAL EXAMPLE) ) f g ( e c r o f ng i t a r pe O

Stroke S (mm)

J OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS

Characteristics Operating force (OF) 200±70 gf Releasing force (RF) 50 gf min.

+0.2 Pretravel (PT) 0.3 --0.1 mm

J CONSTRUCTION Pushbutton

Case

Rubber seal

Film Plunger Disc spring

Base

Terminal

186 B3WN B3WN

Dimensions

Unit: mm (inch)

J B3WN-6002 8±0.2 (0.31±0.008) Recommended mounting holes and internal connection 8±0.2 (PCB thickness t=1.6 mm) (0.31±0.008) 12.7±1.0 6.35±1.0 (0.50±0.04) 0.2 (0.008) 3.8 (0.25±0.04) max. (0.15) dia.

13±0.2 (0.51±0.008) 9 0.9 (0.35) (0.04) 0.9 0.5 Fixed tape (0.04) (0.02) max.

0.6 18+1 (0.02) 0 0.6 0.3 0.2 (0.71+0.04 ) (0.02) (0.01) (0.008) 0 18+1 5±0.2 max. --0.5 (0.71+0.04 ) (0.20±0.008) --0.02 4±0.3 dia. PCB Pad TerminalArrangement/ (0.16±0.01 dia.) 3.85±0.5 (Top View) Internal Connection Master tape (One-side PCB t=1.6) (Top View) (0.15±0.02) 12.7±0.3 12.7±0.3 (0.50±0.01) (0.50±0.01) +0.1 Two, 10 dia.

5±0.1 (0.20±0.004)

Note: 1. In accordance with EIAJ RC-1008, unless otherwise specified. 2. Switch fixing direction (A and B) on the tape may change.

187 B3WN B3WN

Precautions

J OPERATION J OTHER PRECAUTIONS Do not repeatedly operate the Switch with high force, apply When using the Switch in a very humid environment or where additional force to the pushbutton once it has stopped moving, or condensation may occur: mount switch first, then completely operate the Switch with excessive force, otherwise the disc cover the terminals with coating in order to prevent current spring of the Switch may deform and the Switch may malfunction. leakage from terminals. Be sure to set the Switch so that the pushbutton will be pressed Do not use coating materials that contain toluene or xylene. straight. A decrease in the life of the Switch may result if the pushbutton is pressed off-center or from an acute angle. J PCB The Switch is designed for a 1.6-mm-thick, single-sided PCB as a standard PCB. The Switch may not be mounted to any other type of PCB, such as a double-sided, through-hole PCB, or any other one that is different in thickness. Furthermore, the Switch may not operate properly or withstand the soldering heat if it is mounted to such a PCB. Be sure to test the PCB before use. J SOLDERING The Switch can be soldered automatically or manually. The automatic soldering of the Switch on a 1.6-mm-thick, J PACKAGE single-sided PCB must be completed within five seconds at a soldering temperature of 260°C maximum. B3WN Switches are packed on tape as shown below. The manual soldering of the Switch on a 1.6-mm-thick, single-sided PCB must be completed within three seconds at a soldering iron tip temperature of 350°C maximum. B3WN Switches on tape When using a multi-layer PCB, test the PCB in advance because the Switch mounted to the PCB may be deformed by heat if the pattern or land design is improper. Package Soldering may be repeated only once at a minimum interval of five minutes if the Switch is not soldered properly. Stored zigzag 350 Make sure that no flux will rise on the mounting surface of the PCB.

326 53

Do not press strongly, vibrate, or drop the package, otherwise the terminals of the Switches may deform. Pull out the tape slowly. Make sure that the tape is not entangled while pulling it out, otherwise the terminals of the Switches may deform. Do not store the package in locations with high temperature or high humidity. Use the Switches as soon as possible. The package made of paper is not tightly sealed. Storing the package in locations with high temperature or high humidity for a long time may result in the discoloration of the Switch terminals.

188 B3WN B3WN

NOTE: DIMENSIONSSHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters to inches divide by 25.4.

Cat. No. GC SW6 04/01 Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in U.S.A. SPECIAL PURPOSE Basic Switch D2D

Special Purpose Basic Switch ■ Minimum contact gap of 3 mm (0.12 in) needed in general power switches is provided ■ Fail-safe mechanism with double return spring and direct drive positive contact opening features ■ Conforms to Class II of VDE Insulation Grade (SPST-NO type only) Safety-oriented structure with 6 mm (0.24 in) min. insulation distance between terminals of the same polarity, 8 mm (0.31 in) min. between current-carrying metal part and ground, and 8 mm (0.31 in) min. between each terminal and noncurrent-carrying metal part ■ Pull-on lock type for easy maintenance is also available ■ Quick-connect terminal #250 series (conforming to DIN standard)

Ordering Information

Screw mount type Panel mount type panel panel

Part Number Type Contact gap Contact form Screw mount type Panel mount type Standard 3 mm min. SPDT-NO-NC D2D-1000 D2D-1100 SPST-NO D2D-1001 D2D-1101 SPST-NC D2D-1002 D2D-1102 SPDT-NC + SPST-NO — D2D-3103 DPST-NO — D2D-3104 Pull-on lock 1 mm SPDT-NO-NC D2D-2000 D2D-2100

■ CONTACT FORM SPDT SPST-NO SPST-NC SPDT-NC + SPST-NO DPST-NO D2D D2D

Specifications

Non-inductive load (A) Inductive load (A) Resistive load Motor load Type Rated voltage NC NO NC NO Standard 125 VAC 16 16 4 4 250 VAC 16 16 4 4 380 VAC 16 16 4 4 Pull-on lock 125 VAC 10 10 — — 250 VAC 10 10 — — Inrush current NC: 30 A max. (24 A max.) (see note 1) NO: 30 A max. (24 A max.) (see note 1)

Note: 1. Data in parentheses in the above table apply to the pull-on lock type. 2. Inductive load has a power factor of 0.4 min. (AC) and a time constant of 7 milliseconds max. (DC). 3. Motor load has an inrush current of 6 times the steady state current.

Characteristics

Operating speed 10 mm to 1 m/second (0.39 to 39 in/second) Operating frequency Mechanical 300 operations per minute Electrical 60 operations per minute Contact resistance 50 mΩ max. (initial) Insulation resistance 100 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC) Dielectric strength 2,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between terminals of same polarity and between current-carrying metal part and ground 2,500 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between each terminal noncurrent- carrying part (1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between terminals of same polarity 1,500 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between current-carrying metal part and ground and between each terminal and noncurrent-carrying metal part) (see note 1) Temperature rise 30°C max. (initial) Vibration Malfunction durability 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude Shock Mechanical durability Approx. 1,000 m/s2 (approx. 100 g) Malfunction durability Approx. 500 m/s2 (approx. 50 g) (approx. 300 m/s2 [approx. 30 g]) (see note 1) Ambient temperature Operating -25° to 85°C (non-condensing) Humidity 85% RH max. Service life Mechanical 10,000,000 operations min. Electrical 100,000 operations min. Weight Approx. 14 g (D2D-1000)

Note: 1. Data applies to the pull-on type. 2. Data shown are of initial value.

2 D2D D2D

■ CHARACTERISTIC DATA Mechanical service life Electrical service life operations) operations) 3 3 Service life (x10 Service life (x10

OT (%) Rated operating current (A)

Dimensions Unit: mm (inch)

D2D-1000, D2D-1001, D2D-1002

Operating characteristics D2D-1000 D2D-1001 D2D-1002 OF max. (NC-OFF)* 300 g — 300 g (NO-ON) 600 g 600 g — TTF max. 750 g 750 g 750 g OT min. 2.3 mm (0.09 in) 2.3 mm (0.09 in) 5.5 mm (0.22 in) TTP max. 10 mm (0.39 in) 10 mm (0.39 in) 10 mm (0.39 in) FP max. 16.4 mm (0.65 in) 17 mm (0.67 in) 16.4 mm (0.67 in) OP (NC-OFF)* 15.9 ± 0.4 mm — 15.9 ± 0.4 mm (0.63 ± 0.02 in) (0.63 ± 0.02 in) (NO-ON) 12.7 ± 0.4 mm 12.7 ± 0.4 mm — (0.50 ± 0.02 in) (0.50 ± 0.02 in)

D2D-1100, D2D-1101, D2D-1102

Operating characteristics D2D-1100 D2D-1101 D2D-1102 OF max. (NC-OFF)* 300 g — 300 g (NO-ON) 600 g 600 g — TTF max. 750 g 750 g 750 g OT min. 2.3 mm (0.09 in) 2.3 mm (0.09 in) 5.5 mm (0.22 in) TTP max. 6 mm (0.24 in) 6 mm (0.24 in) 6 mm (0.24 in) FP max. 12.4 mm (0.65 in) 13 mm (0.51 in) 12.4 mm (0.65 in) OP (NC-OFF)* 11.9 ± 0.4 mm — 11.9 ± 0.4 mm (0.47 ± 0.02 in) (0.47 ± 0.02 in) (NO-ON) 8.7 ± 0.4 mm 8.7 ± 0.4 mm — (0.34 ± 0.02 in) (0.34 ± 0.02 in)

* NC-OFF: The force applied to the actuator to cause it to move from the free position to the position at which the NC contact opens. NO-ON: The force applied to the actuator to cause it to move from the free position to the position at which the NO contact closes. Note: Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ± 0.4 mm applies to all dimensions.

3 D2D D2D

Unit: mm (inch)

D2D-3103 Operating characteristics D2D-3103 OF max. (NC-OFF)* 300 g (NO-ON) 600 g TTF max. 1,000 g OT min. 2.3 mm (0.09 in) TTP max. 6.4 mm (0.25 in) FP max. 12.4 mm (0.49 in) OP (NC-OFF)* 11.9±0.8 mm (0.47±0.03 in) (NO-ON) 8.7±0.4 mm (0.34±0.02 in)

D2D-3104 Operating characteristics D2D-3104 OF max. (NC-OFF)* — (NO-ON) 600 g TTF max. 1,000 g OT min. 2.3 mm (0.09 in) TTP max. 6.4 mm (0.25 in) FP max. 13.5 mm (0.53 in) OP (NC-OFF)* — (NO-ON) 8.7±0.4 mm (0.34±0.02 in)

D2D-2000 Momentary action (normal operation)

Operating characteristics D2D-2000 D2D-2100 OF max. (NC-OFF)* 200 g 200 g (NO-ON) 300 g 300 g TTF max. 600 g 600 g OT min. 4.5 mm (0.18 in) 4.5 mm (0.17 in) TTP max. 8.3 mm (0.33 in) 4.3 mm (0.17 in) FP max. 14.3 mm (0.56 in) 10.3 mm (0.41 in) OP (NC-OFF)* 13.5±0.6 mm 9.5±0.4 mm (0.53±0.02 in) (0.37±0.15 in) (NO-ON) 12.7±0.6 mm 8.7±0.6 mm (0.50±0.02 in) (0.34±0.02 in)

D2D-2100 Pull-on lock action

Operating characteristics D2D-2000 D2D-2100 OF max. (NC-OFF)* 2,000 g 2,000 g PT max. 2 mm 2 mm OT min. 0.4 mm (0.08 in) 0.4 mm (0.08 in) MD max. 1 mm (0.04 in) 1 mm (0.04 in) TTP max. 16.5 mm (0.65 in) 12.5 mm(0.50 in) FP max. 14.3 mm (0.56 in) 10.3 mm(0.40 in) OP 15.1±0.6 mm 11.1±0.6 mm (0.59±0.02 in) (0.44±0.02 in)

4 D2D D2D

Mounting holes Panel cutout (Panel thickness 1.0 to 2.5 mm)

Note: Dimension * is 36.7 ± 0.1 with a panel thickness of 1.0 mm and 37.0 ± 0.1 with a panel thickness of 2.5 mm.

Note: Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ± 0.4 mm applies to all dimensions.

■ APPROVALS

UL (File No. E41515) / CSA (File No. LR21642)

Type Rating D2D-1 Series 16 A, 250 VAC D2D-2 Series 10 A, 250 VAC D2D-3 Series 16 A, 250 VAC 3/4 HP 125 VAC 1 1/2 HP 250 VAC

VDE (File No. 1673/5861, 3-4401-1009)

Type Rating D2D-1 Series 16 (4) A, 380 VAC D2D-2 Series 10 A, 250 VAC D2D-2 Series 16 (4) A, 380 VAC

SEMKO (File No. 8444083)

Type Rating D2D-2 Series 10 A, 250 VAC

Note: The rated values approved by each of the safety standards (e.g. UL, CSA) may be different from the performance characteristics individually defined in this catalog.

Precautions

■ MOUNTING ■ PULL-ON LOCK FUNCTION

Use M4 screws in combination with flat/lock washers, etc., to When opening or closing the door, the power ON state of the securely mount the switch. Tighten the screws at a torque of 5 switch can be checked with the door left open. By closing the to 7 kg-cm. door after maintenance inspection, the switch will resume the normal momentary action.

Use of a receptacle with an insulated sleeve or Positive Lock (by AMP) is recommended for terminal wiring. Exercise care that no excessive force is applied to the wired terminals.

Example To turn on the power To turn off the power To turn on the power when the door is closed when the door is open with the door left open State

Connection NO-ON ON OFF ON NC-NC (OFF) (ON) (OFF) 5 D2D D2D

■ FAIL-SAFE MECHANISM

Double spring feature Standard type

Two return springs are provided for the pin plunger. Thus, when either of the springs are broken, this feature will prevent Plunger the switch from malfunctioning or short-circuiting. External return spring Case

(The pull-on lock type switch is not provided with this function.) Insulating ring Fixed contact (NC) Movable contact Direct drive positive contact opening feature Movable spring Normally open Fixed contact (NC) The section marked will positively break the circuit if a terminal (NO) Internal return spring contact weld occurs in the switch. Normally closed terminal (NC)

Pull-on lock type

Plunger Case Fixed contact (NC) Movable contact Slider Fixed contact (NC) Returning spring Normally closed Returning spring terminal (NC) stopper The section marked pushes the movable Normally open contact to apply force in the direction which terminal (NO) separates the movable contact forcibly from the fixed contact.

OMRON ELECTRONICS, INC. OMRON CANADA, INC. One East Commerce Drive 885 Milner Avenue Schaumburg, IL 60173 Scarborough, Ontario M1B 5V8 1-800-55-OMRON 416-286-6465

Cat. No. GC SW5 4/98 Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in the U.S.A.

6 Snap Action Switch D2F

Subminiature Snap Action Switch I Super compact, ideal for PCB mounting I Switches 3 A loads (general-purpose), 1 A loads (low force general-purpose) and 0.1 A loads (microvoltage/microcurrent) I Long life span assured by high-precision dual spring reverse-action mechanism I Flux penetration prevented by using an insert terminal and allowing a height difference at the case bottom I Ideal for a wide variety of applications from household appliances and office equipment to audio equipment and communications equipment

Ordering Information

Con- Part number tact Terminal type Actuator Contact type Model OF PCB Self-supporting Soldered Right-angle Left-angle Pin plunger Microvoltage/ Low force 75 g D2F-01F D2F-01F-T D2F-01F-D D2F-01F-A D2F-01F-A1 current Standard 150 g D2F-01 D2F-01-T D2F-01-D D2F-01-A D2F-01-A1 General- Low force 75 g D2F-F D2F-F-T D2F-F-D D2F-F-A D2F-F-A1 purpose Standard 150 g D2F D2F-T D2F-D D2F-A D2F-A1 Hinge lever Microvoltage/ Low force 25 g D2F-01FL D2F-01FL-T D2F-01FL-D D2F-01FL-A D2F-01FL-A1 current Standard 80 g D2F-01L D2F-01L-T D2F-01L-D D2F-01L-A D2F-01L-A1 General- Low force 25 g D2F-FL D2F-FL-T D2F-FL-D D2F-FL-A D2F-FL-A1 purpose Standard 80 g D2F-L D2F-L-T D2F-L-D D2F-L-A D2F-L-A1 Simulated Microvoltage/ Low force 40 g D2F-01FL3 D2F-01FL3-T D2F-01FL3-D D2F-01FL3-A D2F-01FL3-A1 roller lever current Standard 80 g D2F-01L3 D2F-01L3-T D2F-01L3-D D2F-01L3-A D2F-01L3-A1 General- Low force 40 g D2F-FL3 D2F-FL3-T D2F-FL3-D D2F-FL3-A D2F-FL3-A1 purpose Standard 80 g D2F-L3 D2F-L3-T D2F-L3-D D2F-L3-A D2F-L3-A1 Roller lever Microvoltage/ Low force 40 g D2F-01FL2 — D2F-01FL2-D D2F-01FL2-A D2F-01FL2-A1 current Standard 80 g D2F-01L2 D2F-01L2-T D2F-01L2-D D2F-01L2-A D2F-01L2-A1 General- Low force 40 g D2F-FL2 D2F-FL2-T D2F-FL2-D D2F-FL2-A D2F-FL2-A1 purpose Standard 80 g D2F-L2 D2F-L2-T D2F-L2-D D2F-L2-A D2F-L2-A1

37 D2F D2F

Specifications

I CHARACTERISTICS

Operating speed 1 to 500 mm/second (0.04 to 19.7 in./second) Operating frequency Mechanical 200 operations per minute (pin plunger actuator type) Electrical 30 operations per minute (pin plunger actuator type) Contact resistance General-purpose type 30 mΩ max. (initial) Microvoltage/ microcurrent load type 100 mΩ max. (initial) Insulation resistance 100 MΩ min. at 500 VDC Dielectric strength 600 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between terminals of same polarity 1,500 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between current-carrying parts and ground Vibration Malfunction durability 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude Shock Malfunction durability 300 m/s2 min. (approx. 30 g min.) Ambient temperature Operating -25° to 65°C with no icing Humidity Operating 45% to 85% ay 5° to 35°C Service life Mechanical 1 million operations min. (OT: full stroke) Electrical 30,000 operations min. (rated load) Weight Approx. 0.5 g

Note: Data shown are of initial value.

I OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS

Part number Characteristics D2F-01F-I, D2F-F-I D2F-01-I, D2F-I D2F-01FL-I, D2F-FL-I D2F-01L-I, D2F-L-I D2F-01FL3-I, D2F-FL3-I OF max. 75 g 150 g 25 g 80 g 40 g RF min. 5 g 20 g 2 g 5 g 2 g PT max. 0.5 mm (0.020 in) 0.5 mm (0.020 in) ——— OT min. 0.25 mm (0.009 in) 0.25 mm (0.009 in) 0.55 mm (0.022 in) 0.55 mm (0.022 in) 0.5 mm (0.020 in) MD max. 0.12 mm (0.005 in) 0.12 mm (0.005 in) 0.5 mm (0.020 in) 0.5 mm (0.020 in) 0.45 mm (0.177 in) OP 5.5 ± 0.3 mm 5.5 ± 0.3 mm 6.8 ± 1.5 mm 6.8 ± 1.5 mm 8.5 ± 1.2 mm (0.22 ± 0.012 in) (0.22 ± 0.012 in) (0.267 ± 0.059 in) (0.267 ± 0.059 in) (0.335 ± 0.047 in) FP max. — — 10 mm (0.394 in) 10 mm (0.394 in) 13 mm (0.512 in)

Part number Characteristics D2F-01L3-I, D2F-L3-I D2F-01FL2-I, D2F-FL2-I D2F-01L2-I, D2F-L2-I OF max. 80 g 40 g 80 g RF min. 5 g 2 g 5 g PT max. — —— OT min. 0.5 mm (0.020 in) 0.55 mm (0.022 in) 0.55 mm (0.022 in) MD max. 0.45 mm (0.177 in) 0.5 mm (0.020 in) 0.5 mm (0.020 in) OP 8.5 ± 1.2 mm 13 ± 2.0 mm 13 ± 2.0 mm (0.335 ± 0.047 in) (0.512 ± 0.079 in) (0.512 ± 0.079 in) FP max. 13 mm (0.512 in) 16.5 mm (0.650 in) 16.5 mm (0.650 in)

I RATINGS

Resistive load Microvoltage/current General-purpose Rated Voltage Low force Standard Low force Standard 125 VAC — — 1 A 3 A 30 VDC 0.1 A 0.1 A 0.5 A 2 A Note: When using an inductive load or motor load, consult OMRON.

38 D2F D2F

I CONTACT FORM

I APPROVALS UL (File No. E41515), CSA (File No. LR21642), EN conforms 61058-1

Type Rating D2F Series, D2F-01 Series 3 A, 125 VAC 1 A, 125 VAC 2 A, 30 VDC 0.5 A, 30 VDC 0.1 A, 30 VDC

Note: The rated values approved by each of the safety standards (e.g. UL, CSA) may be different from the performance characteristics individually defined in this catalog. Engineering Data Mechanical service life Electrical service life

operations)

Service life (x10

Overtravel (mm) Rated operating current (A) Note: 1. Values are for pin plunger actuator type.

39 D2F D2F

Dimensions Unit: mm (inch) I PIN PLUNGER D2F-01-I D2F-01F-I D2F-I D2F-F-I

I HINGE LEVER D2F-01L-I D2F-01FL-I D2F-L-I D2F-FL-I

I SIMULATED ROLLER LEVER D2F-01L3-I D2F-01FL3-I D2F-L3-I D2F-FL3-I

I ROLLER LEVER D2F-01L2-I D2F-01FL2-I D2F-L2-I D2F-FL2-I

Note: 1. Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ± 0.4 mm applies to all dimensions. 2. Omitted dimensions are the same as pin plunger type. 3. Letters and numbers which identify the terminal are put in the blank box of the part number. 4. The above illustrations and dimensions are for models with PCB terminals. Refer to “Terminals” for models with self- supporting, solder and right/left angle terminals.

40 D2F D2F

I TERMINALS

D2F type D2F-T type PCB terminal Self-supporting terminal

D2F-D type Soldered terminal

D2F-A type D2F-A1 type Right-angle terminal Left-angle terminal

41 D2F D2F

Precautions I MOUNTING I MOUNTING HOLE MACHINING

Mount the D2F switch onto the PC board as shown in the following diagram, using 2-pitch (2 x 2.54 mm) terminal spacing.

I PC BOARD MACHINING

I DIMENSIONS

When soldering, use 6:4 solder and a 60 W soldering iron, and complete soldering within 3 seconds. After soldering, do not apply external force to the soldered area for about 1 minute. Allow sufficient insulation distance between terminals and between terminals and ground.

I DIMENSIONS

The use of molded components is recommended for mounting purposes.

I MOLDED PIN MOUNTING DIAGRAM

When screw mounting, use M2 screws together with washers. Fasten the screws applying 0.8 to 1 kg-cm tightening torque.

42 D2F D2F

NOTE: DIMENSIONS ARE SHOWN IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters to inches divide by 25.4.

Cat. No. GC SW6 04/01 Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in the U.S.A. R Watertight Snap Action Switch D2FW-G

Watertight, Snap Action Detection Switch For Use In Automotive and Industrial Vehicles

H Conforms to IP67 H Single-point mounting with an M4 screw H Incorporates a fixed leaf lever for tough environments H Lead wires have solderless connections to suit environmental concerns H Wide operating-temperature range of --40°C to 85°C

Ordering Information

Actuator Rated load Contact specifications (lead wires) Part number Leaf lever 0.1 A SPDT D2FW-G071M SPST-NC D2FW-G072M SPST-NO D2FW-G073M 1 A SPDT D2FW-G271M SPST-NC D2FW-G272M SPST-NO D2FW-G273M Long leaf lever 0.1 A SPDT D2FW-G081M SPST-NC D2FW-G082M SPST-NO D2FW-G083M 1 A SPDT D2FW-G281M SPST-NC D2FW-G282M SPST-NO D2FW-G283M

Note: The standard length of the lead wires (AVS0.5) is 30 cm. D2FW-G D2FW-G

Specifications

J CHARACTERISTICS

Item D2FW-G0j D2FW-G2j Operating speed 1.0 to 500 mm/s Operating frequency Mechanical 120 operations/min max. Electrical 20 operations/min max. Insulation resistance 100 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC) Contact resistance 150 mΩ max. (at 6 VDC, 0.1 A) 100 mΩ max. (at 6 VDC, 1 A) Dielectric strength 600 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of the same polarity 1,500 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between current-carrying metal parts and ground, and between each terminal and non-current-carrying metal parts Vibration resistance Malfunction 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude, 1-ms max. contact opening Shock resistance Durability 1,000 m/s2 max. Malfunction 300 m/s2 max., 1-ms max. contact opening Life expectancy Mechanical 300,000 operations min. Electrical 100,000 operations min. 30,000 operations min. Degree of protection Conforms to IP67. Ambient operating temperature --40°C to 85°C (--40°F to 185°F) with no condensation at low temperatures Ambient operating humidity 95% max. Weight Approx. 10.4 g (SPDT type)

J OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS

Characteristics Part number D2FW-Gj7jM D2FW-Gj8jM OF max. 250 gf 300 gf RF min. 30 gf 60 gf OT min. 1.0 mm (0.04 in) 1.0 mm (0.04 in) MD max. 1.0 mm (0.04 in) 1.0 mm (0.04 in) FP max. 15.5 mm (0.61 in) 19 mm (0.75 in) OP 11.5±2 mm (0.45±0.08 in) 12±2 mm (0.47±0.08 in) TTP 6.5 mm (0.26 in) 8.5 mm (0.33 in)

J RATINGS

Rated voltage D2FW-G0j (micro-load models) D2FW-G2j (general-load models) Resistive load 30 VDC 0.1 A 1 A

J CONTACT FORM

SPDT SPST-NC SPST-NO

COM NO NC COM NC COM NO (Black*) (Blue*) (Red*) (Black*) (Red*) (Black*) (Blue*)

* The color in parentheses indicates the color of the lead wire.

120 D2FW-G D2FW-G

Dimensions

Unit: mm (inch) J LEAF LEVER D2FW-Gj7jM

8 22.8 2 (0.31) 2 t=0.2 stainless-steel lever (0.90) 16±0.15 (0.63±0.01) 5

+0.2 (0.20) 4.2 0 dia. Free 0 4 -0.15 dia. Operating position position (FP) 5 (0.20) (OP) 4 +0.2 dia. D2FW-G 0 13.5 (0.53)

R3.5 300±10 (11.81±0.39) Lead wires 5 COM AVS0.5 (Black) NO AVS0.5 (Blue) NC AVS0.5 (Red) 15.3 (0.60) 23.5 4.7 (0.93) (0.19)

J LONG LEAF LEVER D2FW-Gj8jM

19 8 (0.75) 2 (0.31) 2 t=0.2 stainless-steel lever 16±0.15 5 (0.63±0.01)

Free +0.2 4.20 dia. position 0 Operating(FP) 4 -0.15 dia. position (OP) 5 (0.20) +0.2 D2FW-G 4 0 dia. 13.5 (0.53)

R3.5 300±10 (11.81±0.39) Lead wires 5 COM AVS0.5 (Black) NO AVS0.5 (Blue) NC AVS0.5 (Red) 15.3 (0.60) 23.5 4.7 (0.93) (0.19)

121 D2FW-G D2FW-G

Precautions

Use the Switch within the specified electrical ratings. Using the Switch outside of the rated values will not only shorten its service J OPERATION life but may cause heat generation or fire damage. When turning Make sure that the switching object is perfectly separated from the power ON or OFF, use the rated voltage and current. the actuator when the switch is not operated and the actuator is pressed appropriately by the switching object when the switch is J ENCLOSURE RATINGS operated. The switching object must not move beyond its operational limit position. Do Not Use the Switch Underwater Position the switching object so that its moving direction is the The Switch was tested and found to meet the conditions same as that of the actuator. necessary to meet the following standard. The test checks for water intrusion after immersion for a specified time period. The test does not check for switching operation underwater. J USING THE SWITCH WITH MICRO IEC Publication 529, degree of protection IP67. LOADS Protection Against Chemicals Even when the Switch is used within the appropriate operating range, power surges may shorten its service life. Insert a contact Prevent the Switch from coming into contact with oil or protection circuit as required. chemicals, to avoid damaging (or deterioration of) Switch materials. Micro application loads are indicated by N standard reference values. This value represents the failure rate at a 60% (λ60) J MOUNTING reliability level. (JIS C5003) The equation λ60 = 0.5 x 10--6/operations indicates that a failure Preparation for Mounting rate of 1/2,000,000 operations can be expected at a reliability Turn the power OFF before (1) mounting or removing the Switch, level of 60%. or (2) before performing maintenance or inspection. Failure to do so can cause electrical shock or fire.

Mount the Switch on a flat surface. If it is mounted on an uneven 0.16 mA 16.6 mA 100 mA 30 surface the Switch may bend, causing a malfunction or cracking the housing. 24 Mounting the Switch Operating ) Operating V area of Mount the switch securely, using an M4 screw with a flat washer ( area of general-load e micro-load or spring washer. Tighten the screw to a torque of 1.18 to g models

a models

t D2FW-G2j 1.47 N S m. l D2FW-G0j o

V 12 When mounting the switch, do not apply any external pressure to the actuator in a direction other than the direction of operation. 5 The following diagram shows the mounting hole dimensions. 1 mA

0 Mounting Holes 0.1 1 10 100 1,000 Current (mA) M4 tap

Model D2FW-G0j D2FW-G2j 16 mm Micro application load 5 VDC, 1 mA 5 VDC, 100 mA (0.63 in) 4-dia. hole (depth 2 mm min.)

122 D2FW-G D2FW-G

NOTE: DIMENSIONSSHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters to inches divide by 25.4.

Cat. No. GC SW6 04/01 Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in U.S.A. R Sealed Subminiature Snap Action Switch D2HW

Smallest Sealed Snap-Action Switch in the Industry With a Long Stroke For Reliable ON/OFF Action

H Conforms to IP67 (lead wire type) and IP50 (terminal type) H Case dimensions 22% smaller than conventional models H Extra-long stroke even without levers (OT: 1.4 mm) H All models are lead-free, including lead wire models Ordering Information

J PCB-MOUNTED MODELS

Actuauator Terminanals Coonntact form Part number With posts on right With posts on left Without posts

Pin plungeunger For PCB Straight SPSPDT ------D2HW-A201D Angled D2HW-BR201DR D2HW-BL201DL --- Hinge lever Straight ------D2HW-A211D Angled D2HW-BR211DR D2HW-BL211DL --- Long hinge Straight ------D2HW-A221D lever Angled D2HW-BR221DR D2HW-BL221DL ---

Simulated roller Straight ------D2HW-A231D lever Angled D2HW-BR231DR D2HW-BL231DL ---

J MODELS WITH SOLDER TERMINALS OR LEAD WIRE TERMINALS

Actuauator Terminanals Coonntact form Part number With posts on right With posts on left M3-screw mounting

Pin plungeunger Solder SPDT D2HW-BR201H D2HW-BL201H D2HW-C201H LeadLead wire Downwards SPDT D2HW-BR201M D2HW-BL201M D2HW-C201M SPST-NC D2HW-BR202M D2HW-BL202M D2HW-C202M SPST-NO D2HW-BR203M D2HW-BL203M D2HW-C203M

(This table continues on the next page.) D2HW D2HW

Ordering Information -- continued from previous page

Actuauator Terminanals Coonntact form Part number With posts on right With posts on left M3-screw mounting

Pin plungeunger LeadLead wire Rigghht-sidede SPST-NC D2HW-BR202MR D2HW-BL202MR D2HW-C202MR SPST-NO D2HW-BR203MR D2HW-BL203MR D2HW-C203MR LeLeftft-sidede SPST-NC D2HW-BR202ML D2HW-BL202ML --- SPST-NO D2HW-BR203ML D2HW-BL203ML --- Hinngege lever Solder SPDT D2HW-BR211H D2HW-BL211H D2HW-C211H LeadLead wire Downwards SPDT D2HW-BR211M D2HW-BL211M D2HW-C211M SPST-NC D2HW-BR212M D2HW-BL212M D2HW-C212M SPST-NO D2HW-BR213M D2HW-BL213M D2HW-C213M Rigghht-sidede SPST-NC D2HW-BR212MR D2HW-BL212MR D2HW-C212MR SPST-NO D2HW-BR213MR D2HW-BL213MR D2HW-C213MR LeLeftft-sidede SPST-NC D2HW-BR212ML D2HW-BL212ML --- SPST-NO D2HW-BR213ML D2HW-BL213ML --- LongLong h inngege Solder SPDT D2HW-BR221H D2HW-BL221H D2HW-C221H lever LeadLead wire Downwards SPDT D2HW-BR221M D2HW-BL221M D2HW-C221M SPST-NC D2HW-BR222M D2HW-BL222M D2HW-C222M SPST-NO D2HW-BR223M D2HW-BL223M D2HW-C223M Rigghht-sidede SPST-NC D2HW-BR222MR D2HW-BL222MR D2HW-C222MR SPST-NO D2HW-BR223MR D2HW-BL223MR D2HW-C223MR LeLeftft-sidede SPST-NC D2HW-BR222ML D2HW-BL222ML --- SPST-NO D2HW-BR223ML D2HW-BL223ML --- Simulateded rollller Solder SPDT D2HW-BR231H D2HW-BL231H D2HW-C231H lever LeadLead wire Downwards SPDT D2HW-BR231M D2HW-BL231M D2HW-C231M SPST-NC D2HW-BR232M D2HW-BL232M D2HW-C232M SPST-NO D2HW-BR233M D2HW-BL233M D2HW-C233M Rigghht-sidede SPST-NC D2HW-BR232MR D2HW-BL232MR D2HW-C232MR SPST-NO D2HW-BR233MR D2HW-BL233MR D2HW-C233MR LeLeftft-sidede SPST-NC D2HW-BR232ML D2HW-BL232ML --- SPST-NO D2HW-BR233ML D2HW-BL233ML --- LeaLeaf lever Solder SPDT D2HW-BR261H D2HW-BL261H D2HW-C261H LeadLead wire Downwards SPDT D2HW-BR261M D2HW-BL261M D2HW-C261M SPST-NC D2HW-BR262M D2HW-BL262M D2HW-C262M SPST-NO D2HW-BR263M D2HW-BL263M D2HW-C263M Rigghht-sidede SPST-NC D2HW-BR262MR D2HW-BL262MR D2HW-C262MR SPST-NO D2HW-BR263MR D2HW-BL263MR D2HW-C263MR LeLeftft-sidede SPST-NC D2HW-BR262ML D2HW-BL262ML --- SPST-NO D2HW-BR263ML D2HW-BL263ML --- Simulateded leaeaf Solder SPDT D2HW-BR271H D2HW-BL271H D2HW-C271H lever LeadLead wire Downwards SPDT D2HW-BR271M D2HW-BL271M D2HW-C271M SPST-NC D2HW-BR272M D2HW-BL272M D2HW-C272M SPST-NO D2HW-BR273M D2HW-BL273M D2HW-C273M Rigghht-sidede SPST-NC D2HW-BR272MR D2HW-BL272MR D2HW-C272MR SPST-NO D2HW-BR273MR D2HW-BL273MR D2HW-C273MR LeLeftft-sidede SPST-NC D2HW-BR272ML D2HW-BL272ML --- SPST-NO D2HW-BR273ML D2HW-BL273ML ---

(This table continues on the next page.)

124 D2HW D2HW

Ordering Information -- continued from previous page

Actuauator Terminanals Coonntact form Part number With posts on right With posts on left M3-screw mounting

LongLong leeaaf lever LeadLead wire Downwards SPDT D2HW-BR281M D2HW-BL281M D2HW-C281M SPST-NC D2HW-BR282M D2HW-BL282M D2HW-C282M SPST-NO D2HW-BR283M D2HW-BL283M D2HW-C283M Rigghht-sidede SPST-NC ------D2HW-C282MR SPST-NO ------D2HW-C283MR

Note: The length of standard lead wires (AWG20) for lead wire models is 30 cm (12 in). Specifications

J CHARACTERISTICS

Item Specification Operating speed 1 mm to 500 mm/s (for pin plunger models) Operating frequency 30 operations/min Insulation resistance 100 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC) Contact resistance 100 mΩ max. (lead wire models: 150 mΩ max.) (initial value) Dielectric strength 600 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of the same polarity 1,500 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between current-carrying metal parts and ground, and between each terminal and non-current-carrying metal parts Vibration resistance Malfunction: 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude Shock resistance Malfunction: 300 m/s2 max. Life expectancy Mechanical:1,000,000 operations min. (30 operations/min) Electrical: 100,000 operations min. (20 operations/min) Degree of protection IP67 for lead wire type,IP50 for terminal type Degree of protection against electric Class I shock Proof tracking index (PTI) 175 Switch category A (IEC 335) Ambient operating temperature --40 to 85°C (with no icing) Ambient operating humidity 95% max. (in temperature range 5 to 35°C) Weight Approx. 0.7 g (for pin plunger models with terminals)

J OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS Part number D2HW-¨20¨¨ D2HW-¨21¨¨ D2HW-¨22¨¨ Characteristic Models without Models with Models without Models with Models without Models with posts posts and posts posts and posts posts and M3-mounting M3-mounting M3-mounting models models models OF max. 76 gf 76 gf 51 gf RF min. 10 gf 7 gf 3 gf MD max. 0.25 mm 0.5 mm 0.8 mm OT ref. 1.4 mm 1.6 mm 2.5 mm FP max. 11.2 mm 7.2 mm 12.8 mm 8.8 mm 15.5 mm 11.5 mm OP 10.4±0.2 mm 6.4±0.2 mm 11.5±0.5 mm 7.5±0.5 mm 13.3±0.8 mm 9.3±0.8 mm TTP max. 9.1 mm 5.1 mm 10 mm 6 mm 11 mm 7 mm

125 D2HW D2HW

Operating Characteristics -- continued from previous page

Part number D2HW-¨23¨¨ D2HW-¨26¨¨ D2HW-¨27¨¨ D2HW-¨28¨¨ Characteristic Models without Models with Models with posts and Models with posts and Models with posts and posts posts and M3-mounting models M3-mounting models M3-mounting models M3-mounting models OF max. 66 gf 183 gf 183 gf 92 gf RF min. 5 gf 20 gf 20 gf 15 gf MD max. 0.5 mm 0.2 mm 0.5 mm 0.7 mm OT ref. 1.9 mm 1.8 mm 2.0 mm 2.8 mm FP max. 16.5 mm 12.5 mm 9.3 mm 12.5 mm 19 mm OP 15.2±0.5 mm 11.2±0.5 mm 7.4±0.5 mm 10.8±0.5 mm 15.4±1.5 mm TTP max. 13.5 mm 9.5 mm 5.8 mm 8.9 mm 12.8 mm

J RATINGS Rated voltage (V) Resistive load 12 VDC 2 A 24 VDC 1 A 42 VDC 0.5 A

Minimum applicable load (see note) 1 mA at 5 VDC

Note: Minimum applicable loads are indicated by N standard reference values. This value represents the failure rate at a 60% (λ60) reliability level (JIS C5003). The equation λ60=0.5 x 10--6/operations indicates that a failure rate of 1/2,000,000 operations can be expected at a reliability level of 60%. J CONTACTFORM SPDT Contacts SPST-NC Contacts SPST-NO Contacts (Lead Wire Models) (Lead Wire Models)

COM NC COM NO NC COM NO (Black) (Red) (Black) (Blue) (Red) (Black) (Blue)

Note: Lead wire colors are indicated in parentheses.

126 D2HW D2HW

Dimensions

Unit: mm (inch) J PIN PLUNGER D2HW-¨20¨¨ 4 1.7 dia. (0.16) (0.07)

7 (0.28)

5.3 (0.21)

J HINGE LEVER D2HW-¨21¨¨ t = 0.3 stainless steel lever 3.4 (0.13) 13 1.15 (0.51) (0.05) 0.4 (0.02)

7 (0.28)

J LONG HINGE LEVER D2HW-¨22¨¨

t = 0.3 stainless 3.4 steel lever (0.13) 20 1.15 (0.79) (0.05) 0.4 (0.02)

7 (0.28)

J SIMULATED ROLLER LEVER D2HW-¨23¨¨ t = 0.3 stainless steel lever 3.4 16 (0.13) (0.63) 1.15 (0.05) 0.4 (0.02)

7 (0.28)

127 D2HW D2HW

Unit: mm (inch)

J LEAFLEVER D2HW-¨¨26¨¨ t = 0.3 stainless steel lever 2.65 8±0.1 (0.10) (0.31±0.004) 14 3.4 (0.55) 1.7 (0.13) (0.07)

6.5 (0.26) 3 (0.12)

J SIMULATED LEAFLEVER D2HW-¨¨27¨¨¨¨ t = 0.3 stainless steel lever 3.4 16 (0.13) (0.63) 8±0.1 1.7 (0.31±0.004) (0.07) 2.65 (0.10)

6.5 (0.26) 3 (0.12)

J LONG LEAFLEVER D2HW-¨¨28¨¨¨

t = 0.2 stainless steel lever 20.85±0.6 (0.82±0.02) 18.5 (0.73) 13±0.1 2.65 (0.51±0.004) 3.3±0.15 (0.10) (0.13±0.006)

3 (0.12) 6 (0.24) 12 0 (0.47) 3--0.1 dia. +0.13 3.1 --0.03 (0.12 +0.005 ) --0.001 COM AVSS 0.5 (Black) 1.5 NO AVSS 0.5 (Blue) 300±10 (0.06) NC AVSS 0.5 (Red) (11.81±0.39)

5 (0.20) +0 +0 1.5 --0.1 1.5 --0.1 13.3 (0.06 +0 ) 5.3 (0.06 +0 ) --0.004 (0.52) --0.004 (0.21)

Note: Dimensions not indicated in the above diagrams have a tolerance of ±0.2 mm.

128 D2HW D2HW

J MOUNTING STRUCTURE AND REFERENCE POSITIONS The reference positions used for FP, OP, and TTP values are as shown below for each type of mounting.

D2HW-Aj D2HW-Bj D2HW-Cj Models without Posts Models with Posts M3-screw Mounting Models

4 2.65 3.3±0.15 dia. 1.7 dia. (0.16) 8±0.1 (0.10) (0.13±0.006) (0.07) 1.7 dia. (0.31±0.004) 13±0.1 6.5 6 (0.07) (0.51±0.004) (0.26) 2.6±0.06 (0.24) (0.10±0.002)

7 (0.28)

Reference Reference position +0.13 Reference position 3.1 6.5 -0.03 position 13.3 5.3 3 (0.12+0.005 ) (0.26) -0.001 5.3 (0.52) (0.21) (0.12) 13.3 +0 5.3 18.5 +0 (0.21) (0.52) 5 -0.2 (0.21) (0.73) 1.5 -0.1 +0 (0.20 ) +0 -0.004 (0.06 ) +0 -0.004 1.5 -0.1 (0.06+0 ) Mounting Hole Dimensions Mounting Hole Dimensions -0.004 (Reference) (Reference) +0.1 3 0 dia. +0.1 (0.12 +0.004 ) 2.4 -0 0 +0.004 depth: 1.5 mm (0.06 in) min. (0.09 -0 ) 2.6 dia. depth: 5 mm (0.10) M3 tap (0.20 in) min.

+0.1 2.4 -0 (0.09 +0.004 ) 13±0.1 8±0.1 -0 (0.51±0.004) (0.31±0.004)

J TERMINALS

Straight PCB Terminals Angled PCB Terminals Solder Terminals

3.4 2.5 1.8 (0.13) (0.10) 6 (0.07) (0.24)

Three-0.6 1.2 Three-0.6 0.5 0.5 0.5 5.08 5.08 (0.05) Three-2 5.08 5.08 (0.02) (0.02) 2.85 (0.02) (0.20) (0.20) (0.20) (0.20) (0.11) 4.38 4.38 PCB Cutout Dimensions PCB Cutout Dimensions (0.17) (0.17) (Reference) (Reference) +0.1 2.4 -0 +0.1 8±0.1 Three, 1 dia. hole (0.09 +0.004 ) 0 -0 (0.31±0.004) depth: 5 mm 2.6 dia. (0.20 in) min. (0.10) +0.1 2.4 -0 +0.004 (0.09 -0 ) 5.08±0.1 5.08±0.1 6±0.1 Lead Wires Downwards (0.20±0.004) (0.20±0.004) (0.24±0.004) Three, 1 +0.1dia. hole 0 5.08±0.1 5.08±0.1 (0.20±0.004) (0.20±0.004) 12 (0.47) Lead Wires on Left-side Lead Wires on Right-side

COM AWG20 300±10 (Black) 12 12 (11.81±0.39) (0.47) NO AWG20 (Blue) (0.47) NC AWG20 (Red)

5 5 (0.20) (0.20) 5 (0.20) 300±10 13.3 13.3 300±10 (11.81±0.39) (0.52) (0.52) (11.81±0.39)

129 D2HW D2HW

Precautions

J CAUTIONS J CORRECT USE Degree of Protection Mounting Do not use this product in water. Although lead wire models Always turn OFF the power supply before mounting or satisfy the test conditions for the standard given below, this test is dismounting, wiring, or performing maintenance inspections. to check the ingress of water into the switch enclosure after Failure to do so may result in electric shock or burning. submerging the Switch in water for a given time. Satisfying this test condition does not mean that the Switch can be used in Mount M3-screw mounted models securely, using M3 mounting water. screws with plain or spring washers. Tighten the screws to a torque of 0.29 N⋅m max. Tightening the screws to a torque Lead wire models satisfy IEC Publication 529, degree of exceeding this may result in deterioration of the sealing or protection IP67. Refer to the following illustration for the test damage to the product. method. For models with posts, secure the posts by thermal caulking or by pressing into an attached device. When pressed into an Water attached device, provide guides on the opposite ends of the Left for 30 min 1m min. posts to ensure that they do not fall out or rattle. Tested object Mount the Switch onto a flat surface. Mounting on an uneven surface may cause deformation of the Switch, resulting in faulty Protection Against Chemicals operation or damage. Prevent the Switch from coming into contact with oil and Operating Body chemicals. Otherwise, damage to or deterioration of Switch Use an operating body with low frictional resistance and of a materials may result. shape that will not interfere with the sealing rubber, otherwise the Terminal Connection plunger may be damaged or the sealing may deteriorate. To solder the lead wire to the terminal, first entwine the Handling conducting part around the terminal hole. Solder using a Do not handle the Switch in a way that may cause damage to the soldering iron rated at 30 W max. within 3 s. sealing rubber. Applying a soldering iron for too long a time or using one that is When handling the switch, ensure that uneven pressure or, as rated at more than 30 W may degrade the Switch characteristics. shown below, pressure in a direction other than the operating When soldering PCB terminals to the PCB, ensure that the direction is not applied to the actuator, otherwise the actuator or surface area of the flux or the solder does not exceed that of the switch may be damaged, or the service life my be reduced. PCB. Side--actuated (cam) Operation When using a cam to operate the switch, factors such as the operating speed, operating frequency, push--button indentation, and material and shape of the cam will affect the durability of the switch. Confirm performance specifications under actual operation conditions before using the switch in applications. Wiring Lead Wire Models When wiring lead wire models, ensure that there is no tension or that there are no sharp bends near the parts where the wire is drawn out. Otherwise, damage to the Switch or deterioration in the sealing may result. Using the Switch with Micro Loads Even when the Switch is used within the appropriate operating range, power surges may shorten its service life.Insert a contact protection circuit as required.

130 D2HW D2HW

NOTE: DIMENSIONSSHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters to inches divide by 25.4.

Cat. No. GC SW6 04/01 Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in U.S.A. Snap Action Switch D2JW

Immersion-Proof Subminiature Snap Action Switch I Ultra-small and highly sealed I Water-tight housing conforming to IP67 (lead wire types) and IP50 (terminal types) I Wide range of operating temperature from -40° to 85°C I Gold crossbar contact and coil spring offer

long life expectancy and high reliability DVE

Ordering Information

Part number Solder Terminal Molded Lead Wire Terminal Actuator

Pin plunger D2JW-011 D2JW-011-MD

Short hinge lever D2JW-01K1A1 D2JW-01K1A1-MD

Hinge lever D2JW-01K11 D2JW-01K11-MD

Simulated roller lever D2JW-01K31 D2JW-01K31-MD

Hinge roller lever D2JW-01K21 D2JW-01K21-MD

Note: The length of the standard molded lead wire (AWG18) is 30 cm (12 in).

131 D2JW D2JW

Specifications

I CHARACTERISTICS

Operating speed (see note 1) 1 mm to 250 mm/second (0.04 to 9.84 in/second) Operating frequency Mechanical 240 operations per minute (see note 1) Electrical 60 operations per minute Contact resistance 100 mΩ max. (Molded lead type: 140 mΩ min.) Insulation resistance 100 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC) Dielectric strength 600 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between terminals of same polarity 1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between current-carrying metal part and ground, and between each terminal and noncurrent-carrying metal part Vibration Malfunction durability 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude Shock Mechanical durability 1,000 m/s2 min. (approx. 100 g min.) Malfunction durability 200 m/s2 min. (approx. 20 g min.) Ambient temperature -40° to 85°C (with no icing) Humidity 35% to 98% RH Degree of protection IEC IP67 (lead wire type) and IP50 (terminal type) Service life Mechanical 1,000,000 operations min. Electrical 100,000 operations min. Weight Approx. 7 g (molded lead terminal type, pin plunger type)

Note: 1. The values are for pin plunger type. 2. Data shown are of initial value.

I OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS

Part number Characteristics D2JW-011 D2JW-01K1A1 D2JW-01K11 D2JW-01K31 D2JW-01K21 OF max. 250 g 117 g 82 g 97 g 100 g RF min. 100 g 23 g 16 g 20 g 20 g PT max. 0.6 mm (0.02 in) 5.4 mm (0.21 in) 6.4 mm (0.25 in) 5.5 mm (0.22 in) 5.2 mm (0.20 in) OT min. 0.3 mm (0.01 in) 0.7 mm (0.03 in) 1.4 mm (0.06 in) 1.1 mm (0.04 in) 1.1 mm (0.04 in) MD max. 0.1 mm (0.004 in) 0.5 mm (0.02 in) 0.7 mm (0.03 in) 0.6 mm (0.02 in) 0.5 mm (0.02 in) OP 8.1 ± 0.3 mm 8.4 ± 0.8 mm 8.4 ± 0.8 mm 10.3 ± 0.8 mm 14.6 ± 0.8 mm (0.32 ± 0.01 in) (0.33 ± 0.03 in) (0.33 ± 0.03 in) (0.41 ± 0.03 in) (0.57 ± 0.03 in)

I RATINGS

Electrical rating 0.1 A, 30 VDC (resistive load)

I CONSTRUCTION

Rubber seal (silicone rubber)

Cover (polycarbonate resin)

Soldered

Epoxy resin

132 D2JW D2JW

I CONTACT FORM

Dimensions Unit: mm (inch) I PIN PLUNGER 1.6 dia. (0.06) D2JW-011 PT

2.8 OP (0.11) 12.3 9.4 (0.48) (0.37) 1.3 (0.05)

+0.05 2.35 -0.025 dia. (0.09 +0.002 dia.) -0.001 0.4 +0.05 (0.02) 2.35 -0.025 dia. +0.05 1 2.5 -0.025 dia. (0.09 +0.002 dia.) +0.002 (0.04) -0.001 (0.10 -0.001 dia.) ± 2 5.3 0.1 ± (0.08) (0.21 0.004)

3.95 3.95 (0.16) (0.16) 3.95 12.7 (0.16) 4.8±0.05 (0.50) (0.19±0.002)

I SHORT HINGE LEVER 1.8 7.95 D2JW-01K1A1 (0.07) (0.31) PT 0.3t stainless steel 3 spring lever (0.12)

OP 2.8 6.15 (0.11) (0.24) 9.4 (0.37) 1.3 12.3 +0.05 (0.05) (0.48) 2.35 -0.025 dia. +0.002 (0.09 -0.001 dia.)

+0.05 2.5 -0.025 dia. +0.05 0.4 +0.002 2.35 -0.025 dia. (0.10 -0.001 dia.) +0.002 (0.02) (0.09 -0.001 dia.) 5.3±0.1 1 (0.21±0.004) (0.04) 2 3.95 (0.08) (0.16) 3.95 (0.16)

4.8±0.05 12.7 3.95 (0.19±0.002) (0.50) (0.16)

Note: Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ± 0.4 mm applies to all dimensions.

133 D2JW D2JW

Unit: mm (inch) I HINGE LEVER 1.8 (0.07) 7.95 D2JW-01K11 (0.31) PT 0.3t stainless steel 3 spring lever (0.12)

OP 6.15 2.8 12.3 (0.24) (0.11) 9.4 (0.48) (0.37) 1.3 +0.05 (0.05) 2.35 -0.025 dia. +0.002 (0.09 -0.001 dia.)

+0.05 2.5 -0.025 dia. 0.4 +0.002 +0.05 (0.10 -0.001 dia.) 2.35 -0.025 dia. (0.02) +0.002 (0.09 -0.001 dia.) 1 ± 3.95 5.3 0.1 (0.04) ± (0.16) 2 (0.21 0.004) (0.08) 3.95 (0.16) 4.8±0.05 3.95 ± (0.19 0.002) 12.7 (0.16) (0.50)

I SIMULATED ROLLER LEVER

D2JW-01K31 5.35 (0.21) 1.8 7.95 1.3 PT (0.07) (0.31) (0.05) 1.9 3 0.3t stainless steel (0.07) (0.12) spring lever

6.15 2.8 (0.24) (0.11) 9.4 (0.37) 12.3 1.3 (0.48) (0.05) +0.05 2.35 -0.025 dia. +0.002 (0.09 -0.001 dia.)

+0.05 2.5 -0.025 dia. +0.05 0.4 +0.002 2.35 -0.025 dia. (0.02) (0.10 -0.001 dia.) +0.002 (0.09 -0.001 dia.) 1 5.3±0.1 3.95 (0.04) 2 (0.21±0.004) (0.16) (0.08) 3.95 4.8±0.05 (0.16) (0.19±0.002) 12.7 3.95 (0.50) (0.16)

134 D2JW D2JW

I HINGE ROLLER LEVER D2JW-01K21 1.8 7.95 PT (0.07) (0.31)

4.8 dia. x 2.2 resin roller

6.15 2.8 (0.24) 9.4 (0.11) (0.37) 1.3 12.3 (0.05) (0.48) +0.05 2.35 -0.025 dia. +0.002 (0.09 -0.001 dia.) 0.4 +0.05 (0.02) +0.05 2.35 -0.025 dia. 2.5 -0.025 dia. +0.002 +0.002 (0.09 -0.001 dia.) (0.10 -0.001 dia.) 5.3±0.1 1 (0.21±0.004) 3.95 (0.04) (0.16) 2 (0.08) 3.95 4.8±0.05 3.95 (0.16) 12.7 (0.19±0.002) (0.16) (0.50)

I MOLDED LEAD WIRE D2JW-01III-MD 1.6 (0.06) +0.05 PT 2.35 -0.025 dia. +0.002 (0.09 -0.001 dia.)

15.3 (0.60) +0.05 2.35 -0.025 dia. 8.7 +0.002 (0.09 -0.001 dia.) (0.34)

+0.05 2.5 -0.025 dia. +0.002 (0.10 -0.001 dia.)

4.8±0.05 5±2 5.3±0.1 (0.19±0.002) (0.20±0.08) (0.21±0.004)

12.7 (0.50) 3.95 (0.16)

Note: 1. Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ± 0.4 mm applies to all dimensions. 2. Letters and numbers are inserted in blank boxes according to the type actuator. 135 D2JW D2JW

Precautions I MOUNTING I DEGREE OF PROTECTION

Use M2.3 screws in combination with plane washers or spring The D2JW satisfies the following test condition specified by the washers to securely mount the switch. Tighten the screws at a IEC Publication 529 (Degree of Protection by Enclosure): torque of 2 to 3 kg-cm. Degree of protection: IP67 Test method: See the figure below.

Because the switch uses polycarbonate resin as material for its component parts, contact OMRON if the switch material is likely to deteriorate due to adherence of oil or chemicals to the switch housing. Leave the test piece in water for 30 minutes with the top of the test piece submerged 15 cm or more below the water level and the bottom of the test piece submerged 1 m or more below the I SOLDERING water level. This test is to check the ingress of water into the switch To solder the lead to the terminal, apply a soldering iron rated enclosure after submerging the switch in water for a given at 30 W max. (temperature of soldering iron: 280°C max. time. Note that even if this test condition is met, the switch within three seconds. cannot be used in water. Note that applying a soldering iron too long or using one that is rated at more than 30 W may degrade the switch characteristics.

I OPERATION

Make sure that the operating body pushes the switch actuator with an adequate force when the switch is to be operated, and that it does not touch the actuator when the switch is released.

Install the pin plunger switch so that the operating force is applied in alignment with the stroke of the actuator. Do not apply excessive force to the actuator; otherwise, the switch may be damaged.

136 D2JW D2JW

NOTE: DIMENSIONS ARE SHOWN IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters to inches divide by 25.4.

Cat. No. GC SW6 04/01 Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in the U.S.A. Sealed Reed Basic Switch D2RW

Extended life logic level switching with watertight circuitry

• Suitable for micro loads to 1 million operations minimum. • Internal Reed Switch sealed to IP67 ensures stable operation. • Extended humidity operating range, up to 95% RH. • Industry standard mounting for miniature basic switches. • Available with internally fitted levers.

Ordering Information

I Model Number Legend D2RW-01@ 12 1. Ratings 01: 0.25 A at 100 VDC; 100 µA at 5 VDC 2. Actuator None: Pin plunger L1: Hinge lever L2: Hinge roller lever L3: Simulated roller lever I List of Models

Actuator Model Pin plunger D2RW-01 Hinge lever D2RW-01L1

Hinge roller lever D2RW-01L2

Simulated roller lever D2RW-01L3

Specifications

I Ratings

Switching voltage 100 VDC max. Switching current 0.25 A max. Contact capacity 10 W max.

Note: The values apply under the following test conditions: Ambient temperature: 20±2°C Ambient humidity: 65±5% Operating frequency: 30 operations/min.

142 Sealed Reed Basic Switch D2RW I Characteristics

Operating speed 0.1 mm to 1 m/s (pin plunger models) Operating frequency Mechanical: 150 operations/min max. Electrical: 30 operations/min max. Insulation resistance 100 MΩ min. (at 100 VDC) between terminals of same polarity 100 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC) between current-carrying metal parts and ground Contact resistance (initial value) 300 mΩ max. Dielectric strength (see note 2) 200 VDC for 1 min between terminals of the same polarity 500 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between current-carrying metal parts and ground Vibration resistance (see note 3) Malfunction: 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude Shock resistance (see note 3) Destruction: 500 m/s2 {approx. 50 G} max. Malfunction: 200 m/s2 {approx. 20 G} max. Durability (see note 4) Mechanical: 1,000,000 operations min. (30 operations/min.) Electrical: 1,000,000 operations min. (15 operations/min.) (100 mA at 24 VDC) Degree of protection IEC IP67 (internal Reed Switch only; case sealed to IP40) Degree of protection against electric shock Class I Proof tracking index (PTI) 175 Ambient operating temperature −10°C to 60°C (at ambient humidity of 60% max.) (with no icing or condensation) Ambient operating humidity 95% max. (for 5°C to 35°C) Weight Approx. 20 g (pin plunger models)

Note: 1. The data given above are initial values. 2. The dielectric strength values shown in the are for models with a separator. 3. For the pin plunger models, the above values apply for use at both the free position and total travel position. For the lever models, they apply at the total travel position. Contact opening or closing time is within 1 ms. 4. For testing conditions, contact your OMRON sales representative. I Contact Specifications Internally mounted reed switch

Minimum applicable load 100 µA at 5 VDC

I Contact Form

SPST-NO

Note: Lead wire colors are indicated in parentheses.

Dimensions

Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated. I Terminals I Mounting Holes

Molded Lead Wires

Sealed Reed Basic Switch D2RW 143 I Dimensions and Operating Characteristics Note: 1. All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated. 2. Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ±0.4 mm applies to all dimensions. 3. The operating characteristics are for operation in the A direction ( ).

. Pin Plunger Models OF max. 1.5 N {153 gf} D2RW-01 RF min. 0.1 N {10 gf} PT max. 1.6 mm OT min. 0.6 mm MD max. 0.8 mm OP 14.7±0.6 mm

. Hinge Lever Models OF max. 0.75 N {76 gf} D2RW-01L1 RF min. 0.05 N {5 gf} PT max. 4.0 mm OT min. 1.0 mm MD max. 1.6 mm OP 15.2±1.5 mm

. Hinge Roller Lever Models OF max. 0.75 N {76 gf} D2RW-01L2 RF min. 0.05 N {5 gf} PT max. 4.0 mm OT min. 1.0 mm MD max. 1.6 mm OP 20.7±1.5 mm

. Simulated Roller Lever Models OF max. 0.75 N {76 gf} D2RW-01L3 RF min. 0.05 N {5 gf} PT max. 4.0 mm OT min. 1.0 mm MD max. 1.6 mm OP 18.7±1.5 mm

144 Sealed Reed Basic Switch D2RW Precautions

I Cautions I Correct Use

Degree of Protection Mounting Do not use this product immersed in water. Although this model sat- Use M3 mounting screws with plane washers or spring washers to isfies the test conditions for the standard given below, this test is to securely mount the Switch. Tighten the screws to a torque of 0.39 to check the ingress of water into the switch enclosure after submerging 0.59 N·m {4 to 6 kgf·cm}. the Switch in water for a given time. Satisfying this test condition Mount the Switch onto a flat surface. Mounting on an uneven surface does not mean that the Switch can be used immersed in water. may cause deformation of the Switch, resulting in faulty operation or IEC 60529: 2001 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures damage. (IP Code) Code: IP67 (No water intrusion after immersion for 30 minutes.) Handling Prevent the Switch from long-term exposure to water spray and/or When handling the Switch, ensure that uneven pressure or, as having water adhere to the Switch surface during sudden tempera- shown in the following diagram, pressure in a direction other than the ture changes, otherwise water may intrude into the interior of the operating direction is not applied to the Actuator, otherwise the Actu- Switch due to suction. ator or Switch may be damaged, or durability may be decreased. Prevent the Switch from coming into contact with oil and chemicals. Otherwise, damage to or deterioration of Switch materials may result. The environment-resistant performance of the switch differs depending on operating loads, ambient atmospheres, and installation conditions, etc. Please perform an operating test of the switch in advance under actual usage conditions. Operating Stroke Setting Handling Install the Switch so that the operating body matches the movement direction of the actuator. Do not drop the Switch, as the internal mechanism of the Switch may be damaged and, as a result, the characteristics of the Switch may Set the operating stroke so that the actuator is completely disen- be degraded. gaged when the switch is in the free position (FP), and is pushed to a point between 60% and 90% of the OT distance after the switch is Effect of External vibrations operated. Note that the application of 1 kHz or higher vibration to the Switch Avoid shock operation to the Switch, as this may result in a degrada- may cause switching failure due to resonance frequencies. tion in the durability of the switch. Effect of External Magnetic Field Do not install two or more Switches in close proximity. Doing so may result in failure due to interference by leaked magnetic fields. When installing several switches, maintain a distance of at least 8 mm between units. When mounting on a steel plate, maintain a distance of at least 2 mm between Switches as failure to do so may lead to changes in operating characteristics. Avoid installing the Switch where there are strong magnetic forces, as these may cause failures in operation. Screws used to mount the Switch should be made of brass or stainless steel (SUS304). Avoid using steel screws. Storage Environment Make sure that the location is free of corrosive gas, dust with no high temperature or humidity, or rapid temperature change. It is recommended that a switch be inspected before use if it is stored for three months or more. Effect of Contained Material The Switch uses a corrosion inhibitor inside the unit. Before using, check the effect of outgassing.

Sealed Reed Basic Switch D2RW 145 Certain Terms and Conditions of Sale

1. Offer; Acceptance. These terms and conditions (these "Terms") are deemed 12. Warranties. (a) Exclusive Warranty. Seller's exclusive warranty is that the part of all catalogs, manuals or other documents, whether electronic or in writ- Goods will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of ing, relating to the sale of goods or services (collectively, the "Goods") by twelve months from the date of sale by Seller (or such other period expressed Omron Electronic Components LLC and its subsidiary companies ("Seller"). in writing by Seller). Seller disclaims all other warranties, express or implied. Seller hereby objects to any terms or conditions proposed in Buyer's purchase (b) Limitations. SELLER MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, order or other documents which are inconsistent with, or in addition to, these EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ABOUT NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABIL- Terms. Please contact your Omron representative to confirm any additional ITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE GOODS. terms for sales from your Omron company. BUYER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT IT ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE 2. Prices. All prices stated are current, subject to change without notice by GOODS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR Seller. Buyer agrees to pay the price in effect at time of shipment. INTENDED USE. Seller further disclaims all warranties and responsibility of 3. Discounts. Cash discounts, if any, will apply only on the net amount of any type for claims or expenses based on infringement by the Goods or other- invoices sent to Buyer after deducting transportation charges, taxes and wise of any intellectual property right. (c) Buyer Remedy. Seller's sole obliga- duties, and will be allowed only if (i) the invoice is paid according to Seller's tion hereunder shall be to replace (in the form originally shipped with Buyer payment terms and (ii) Buyer has no past due amounts owing to Seller. responsible for labor charges for removal or replacement thereof) the non- 4. Orders. Seller will accept no order less than $200 net billing. complying Good or, at Seller's election, to repay or credit Buyer an amount 5. Governmental Approvals. Buyer shall be responsible for, and shall bear all equal to the purchase price of the Good; provided that in no event shall Seller costs involved in, obtaining any government approvals required for the impor- be responsible for warranty, repair, indemnity or any other claims or expenses tation or sale of the Goods. regarding the Goods unless Seller's analysis confirms that the Goods were 6. Taxes. All taxes, duties and other governmental charges (other than general properly handled, stored, installed and maintained and not subject to contami- real property and income taxes), including any interest or penalties thereon, nation, abuse, misuse or inappropriate modification. Return of any goods by imposed directly or indirectly on Seller or required to be collected directly or Buyer must be approved in writing by Seller before shipment. Seller shall not indirectly by Seller for the manufacture, production, sale, delivery, importation, be liable for the suitability or unsuitability or the results from the use of Goods consumption or use of the Goods sold hereunder (including customs duties in combination with any electrical or electronic components, circuits, system and sales, excise, use, turnover and license taxes) shall be charged to and assemblies or any other materials or substances or environments. Any remitted by Buyer to Seller. advice, recommendations or information given orally or in writing, are not to be 7. Financial. If the financial position of Buyer at any time becomes unsatisfactory construed as an amendment or addition to the above warranty. to Seller, Seller reserves the right to stop shipments or require satisfactory 13. Damage Limits; Etc. SELLER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL, INDI- security or payment in advance. If Buyer fails to make payment or otherwise RECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, LOSS OF PROFITS OR PRODUC- comply with these Terms or any related agreement, Seller may (without liability TION OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE and in addition to other remedies) cancel any unshipped portion of Goods sold GOODS, WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED IN CONTRACT, WARRANTY, hereunder and stop any Goods in transit until Buyer pays all amounts, includ- NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY. Further, in no event shall liability of ing amounts payable hereunder, whether or not then due, which are owing to it Seller exceed the individual price of the Good on which liability is asserted. by Buyer. Buyer shall in any event remain liable for all unpaid accounts. 14. Indemnities. Buyer shall indemnify and hold harmless Seller, its affiliates and 8. Cancellation; Etc. Orders are not subject to rescheduling or cancellation its employees from and against all liabilities, losses, claims, costs and unless Buyer indemnifies Seller fully against all costs or expenses arising in expenses (including attorney's fees and expenses) related to any claim, inves- connection therewith. tigation, litigation or proceeding (whether or not Seller is a party) which arises 9. Force Majeure. Seller shall not be liable for any delay or failure in delivery or is alleged to arise from Buyer's acts or omissions under these Terms or in resulting from causes beyond its control, including earthquakes, fires, floods, any way with respect to the Goods. Without limiting the foregoing, Buyer (at strikes or other labor disputes, shortage of labor or materials, accidents to its own expense) shall indemnify and hold harmless Seller and defend or settle machinery, acts of sabotage, riots, delay in or lack of transportation or the any action brought against Seller to the extent that it is based on a claim that requirements of any government authority. any Good made to Buyer specifications infringed intellectual property rights of 10. Shipping; Delivery. Unless otherwise expressly agreed in writing by Seller: another party. a. Shipments shall be by a carrier selected by Seller; 15. Property; Confidentiality. The intellectual property embodied in the Goods is b. Such carrier shall act as the agent of Buyer and delivery to such carrier the exclusive property of Seller and its affiliates and Buyer shall not attempt to shall constitute delivery to Buyer; duplicate it in any way without the written permission of Seller. Notwithstand- c. All sales and shipments of Goods shall be FOB shipping point (unless oth- ing any charges to Buyer for engineering or tooling, all engineering and tooling erwise stated in writing by Seller), at which point title to and all risk of loss of shall remain the exclusive property of Seller. All information and materials the Goods shall pass from Seller to Buyer, provided that Seller shall retain a supplied by Seller to Buyer relating to the Goods are confidential and propri- security interest in the Goods until the full purchase price is paid by Buyer; etary, and Buyer shall limit distribution thereof to its trusted employees and d. Delivery and shipping dates are estimates only. strictly prevent disclosure to any third party. e. Seller will package Goods as it deems proper for protection against normal 16. Miscellaneous. (a) Waiver. No failure or delay by Seller in exercising any right handling and extra charges apply to special conditions. and no course of dealing between Buyer and Seller shall operate as a waiver 11. Claims. Any claim by Buyer against Seller for shortage or damage to the of rights by Seller. (b) Assignment. Buyer may not assign its rights hereunder Goods occurring before delivery to the carrier must be presented in writing to without Seller's written consent. (c) Amendment. These Terms constitute the Seller within 30 days of receipt of shipment and include the original transporta- entire agreement between Buyer and Seller relating to the Goods, and no pro- tion bill signed by the carrier noting that the carrier received the Goods from vision may be changed or waived unless in writing signed by the parties. Seller in the condition claimed. (d) Severability. If any provision hereof is rendered ineffective or invalid, such provision shall not invalidate any other provision. (e) Setoff. Buyer shall have no right to set off any amounts against the amount owing in respect of this invoice. (f) As used herein, "including" means "including without limitation".

Certain Precautions on Specifications and Use

1. Suitability of Use. Seller shall not be responsible for conformity with any stan- 2. Programmable Products. Seller shall not be responsible for the user's pro dards, codes or regulations which apply to the combination of the Good in the gramming of a programmable Good, or any consequence thereof. Buyer's application or use of the Good. At Buyer's request, Seller will provide 3. Performance Data. Performance data given in this catalog is provided as a applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty of use which apply to the Good. This information by itself is not sufficient for a It may represent the result of Seller's test conditions, and the user must corre complete determination of the suitability of the Good in combination with the late it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the end product, machine, system, or other application or use. The following are Seller's Warranty and Limitations of Liability. some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given. 4. Change in Specifications. Product specifications and accessories may be This is not intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of this Good, changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons. It is our prac nor is it intended to imply that the uses listed may be suitable for this Good: tice to change part numbers when published ratings or features are changed (i) Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical or when significant construction changes are made. However, some specifica interference, or conditions or uses not described in this document. tions of the Good may be changed without any notice. When in doubt, specia (ii) Energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation part numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for you systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, vehicles, safety application. Please consult with your Seller's representative at any time to con equipment, and installations subject to separate industry or government firm actual specifications of purchased Good. regulations. 5. Errors and Omissions. The information in this catalog has been carefully (iii) Systems, machines and equipment that could present a risk to life or checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no responsibility is assumed property. Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to for clerical, typographical or proofreading errors, or omissions. this Good. NEVER USE THE PRODUCT FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE SELLER'S PRODUCT IS PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM. Complete “Terms and Conditions of Sale” for product purchase and use are on Omron’s website at www.omron.com/oei – under the “About Us” tab, in the Legal Matters section.

ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527.

OMRON ELECTRONIC OMRON CANADA, INC. OMRON ON-LINE COMPONENTS LLC 885 Milner Avenue Global - http://www.omron.com 55 E. Commerce Drive, Suite B Toronto, Ontario M1B 5V8 USA - http://www.omron.com/oei Schaumburg, IL 60173 416-286-6465 Canada - http://www.omron.ca 847-882-2288 Cat. No. D2RW 12/04 Specifications subject to change without notice Printed in USA Sealed Reed Basic Switch D2RW

Extended life logic level switching with watertight circuitry

Ordering Information

I Model Number Legend D2RW-01@ 12 1. Ratings 01: 0.25 A at 100 VDC; 100 µA at 5 VDC 2. Actuator None: Pin plunger L1: Hinge lever L2: Hinge roller lever L3: Simulated roller lever I List of Models

Actuator Model Pin plunger D2RW-01 Hinge lever D2RW-01L1

Hinge roller lever D2RW-01L2

Simulated roller lever D2RW-01L3

Specifications

I Ratings

Switching voltage 100 VDC max. Switching current 0.25 A max. Contact capacity 10 W max.

Note: The values apply under the following test conditions: Ambient temperature: 20±2°C Ambient humidity: 65±5% Operating frequency: 30 operations/min.

142 Sealed Reed Basic Switch D2RW I Characteristics

Minimum applicable load 100 µA at 5 VDC

I Contact Form

SPST-NO

Note: Lead wire colors are indicated in parentheses.

Dimensions

Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated. I Terminals I Mounting Holes

Molded Lead Wires

. Pin Plunger Models OF max. 1.5 N {153 gf} D2RW-01 RF min. 0.1 N {10 gf} PT max. 1.6 mm OT min. 0.6 mm MD max. 0.8 mm OP 14.7±0.6 mm

. Hinge Lever Models OF max. 0.75 N {76 gf} D2RW-01L1 RF min. 0.05 N {5 gf} PT max. 4.0 mm OT min. 1.0 mm MD max. 1.6 mm OP 15.2±1.5 mm

. Hinge Roller Lever Models OF max. 0.75 N {76 gf} D2RW-01L2 RF min. 0.05 N {5 gf} PT max. 4.0 mm OT min. 1.0 mm MD max. 1.6 mm OP 20.7±1.5 mm

. Simulated Roller Lever Models OF max. 0.75 N {76 gf} D2RW-01L3 RF min. 0.05 N {5 gf} PT max. 4.0 mm OT min. 1.0 mm MD max. 1.6 mm OP 18.7±1.5 mm

144 Sealed Reed Basic Switch D2RW Precautions

I Cautions I Correct Use

Sealed Reed Basic Switch D2RW 145 Certain Terms and Conditions of Sale

Certain Precautions on Specifications and Use

ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527.

Sealed Basic Switch with Simplified Construction, Mounting Compatible with SS and D2SW Series.

• Sealed to IEC IP67. • Switch rating of 2A at 250 VAC possible with a single-leaf movable spring. Models for micro loads are also available. • Solder, quick-connect terminals (#110), PCB terminals and molded lead wires are available. Even-pitched PCB terminals are also standardized.

Ordering Information

I Model Number Legend D2SW-P @@@@ 1 2 3 4 1. Ratings 3. Contact Form 2: 2A at 250 VAC None: SPDT 01: 0.1A at 30 VDC -2: SPST-NC (Molded lead wire models only) 2. Actuator -3: SPST-NO (Molded lead wire models only) None: Pin plunger 4. Terminals L1: Hinge lever H: Solder terminals L2: Hinge roller lever T: Quick-connect terminals (#110) L3: Simulated roller lever D: PCB terminals (Uneven pitch) B: PCB terminals (Even pitch) M: Molded lead wires I List of Models

Rating Actuator Terminal Solder Quick-connect PCB terminals Molded lead terminals terminals (#110) Uneven pitch Even pitch wires 2A Pin plunger D2SW-P2H D2SW-P2T D2SW-P2D D2SW-P2B D2SW-P2M Hinge lever D2SW-P2L1H D2SW-P2L1T D2SW-P2L1D D2SW-P2L1B D2SW-P2L1M

Hinge roller lever D2SW-P2L2H D2SW-P2L2T D2SW-P2L2D D2SW-P2L2B D2SW-P2L2M

Simulated roller lever D2SW-P2L3H D2SW-P2L3T D2SW-P2L3D D2SW-P2L3B D2SW-P2L3M

0.1A Pin plunger D2SW-P01H D2SW-P01T D2SW-P01D D2SW-P01B D2SW-P01M Hinge lever D2SW-P01L1H D2SW-P01L1T D2SW-P01L1D D2SW-P01L1B D2SW-P01L1M

Hinge roller lever D2SW-P01L2H D2SW-P01L2T D2SW-P01L2D D2SW-P01L2B D2SW-P01L2M

Simulated roller lever D2SW-P01L3H D2SW-P01L3T D2SW-P01L3D D2SW-P01L3B D2SW-P01L3M

Note: Consult your OMRON sales representative for details on SPST-NO and SPST-NC models.

142 Sealed Subminiature Basic Switch D2SW-P Specifications

I Ratings

Model Rated voltage Resistive load D2SW-P2 30 VDC 2 A 250 VAC D2SW-P01 30 VDC 0.1 A 125 VAC

Note: The ratings values apply under the following test conditions. Ambient temperature: 20±2°C Ambient humidity: 65±5% Operating frequency: 20 operations/min. I Characteristics

Item Model D2SW-P2 D2SW-P01 Operating speed 0.1 mm to 500 mm/s (pin plunger models) Operating frequency Mechanical: 120 operations/min max. Electrical: 20 operations/min max. Insulation resistance 100 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC) Contact resistance (initial value) Terminal models: 50 mΩ max. Terminal models: 100 mΩ max. Molded lead wire models: 100 mΩ max. Molded lead wire models: 150 mΩ max. Dielectric strength (see note 2) 1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min. between 600 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min. between terminals of the same polarities terminals of the same polarities 1,500 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min. between current-carrying metal parts and ground, and between each terminal and non-current-carrying metal parts Vibration resistance (see note 3) Malfunction: 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude Shock resistance (see note 3) Destruction: 1,000 m/s2 {approx. 100 G} max. Malfunction: 300 m/s2 {approx. 30 G} max. Durability (see note 4) Mechanical: 1,000,000 operations min. Mechanical: 1,000,000 operations min. (60 operations/min.) (60 operations/min.) Electrical: 50,000 operations min. Electrical: 200,000 operations min. (20 operations/min.) (20 operations/min.) Degree of protection IEC IP67 (see note 5) (excluding the terminals on terminal models) Degree of protection against electric shock Class 1 Proof tracking index (PTI) 175 Ambient operating temperature -20°C to 70°C (at ambient humidity of 60% max.) (with no icing) Ambient operating humidity 85% max. (for 5°C to 35°C) Weight Approx. 2 g (pin plunger models with terminals)

Note: 1. The data given above are initial values. 2. The dielectric strength shown in the table indicates a value for models with a Separator. 3. For the pin plunger models, the above values apply for both the free position and total travel position. For the lever models, the values apply at the total travel position. Contact opening or closing time is within 1ms. 4. Consult your OMRON sales representative for testing conditions. 5. The test to meet standards checks for water intrusion after immersion for 30 minutes. The test does not check for switching operation underwater. Refer to “Degree of Protection” or “Instructions for Correct Use”.

Sealed Subminiature Basic Switch D2SW-P 143 I Approved Standards I Contact Form Consult your OMRON sales representative for specific models with SPDT standard approval. UL1054 (File No. E41515)/ COM NO NC CSA C22.2 No. 55 (UL approval) (Black) (Blue)(Red) SPST-NC Rated voltage D2SW-P2 D2SW-P01 (Molded lead wire models only) 125 VAC — 0.1 A 250 VAC 2 A — COM NC 30 VDC 2 A 0.1 A (Black) (Red) SPST-NO I Contact Specifications (Molded lead wire models only)

COM NO Item Model (Black) (Blue) D2SW-P2 D2SW-P01 Note: Lead wire colors are indicated in parentheses. Contact Specification Rivet Crossbar Material Silver alloy Gold alloy Gap 0.5 mm (standard value) Minimum applicable load 160 mA at 5 VDC 1 mA at 5 VDC (see note)

Note: For more information on the minimum applicable load, refer to Using Micro Loads on page 147.

Dimensions

I Terminals Note: 1. All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated. 2. Terminal plate thickness is 0.5 mm for all models. Solder Terminals Quick-connect Terminals (#110)

C NC NC 3.3±0.1 7.3 3.3±0.1 11 7.1 3.2 Three, 1.6-dia. Holes 0.5 2.15 0.5 8.55 6.4±0.2 3-2.8 15.5 6.4±0.2 7.6±0.2 7.6±0.2 5.15 9.5±0.1 5.15 9.5±0.1 19.8±0.2 19.8±0.2 PCB Terminals (Uneven pitch) PCB Terminals (Even pitch)

1.8 1.8 3.3±0.1 3.3±0.1 3.9 3.9 3-1.2 1.3 3-1.2 1.3 8.8±0.2 3-0.8 1.85 3-0.8 0.5 0.1 0.5 16.1±0.2 5.15 9.5± 6.4±0.2 6.4±0.2 5.15 9.5±0.1 7.62±0.2 7.62±0.2 19.8±0.2 19.8±0.2 PCB Mounting Dimensions (Reference) PCB Mounting Dimensions (Reference)

16.1±0.1 7.62±0.1 7.62±0.1 Three, 1.35 to 1.5 dia. 8.8±0.1 Three,-1.35 to 1.5 dia.

144 Sealed Subminiature Basic Switch D2SW-P Molded Lead Wires

9.2

Common terminal (black) 6.4±0.2 300±10 Insulator Normally closed Stranded annealed terminal (red) copper wites (5)

0.7 Normally open 5.15 9.5±0.1 terminal (blue) 21.2

I Mounting Holes

Two, M2.3 screw hole

9.5±0.1

I Dimensions and Operating Characteristics Note: 1. All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated. 2. The following illustrations and drawings are for solder terminal models. Refer to Terminals section for details on models with quick-connect terminals (#110) or PCB terminals or molded lead wires. 3. The @ in the model number is for the contact form code or the terminal code. 4. Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ±0.4 mm applies to all dimensions. 5. The operating characteristics are for operation in the A direction ( ).

. Pin Plunger Models Model D2SW-P2@@ D2SW-P01@@ D2SW-P2@@ A 7.55±0.2 D2SW-P01@@ PT 1.8 dia. OF max. 1.8 N {183 gf} 2.5±0.07 dia. +0.075 2.35 − 0.05 dia. RF min. 0.2 N {20 gf} PT max. 0.6 mm OP 6.9 7.7 OT min. 0.4 mm MD max. 0.15 mm 3.3±0.1 +0.075 7.3 OP 8.4±0.3 mm 2.35−0.05 3.2 Three, 1.6 dia. holes 2.15 8.55 0.5 15.5 6.4±0.2 5.15 9.5±0.1 19.8±0.2

Hinge Lever Models Model D2SW-P2L1@@ D2SW-P01L1@@ D2SW-P2L1@@ A OF max. 0.6 N {61 gf} D2SW-P01L1@@ t=0.3 Stainless-steel lever 14.5±0.6 RF min. 0.05 N {5 gf} +0.075 2.35 − 0.05 dia. 2.5±0.07 dia. OT min. 0.8 mm MD max. 0.8 mm OP FP 6.9 7.7 FP max. 13.6 mm +0.075 OP 8.8±0.8 mm 2.35−0.05 3.3±0.1 7.3

3.2 2.15 8.55 Three, 1.6 dia. holes 0.5 15.5 6.4±0.2 5.15 9.5±0.1 19.8±0.2

Sealed Subminiature Basic Switch D2SW-P 145 Hinge Roller Lever Models Model D2SW-P2L2@@ D2SW-P01L2@@ A dia. 4.8 x 3.2 D2SW-P2L2@@ Polyacetal resin roller OF max. 0.6 N {61 gf} D2SW-P01L2@@ RF min. 0.05 N {5 gf} t=0.3 Stainless-steel lever 14.5±0.6 OT min. 0.8 mm 2.5±0.07 dia. MD max. 0.8 mm 2.35 +0.075 dia. -0.05 FP OP FP max. 19.3 mm 6.9 7.7 OP 14.5±0.8 mm +0.075 2.35-0.05 3.3±0.1 7.3

3.2 2.15 8.55 Three, 1.6 dia. holes 0.5 15.5 6.4±0.2 5.15 9.5±0.1 19.8±0.2

Simulated Roller Lever Models A Model D2SW-P2L3@@ D2SW-P01L3@@ D2SW-P2L3@@ OF max. 0.6 N {61 gf} D2SW-P01L3@@ t=0.3 Stainless-steel lever R1.3 0.6 +0.075 15.8± 2.35 − 0.05 dia. RF min. 0.05 N {5 gf} 2.5±0.07 dia. OT min. 0.8 mm MD max. 0.8 mm OP FP 6.9 7.7 FP max. 15.5 mm +0.075 ± 2.35 −0.05 OP 10.7 0.8 mm 3.3±0.1 7.3

3.2 0.5 2.15 8.55 Three, 1.6 dia. holes 15.5 6.4±0.2 5.15 9.5±0.1 19.8±0.2

Precautions

I Cautions Connecting to Terminals Connecting to Solder Terminals Degree of Protection When soldering the lead wire to the terminal, first insert the lead wire Do not use this product in water. Although these models satisfy the conductor through the terminal hole and the conduct soldering. test conditions for the standard given below, this test is to check the Make sure that the temperature at the tip of the soldering iron is 350 ingress of water into the switch enclosure after submerging the to 400°C. Do not take more than 3 seconds to solder the switch ter- Switch in water for a given time. Satisfying this test condition does minal, and do not impose external force on the terminal for 1 min. not mean that the Switch can be used in water. after soldering. Improper soldering involving an excessively high tem- IEC 60529: 2001 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP perature or excessive soldering time may deteriorate the characteris- Code) tics of the Switch. Code: IP67 (The test to meet the standard checks for water intrusion Connecting to Quick-connect Terminals after immersion for 30 minutes.) Wire the quick-connect terminals (#110) with receptacles. Insert the Do not operate the Switch when it is exposed to water spray, or when terminals straight into the receptacles. Do not impose excessive water drops adhere to the Switch surface, or during sudden tempera- force on the terminal in the horizontal direction, otherwise the termi- ture changes, otherwise water may intrude into the interior of the nal may be deformed or the housing may be damaged. Switch due to a suction effect. Connecting to PCB Terminal Boards Prevent the Switch from coming into contact with oil and chemicals. When using automatic soldering baths, we recommend soldering at Otherwise, damage to or deterioration of Switch materials may 260±5°C within 5 seconds. Make sure that the liquid surface of the result. solder does not flow over the edge of the board. Do not use the Switch in areas where it is exposed to silicon adhe- When soldering by hand, as a guideline, solder with a soldering iron sives, oil, or grease, otherwise faulty contact may result due to the with a tip temperature of 350 to 400°C within 3 seconds, and do not generation of silicon oxide. apply any external force for at least 1 minute after soldering. When The environment-resistant performance of the switch differs depend- applying solder, keep the solder away from the case of the Switch ing on operating loads, ambient atmospheres, and installation condi- and do not allow solder or flux to enter the case. tions, etc. Please perform an operating test of the switch in advance Side-actuated (Cam/Dog) Operation under actual usage conditions. When using a cam or dog to operate the Switch, factors such as the operating speed, operating frequency, push-button indentation, and material and shape of the cam or dog will affect the durability of the Switch. Confirm performance specifications under actual operation conditions before using the Switch in applications.

146 Sealed Subminiature Basic Switch D2SW-P I The equation, λ60 = 0.5 x 10-6/operations indicates that the esti- Correct Use mated malfunction rate is less than 1/2,000,000 operations with a reliability level of 60%. Mounting Turn OFF the power supply before mounting or removing the Switch, wiring, or performing maintenance or inspection. Failure to do so may 0.16mA 26mA 100mA 30 result in electric shock or burning. Voltage (V) Voltage Use M2.3 mounting screws with plane washers or spring washers to securely mount the Switch. Tighten the screws to a torque of 0.23 to 24 Operating 0.26 N·m {2.3 to 2.7 kgf·cm}. Exceeding the specified torque may range for Operating range for result in deterioration of the sealing or damage. general-load micro load models models D2SW-P01 Mount the Switch onto a flat surface. Mounting on an uneven surface D2SW-P2 may cause deformation of the Switch, resulting in faulty operation or 12 damage. Inoperable Operating Body range 5 1mA 100mA 160mA Use an operating body with low frictional resistance and of a shape that will not interfere with the sealing rubber, otherwise the plunger 0 0.1 1 10 100 1,000 may be damaged or the sealing may deteriorate. Current (mA) With the pin plunger models, set the Switch so that the plunger can be pushed in from directly above. Since the plunger is covered with a rubber cap, applying a force from lateral directions may cause damage to the plunger or reduction in the sealing capability

. Correct Incorrect Incorrect

Handling Do not handle the Switch in a way that may cause damage to the sealing rubber. When handling the Switch, ensure that uneven pressure or, as shown in the following diagram, pressure in a direction other than the operating direction is not applied to the Actuator, otherwise the Actu- ator or Switch may be damaged, or durability may be decreased.

Wiring Molded Lead Wire Models When wiring molded lead wire models, ensure that there is no weight on the wire or that there are no sharp bends near the parts where the wire is drawn out. Otherwise, damage to the Switch or deterioration in the sealing may result. Operating Stroke Setting Set the operating stroke so that the actuator is completely disen- gaged when the switch is in the free position (FP), and is pushed to a point between 60% and 90% of the OT distance after the switch is operated. Insufficient or excessive pushing of the actuator may result in decreased switch durability or damage to the switch. Using Micro Loads Using a model for ordinary loads to open or close the contact of a micro load circuit may result in a faulty contact. Use models that operate in the following range. However, even when using micro load models within the operating range shown below, if inrush current occurs when the contact is opened or closed, it may increase contact wear and so decrease durability. Therefore, insert a contact protection circuit where necessary. The minimum applicable load is the N-level reference value. This value indicates the malfunction reference level for the reliability level of 60% (λ60).

Sealed Subminiature Basic Switch D2SW-P 147 Certain Terms and Conditions of Sale

Certain Precautions on Specifications and Use

ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527.

OMRON ELECTRONIC OMRON CANADA, INC. OMRON ON-LINE COMPONENTS LLC 885 Milner Avenue Global - http://www.omron.com 55 E. Commerce Drive, Suite B Toronto, Ontario M1B 5V8 USA - http://www.omron.com/oei Schaumburg, IL 60173 416-286-6465 Canada - http://www.omron.ca 847-882-2288 Cat. No. D2SW-P 12/04 Specifications subject to change without notice Printed in USA Snap Action Switch D2SW

Watertight Miniature Snap Action Switch I High-quality watertight miniature snap action switch — meets IP67 (IEC 529) requirements (for lead wire types) and IP50 (for terminal types) I Monoblock construction assures high sealing capability and is ideal for dusty places or where water is sprayed I Wide operating temperature range of -40°C to 85°C I Perfect for the automobile, agriculture machinery, automatic vending machine, refrigerator, ice-manufacturing, bath equipment, hot-water supply, air conditioner, and factory machine industries, which require highly environment- resistive capabilities

Ordering Information

Part number Actuator Terminal Model 3 A Model 0.1 A Pin plunger Solder terminals D2SW-3HS D2SW-01HS Tab terminals (#110) D2SW-3TS D2SW-01TS PCB terminals D2SW-3DS D2SW-01DS With lead wires D2SW-3MS D2SW-01MS Hinge lever Solder terminals D2SW-3L1HS D2SW-01L1HS Tab terminals (#110) D2SW-3L1TS D2SW-01L1TS PCB terminals D2SW-3L1DS D2SW-01L1DS With lead wires D2SW-3L1MS D2SW-01L1MS Simulated roller lever Solder terminals D2SW-3L3HS D2SW-01L3HS Tab terminals (#110) D2SW-3L3TS D2SW-01L3TS PCB terminals D2SW-3L3DS D2SW-01L3DS With lead wires D2SW-3L3MS D2SW-01L3MS Hinge roller lever Solder terminals D2SW-3L2HS D2SW-01L2HS Tab terminals (#110) D2SW-3L2TS D2SW-01L2TS PCB terminals D2SW-3L2DS D2SW-01L2DS With lead wires D2SW-3L2MS D2SW-01L2MS

Note: The standard lengths of the lead wires (AWG22) of models incorporating them are 30 cm (12 in).

137 D2SW D2SW

Specifications

I CHARACTERISTICS

D2SW-3 D2SW-01 Operating speed (see note 2) 0.1 mm to 1 m/second (at pin plunger) Operating frequency Mechanical 300 operations/min. Electrical 60 operations/min. Insulation resistance 100 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC) Contact resistance 50 mΩ max. (initial value) Dielectric strength 1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min. between 600 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min. between contacts of the same polarity contacts of the same polarity 1,500 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min. between current-carrying metal parts and ground, and between each terminal and noncurrent-carrying metal part Inrush current NO 10 A — NC 20 A — Vibration resistance Malfunction 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude Shock resistance Malfunction 300 m/s2 (approx. 30 g) Life expectancy Mechanical 5,000,000 operations min. Electrical 200,000 operations min. 200,000 operations min. (3 A at 125 VAC) 100,000 operations min. (2 A at 250 VAC) Ambient temperature Operating -40° to 85°C (with no icing) Ambient humidity Operating 95% max. Enclosure rating Reference to IP67 IEC 529 (lead wire type) and IP50 (terminal type) Weight Terminal model 2 g Lead wire model 10 g

Note: 1. Data shown are of initial value. 2. The operating speed value shown is for pin plunger models. For hinge lever models, contact OMRON.

I OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS Part number Terminal model Lead wire model D2SW-3IS D2SW-3L1IS D2SW-3L3IS D2SW-3L2IS D2SW-3MS Characteristics D2SW-01IS D2SW-01L1IS D2SW-01L3IS D2SW-01L2IS D2SW-01MS OF max. 180 g 60 g 60 g 60 g 180 g RF min. 30 g 6 g 6 g 6 g 30 g PT max. 0.6 mm — — — 0.6 mm OT min. 0.5 mm 1.0 mm 1.0 mm 1.0 mm 0.5 mm MD max. 0.1 mm 0.8 mm 0.8 mm 0.8 mm 0.1 mm FP max. — 13.6 mm 15.5 mm 19.3 mm — OP 8.4±0.3 mm 8.8±0.8 mm 10.7±0.8 mm 14.5±0.8 mm 8.4±0.3 mm

138 D2SW D2SW

I RATINGS D2SW-3

Non-inductive load (A) Inductive load (A) Resistive load Lamp load Inductive load Motor load Rated Voltage NC NO NC NO NC NO NC NO 125 VAC 3 — 1 0.5 1 0.5 1 0.5 250 VAC 2 — 0.5 0.3 0.5 0.3 0.5 0.3 30 VDC 3 — 1 — 1 — 1 —

D2SW-01

Non-inductive load (A) Inductive load (A) Resistive load Lamp load Inductive load Motor load Rated Voltage NC NO NC NO NC NO NC NO 125 VAC 0.1 — —————— 30 VDC0.1———————

Note: 1. The above current ratings are the values of the steady-state current. 2. Inductive load has a power factor of 0.7 min. (AC) and a time constant of 7 ms max. (DC). 3. Lamp load has an inrush current of 10 times the steady-state current. 4. Motor load has an inrush current of 6 times the steady-state current.

I CONTACT FORM * Indicates lead wire color

SPDT SPST-NC SPST-NO (standard) (Consult Omron for ordering information) (Consult Omron for ordering information)

(Black*) (Blue*) (Red*) (Black*) (Red*) (Black*) (Blue*)

I APPROVALS

UL (File No. E41515), CSA (File No. LR21642-388), EN 61058-1

139 D2SW D2SW

Dimensions Unit: mm (inch) I PIN PLUNGER D2SW-3IS D2SW-01IS

I HINGE LEVER D2SW-3L1IS D2SW-01L1IS

I SIMULATED ROLLER LEVER D2SW-3L3IS D2SW-01L3IS

I HINGE ROLLER LEVER D2SW-3L2IS D2SW-01L2IS

Note: 1. Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ± 0.4 mm applies to all dimensions. 2. The above illustrations and dimensions are for models with solder terminals. Refer to “Terminals” for models with tab (#110) and PCB terminals. The dimensions not described are the same as those of models with pin plungers. 140 D2SW D2SW

I PIN PLUNGER LEAD WIRES

Note: 1. Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ± 0.4 mm applies to all dimensions. 2. The above illustrations and dimensions are for models with pin plungers. The dimensions and operating characteristics of the actuators of models incorporating them are the same as those of the actuators of models with both actuators and terminals.

I TERMINALS Solder Terminals Tab terminals (#110)

PCB Terminals PCB mounting

Note: Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ± 0.4 mm applies to all dimensions.

141 D2SW D2SW

Precautions

I MOUNTING I ENCLOSURE RATINGS

Use two M2.3 mounting screws with spring washers to mount The D2SW was tested under water and passed the following the switch. Tighten the screws to a torque of 0.23 to 0.26 N ¥ m watertightness test, which however, does not mean that the (2.3 to 2.7 kgf ¥ cm) D2SW can be used in the water. JIS C0929 (rules for testing the watertightness of electrical Mounting holes devices and materials), class 7 (watertightness test). Refer to the following illustration for the test method. IEC Publication 529, class IP67. Refer to the following illustration for the test method.

When soldering a lead wire to a terminal of the D2SW, use a soldering iron with a maximum capacity of 60 W and do not take more than 5 seconds to solder the lead wire, otherwise the characteristics of the D2SW may be altered. Make sure that there is no icing when using the D2SW at low ambient temperatures. Note: The object to be tested is left in the water for 30 minutes on condition that the distance between the surface of the water and the top of the object be 15 cm minimum, and I OPERATIONS the distance between the surface of the water and the bottom of the object be 1 m minimum. Make sure that the switching object is perfectly separated from the actuator when the switch is not operated and the actuator is pressed appropriately by the switching object when the switch is operated. The switch should be set so that its stroke will be within the rated OT when the switch is operated. Install the switching object so that its moving direction is the same as that of the actuator. Handle D2SW models with pin plungers with care so that the sealing rubber parts around the pin plungers will not be damaged.

142 D2SW D2SW

NOTE: DIMENSIONS ARE SHOWN IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters to inches divide by 25.4.

Cat. No. GC SW6 04/01 Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in the U.S.A. Snap Action Switch D2T

Compact DPST-NO Snap Action Switch I Incorporates circuits for power and low-level loads I Approved by safety standards, such as UL, VDE, and SEMKO I As compact as OMRON's V-series snap action switches I Contact gap of 0.7 mm min. I Panel or screw-mounted with ease I Straight and angled terminals are available

Ordering Information

Part number Actuator Angled Terminal Straight Terminal Pin plunger D2T-T1 D2T-T1S

Hinge lever D2T-LT1 D2T-LT1S

Note: The actuator of the D2T is identical to that used for OMRON's V-series Snap-action Switches. The actuator can be replaced with other types of actuators. Contact your OMRON representative for details. Specifications

I CHARACTERISTICS

Electrical ratings 5 A at 125/250 VAC between terminals 1 and 2 0.1 A at 125 VAC between terminals 3 and 4 Operating speed 10 to 500 mm/second (0.39 to 19.7 in/second) Operating frequency Mechanical 120 operations per min. Electrical 60 operations per min. Contact resistance 50 mΩ max. between terminals 1 and 2 100 mΩ max. between terminals 3 and 4 Insulation resistance 100 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC) Dielectric strength (VAC) 1,000 VAC, for 1 minute between contacts of same polarity 1,500 VAC for 1 minute between current-carrying metal parts and ground, and between contacts of different polarity Vibration resistance Malfunction 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude Shock resistance Malfunction 300 m/s2 (approx. 30 g min.) Life expectancy Mechanical 100,000 operations min. (at full OT value, operating frequency of 120 operations/min.) Electrical 100,000 operations min. (at rated OT value, operating frequency of 60 operations/min.) Ambient temperature Operating -25° to 85°C (with no icing) Ambient humidity Operating 85% RH max. Weight Approx. 10 g

43 D2T D2T

I OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS

Part number Characteristics D2T-T1, D2T-T1S D2T-LT1, D2T-LT1S OF max. 330 g 150 g RF min. 50 g 20 g TTF max. 650 g 250 g OT min. 0.8 mm 1.6 mm OP 4.4±0.6 mm (see note) 6.9±1.3 mm (see note)

Note: There is no actuation order between terminals 1 and 2 and terminals 3 and 4.

I CONTACT FORM

Note: The circuit switching power load has a snap-action mechanism. The circuit switching low-level load has a slow-action mechanism.

I RATINGS

Electrical Ratings Between terminals 1 and 2: 5 A @ 125/250 VAC Between terminals 3 and 4: 0.1 A @125 VAC

Dimensions Unit: mm (inch) I PIN PLUNGER D2T-T1 D2T-T1S

Note: 1. Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ± 0.4 mm applies to all dimensions. 2. The above illustrations and dimensions of the pin plunger and hinge lever are for D2T models with angled terminals. Refer to the dimensions in “Terminals” for the straight terminals of D2T.

44 D2T D2T

I HINGE LEVER D2T-LT1 D2T-LT1S

I TERMINALS

Angled terminal Straight terminal

Precautions

I MOUNTING I SOLDERING

Use M3 mounting screws to mount the switch. Tighten the The following soldering conditions are recommended. screws to a torque of 4 to 6 kgf ¥ cm. Soldering Temperature Time Mounting Holes Manual 350°C 3 s max. Automatic 260°C 5 s max.

When soldering the D2T to a PCB, make sure that no flux will be on the surface of the PCB. Panel Mounting Dimensions (Panel thickness: 1.5 to 2 mm)

When mounting the D2T to a panel, be sure to insert an insulation separator between the D2T and the panel. The actual OT of the D2T must be at least the specified value and within the permissible OP of the D2T.

45 D2T D2T

NOTE: DIMENSIONS ARE SHOWN IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters to inches divide by 25.4.

Cat. No. GC SW6 04/01 Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in the U.S.A. Snap Action Switch D2VW

Watertight Miniature Snap Action Switch I High-quality watertight, high-precision miniature Snap Action switch. Meets IP67 (IEC 529) requirements (for lead wire types) and IP50 (for terminal types) I Monoblock construction assures high sealing capability and is ideal for dusty places or where water is sprayed I V-series internal mechanism assures high operating-position accuracy (±0.4 mm) and long life (10 million operations) I Wide operating temperature range of -40°C to 90°C is ideal for any operating environment I General-load (5 A at 250 VAC) models and micro-load models are available

Ordering Information

Part number Actuator Terminal Model 0.1 A Model 5 A Pin plunger With solder and #187 tab terminals D2VW-01-1HS D2VW-5-1HS With lead wires D2VW-01-1MS D2VW-5-1MS Short hinge lever With solder and #187 tab terminals D2VW-01L1A-1HS D2VW-5L1A-1HS With lead wires D2VW-01L1A-1MS D2VW-5L1A-1MS Hinge lever With solder and #187 tab terminals D2VW-01L1-1HS D2VW-5L1-1HS With lead wires D2VW-01L1-1MS D2VW-5L1-1MS Long hinge lever With solder and #187 tab terminals D2VW-01L1B-1HS D2VW-5L1B-1HS With lead wires D2VW-01L1B-1MS D2VW-5L1B-1MS Simulated roller lever With solder and #187 tab terminals D2VW-01L3-1HS D2VW-5L3-1HS With lead wires D2VW-01L3-1MS D2VW-5L3-1MS Short hinge roller lever With solder and #187 tab terminals D2VW-01L2A-1HS D2VW-5L2A-1HS With lead wires D2VW-01L2A-1MS D2VW-5L2A-1MS Hinge roller lever With solder and #187 tab terminals D2VW-01L2-1HS D2VW-5L2-1HS With lead wires D2VW-01L2-1MS D2VW-5L2-1MS

Note: The standard lengths of the lead wires (AWG20) of models incorporating them are 30 cm.

143 D2VW D2VW

Specifications

I CHARACTERISTICS

D2VW-01 D2VW-5 Operating speed (see note 2) 0.1 mm to 1 m/s (at pin plunger) Operating frequency Mechanical 300 operations/min. Electrical 60 operations/min. Insulation resistance 100 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC) Contact resistance 100 mΩ max. (initial value) Dielectric strength 1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min. between contacts of the same polarity 1,500 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min. between each terminal and ground Inrush current — 15 A max. Vibration resistance Malfunction 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude Shock resistance Malfunction 300 m/s2 (approx. 30 g) Life expectancy Mechanical 10,000,000 operations min. Electrical 1,000,000 operations min. 100,000 operations min Ambient temperature Operating -40° to 90°C (with no icing) Ambient humidity Operating 95% max. Enclosure rating Reference to IP67 IEC 529 (lead wire type). Reference to IP50 (terminal type). Weight 16 g (including lead wire)

Note: 1. Data shown are of initial value. 2. The operating speed value shown is for pin plunger models. For hinge lever models, contact OMRON.

I OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS

Part number D2VW-01-1HS D2VW-01L1A-1HS D2VW-01L1-1HS D2VW-01L1B-1HS D2VW-01L3-1HS D2VW-01L2A-1HS D2VW-01L2-1HS D2VW-01-1MS D2VW-01L1A-1MS D2VW-01L1-1MS D2VW-01L1B-1MS D2VW-01L3-1MS D2VW-01L2A-1MS D2VW-01L2-1MS D2VW-5-1HS D2VW-5L1A-1HS D2VW-5L1-1HS D2VW-5L1B-1HS D2VW-5L3-1HS D2VW-5L2A-1HS D2VW-5L2-1HS Characteristics D2VW-5-1MS D2VW-5L1A-1MS D2VW-5L1-1MS D2VW-5L1B-1MS D2VW-5L3-1MS D2VW-5L2A-1MS D2VW-5L2-1MS OF max. 200 g 200 g 120 g 60 g 120 g 230 g 120 g RF min. 30 g 20 g 15 g 5 g 15 g 20 g 15 g PT max. 1.2 mm 1.6 mm 4.0 mm 9.0 mm 4.0 mm 1.6 mm 4.0 mm OT min. 1.0 mm 0.8 mm 1.6 mm 3.2 mm 1.6 mm 0.8 mm 1.6 mm MD max. 0.4 mm 0.5 mm 0.8 mm 2.0 mm 0.8 mm 0.5 mm 0.8 mm OP 14.7±0.4 mm 15.2±0.5 mm 15.2±1.2 mm 15.2±2.6 mm 18.7±1.2 mm 20.7±0.6 mm 20.7±1.2 mm

I RATINGS (See note 5)

Non-inductive load Inductive load D2VW-5 Resistive load Lamp load Inductive load Motor load Rated Voltage NC NO NC NO NC NO NC NO 125 VAC 5 — 0.5 — 4 — — — 250 VAC 5 — 0.5 — 4 — — — 30 VDC 5 — 3 — 4 — — — 125 VDC 0.4 — 0.1 — 0.4 — — — 250 VDC 0.2 — 0.03 — 0.2 — — — D2VW-01 Rated Voltage NC NO NC NO NC NO NC NO 125 VAC 0.1 — —————— 30 VDC0.1———————

I CONTACT FORM

SPDT SPST-NC SPST-NO (standard) (Consult Omron for ordering information) (Consult Omron for ordering information)

I APPROVALS UL (File No. E41515), CSA (File No. LR21642-388), IEC 1058-1, EN conforms 61058-1 Dimensions Unit: mm (inch) I PIN PLUNGER D2VW-01-1HS D2VW-5-1HS

I PIN PLUNGER D2VW-01-1MS D2VW-5-1MS

I SHORT HINGE LEVER D2VW-01L1A-1MS D2VW-5L1A-1MS

145 D2VW D2VW

Unit: mm (inch) I HINGE LEVER D2VW-01L1-1MS D2VW-5L1-1MS

I LONG HINGE LEVER D2VW-01L1B-1MS D2VW-5L1B-1MS

I SIMULATED ROLLER LEVER D2VW-01L3-1MS D2VW-5L3-1MS

I SHORT HINGE ROLLER LEVER D2VW-01L2A-1MS D2VW-5L2A-1MS

I HINGE ROLLER LEVER D2VW-01L2-1MS D2VW-5L2-1MS

146 D2VW D2VW

Precautions

I MOUNTING I ENCLOSURE RATINGS

Use two M3 mounting screws with spring washers to mount the The D2VW was tested under water and passed the following switch. Tighten the screws to a torque of 0.39 to 0.59 N ¥ m watertightness test, which however, does not mean that the (4 to 6 kgf ¥ cm). D2VW can be used in the water. JIS C0929 (rules for testing the watertightness of electrical Mounting holes devices and materials), class 7 (watertightness test). Refer to the following illustration for the test method at OMRON.

Note: The object to be tested is left in the water for 30 minutes I OPERATIONS on condition that the distance between the surface of the water and the top of the object be 15 cm minimum and the distance between the surface of the water and the Make sure that the switching object is perfectly separated from bottom of the object be 1 m minimum. the actuator when the switch is not operated and the actuator is pressed appropriately by the switching object when the switch is operated. The switch should be set so that its stroke will be within the rated OT when the switch is operated. Install the switching object so that its moving direction is the same as that of the actuator.

147 D2VW D2VW

NOTE: DIMENSIONS ARE SHOWN IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters to inches divide by 25.4.

Cat. No. GC SW6 04/01 Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in the U.S.A. Detection Switch D2X

Switch With Crimp Connector I Reduced wiring time with AMP crimp-type connectors I Snap-fit attachment for easy installation I Actuator operates from either side, allowing mounting in either direction I High contact force and wiping action for greater contact reliability I Rated load 0.1 A at 30 VDC

Ordering Information

Part number Actuator Terminal Contact OF Standard Model Center mounted rotary lever Crimp-type connector 50 g D2X

Specifications

I CHARACTERISTICS

Electrical ratings 0.1 A, 30 VDC (resistive load) Operating speed 0.1 mm to 100 mm/second (0.004 to 3.94 in/second) Operating frequency Mechanical 60 operations per minute (OT: full stroke) Electrical 30 operations per minute (0.1 A at 30 VDC) Contact resistance 200 mΩ Insulation resistance 100 MΩ min. at 250 VDC Dielectric strength 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between contacts of same polarity 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between each terminal and ground Vibration Malfunction durability 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude Shock Malfunction durability 300 m/s2 minimum (approx. 30 g minimum) Ambient temperature Operating -10° to 70°C Humidity Operating 45% to 85% RH max. with no icing Service life Mechanical 1 million operations minimum (OT: full stroke) Electrical 50,000 operations minimum (rated load) Weight Approx. 1 g

Note: Data shown are of initial value. I CONTACT FORM

245 D2X D2X

Dimensions Unit: mm (inch) I D2X

Operating characteristics D2X OF 50 g RF min. 2 g OP 2° to 9° max. or 0.52 to 2.35 mm (0.020 to 0.93 in) TTP max. 25° or 6.34 mm (0.250 in)

I MOUNTING HOLES

With 1.6 mm panel thickness With 1.2 mm panel thickness

Note: 1. Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ± 0.2 mm applies to all dimensions. 2. The tolerance of the center of each hole is ± 0.07 mm. Precautions

For proper operation, follow these guidelines: Set the dog or cam stroke so the actuator does not receive excessive force when the switch is actuated. When the actuator is released, the dog or cam must be off the actuator head. Set the dog or cam so that it will press the head of the lever in the traveling direction of the lever. Do not allow the lever to be pressed beyond the TTP. 246 D2X D2X

NOTE: DIMENSIONS ARE SHOWN IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters to inches divide by 25.4.

Cat. No. GC SW6 04/01 Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in the U.S.A. Detection Switch D3C

Subminiature Detection Switch I Built-in slide mechanism selects shorting or non-shorting switch timing I 3 mm (0.12 in) long stroke I PCB mount switch with 100 milliamp capacity I Ideal for household appliances, sound equipment, office equipment, communications equipment, etc. I Compact size

Ordering Information

Part number General Purpose Low Operating Force Actuator Non-shorting Model Shorting Model Non-shorting Model Shorting Model Hinge lever D3C-1210 D3C-2210 D3C-1220 D3C-2220

Specifications

I CHARACTERISTICS

Electrical rating 0.1 A, 30 VDC (resistive load) Operating speed 1 to 500 mm/second (0.04 to 19.7 in/second) Operating frequency Mechanical 200 operations per minute Electrical 30 operations per minute Contact resistance 50 mΩ max. Insulation resistance 100 MΩ min. at 250 VDC Dielectric strength 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between contacts of same polarity 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between each terminal and ground Vibration Malfunction durability 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude Shock Malfunction durability 300 m/s2 minimum (approx. 30 g minimum) Ambient temperature Operating -20° to 80°C with no icing Humidity Operating 65% max. at 5° to 35°C Service life 50,000 operations minimum at the rated switch frequency Weight Approx. 0.3 g

Note: Data shown are of initial value. I OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS

Non-shorting Model Shorting Model Characteristics D3C-1210 D3C-1220 D3C-2210 D3C-2220 OF max. 130 g 40 g 130 g 40 g RF min. 10 g 3 g 10 g 3 g OP1 3.5 ± 0.3 mm (0.14 ± 0.01 in) 3.4 ± 0.3 mm (0.13 ± 0.01 in) OP2 2.5 ± 0.3 mm (0.10 ± 0.01 in) 2.6 ± 0.3 mm (0.10 ± 0.01 in) TTP 1.3 ± 0.4 mm (0.05 ± 0.02 in) 1.3 ± 0.4 mm (0.05 ± 0.02 in) FP max. 4.8 mm (0.19 inches) 4.8 mm (0.19 inches)

247 D3C D3C

I SWITCHING TIMING

Non-shorting Model

I CONTACT FORM

Dimensions Unit: mm (inch) I DSC

I MOUNTING HOLES

When mounting the D3C with screws, use M1.6 mounting screws with plain washers or spring washers. Tighten the screws to a torque of 4.9 to 9.8 X 102 N.

Note: Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ± 0.2 mm applies to all dimensions.

248 D3C D3C

Precautions I MOUNTING

Refer to the following dimensions for PCB mounting. The distance between two adjacent terminals is 2.54 mm.

When soldering each terminal of the D3C, apply a soldering iron rated at 30 W for no longer than three seconds. Do not impose any external force to the terminals for approximately one minute after the terminals are soldered. Make sure that the terminals of the D3C are insulated from one another and the ground. Do not allow the lever to be pressed beyond the TTP.

249 D3C D3C

NOTE: DIMENSIONS ARE SHOWN IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters to inches divide by 25.4.

Cat. No. GC SW6 04/01 Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in the U.S.A. Miniature Door Switch D3D

Unique Mechanism Allows Switching of Micro Loads

• Choose from plunger or lever actuators. • Plunger models provide sealing in the free position. • Low operating force of 204 g max. • Disconnectable crimp connector for easier wiring. • High contact reliability ensured with gold crossbar contacts. • Low noise operation.

Ordering Information

■ Model Number Legend D3D- 12 3 1. Actuator 1: Plunger 2: Lever 2. Contact Form 1: SPDT 2: SPST-NC 3: SPST-NO 3. Color of Housing 1: White

■ List of Models Stock Note: Shaded items are normally stocked.

Actuator Model Contact form SPDT SPST-NC SPST-NO Plunger D3D-111 D3D-121 D3D-131

Lever D3D-211 D3D-221 D3D-231

Miniature Door Switch D3D 1 Specifications

■ Ratings

Rated voltage Resistive load 125 VAC 1 A 250 VAC 0.5 A

Note: The ratings on the left were tested under the following conditions. Ambient temperature: 20±2°C Ambient humidity 65±5% Operating frequency 20 operations/min ■ Characteristics

Operating speed 7.5 to 500 mm/s Operating frequency Mechanical: 120 operations/min Electrical: 20 operations/min Insulation resistance 100 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC) Contact resistance (initial value) 100 mΩ max. Dielectric strength 1,000 VAC. 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of the same polarity 1,500 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between current-carrying metal parts and ground, and between each terminal and non-current-carrying metal parts Vibration resistance Malfunction: 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude Shock resistance Destruction: 490 m/s2 max. (See note 1) Malfunction: 300 m/s2 max. Durability Mechanical: 300,000 operations min. (60 operations/min) (See note 2) Electrical: 100,000 operations min. (20 operations/min) Degree of protection IP00 Degree of protection against D3D-1 models (plunger models): Class II electric shock D3D-2 models (lever models): Class 0 Proof tracking index (PTI) 600 Ambient operating temperature -30°C to 60°C (with no icing) Ambient operating humidity 85% max. Weight Approx. 4 g Note: 1. The contacts do not open or close for more than 1 ms. 2. Consult your Omron representative for details on test conditions. ■ Approved Standards ■ Contact Form UL 1054 (File No. E41515), CSA C22.2 No. 55, cuRus component recognized, VDE EN 61058-1 (File No. 4000 5053). ■ Contact Specifications

Contact Specification Crossbar Material Gold Alloy Minimum applicable load 1 mA at 5 VDC (See note)

Note: For more information about the minimum applicable load, refer to “Micro Loads” on page 4.

2 Miniature Door Switch D3D Dimensions

Unit: mm ■ Dimensions and Operating Characteristics

Note: 1. Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ±0.4 mm applies to all dimensions. 2. The operating characteristics are for operation in direction A (indicated by the arrow). Plunger Models D3D-111 D3D-121 Type Plunger model D3D-111 D3D-121 D3D-131 D3D-131 Model OF max. 204 g TT (9.0) mm OP min. OP1 13 mm 12 mm (NC-OFF) 13 mm OP2 (NO-ON) 12 mm

Note: The dimensions OP1 and OP2 apply to the D3D-111 only. The D3D-121 and D3D-131 are SPST-NC and SPST-NO respectively and so therefore have only one corresponding dimension here (OP). Lever Models D3D-211 D3D-221 Type Level model D3D-211 D3D-221 D3D-231 D3D-231 Model OF max. 204 g TT (9.7) mm OP min. OP1 13 mm 11.5 mm (NC-OFF) 13 mm OP2 (NO-ON) 12 mm

Note: The dimensions OP1 and OP2 apply to the D3D-211 only. The D3D-221 and D3D-231 are SPST-NC and SPST-NO respectively and so therefore have only one corresponding dimension here (OP).

Miniature Door Switch D3D 3 ■ Mounting Panel Cutout ■ Connectors Dimensions The terminals connect to JST’s HL Connector. The HL Connector consists of the following components. Unit (mm) Contact: SSF-21T-P1.4 Housing: HLP-03V Omron does not sell the HL Connector. Contact the following. J.S.T. Manufacturing Co., Ltd. (Japan) Tel: (81) 6-6968-6855 Fax: (81) 6-6964-2085 Web: www.jst.com J.S.T. (U.K.) Ltd. (United Kingdom) Tel: (44) 1986-874131 Fax: (44) 1986-874276 J.S.T. Corporation (U.S.A.) Tel: (1)847-473-1957 Toll free: (800) 947-1110 Fax: (1)847-473-1373 J.S.T. (H.K.) Co. Ltd. (Hong Kong) Tel: (852)24137979 Fax: (852)24111193

Precautions

■ Cautions Wiring Do not use the switch with a large force applied to the connector or Handling lead wire. Doing so may result in rattling or contact failure. Do not expose the switch to shocks, such as by dropping it. Doing so Storage Environment may damage or deform the switch. Do not apply lubrication to the sliding parts, such as pushbuttons or Storing the switch in a plastic bag will help prevent discoloration due actuators. Doing so may result in faulty operation or contact failure. to sulfuration of the (silver-plated) terminals. In order to ensure stable contact force for NO contacts, use an Do not use the switch in locations subject to harmful gases or to high operating stroke of at least 5 mm. temperatures or humidity levels. Depending on the location, it is recommended that switches be inspected between 3 and 6 months after ■ Correct Use the date of manufacture. Micro Loads Mounting Even when using the switch within the operating range, if there are This product does not have waterproof or drip-proof construction. inrush currents or surges, it may decrease the durability of the Ensure that water does not enter the switch interior. In particular, do switch. If necessary, insert a contact protection circuit. not use the switch in locations where water may be spilled or flow over the switch. Doing so may result in deterioration of the insulation.

4 Miniature Door Switch D3D Certain Terms and Conditions of Sale

1. Offer; Acceptance. These terms and conditions (these "Terms") are deemed 12. Warranties. (a) Exclusive Warranty. Seller's exclusive warranty is that the part of all catalogs, manuals or other documents, whether electronic or in writ- Goods will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of ing, relating to the sale of goods or services (collectively, the "Goods") by twelve months from the date of sale by Seller (or such other period expressed Omron Electronics LLC and its subsidiary companies ("Seller"). Seller hereby in writing by Seller). Seller disclaims all other warranties, express or implied. objects to any terms or conditions proposed in Buyer's purchase order or other (b) Limitations. SELLER MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, documents which are inconsistent with, or in addition to, these Terms. Please EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ABOUT NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABIL- contact your Omron representative to confirm any additional terms for sales ITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE GOODS. from your Omron company. BUYER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT IT ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE 2. Prices. All prices stated are current, subject to change without notice by GOODS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR Seller. Buyer agrees to pay the price in effect at time of shipment. INTENDED USE. Seller further disclaims all warranties and responsibility of 3. Discounts. Cash discounts, if any, will apply only on the net amount of any type for claims or expenses based on infringement by the Goods or other- invoices sent to Buyer after deducting transportation charges, taxes and wise of any intellectual property right. (c) Buyer Remedy. Seller's sole obliga- duties, and will be allowed only if (i) the invoice is paid according to Seller's tion hereunder shall be to replace (in the form originally shipped with Buyer payment terms and (ii) Buyer has no past due amounts owing to Seller. responsible for labor charges for removal or replacement thereof) the non- 4. Orders. Seller will accept no order less than $200 net billing. complying Good or, at Seller's election, to repay or credit Buyer an amount 5. Governmental Approvals. Buyer shall be responsible for, and shall bear all equal to the purchase price of the Good; provided that in no event shall Seller costs involved in, obtaining any government approvals required for the impor- be responsible for warranty, repair, indemnity or any other claims or expenses tation or sale of the Goods. regarding the Goods unless Seller's analysis confirms that the Goods were 6. Taxes. All taxes, duties and other governmental charges (other than general properly handled, stored, installed and maintained and not subject to contami- real property and income taxes), including any interest or penalties thereon, nation, abuse, misuse or inappropriate modification. Return of any goods by imposed directly or indirectly on Seller or required to be collected directly or Buyer must be approved in writing by Seller before shipment. Seller shall not indirectly by Seller for the manufacture, production, sale, delivery, importation, be liable for the suitability or unsuitability or the results from the use of Goods consumption or use of the Goods sold hereunder (including customs duties in combination with any electrical or electronic components, circuits, system and sales, excise, use, turnover and license taxes) shall be charged to and assemblies or any other materials or substances or environments. Any remitted by Buyer to Seller. advice, recommendations or information given orally or in writing, are not to be 7. Financial. If the financial position of Buyer at any time becomes unsatisfactory construed as an amendment or addition to the above warranty. to Seller, Seller reserves the right to stop shipments or require satisfactory 13. Damage Limits; Etc. SELLER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL, INDI- security or payment in advance. If Buyer fails to make payment or otherwise RECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, LOSS OF PROFITS OR PRODUC- comply with these Terms or any related agreement, Seller may (without liability TION OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE and in addition to other remedies) cancel any unshipped portion of Goods sold GOODS, WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED IN CONTRACT, WARRANTY, hereunder and stop any Goods in transit until Buyer pays all amounts, includ- NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY. Further, in no event shall liability of ing amounts payable hereunder, whether or not then due, which are owing to it Seller exceed the individual price of the Good on which liability is asserted. by Buyer. Buyer shall in any event remain liable for all unpaid accounts. 14. Indemnities. Buyer shall indemnify and hold harmless Seller, its affiliates and 8. Cancellation; Etc. Orders are not subject to rescheduling or cancellation its employees from and against all liabilities, losses, claims, costs and unless Buyer indemnifies Seller fully against all costs or expenses arising in expenses (including attorney's fees and expenses) related to any claim, inves- connection therewith. tigation, litigation or proceeding (whether or not Seller is a party) which arises 9. Force Majeure. Seller shall not be liable for any delay or failure in delivery or is alleged to arise from Buyer's acts or omissions under these Terms or in resulting from causes beyond its control, including earthquakes, fires, floods, any way with respect to the Goods. Without limiting the foregoing, Buyer (at strikes or other labor disputes, shortage of labor or materials, accidents to its own expense) shall indemnify and hold harmless Seller and defend or settle machinery, acts of sabotage, riots, delay in or lack of transportation or the any action brought against Seller to the extent that it is based on a claim that requirements of any government authority. any Good made to Buyer specifications infringed intellectual property rights of 10. Shipping; Delivery. Unless otherwise expressly agreed in writing by Seller: another party. a. Shipments shall be by a carrier selected by Seller; 15. Property; Confidentiality. The intellectual property embodied in the Goods is b. Such carrier shall act as the agent of Buyer and delivery to such carrier the exclusive property of Seller and its affiliates and Buyer shall not attempt to shall constitute delivery to Buyer; duplicate it in any way without the written permission of Seller. Notwithstand- c. All sales and shipments of Goods shall be FOB shipping point (unless oth- ing any charges to Buyer for engineering or tooling, all engineering and tooling erwise stated in writing by Seller), at which point title to and all risk of loss of shall remain the exclusive property of Seller. All information and materials the Goods shall pass from Seller to Buyer, provided that Seller shall retain a supplied by Seller to Buyer relating to the Goods are confidential and propri- security interest in the Goods until the full purchase price is paid by Buyer; etary, and Buyer shall limit distribution thereof to its trusted employees and d. Delivery and shipping dates are estimates only. strictly prevent disclosure to any third party. e. Seller will package Goods as it deems proper for protection against normal 16. Miscellaneous. (a) Waiver. No failure or delay by Seller in exercising any right handling and extra charges apply to special conditions. and no course of dealing between Buyer and Seller shall operate as a waiver 11. Claims. Any claim by Buyer against Seller for shortage or damage to the of rights by Seller. (b) Assignment. Buyer may not assign its rights hereunder Goods occurring before delivery to the carrier must be presented in writing to without Seller's written consent. (c) Amendment. These Terms constitute the Seller within 30 days of receipt of shipment and include the original transporta- entire agreement between Buyer and Seller relating to the Goods, and no pro- tion bill signed by the carrier noting that the carrier received the Goods from vision may be changed or waived unless in writing signed by the parties. Seller in the condition claimed. (d) Severability. If any provision hereof is rendered ineffective or invalid, such provision shall not invalidate any other provision. (e) Setoff. Buyer shall have no right to set off any amounts against the amount owing in respect of this invoice. (f) As used herein, "including" means "including without limitation".

Certain Precautions on Specifications and Use

1. Suitability of Use. Seller shall not be responsible for conformity with any stan- 2. Programmable Products. Seller shall not be responsible for the user's pro- dards, codes or regulations which apply to the combination of the Good in the gramming of a programmable Good, or any consequence thereof. Buyer's application or use of the Good. At Buyer's request, Seller will provide 3. Performance Data. Performance data given in this catalog is provided as a applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty. of use which apply to the Good. This information by itself is not sufficient for a It may represent the result of Seller's test conditions, and the user must corre- complete determination of the suitability of the Good in combination with the late it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the end product, machine, system, or other application or use. The following are Seller's Warranty and Limitations of Liability. some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given. 4. Change in Specifications. Product specifications and accessories may be This is not intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of this Good, changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons. It is our prac- nor is it intended to imply that the uses listed may be suitable for this Good: tice to change part numbers when published ratings or features are changed, (i) Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical or when significant construction changes are made. However, some specifica- interference, or conditions or uses not described in this document. tions of the Good may be changed without any notice. When in doubt, special (ii) Energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation part numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, vehicles, safety application. Please consult with your Seller's representative at any time to con- equipment, and installations subject to separate industry or government firm actual specifications of purchased Good. regulations. 5. Errors and Omissions. The information in this catalog has been carefully (iii) Systems, machines and equipment that could present a risk to life or checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no responsibility is assumed property. Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to for clerical, typographical or proofreading errors, or omissions. this Good. NEVER USE THE PRODUCT FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE SELLER'S PRODUCT IS PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM.

Miniature Door Switch D3D 5 Complete “Terms and Conditions of Sale” for product purchase and use are on Omron’s website at www.omron.com/oei – under the “About Us” tab, in the Legal Matters section.

ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527.

OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC OMRON CANADA, INC. OMRON ON-LINE 55 East Commerce Drive, Suite B 885 Milner Avenue Global - http://www.omron.com Schaumburg, IL 60173-5302 Toronto, Ontario M1B 5V8 USA - http://www.omron.com/oei 847-882-2288 416-286-6465 Canada - http://www.omron.ca

Cat. No. B107-E3-01 9/03/2.5M Specifications subject to change without notice Printed in USA

6 Miniature Door Switch D3D R Detection Switch D3K

Requires Only Minimal Operating Force

H Detects cards and paper sheets with a 3-gram operating force H Snap-fit onto 0.8, 1.0 or 1.2-mm-thick mounting objects H Connector terminals ensure easy wiring H Long 45-degree-stroke angle makes it easier to design a wide range of mechanisms H Long life ensured with 2,000,000 switching operations

Ordering Information

Item Part number Detection Switch D3K-B Note: Minimum order quantity is 100 pcs. Specifications

J CHARACTERISTICS Ratings 10 mA at 12 VDC (resistive load) Operating speed 0.1 to 100 mm/s Operating frequency Mechanical 30 operations/min Electrical 30 operations/min Insulation resistance 100 MΩ min. (at 250 VDC) Contact resistance 200 mΩ max. (initial value) Dielectric strength 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between contacts of same polarity 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between each terminal and ground Vibration resistance Malfunction: 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude (at a contact separation time of 1 ms max.) (see note) Shock resistance Malfunction: 300 m/s2 (30G) min. (at a contact separation time of 1 ms max.) (see note) Life expectancy Mechanical 2,000,000 operations min. at the rated operating frequency Electrical 2,000,000 operations min. at the rated operating frequency Enclosure rating IP00 Protection against electric shock Class III Ambient temperature Operating --10°C to 70°C (14°F to 158°F) with no icing Ambient humidity Operating 35% to 85% (at 5°C to 35°C) Weight Approx. 0.9 g

Note: These values are possible on condition that the actuator of the D3K is in the total travel position (TTP). D3K D3K

J OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS Characteristics OF max. 3 grams TTF max. 5 grams TTP max. 11.4 mm (5°) FP max. 28.7 mm (50°) OP 21.6±2 mm (30±5°)

J CONTACT FORM

Dimensions

Unit: mm (inch) J D3K

(0.20) 2.05 (0.08) 1 (0.04) 0.9 (0.04) (1.08)

(0.96)

(0.20)

(0.24) (0.54) (0.32)

(0.03) (0.04) (0.05) (0.1) (0.06) (0.09) (0.03) (0.12)

(0.42)

(0.74)

(0.07)

2.55 (0.26) (0.07)

252 D3K D3K

Precautions

J MOUNTING Refer to the following mounting hole dimensions and be sure that the burred side is opposite to the Switch mounting side. Mounting Hole Dimensions • Plate thickness t=0.8 • Plate thickness t=1.2

(0.68) (0.68) (0.34) (0.34) (0.08) (0.08) (0.14) (0.14)

(0.12) (0.12)

(0.10) (0.10)

1.9 0.05 dia. Two, R0.3 Two, ± Two, Two, R0.3 Two, R0.3 Two, 1.9±0.05 dia. Two, Two, R0.3 max. R0.3±0.1 R0.3±0.1 max. max. R0.5±0.1 R0.5±0.1 max.

• Plate thickness t=1.0 Contact your OMRON representatives if further mounting security is required for the prevention of rattling. (0.68) (0.34) (0.11) (0.11)

(0.12)

(0.10)

Two, R0.3 Two, 1.9±0.05 dia. Two, Two, R0.3 max. R0.5±0.1 R0.5±0.1 max.

253 D3K D3K

NOTE: DIMENSIONSSHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters to inches divide by 25.4.

Cat. No. GC SW6 04/01 Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in U.S.A. R Subminiature Snap Action Switch D3M

Saves Wiring Effort, Production Steps, and Time

H Easy wiring ensured through the Quick-Connect Terminals H External actuator mounts in either of two directions H Horizontal layout of terminals saves mounting space H Same internal mechanism as the OMRON SS Subminiature Snap Action Switch

Ordering Information

Actuator Actuator mounting position Contact type Part number Pin plunger ------SPST-NC D3M-01 SPST-NO D3M-01-3 Hinge lever High ratio operating SPST-NC D3M-01K1 position SPST-NO D3M-01K1-3 Standard operating position SPST-NC D3M-01L1 SPST-NO D3M-01L1-3 Hinge roller lever High ratio operating SPST-NC D3M-01K2 position SPST-NO D3M-01K2-3 Standard operating position SPST-NC D3M-01L2 SPST-NO D3M-01L2-3 Simulated roller lever High ratio operating SPST-NC D3M-01K3 position SPST-NO D3M-01K3-3 Standard operating position SPST-NC D3M-01L3

Simulated roller lever SPST-NO D3M-01L3-3

J CONNECTORS Refer to Wiring under the Precautions section of this data sheet. D3M D3M

Specifications

J CHARACTERISTICS

Permissible operating speed (see note 1) 0.1 mm/s to 1 m/s Permissible operating Mechanical 400 operations/min max. frequency Electrical 60 operations/min max. Insulation resistance 100 MΩ min. at 500 VDC Contact resistance (initial value) 100 mΩ max. including connector and 50-mm AWG28 lead wire resistance Dielectric strength Between terminals of the 1,000 VAC at 50/60 Hz for 1 min same polarity Between charged metal part 1,500 VAC at 50/60 Hz for 1 min and ground Between non-charged metal 1,500 VAC at 50/60 Hz for 1 min part and each terminal Vibration resistance Malfunction (See Note 2.) 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude for 1 ms max. with contacts closed or open. Shock resistance Destruction 1,000 m/s2 (approx. 100G) Malfunction (See Note 2.) 300 m/s2 (approx. 30G) for 1 ms max. with contacts closed or open. Life expectancy Mechanical 500,000 operations (at full-stroke operating speed of 10 mm/s at a frequency of 60 operations/min) Electrical 200,000 operations (at full-stroke operating speed of 10 mm/s at a frequency of 30 operations/min) Enclosure rating IP00 Degree of protection against electric shock Class I Proof tracking index (PTI) 175 Ambient temperature Operating --25°C to 85°C (with no icing) Ambient humidity Operating 85% max. Weight Approx. 2 g (pin plunger model)

Note: 1. The permissible operating speed applies to pin plunger models. 2. If a lever actuator model is used, the above vibration resistance conditions will apply when the actuator is in the maximum overtravel position.

J OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS

Characteristics Part number D3M-01 D3M-01K1 D3M-01L1 D3M-01K2 D3M-01L2 D3M-01K3 D3M-01L3 D3M-01-3 D3M-01K1-3 D3M-01L1-3 D3M-01K2-3 D3M-01L2-3 D3M-01K3-3 D3M-01L3-3 Max. operating force (OF) 153 gf 51 gf 102 gf 51 gf 102 gf 51 gf 102 gf Min. reset force (RF) 25 gf 6 gf 10 gf 6 gf 10 gf 6 gf 10 gf Min. pretravel (PT) 0.6 mm ------Min. overtravel (OT) 0.4 mm 1.2 mm 0.7 mm 1.2 mm 0.7 mm 1.2 mm 0.7 mm Max. movement differential 0.1 mm 0.8 mm 0.6 mm 0.8 mm 0.6 mm 0.8 mm 0.6 mm (MD) Max. free position (FP) -- 14.0 mm 11.5 mm 19.7 mm 17.2 mm 16.2 mm 13.6 mm Operating position (OP) 8.4±0.3 mm 10.0±0.8 mm 9.2±0.6 mm 15.7±0.8 mm 14.9±0.6 mm 12.2±0.8 mm 11.3±0.6 mm

Note: 1. A tolerance of ±0.4 mm applies to all of the above dimensions unless otherwise specified. 2. The operating characteristics apply when each actuator is moved in the direction indicated by the arrow and “A.”

48 D3M D3M

J CONTACT FORM SPST-NC SPST-NO

NC NO

COM COM

J APPROVED STANDARDS EN61058-1

UL1054 CSA C22.2 No.55

J RATINGS

Rated voltage Resistive load 30 VDC 0.1 A

Use the D3M in the following permissible operating range. ) V ( e g a t l o V

Permissible operating range

Prohibited range

Current (mA)

Minimum Applicable Load (Level N) Voltage Resistive load 5 VDC 1 mA

Refer to Minimum Load under the Precautions section of this data sheet

49 D3M D3M

Dimensions

Unit: mm (inch) J MOUNTING DIMENSIONS FOR ALL MODELS Use M2.3 screws, flat washers, and spring washers to mount the D3M securely. Make sure that the tightening torque applied to each screw is within a range from 2.3 to 2.7 kgf S cm.

Two, 2.4-dia. or M2.3 mounting hole

9.5 ± 0.1 (0.37 ± 0.004 )

J PIN PLUNGER D3M-01 D3M-01-3

Note: 1. The terminals connect to JST’s 7.2 Dipole XA Connector. (0.28) 2. The Dipole XA Connector consists of the following components. (See Note 2.) Contact: SAX-001T-P0.6 Housing: XAP-02V-1(13)

A 2.35 +0.1 3.5 7.6 -0.05 +0.004 (0.14) (See Note 2.) (0.30) (0.09-0.002 )

Free position 7.7 Operating 2.5 (0.30) 10 (0.10) (0.39) position

2.5 dia. 7 (0.10) (0.28) (See Note 1.) 9.5 ± 0.1 5.7 29.2 (0.37 ±0.004 ) (0.22) (1.15) 31.6 (1.24) +0.1 2.35 dia. -0.05 (0.09+0.004dia.) -0.002

J HINGE LEVER D3M-01K1 D3M-01K1-3

Note: 1. The terminals connect to JST’s Dipole XA Connector. 2. The Dipole XA Connector consists of the Stainless steel (t = 0.3) (See Note 2.) following components. Contact: SAX-001T-P0.6 Housing: XAP-02V-1(13) 12.9 (0.51) (See Note 2.) Free position Operating position

2.5 dia. (See Note 1.) 2.35+0.1 dia. -0.05

50 D3M D3M

J HINGE LEVER D3M-01L1 D3M-01L1-3

Note: 1. The terminals connect to JST’s Dipole X Connector. 2. The Dipole XA Connector consists of the Stainless steel (t = 0.3) (See Note 2.) following components. Contact: SAX-001T-P0.6 Housing: XAP-02V-1(13)

(See Note 2.)

Free position Operating position

2.5 dia. (See Note 1.) 2.35+0.1 dia. -0.05

J HINGE ROLLER LEVER D3M-01K2 D3M-01K2-3

Note: 1. The terminals connect to JST’s Dipole XA Connector. 2. The Dipole XA Connector consists of the following components. Stainless steel (t = 0.3) (See Note 2.) Contact: SAX-001T-P0.6 Housing: XAP-02V-1(13) 4.8 dia. x 3.2 polyacetal resin roller

Free position Operating (See Note 2.) position

2.5 dia. (See Note 1.) 2.35+0.1 dia. -0.05

51 D3M D3M

Unit: mm (inch)

J HINGE ROLLER LEVER D3M-01L2 D3M-01L2-3 Note: 1. The terminals connect to JST’s Dipole XA Connector. 2. The Dipole XA Connector consists of the following components. Stainless steel (t = 0.3) Contact: SAX-001T-P0.6 (See Note 2.) Housing: XAP-02V-1(13)

4.8 dia. x 3.2 polyacetal resin roller

Free position Operating (See Note 2.) position

(See Note 1.) 2.5 dia. 2.35+0.1 dia. -0.05

J SIMULATED ROLLER LEVER D3M-01K3 D3M-01K3-3 Note: 1. The terminals connect to JST’s Dipole XA Connector. 2. The Dipole XA Connector consists of the Stainless steel (t = 0.3) (See Note 2.) following components. Contact: SAX-001T-P0.6 Housing: XAP-02V-1(13)

(See Note 2.) Free position Operating position

2.5 dia. (See Note 1.) 2.35+0.1 dia. -0.05

J SIMULATED ROLLER LEVER D3M-01L3 D3M-01L3-3

(See Note 2.) Free position Operating position

2.5 dia. (See Note 1.) 2.35+0.1 dia. -0.05

52 D3M D3M

Precautions

J MOUNTING J WIRING To avoid an electric shock or a fire, be sure to turn OFF the D3M The terminals connect to JST’s Dipole XA Connector. before mounting, removing, wiring, or servicing. The Dipole XA Connector consists of the following components. Make sure that the surface to which the D3M is mounted is flat. If Contact: SAX-001T-P0.6 the surface is not flat, the housing may distort, and the D3M may Housing: XAP-02V-1 malfunction, or the housing may crack. OMRON does not sell the Dipole XA Connector. Contact the following. J OPERATING STROKE J.S.T. Corporation (U.S.A.) Tel: (1)847-473-1957 Make sure that the dog is separated from the actuator when the Fax: (1)847-473-0144 actuator is in the free position and that the actuator is pressed appropriately when the D3M is actuated. The actuator must not be pressed excessively to reach the maximum overtravel ! Caution position, or the D3M may be damaged. The voltage and current applied to the D3M must be within the rated ranges when it is turned ON, turned OFF, and in opera- Make sure the actuator is pressed in the direction where the D3M tion, orthe servicelife ofthe D3Mmay beshortened. Alsonote is actuated. that if inappropriate voltage and current are applied, the D3M may radiate heat and burn. J MINIMUM LOAD If the load causes inrush current, even though the D3M is in operation within the permissible operating range, the life of the D3M may be shortened. In this case, insert a contact protection circuit. The minimum applicable load is on the basis of level N, that is, a reliable rate of 60% (λ60), in accordance with JIS C5003. This rate (λ60 = 0.5 x 10--6/operations) means that the D3M is expected to have operational failure at least once per 2,000,000 operations.

53 D3M D3M

NOTE: DIMENSIONSSHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters to inches divide by 25.4.

Cat. No. GC SW6 04/01 Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in U.S.A. Miniature Basic Switch D3V

Reliable Basic Switch with External Lever

• Available by 0.1 A, 6 A, 11 A, 16 A and 21 A models, all with self-cleaning contacts. 0.1 A utilizes gold alloy crossbar contacts for high reliability at low loads. • Available with internally or externally fitted levers, and 2 fixing positions for external levers. • Conforms to EN61058-1 UL1054. • Right-angle plunger option available in some models. •200°C version for UL858/UL873 are in development for 0.1 A and 6 A ratings.

Ordering Information

■ Model Number Legend

D3V-@@@@-@@@-@-@ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 89

1. Ratings 6. Terminals 21: 20 (4) A at 250 VAC A: Solder/quick-connect terminal (#187) 16: 16 (3) A at 250 VAC C2: Quick-connect terminal (#187) 11: 11 (3) A at 250 VAC C: Quick-connect terminal (#250) 6: 6 (2) A at 250 VAC (optional without surge creepage tab flush around terminals.) 01: 0.1 A at 125 VAC 7. Maximum Operating Force 2. Contact Gap None: 1 mm (F gap) 5: 1.96 N {200 gf} 4A: 1.23 N {125 gf} G: 0.5 mm (G gap) 4: 0.98 N {100 gf} 3. Actuator None: Pin plunger 3: 0.49 N {50 gf} 2: 0.25 N {25 gf} 1: Short hinge lever 2: Hinge lever Note: These values are for the plunger models. 3: Long hinge lever 8. Mounting Hole Size 4: Simulated roller lever None: 3.1 mm 5: Short hinge roller lever K: 2.9 mm 6: Hinge roller lever 9. Special Code 4. Hinge Position None: Standard None: Internal/Far from plunger H: High temperature (125°C) M: External/Far from plunger E: Special rating: 21 (8) A K: External/Near plunger 5. Contact Form 1: SPDT 2: SPST-NC 3: SPST-NO

Miniature Basic Switch D3V 1 ■ Available Combinations

Model D3V-21 D3V-16 D3V-11 D3V-6 D3V-01

Rated current 21 A 16 A 11 A 6 A 0.1 A

OF 1.23 N 1.96 N 0.98 N 1.96 N 0.98 N 0.49 N 1.96 N 0.98 N 0.49 N 0.49 N 0.25 N {125 gf} {200 gf} {100 gf} {200 gf} {100 gf} {50 gf} {200 gf} {100 gf} {50 gf} {50 gf} {25 gf}

Heat resis- Contact G F G F/G F G F G G F/G F G G F F tance gap 0.5 mm 1 mm 0.5 mm 1 mm or 1 mm 0.5 mm 1 mm 0.5 0.5 mm 1 mm or 1 mm 0.5 0.5 mm 1 mm 1 mm Terminals 0.5 mm mm 0.5 mm mm

Standard #187 ●● (85°C) #250 ● ❍❍

Standard #187 ●❍ ❍ ● ❍ ● ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ❍ ● (105°C) #250 ●❍ ❍ ● ❍ ● ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ❍ ●

High tem- #187 ❍❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ perature (125°C) #250 ❍❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

Note: 1. ●: Standard ❍: Semi-standard 2. Consult OMRON for models with standard approval.

2 Miniature Basic Switch D3V ■ List of Models

21 A (OF: 1.23 N {125 gf})

Actuator Hinge position Contact form (far from plunger) SPDT SPST-NC SPST-NO Plunger --- D3V-21G-1@4A-∆ D3V-21G-2@4A-∆ D3V-21G-3@4A-∆ Short hinge lever Internal D3V-21G1-1@4A-∆ D3V-21G1-2@4A-∆ D3V-21G1-3@4A-∆ External (M) D3V-21G1M-1@4A-∆ D3V-21G1M-2@4A-∆ D3V-21G1M-3@4A-∆ Hinge lever Internal D3V-21G2-1@4A-∆ D3V-21G2-2@4A-∆ D3V-21G2-3@4A-∆ External (M) D3V-21G2M-1@4A-∆ D3V-21G2M-2@4A-∆ D3V-21G2M-3@4A-∆ Long hinge lever Internal D3V-21G3-1@4A-∆ D3V-21G3-2@4A-∆ D3V-21G3-3@4A-∆ External (M) D3V-21G3M-1@4A-∆ D3V-21G3M-2@4A-∆ D3V-21G3M-3@4A-∆ Simulated roller lever Internal D3V-21G4-1@4A-∆ D3V-21G4-2@4A-∆ D3V-21G4-3@4A-∆ External (M) D3V-21G4M-1@4A-∆ D3V-21G4M-2@4A-∆ D3V-21G4M-3@4A-∆ Short hinge roller lever Internal D3V-21G5-1@4A-∆ D3V-21G5-2@4A-∆ D3V-21G5-3@4A-∆ External (M) D3V-21G5M-1@4A-∆ D3V-21G5M-2@4A-∆ D3V-21G5M-3@4A-∆ Hinge roller lever Internal D3V-21G6-1@4A-∆ D3V-21G6-2@4A-∆ D3V-21G6-3@4A-∆ External (M) D3V-21G6M-1@4A-∆ D3V-21G6M-2@4A-∆ D3V-21G6M-3@4A-∆

16 A (OF: 1.96 N {200 gf})

Actuator Hinge position Contact form (far from plunger) SPDT SPST-NC SPST-NO Plunger --- D3V-16-1@5-∆ D3V-16-2@5-∆ D3V-16-3@5-∆ Short hinge lever Internal D3V-161-1@5-∆ D3V-161-2@5-∆ D3V-161-3@5-∆ External (M) D3V-161M-1@5-∆ D3V-161M-2@5-∆ D3V-161M-3@5-∆ Hinge lever Internal D3V-162-1@5-∆ D3V-162-2@5-∆ D3V-162-3@5-∆ External (M) D3V-162M-1@5-∆ D3V-162M-2@5-∆ D3V-162M-3@5-∆ Long hinge lever Internal D3V-163-1@5-∆ D3V-163-2@5-∆ D3V-163-3@5-∆ External (M) D3V-163M-1@5-∆ D3V-163M-2@5-∆ D3V-163M-3@5-∆ Simulated roller lever Internal D3V-164-1@5-∆ D3V-164-2@5-∆ D3V-164-3@5-∆ External (M) D3V-164M-1@5-∆ D3V-164M-2@5-∆ D3V-164M-3@5-∆ Short hinge roller lever Internal D3V-165-1@5-∆ D3V-165-2@5-∆ D3V-165-3@5-∆ External (M) D3V-165M-1@5-∆ D3V-165M-2@5-∆ D3V-165M-3@5-∆ Hinge roller lever Internal D3V-166-1@5-∆ D3V-166-2@5-∆ D3V-166-3@5-∆ External (M) D3V-166M-1@5-∆ D3V-166M-2@5-∆ D3V-166M-3@5-∆

Note: The @ in the model number is for the terminal code. A: Solder/quick-connect terminals (#187) C2: Quick-connect terminals (#187) C: Quick-connect terminals (#250) The ∆ in the model number is for the mounting hole size. None: 3.1 mm K: 2.9 mm

Miniature Basic Switch D3V 3 16 A (OF: 0.98 N {100 gf})

Actuator Hinge position Contact form (far from plunger) SPDT SPST-NC SPST-NO Plunger --- D3V-16-1@4-∆ D3V-16-2@4-∆ D3V-16-3@4-∆ Short hinge lever Internal D3V-161-1@4-∆ D3V-161-2@4-∆ D3V-161-3@4-∆ External (M) D3V-161M-1@4-∆ D3V-161M-2@4-∆ D3V-161M-3@4-∆ Hinge lever Internal D3V-162-1@4-∆ D3V-162-2@4-∆ D3V-162-3@4-∆ External (M) D3V-162M-1@4-∆ D3V-162M-2@4-∆ D3V-162M-3@4-∆ Long hinge lever Internal D3V-163-1@4-∆ D3V-163-2@4-∆ D3V-163-3@4-∆ External (M) D3V-163M-1@4-∆ D3V-163M-2@4-∆ D3V-163M-3@4-∆ Simulated roller lever Internal D3V-164-1@4-∆ D3V-164-2@4-∆ D3V-164-3@4-∆ External (M) D3V-164M-1@4-∆ D3V-164M-2@4-∆ D3V-164M-3@4-∆ Short hinge roller lever Internal D3V-165-1@4-∆ D3V-165-2@4-∆ D3V-165-3@4-∆ External (M) D3V-165M-1@4-∆ D3V-165M-2@4-∆ D3V-165M-3@4-∆ Hinge roller lever Internal D3V-166-1@4-∆ D3V-166-2@4-∆ D3V-166-3@4-∆ External (M) D3V-166M-1@4-∆ D3V-166M-2@4-∆ D3V-166M-3@4-∆

11 A (OF: 1.96 N {200 gf})

Actuator Hinge position Contact form (far from plunger) SPDT SPST-NC SPST-NO Plunger --- D3V-11-1@5-∆ D3V-11-2@5-∆ D3V-11-3@5-∆ Short hinge lever Internal D3V-111-1@5-∆ D3V-111-2@5-∆ D3V-111-3@5-∆ External (M) D3V-111M-1@5-∆ D3V-111M-2@5-∆ D3V-111M-3@5-∆ Hinge lever Internal D3V-112-1@5-∆ D3V-112-2@5-∆ D3V-112-3@5-∆ External (M) D3V-112M-1@5-∆ D3V-112M-2@5-∆ D3V-112M-3@5-∆ Long hinge lever Internal D3V-113-1@5-∆ D3V-113-2@5-∆ D3V-113-3@5-∆ External (M) D3V-113M-1@5-∆ D3V-113M-2@5-∆ D3V-113M-3@5-∆ Simulated roller lever Internal D3V-114-1@5-∆ D3V-114-2@5-∆ D3V-114-3@5-∆ External (M) D3V-114M-1@5-∆ D3V-114M-2@5-∆ D3V-114M-3@5-∆ Short hinge roller lever Internal D3V-115-1@5-∆ D3V-115-2@5-∆ D3V-115-3@5-∆ External (M) D3V-115M-1@5-∆ D3V-115M-2@5-∆ D3V-115M-3@5-∆ Hinge roller lever Internal D3V-116-1@5-∆ D3V-116-2@5-∆ D3V-116-3@5-∆ External (M) D3V-116M-1@5-∆ D3V-116M-2@5-∆ D3V-116M-3@5-∆

4 Miniature Basic Switch D3V 11 A (OF: 0.98 N {100 gf})

Actuator Hinge position Contact form (far from plunger) SPDT SPST-NC SPST-NO Plunger --- D3V-11-1@4-∆ D3V-11-2@4-∆ D3V-11-3@4-∆ Short hinge lever Internal D3V-111-1@4-∆ D3V-111-2@4-∆ D3V-111-3@4-∆ External (M) D3V-111M-1@4-∆ D3V-111M-2@4-∆ D3V-111M-3@4-∆ Hinge lever Internal D3V-112-1@4-∆ D3V-112-2@4-∆ D3V-112-3@4-∆ External (M) D3V-112M-1@4-∆ D3V-112M-2@4-∆ D3V-112M-3@4-∆ Long hinge lever Internal D3V-113-1@4-∆ D3V-113-2@4-∆ D3V-113-3@4-∆ External (M) D3V-113M-1@4-∆ D3V-113M-2@4-∆ D3V-113M-3@4-∆ Simulated roller lever Internal D3V-114-1@4-∆ D3V-114-2@4-∆ D3V-114-3@4-∆ External (M) D3V-114M-1@4-∆ D3V-114M-2@4-∆ D3V-114M-3@4-∆ Short hinge roller lever Internal D3V-115-1@4-∆ D3V-115-2@4-∆ D3V-115-3@4-∆ External (M) D3V-115M-1@4-∆ D3V-115M-2@4-∆ D3V-115M-3@4-∆ Hinge roller lever Internal D3V-116-1@4-∆ D3V-116-2@4-∆ D3V-116-3@4-∆ External (M) D3V-116M-1@4-∆ D3V-116M-2@4-∆ D3V-116M-3@4-∆

11 A (OF: 0.49 N {50 gf})

Actuator Hinge position Contact form (far from plunger) SPDT SPST-NC SPST-NO Plunger --- D3V-11G-1@3-∆ D3V-11G-2@4-∆ D3V-11G-3@3-∆ Short hinge lever Internal D3V-11G1-1@3-∆ D3V-11G1-2@4-∆ D3V-11G1-3@3-∆ External (M) D3V-11G1M-1@3-∆ D3V-11G1M-2@3-∆ D3V-11G1M-3@3-∆ Hinge lever Internal D3V-11G2-1@3-∆ D3V-11G2-2@3-∆ D3V-11G2-3@3-∆ External (M) D3V-11G2M-1@3-∆ D3V-11G2M-2@3-∆ D3V-11G2M-3@3-∆ Long hinge lever Internal D3V-11G3-1@3-∆ D3V-11G3-2@3-∆ D3V-11G3-3@3-∆ External (M) D3V-11G3M-1@3-∆ D3V-11G3M-2@3-∆ D3V-11G3M-3@3-∆ Simulated roller lever Internal D3V-11G4-1@3-∆ D3V-11G4-2@3-∆ D3V-11G4-3@3-∆ External (M) D3V-11G4M-1@3-∆ D3V-11G4M-2@3-∆ D3V-11G4M-3@3-∆ Short hinge roller lever Internal D3V-11G5-1@3-∆ D3V-11G5-2@3-∆ D3V-11G5-3@3-∆ External (M) D3V-11G5M-1@3-∆ D3V-11G5M-2@3-∆ D3V-11G5M-3@3-∆ Hinge roller lever Internal D3V-11G6-1@3-∆ D3V-11G6-2@3-∆ D3V-11G6-3@3-∆ External (M) D3V-11G6M-1@3-∆ D3V-11G6M-2@3-∆ D3V-11G6M-3@3-∆

Miniature Basic Switch D3V 5 6 A (OF: 0.98 N {100 gf})

Actuator Hinge position Contact form (far from plunger) SPDT SPST-NC SPST-NO Plunger --- D3V-6-1@4-∆ D3V-6-2@4-∆ D3V-6-3@4-∆ Short hinge lever Internal D3V-61-1@4-∆ D3V-61-2@4-∆ D3V-61-3@4-∆ External (M) D3V-61M-1@4-∆ D3V-61M-2@4-∆ D3V-61M-3@4-∆ Hinge lever Internal D3V-62-1@4-∆ D3V-62-2@4−∆ D3V-62-3@4-∆ External (M) D3V-62M-1@4-∆ D3V-62M-2@4-∆ D3V-62M-3@4-∆ Long hinge lever Internal D3V-63-1@4-∆ D3V-63-2@4-∆ D3V-63-3@4-∆ External (M) D3V-63M-1@4-∆ D3V-63M-2@4-∆ D3V-63M-3@4-∆ Simulated roller lever Internal D3V-64-1@4-∆ D3V-64-2@4-∆ D3V-64-3@4-∆ External (M) D3V-64M-1@4-∆ D3V-64M-2@4-∆ D3V-64M-3@4-∆ Short hinge roller lever Internal D3V-65-1@4-∆ D3V-65-2@4-∆ D3V-65-3@4-∆ External (M) D3V-65M-1@4-∆ D3V-65M-2@4-∆ D3V-65M-3@4-∆ Hinge roller lever Internal D3V-66-1@4-∆ D3V-66-2@4-∆ D3V-66-3@4-∆ External (M) D3V-66M-1@4-∆ D3V-66M-2@4-∆ D3V-66M-3@4-∆

6 A (OF: 0.49 N {50 gf})

Actuator Hinge position Contact form (far from plunger) SPDT SPST-NC SPST-NO Plunger --- D3V-6G-1@3-∆ D3V-6G-2@3-∆ D3V-6G-3@3-∆ Short hinge lever Internal D3V-6G1-1@3-∆ D3V-6G1-2@3-∆ D3V-6G1-3@3-∆ External (M) D3V-6G1M-1@3-∆ D3V-6G1M-2@3-∆ D3V-6G1M-3@3-∆ Hinge lever Internal D3V-6G2-1@3-∆ D3V-6G2-2@3-∆ D3V-6G2-3@3-∆ External (M) D3V-6G2M-1@3-∆ D3V-6G2M-2@3-∆ D3V-6G2M-3@3-∆ Long hinge lever Internal D3V-6G3-1@3-∆ D3V-6G3-2@3-∆ D3V-6G3-3@3-∆ External (M) D3V-6G3M-1@3-∆ D3V-6G3M-2@3-∆ D3V-6G3M-3@3-∆ Simulated roller lever Internal D3V-6G4-1@3-∆ D3V-6G4-2@3-∆ D3V-6G4-3@3-∆ External (M) D3V-6G4M-1@3-∆ D3V-6G4M-2@3-∆ D3V-6G4M-3@3-∆ Short hinge roller lever Internal D3V-6G5-1@3-∆ D3V-6G5-2@3-∆ D3V-6G5-3@3-∆ External (M) D3V-6G5M-1@3-∆ D3V-6G5M-2@3-∆ D3V-6G5M-3@3-∆ Hinge roller lever Internal D3V-6G6-1@3-∆ D3V-6G6-2@3-∆ D3V-6G6-3@3-∆ External (M) D3V-6G6M-1@3-∆ D3V-6G6M-2@3-∆ D3V-6G6M-3@3-∆

6 Miniature Basic Switch D3V 01 A (OF: 0.49 N {50 gf})

Actuator Hinge position Contact form (far from plunger) SPDT SPST-NC SPST-NO Plunger --- D3V-01-1@3-∆ D3V-01-2@3-∆ D3V-01-3@3-∆ Short hinge lever Internal D3V-011-1@3-∆ D3V-011-2@3-∆ D3V-011-3@3-∆ External (M) D3V-011M-1@3-∆ D3V-011M-2@3-∆ D3V-011M-3@3-∆ Hinge lever Internal D3V-012-1@3-∆ D3V-012-2@3-∆ D3V-012-3@3-∆ External (M) D3V-012M-1@3-∆ D3V-012M-2@3-∆ D3V-012M-3@3-∆ Long hinge lever Internal D3V-013-1@3-∆ D3V-013-2@3-∆ D3V-013-3@3-∆ External (M) D3V-013M-1@3-∆ D3V-013M-2@3-∆ D3V-013M-3@3-∆ Simulated roller lever Internal D3V-014-1@3-∆ D3V-014-2@3-∆ D3V-014-3@3-∆ External (M) D3V-014M-1@3-∆ D3V-014M-2@3-∆ D3V-014M-3@3-∆ Short hinge roller lever Internal D3V-015-1@3-∆ D3V-015-2@3-∆ D3V-015-3@3-∆ External (M) D3V-015M-1@3-∆ D3V-015M-2@3-∆ D3V-015M-3@3-∆ Hinge roller lever Internal D3V-016-1@3-∆ D3V-016-2@3-∆ D3V-016-3@3-∆ External (M) D3V-016M-1@3-∆ D3V-016M-2@3-∆ D3V-016M-3@3-∆

01 A (OF: 0.25 N {25 gf})

Actuator Hinge position Contact form (far from plunger) SPDT SPST-NC SPST-NO Plunger --- D3V-01-1@2-∆ D3V-01-2@2-∆ D3V-01-3@2-∆ Note: The @ in the model number is for the terminal code. A: Solder/quick-connect terminals (#187) C2: Quick-connect terminals (#187) C: Quick-connect terminals (#250) The ∆ in the model number is for the mounting hole size. None: 3.1 mm K: 2.9 mm

Miniature Basic Switch D3V 7 Specifications

■ Ratings

Type Rated voltage Non-inductive load Inductive load Resistive load Lamp load Inductive load Motor load NC NO NC NO NC NO NC NO D3V-21 250 VAC 21 A 3 A 12 A 4 A 8 VDC 21 A 5 A 12 A 7 A 30 VDC 14 A 5 A 12 A 5 A 125 VDC 0.6 A 0.1 A 0.6 A 0.1 A 250 VDC 0.3 A 0.05 A 0.3 A 0.05 A D3V-16 250 VAC 16 A 2 A 10 A 3 A 8 VDC 16 A 4 A 10 A 6 A 30 VDC 10 A 4 A 10 A 4 A 125 VDC 0.6 A 0.1 A 0.6 A 0.1 A 250 VDC 0.3 A 0.05 A 0.3 A 0.05 A D3V-11 250 VAC 11 A 1.5 A 6 A 2 A 8 VDC 11 A 3 A 6 A 3 A 30 VDC 6 A 3 A 6 A 3 A 125 VDC 0.6 A 0.1 A 0.6 A 0.1 A 250 VDC 0.3 A 0.05 A 0.3 A 0.05 A D3V-6 250 VAC 6 A 3 A 4 A --- 8 VDC 6 A 3 A 4 A --- 30 VDC 6 A 3 A 4 A 125 VDC 0.4 A 0.1 A 0.4 A 250 VDC 0.3 A 0.05 A 0.2 A D3V-01 125 VAC 0.1 A ------8 VDC 0.1 A ------30 VDC 0.1 A Note: 1. The above current values are the normal current values of models with a contact gap of 1 mm (gap F), which vary with the normal current values of models with a contact gap of 0.5 mm (gap G). 2. Inductive load has a power factor of 0.4 min. (AC) and a time constant of 7 ms max. (DC). 3. Lamp load has an inrush current of 10 times the steady-state current. 4. Motor load has an inrush current of 6 times the steady-state current. 5. The ratings values apply under the following test conditions: Ambient temperature: 20±2°C Ambient humidity: 65±5% Operating frequency: 30 operations/min

8 Miniature Basic Switch D3V ■ Characteristics

Operating speed 0.1 mm to 1 m/s (plunger models without levers) Operating frequency Mechanical: 600 operations/min Electrical: 60 operations/min Insulation resistance 100 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC) Contact resistance (initial values) D3V-21: 50 mΩ max. D3V-16, D3V-11, D3V-6: 30 mΩ max. D3V-01, 0.49 N {50 gf}: 50 mΩ max. 0.25 N {25 gf}: 100 mΩ max. Dielectric strength (see note 1) 1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of the same polarity 2,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between current-carrying metal parts and ground, and between each terminal and non-current-carrying metal parts Vibration resistance (see note 2) Malfunction: 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude Shock resistance (see note 2) Destruction: 400 m/s2 {approx. 40G} max. Malfunction: 100 m/s2 {approx. 10G} max. Durability (see note 3) Mechanical: 10,000,000 operations min. Electrical: D3V-21: 50,000 operations min. D3V-16: 100,000 operations min. D3V-11: 200,000 operations min. D3V-6, D3V-01: 500,000 operations min. Degree of protection IEC IP00 Degree of protection against electric Class I shock Proof tracking index (PTI) 250 Ambient operating temperature D3V-21, D3V-01: –25°C to 85°C (with no icing) D3V-16, D3V-11, D3V-6: –25°C to 105°C (with no icing) Ambient operating humidity 85% max. (for 5°C to 35°C) Weight Approx. 6.2 g (plunger models without levers)

Note: 1. The dielectric strength values shown in the table are for models with a Separator. 2. For plunger models, the above values apply for use at both the free position and total travel position. For lever models, they apply at the total travel position. 3. For testing conditions, contact your OMRON sales representative. ■ Approved Standards

UL1054 (File No. E41515) CSA C22.2 No.55 (File No. LR21642) (Only standard ratings are listed.)

Rated voltage D3V-21G D3V-16 D3V-16G D3V-11 D3V-11G D3V-6 D3V-6G D3V-01 125 VAC 21 A, 1/2 HP 16 A, 1/2 HP 16 A, 1/2 HP 11 A, 1/2 HP 11 A, 1/2 HP 6 A, 1/4 HP 6 A, 1/4 HP 0.1 A (See note.) 250 VAC 21 A, 1/2 HP 16 A, 1/2 HP 16 A, 1/2 HP 11 A, 1/2 HP 11 A, 1/2 HP 6 A, 1/4 HP 6 A, 1/4 HP --- (See note.) 125 VDC --- 0.6 A 0.1 A 0.6 A 0.1 A ------250 VDC --- 0.3 A --- 0.3 A ------

Note: Approval projected. EN 61058-1: 1992+A1: 1993 (License No. 119151L)

Rated voltage D3V-21G D3V-16 D3V-11 D3V-6 D3V-01 125 VAC ------0.1 A 250 VAC 20 (4) A 16 (3) A 11 (3) A 6 (2) A ---

Testing conditions: 50,000 operations, T85 (0°C to 85°C) for D3V-21/D3V-01, T105 (0°C to 105°C) for D3V-16/D3V-11/D3V-6

Rated voltage D3V-21G 250 VAC 21 (8) A

Testing conditions: 10,000 operations, T85 (0°C to 85°C)

Miniature Basic Switch D3V 9 ■ Contact Specifications

Item D3V-21 D3V-16 D3V-11 D3V-6 D3V-01 Contact Specification Rivet Crossbar Material Silver alloy Gold alloy Gap 0.5 mm 1 mm (F gap type) or 0.5 mm (G gap type) 1.0 mm (standard value) Inrush current NC 50 A max. 40 A max. 24 A max. 15 A max. --- NO Minimum applicable load 160 mA at 5 VDC 1 mA at 5 VDC ■ Contact Form

SPDT SPST-NC SPST-NO

NC NC NO

COM COM COM

Dimensions

Unit: mm (inch) ■ Terminals

Terminal type Solder/Quick-connect Terminal Quick-connect Terminal Quick-connect Terminal (#187) (A) (#187) (C2) (#250) (C) COM (5.5) (5.5) (4.9) (6.5) (6.5) (7.7)

2.9 2.9 3.2

t = 0.5 (10) t = 0.5 (10) (12.0) Three, solder/quick-connect Three, quick-connect t = 0.8 terminals (#187) terminals (#187) Three, quick-connect terminals (#250)

Terminal 6.35 6.35 8 dimensions 3.2 (see note) 3.2 3.95

4.75±0.1 4.75±0.1 6.35±0.1 1.6-dia. terminal hole 2.4 dia. 1.6 dia. Note: Indicates the length to the center of the 1.6-dia. holes 1.65-dia. terminal hole

Note: The table above is for the SPDT contact specifications. Two terminals will be available for SPST-NO or SPST-NC contact specifications. For terminal positions, refer to the above Contact Form. ■ Mounting Holes

Two, 3.1-dia. mounting holes or M3 screw holes

10.3±0.1

22.2±0.1

10 Miniature Basic Switch D3V ■ Dimensions and Operating Characteristics Note: 1. All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated. 2. Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ±0.4 mm applies to all dimensions. 3. The following illustrations and drawings are for quick-connect terminals (#187) (terminals C2). D3V models incorporate terminals A and C. These models are different from #187 models in terminal size only. Terminals A and C are omitted from the following drawings. Refer to Terminals on page 10 for these terminals. 4. The following illustrations and drawings are for models with the hinge position set to external/further than plunger. Models with the hinge position set to internal position are not shown here. For details about the internal position models, contact your OMRON sales representative. Operating characteristics are the same for these two types of models. 5. The @ in the model number is for the terminal code. 6. The ∆ in the model number is for the mounting hole size. The hole size in the following illustrations of models with a suffix “K” in the ∆ is 2.9 mm. 7. The operating characteristics are for operation in the A direction (➡ ). Plunger Models

D3V-21G-1 4-∆ A ➡ D3V-16-1 5-∆ D3V-11-1 5-∆ D3V-11-1 4-∆ D3V-6-1 4-∆ D3V-6G-1 3-∆ D3V-01-1 2-∆ D3V-01-1 3-∆ t=0.5 Three, quick-connect terminals (#187)

Model D3V-21G-1@4A-∆ D3V-16-1@5-∆ D3V-11-1@4-∆ D3V-6G-1@3-∆ D3V-01-1@3-∆ D3V-01-1@2-∆ D3V-11-1@5-∆ D3V-6-1@4-∆ OF max. 125 g {1.23 N} 200 g {1.96 N} 100 g {0.98 N} 50 g {0.49 N} 50 g {0.49 N} 25 g {0.25 N} RF min. 20 g {0.20 N} 50 g {0.49 N} 15 g {0.15 N} 5 g {0.05 N} 5 g {0.05 N} 3 g {0.03 N} PT max. 1.2 mm 1.2 mm 1.2 mm OT min. 1.0 mm 1.0 mm 1.0 mm MD max. 0.3 mm 0.4 mm (F gap type) or 0.3 mm (G gap type) 0.4 mm OP 14.7±0.4 mm Short Hinge Lever Models

D3V-21GM-1 4A-∆ A D3V-161M-1 5-∆ ➡ D3V-111M-1 5-∆ D3V-111M-1 4-∆ D3V-61M-1 4-∆ D3V-6G1M-1 3-∆ D3V-01-1 2-∆ D3V-01M1-1 3-∆ t=0.5 Three, quick-connect terminals (#187)

Note: Stainless-steel lever.

Model D3V-21G1M-1@4A-∆ D3V-161M-1@5-∆ D3V-111M-1@4-∆ D3V-6G1M-1@3-∆ D3V-011M-1@3-∆ D3V-111M-1@5-∆ D3V-61M-1@4-∆ OF max. 125 g {1.23 N} 200 g {1.96 N} 100 g {0.98 N} 50 g {0.49 N} RF min. 20 g {0.20 N} 50 g {0.49 N} 15 g {0.15 N} 5 g {0.05 N} PT max. 1.6 mm 1.6 mm 1.6 mm OT min. 0.8 mm 0.8 mm 0.8 mm MD max. 0.5 mm 0.6 mm (F gap type) or 0.5 mm (G gap type) 0.6 mm OP 15.2±0.5 mm

Miniature Basic Switch D3V 11 Hinge Lever Models

D3V-21G2M-1 4A-∆ A D3V-162M-1 5-∆ ➡ D3V-112M-1 5-∆ D3V-112M-1 4-∆ D3V-62M-1 4-∆ D3V-6G2M-1 3-∆ D3V-012M-1 3-∆

t=0.5 Three, quick-connect terminals (#187)

Note: Stainless-steel lever.

Model D3V-21G2M-1@4A-∆ D3V-162M-1@5-∆ D3V-112M-1@4-∆ D3V-6G2M-1@3-∆ D3V-012M-1@3-∆ D3V-112M-1@5-∆ D3V-62M-1@4−∆ OF max. 80 g {0.78 N} 125 g {1.23 N} 60 g {0.59 N} 30 g {0.29 N} RF min. 6 g {0.06 N} 14 g {0.14 N} 6 g {0.06 N} --- PT max. 4.0 mm 4.0 mm 4.0 mm OT min. 1.6 mm 1.6 mm 1.6 mm MD max. 0.8 mm 1.5 mm (F gap type) or 0.8 mm (G gap type) 1.5 mm OP 15.2±1.2 mm Long Hinge Lever Models D3V-21G3M-1 4A-∆ A D3V-163M-1 5-∆ ➡ D3V-113M-1 5-∆ D3V-113M-1 4-∆ D3V-63M-1 4-∆ D3V-6G3M-1 3-∆ D3V-013M-1 3-∆

t=0.5 Three, quick-connect terminals (#187)

Note: Stainless-steel lever.

Model D3V-21G3M-1@4A-∆ D3V-163M-1@5-∆ D3V-113M-1@4-∆ D3V-6G3M-1@3-∆ D3V-013M-1@3-∆ D3V-113M-1@5-∆ D3V-63M-1@4-∆ OF max. 45 g {0.44 N} 70 g {0.69 N} 35 g {0.34 N} 20 g {0.20 N} RF min. 3 g {0.03 N} 6 g {0.06 N} ------PT max. 9.0 mm 9.0 mm 9.0 mm 9.0 mm OT min. 2.0 mm 2.0 mm 3.2 mm 3.2 mm MD max. 2.0 mm 2.8 mm (F gap type) or 2.0 mm (G gap type) 2.8 mm (F gap type) or 2.0 mm (G gap 2.8 mm type)

OP +2.6 15.2±2.6 mm 15.2 − 3.2 mm

12 Miniature Basic Switch D3V Simulated Roller Lever Models D3V-21G3M-1 4A- ∆ ➡ A D3V-164M-1 5-∆ D3V-114M-1 5-∆ D3V-114M-1 4-∆ D3V-64M-1 4-∆ D3V-6G4M-1 3-∆ D3V-014M-1 3-∆

t=0.5 Three, quick-connect terminals (#187)

Note: Stainless-steel lever.

Model D3V-21G4M-1@4A-∆ D3V-164M-1@5-∆ D3V-114M-1@4-∆ D3V-6G4M-1@3-∆ D3V-014M-1@3-∆ D3V-114M-1@5-∆ D3V-64M-1@4-∆ OF max. 85 g {0.83 N} 125 g {1.23 N} 60 g {0.59 N} 30 g {0.29 N} RF min. 7 g {0.07 N} 14 g {0.14 N} 6 g {0.06 N} --- PT max. 4.0 mm 4.0 mm 4.0 mm OT min. 1.6 mm 1.6 mm 1.6 mm MD max. 1.4 mm 1.5 mm (F gap type) or 0.8 mm (G gap type) 1.5 mm OP 18.7±1.2 mm Short Hinge Roller Lever Models

D3V-21G5M-1 4A-∆ ➡ A D3V-165M-1 5-∆ D3V-115M-1 5-∆ D3V-115M-1 4-∆ D3V-65M-1 4-∆ D3V-6G5M-1 3-∆ D3V-015M-1 3-∆

t=0.5 Three, quick-connect terminals (#187)

Note: 1. Stainless-steel lever. 2. Oilless polyacetal resin roller.

Model D3V-21G5M-1@4A-∆ D3V-165M-1@5-∆ D3V-115M-1@4-∆ D3V-6G5M-1@3-∆ D3V-015M-1@3-∆ D3V-115M-1@5-∆ D3V-65M-1@4-∆ OF max. 145 g {1.42 N} 240 g {2.35 N} 120 g {1.18 N} 60 g {0.59 N} RF min. 20 g {0.2 N} 50 g {0.49 N} 15 g {0.15 N} 6 g {0.06 N} PT max. 1.6 mm 1.6 mm 1.6 mm OT min. 0.8 mm 0.8 mm 0.8 mm MD max. 0.5 mm 0.6 mm (F gap type) or 0.5 mm (G gap type) 0.6 mm OP 20.7±0.6 mm

Miniature Basic Switch D3V 13 Hinge Roller Lever Models

D3V-21G6M-1 4A-∆ ➡ A D3V-166M-1 5-∆ D3V-116M-1 5-∆ D3V-116M-1 4-∆ D3V-66M-1 4-∆ D3V-6G6M-1 3-∆ D3V-016M-1 3-∆

t=0.5 Three, quick-connect terminals (#187)

Note: 1. Stainless-steel lever. 2. Oilless polyacetal resin roller.

Model D3V-21G6M-1@4A-∆ D3V-166M-1@5-∆ D3V-116M-1@4-∆ D3V-6G6M-1@3-∆ D3V-016M-1@3-∆ D3V-116M-1@5-∆ D3V-66M-1@4-∆ OF max. 80 g {0.79 N} 125 g {1.23 N} 60 g {0.59 N} 30 g {0.29 N} RF min. 5 g {0.05 N} 14 g {0.14 N} 6 g {0.06 N} --- PT max. 4.0 mm 4.0 mm 4.0 mm OT min. 1.6 mm 1.6 mm 1.6 mm MD max. 0.8 mm 1.5 mm (F gap type) or 0.8 mm (G gap type) 1.5 mm OP 20.7±1.2 mm

14 Miniature Basic Switch D3V Precautions

■ Cautions

Handling Using Micro Loads Be careful not to drop the switch. Doing so may cause damage to the Using a model for ordinary loads to open or close the contact of a switch’s internal components because it is designed for a small load. micro load circuit may result faulty contact. Use models that operate in the following range. However, even when using micro load models within the operating range shown below, if inrush current occurs ■ Correct Use when the contact is opened or closed, it may increase contact wear and so decrease life expectancy. Therefore, insert a contact protection circuit where necessary. Mounting The minimum applicable load is the N-level reference value. This Use two M3 mounting screws with an appropriate screwdriver to value indicates the malfunction reference level for the reliability level mount the switch. Tighten the screws to a torque of 0.39 to of 60% (λ 60). The equation, λ 60 = 0.5 × 10−6/operations indicates 0.59 N • m {4 to 6 kgf • cm}. that the estimated malfunction rate is less than 1/2,000,000 operations with a reliability level of 60%. Mounting Direction Mount lever-operated switches with a maximum operating force of 0.49 N in a direction where the actuator weight will not be applied to the switch. Since the switch is designed for a small load, its resetting force is small. Therefore, resetting failure may occur if unnecessary (V) Voltage load is applied to the switch. Operating range for Insulation Distance Operating range general- for micro load load models models D3V-01 According to EN61058-1, the minimum insulation thickness for this switch should be 1.1 mm and minimum clearance distance between the terminal and mounting plate should be 1.9 mm. If the insulation distance cannot be provided in the product incorporating the switch, Inoperable either use a switch with insulation barrier or use a Separator to range ensure sufficient insulation distance.

Current (mA)

Solder Terminal Approval Conditions

Use of soldering iron for normal soldering is acceptable. Soldering hook holes version available. Soldering terminal types 1 and 2 are met.

Miniature Basic Switch D3V 15 OMRON Switches for Integration in Machinery

Miniature Basic Switches (V-size)

V D3V VX D2MV K D2RV

D2MC

Subminiature Basic Switches (S-size)

SSSSG D2S D3M

Ultra Subminiature Basic Switches (J-size)

D2MQ D2F J

Sealed Basic Switches

D2VW D2SW D2HW D2FW D2JW

Door Switches

D2D D2T D3D

Miniature Detection Switches

D2A D3C D3K D2X

16 Miniature Basic Switch D3V Certain Terms and Conditions of Sale

1. Offer; Acceptance. These terms and conditions (these "Terms") are deemed 12. Warranties. (a) Exclusive Warranty. Seller's exclusive warranty is that the part of all catalogs, manuals or other documents, whether electronic or in writ- Goods will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of ing, relating to the sale of goods or services (collectively, the "Goods") by twelve months from the date of sale by Seller (or such other period expressed Omron Electronics LLC and its subsidiary companies ("Seller"). Seller hereby in writing by Seller). Seller disclaims all other warranties, express or implied. objects to any terms or conditions proposed in Buyer's purchase order or other (b) Limitations. SELLER MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, documents which are inconsistent with, or in addition to, these Terms. Please EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ABOUT NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABIL- contact your Omron representative to confirm any additional terms for sales ITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE GOODS. from your Omron company. BUYER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT IT ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE 2. Prices. All prices stated are current, subject to change without notice by GOODS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR Seller. Buyer agrees to pay the price in effect at time of shipment. INTENDED USE. Seller further disclaims all warranties and responsibility of 3. Discounts. Cash discounts, if any, will apply only on the net amount of any type for claims or expenses based on infringement by the Goods or other- invoices sent to Buyer after deducting transportation charges, taxes and wise of any intellectual property right. (c) Buyer Remedy. Seller's sole obliga- duties, and will be allowed only if (i) the invoice is paid according to Seller's tion hereunder shall be to replace (in the form originally shipped with Buyer payment terms and (ii) Buyer has no past due amounts owing to Seller. responsible for labor charges for removal or replacement thereof) the non- 4. Orders. Seller will accept no order less than $200 net billing. complying Good or, at Seller's election, to repay or credit Buyer an amount 5. Governmental Approvals. Buyer shall be responsible for, and shall bear all equal to the purchase price of the Good; provided that in no event shall Seller costs involved in, obtaining any government approvals required for the impor- be responsible for warranty, repair, indemnity or any other claims or expenses tation or sale of the Goods. regarding the Goods unless Seller's analysis confirms that the Goods were 6. Taxes. All taxes, duties and other governmental charges (other than general properly handled, stored, installed and maintained and not subject to contami- real property and income taxes), including any interest or penalties thereon, nation, abuse, misuse or inappropriate modification. Return of any goods by imposed directly or indirectly on Seller or required to be collected directly or Buyer must be approved in writing by Seller before shipment. Seller shall not indirectly by Seller for the manufacture, production, sale, delivery, importation, be liable for the suitability or unsuitability or the results from the use of Goods consumption or use of the Goods sold hereunder (including customs duties in combination with any electrical or electronic components, circuits, system and sales, excise, use, turnover and license taxes) shall be charged to and assemblies or any other materials or substances or environments. Any remitted by Buyer to Seller. advice, recommendations or information given orally or in writing, are not to be 7. Financial. If the financial position of Buyer at any time becomes unsatisfactory construed as an amendment or addition to the above warranty. to Seller, Seller reserves the right to stop shipments or require satisfactory 13. Damage Limits; Etc. SELLER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL, INDI- security or payment in advance. If Buyer fails to make payment or otherwise RECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, LOSS OF PROFITS OR PRODUC- comply with these Terms or any related agreement, Seller may (without liability TION OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE and in addition to other remedies) cancel any unshipped portion of Goods sold GOODS, WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED IN CONTRACT, WARRANTY, hereunder and stop any Goods in transit until Buyer pays all amounts, includ- NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY. Further, in no event shall liability of ing amounts payable hereunder, whether or not then due, which are owing to it Seller exceed the individual price of the Good on which liability is asserted. by Buyer. Buyer shall in any event remain liable for all unpaid accounts. 14. Indemnities. Buyer shall indemnify and hold harmless Seller, its affiliates and 8. Cancellation; Etc. Orders are not subject to rescheduling or cancellation its employees from and against all liabilities, losses, claims, costs and unless Buyer indemnifies Seller fully against all costs or expenses arising in expenses (including attorney's fees and expenses) related to any claim, inves- connection therewith. tigation, litigation or proceeding (whether or not Seller is a party) which arises 9. Force Majeure. Seller shall not be liable for any delay or failure in delivery or is alleged to arise from Buyer's acts or omissions under these Terms or in resulting from causes beyond its control, including earthquakes, fires, floods, any way with respect to the Goods. Without limiting the foregoing, Buyer (at strikes or other labor disputes, shortage of labor or materials, accidents to its own expense) shall indemnify and hold harmless Seller and defend or settle machinery, acts of sabotage, riots, delay in or lack of transportation or the any action brought against Seller to the extent that it is based on a claim that requirements of any government authority. any Good made to Buyer specifications infringed intellectual property rights of 10. Shipping; Delivery. Unless otherwise expressly agreed in writing by Seller: another party. a. Shipments shall be by a carrier selected by Seller; 15. Property; Confidentiality. The intellectual property embodied in the Goods is b. Such carrier shall act as the agent of Buyer and delivery to such carrier the exclusive property of Seller and its affiliates and Buyer shall not attempt to shall constitute delivery to Buyer; duplicate it in any way without the written permission of Seller. Notwithstand- c. All sales and shipments of Goods shall be FOB shipping point (unless oth- ing any charges to Buyer for engineering or tooling, all engineering and tooling erwise stated in writing by Seller), at which point title to and all risk of loss of shall remain the exclusive property of Seller. All information and materials the Goods shall pass from Seller to Buyer, provided that Seller shall retain a supplied by Seller to Buyer relating to the Goods are confidential and propri- security interest in the Goods until the full purchase price is paid by Buyer; etary, and Buyer shall limit distribution thereof to its trusted employees and d. Delivery and shipping dates are estimates only. strictly prevent disclosure to any third party. e. Seller will package Goods as it deems proper for protection against normal 16. Miscellaneous. (a) Waiver. No failure or delay by Seller in exercising any right handling and extra charges apply to special conditions. and no course of dealing between Buyer and Seller shall operate as a waiver 11. Claims. Any claim by Buyer against Seller for shortage or damage to the of rights by Seller. (b) Assignment. Buyer may not assign its rights hereunder Goods occurring before delivery to the carrier must be presented in writing to without Seller's written consent. (c) Amendment. These Terms constitute the Seller within 30 days of receipt of shipment and include the original transporta- entire agreement between Buyer and Seller relating to the Goods, and no pro- tion bill signed by the carrier noting that the carrier received the Goods from vision may be changed or waived unless in writing signed by the parties. Seller in the condition claimed. (d) Severability. If any provision hereof is rendered ineffective or invalid, such provision shall not invalidate any other provision. (e) Setoff. Buyer shall have no right to set off any amounts against the amount owing in respect of this invoice. (f) As used herein, "including" means "including without limitation".

Certain Precautions on Specifications and Use

Miniature Basic Switch D3V 17 Complete “Terms and Conditions of Sale” for product purchase and use are on Omron’s website at www.omron.com/oei – under the “About Us” tab, in the Legal Matters section.

ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527.

Cat. No. B103-E3-01 1/04 Specifications subject to change without notice Printed in USA

18 Miniature Basic Switch D3V Table of Contents Low Voltage Switch Gear

Selection Guide H-2 J7KNA-AR Mini Contactor Relays 4-pole H-7 J7KNA Mini Motor Contactor H-15 J7KN Motor Contactor H-27 J7TKN Thermal Overload Relay H-57 J7MN Motor Protection Circuit Breaker (MPCB) H-69 Appendix H-83 LVSG

H-1 Selection Guide Low Voltage Switch Gear

Classification Mini Contactor Relays Mini Motor Contactors Model J7KNA - AR J7KNA J7KNA-4 4-pole 3-pole 4-pole Appearance

Remarks AC and DC operated AC and DC operated AC operated 4-, 6- and 8-contacts in different 3 main poles 4 main poles configurations 1 auxiliary contact Positively guided contacts integrated (1NO or 1NC) Screw fixing and snap fitting (DIN rail) Accessoirs Auxiliar contact modules Auxiliar contact modules Auxiliar contact modules Suppressors Suppressors Link module MPCB - contactor Link module MPCB - contactor

Maximum power (AC3-380/415V) No 4 kW; 5,5 kW 4 kW Rated current (AC3-380/415V) 10 A (I th2) 9/12 A 9 A AC operated Yes Yes Yes DC operated Yes Yes No 4 - pole version Yes No Yes Auxiliary contacts included No 1NO or 1NC No Auxiliary contacts front 1NO/1NC 1NO/1NC 1NO/1NC mounting 0NO/2NC 0NO/2NC 0NO/2NC 2NO/2NC 2NO/2NC 2NO/2NC 4NO/0NC Auxiliary contacts side mounting No No No Mechanical life span 5 Mio. 5 Mio. 5 Mio. (AC operated) Mechanical life span 15 Mio. 15 Mio. 15 Mio. (DC operated) Setting range (in A) No No No Page No. H-7 H-15 H-15

H-2 Motor Contactors J7KN 10..KN 22 J7KN 24..KN 40 J7KN 50..KN 74 J7KN 85..KN 110 3-pole 3-pole 3-pole 3-pole

AC and DC operate AC and DC operate AC and DC operate AC and DC operate 3 main poles 3 main poles 3 main poles 3 main poles 1 auxiliary contact integrated (1NO or max 4 auxiliary contacts front mounted max 4 auxiliary contacts front mounted 4 auxiliary contacts integrated 1NC) 2 auxiliary contacts side mounted (1NO 2 auxiliary contacts side mounted (1NO (1NO/1NC) max 4 auxiliary contacts front mounted or 1NC) or 1NC) Auxiliar contact modules Auxiliar contact modules Auxiliar contact modules Mechanical interlock Mechanical interlock Mechanical interlock Mechanical interlock Suppressors Suppressors Suppressors Suppressors Link module MPCB-contactor Link module MPCB-contactor Pneumatic timers Pneumatic timers Pneumatic timers 4 kW; 5,5 kW; 7,5 kW; 11 kW 11 kW; 15 kW; 18,5 kW 22 kW; 30kW; 37 kW 45 kW; 55 kW 10/14/18/22 A 24/32/40 A 50/62/74 A 85/110 A Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No 1NO or 1NC No No 2NO + 2NC max 4 max 4 max 4 No NO/NC NO/NC NO/NC

No 1NO + 1NC 1NO + 1NC 1NO + 1NC 10 Mio. 10 Mio. 10 Mio. 5 Mio. LVSG 10 Mio. 10 Mio. 10 Mio. 5 Mio.

No No No No H-27 H-27 H-27 H-27

H-3 Selection Guide Low Voltage Switch Gear

Classification Motor Contactors Thermal Overload Relays Model J7KN 150..KN 175 J7KN 200 J7TKN-A 3-pole 3-pole Appearance

Remarks AC and DC operate AC and DC operate Direct mounting 3 main poles 3 main poles 1 auxiliary contact (change over) 2 auxiliary contacts integrated (1NO/ 4 auxiliary contacts integrated (1NO/ 1NC) 1NC) Accessoirs No No No

Maximum power (AC3-380/415V) 75 kW; 90 kW 110 kW Rated current (AC3-380/415V) 150/175 A 210 A AC operated Yes Yes DC operated No No 4 - pole version No No Auxiliary contacts included 1NO + 1NC 2NO + 2NC 1NO + 1NC Auxiliary contacts front No No mounting Auxiliary contacts side mounting 1NO + 1NC 2NO + 2NC Mechanical life span 10 Mio. 10 Mio. (AC operated) Mechanical life span 10 Mio. 10 Mio. (DC operated) Setting range (in A) No No 0,12..30 A Page No. H-27 H-27 H-57

H-4 Thermal Overload Relays Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) J7TKN-B..TKN-D J7TKN-E..TKN-F J7MN12 J7MN25

Direct mounting Separate mounting Rocker operating switch Rotary operating switch Auto, -manual, -reset button 2 auxiliary contacts (1NO/1NC) Short circuit release Short circuit release 2 auxiliary contacts (1NO/1NC) Over load release Over load release I cu = 100 kA (0,16..6,3 A) I cu = 100 kA (0,16..12,5 A) Sets for single mounting Sets for single mounting Trip indicating contact Trip indicating contact Busbar sets Busbar sets Plastic enclosures Plastic enclosures 2 contacts side mounted 3 contacts side mounted 2 contacts front mounted 2 contacts front mounted Bus bar system Bus bar system

1NO + 1NC 1NO + 1NC 1NO + 1NC 1NO + 1NC

1NO + 1NC 1NO + 1NC 100000 100000 LVSG

0,12..74 A 60..220 A 0,11..12 A 0,11..25 A H-57 H-57 H-69 H-69

H-5 Selection Guide Low Voltage Switch Gear

Classification Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Model J7MN50 J7MN100

Appearance

Remarks Rotary operating switch Rotary operating switch Short circuit release Short circuit release Over load release Over load release I cu = 50 kA I cu = 50 kA Accessoirs Trip indicating contact Trip indicating contact Plastic enclosures Plastic enclosures 2 contacts side mounted 2 contacts side mounted 3 contacts front mounted 3 contacts front mounted Bus bar system Bus bar system Maximum power (AC3-380/415V) Rated current (AC3-380/415V) AC operated DC operated 4 - pole version Auxiliary contacts included Auxiliary contacts front 1NO + 1NC 1NO + 1NC mounting Auxiliary contacts side mounting 1NO + 1NC 1NO + 1NC Mechanical life span 50000 50000 (AC operated) Mechanical life span (DC operated) Setting range (in A) 22..50 A 45..100 A Page No. H-69 H-69

H-6 Mini Contactor Relays 4-pole

J7KNA-AR )

Main contactor

• AC & DC operated • 4-, 6- and 8-pole versions in different configurations • Positively guided contacts • Screw fixing and snap fitting (35 mm DIN rail)

• Rated current = 10A (Ith) • Suitable for electronic devices (DIN 19240) • Finger proof (VBG 4) Accessories

• 2- and 4-pole additional auxiliary contacts in different configurations

Approved Standards

Standard Guide No (US,C) UL NKCR, NKCR7 ICE 947-5-1 VDE 0660 EN 60947-5-1

Ordering Information

■ Model Number Legend LVSG

1. Mini Contactor Relays

7KNA-##-##-##### 1234

1) Mini Contactor Coil voltage (DC operated) 2) AR: Contactor Relay 24D: DC24V 48D: DC48V 3) Combination of NO / NC contacts 60D: DC60V 22: 2 NO 2 NC 110D: DC110V 31: 3 NO 1NC 125D: DC125V 40: 4 NO 0NC 24VS: DC24V with diode 4) Coil voltage (AC operated) 48VS: DC48V with diode 24: AC24V 50/60Hz 110VS: DC110V with diode 48: AC48V 50Hz 110: AC110-115V 50Hz,AC120-125V 60Hz 2. Aux. Contact Modules for Mini Contactor Relays 230: AC220-230V 50Hz,AC240V 60Hz 240: AC230V-240V 50Hz 73KN-##-##-# 400: AC380-400V 50Hz,AC440V 60Hz 1234 415: AC400-415V 50Hz 550: AC525-550V 50Hz,AC600V 60Hz 1) Auxiliary Contact Modules 2) A: for mini contactor relay 3) Combination of NO/NC contacts 11: 1 NO 1 NC 02: 0 NO 2 NC 22: 2 NO 2 NC 40: 4 NO 0 NC

Mini Contactor Relays 4-pole J7KNA-AR H-7 ■ System overview Mini Contactor Relays 4-pole AC Operated Contacts Distinc. Ratings Thermal Type Pack Weight Number Rated acc. to AC15 Current Coil voltage 1)

DIN EN 230V 400V Ith 24 24V 50/60Hz NO NC 50011 A A A 230 220-230V 50Hz pcs. kg/pc. 4-pole, With Screw Terminals 4- 40E3 2 10 J7KNA-AR-40 24 10 0,16 J7KNA-AR-40 230

3131E3 2 10 J7KNA-AR-31 24 10 0,16 J7KNA-AR-31 230

2222E3 2 10 J7KNA-AR-22 24 10 0,16 J7KNA-AR-22 230

1) Other coil voltages see page 10

DC Solenoid Operated Contacts Distinc. Ratings Thermal Type Pack Weight Number Rated acc. to AC15 Current

DIN EN 230V 400V Ith NO NC 50011 A AA Coil voltage 24V DC 2,5W pcs. kg/pc. 4-pole, With Screw Terminals 4- 40E3 2 10 J7KNA-AR-40 24D (-VS)1) 10 0,19

3131E3 2 10 J7KNA-AR-31 24D (-VS)1) 10 0,19

2222E3 2 10 J7KNA-AR-22 24D (-VS)1) 10 0,19

1) VS = with diode

Auxiliary Contact Blocks for Contactor Relays J7KNA-AR Contacts Ratings Thermal Type Pack Weight Rated AC15 Current

230V 400V Ith NO NC A A A pcs. kg/pc. 11 3 2 10 J73KN-A-11 10 0,04 -2 3 2 10 J73KN-A-02 10 0,04 4- 3 2 10 J73KN-A-40 10 0,04 22 3 2 10 J73KN-A-22 10 0,04

H-8 Mini Contactor Relays 4-pole J7KNA-AR ■ System overview Mini Contactor Relays 4-pole AC Operated Wiring Diagrams Distinc. Auxiliary Contact Blocks Contactor Relay with Auxiliary Contact Contacts suitable for Electronic Number Block Circuits according to DIN 19240 acc. to Distinc. Number for rated voltage 24V DC DIN EN according to (test ratings 17V DC, 5mA) 50011 Type NO NC DIN EN 50011 NO NC Positively guided contacts 4-pole, With Screw Terminals 40E J73KN-A-11 1 1 51E 5 1 Preferable combinations with J73KN-A-02 0242E 42distinctive letter „E“ according to DIN EN 50011 J73KN-A-40 4080E 80 J73KN-A-22 2262E 62 31E J73KN-A-11 1142Y 42 J73KN-A-02 0233Y 33 J73KN-A-40 4071Y 71 J73KN-A-22 2253Y 53 22E J73KN-A-11 1133Y 33 J73KN-A-02 0224Y 24 J73KN-A-40 4062Y 62 J73KN-A-22 2244Y 44

DC Solenoid Operated Wiring Diagrams Distinc. Auxiliary Contact Blocks Contactor Relay with Auxiliary Contact Number Block acc. to Distinc. Number DIN EN according to 50011 Type NO NC DIN EN 50011 NO NC 4-pole, With Screw Terminals 40E J73KN-A-11 1 1 51E 5 1 Preferable combinations with J73KN-A-02 0242E 42distinctive letter „E“ according to DIN EN 50011 J73KN-A-40 4080E 80

J73KN-A-22 2262E 62 LVSG 31E J73KN-A-11 1142Y 42 J73KN-A-02 0233Y 33 J73KN-A-40 4071Y 71 J73KN-A-22 2253Y 53 22E J73KN-A-11 1133Y 33 J73KN-A-02 0224Y 24 J73KN-A-40 4062Y 62 J73KN-A-22 2244Y 44

Auxiliary Contact Blocks for Contactor Relays J7KNA-AR Wiring diagrams Contacts suitable for Electronic Circuits according to DIN 19240 for rated voltage 24V DC (test ratings 17V DC, 5mA) J73KN-A-11 J73KN-A-02 J73KN-A-40 J73KN-A-22 Positively guided contacts

Mini Contactor Relays 4-pole J7KNA-AR H-9 Specifications

■ Coil Voltages

Suffix Voltage Marking Rated Control Voltage Us Suffix Voltage Marking Rated Control Voltage Us to contactor type range for to contactor type range for e.g. at the coil 50Hz 60Hz e.g. at the coil 50Hz 60Hz for 50Hz for 60Hz min max min max for 50Hz for 60Hz min max min max J7KNA-09-10-24 V V V. V. V. V. J7KNA-09-10- 230 V V V. V. V. V. 12 12 12 11 12 12 12 210 205-215 220-230 205 215 220 230 24 24 24 22 24 24 24 220 210-220 230-240 210 220 230 240 42 42 42 38.5 42 42 42 230 220-230 240 220 230 240 250 48 48-50 48 48 50 48 50 240 230-240 230 240 250 260 60 60 60 52 66 54 60 400 380-400 440 380 400 415 440 90 90-95 100-105 90 95 100 105 500 475-500 520-545 475 500 520 545 95 95-100 105-110 95 100 105 110 550 525-550 600 525 550 570 600 100 100 110-115 100 105 110 115 Standard voltages in bold type letters. Coil not exchangeable 105 105-110 115-120 105 110 115 120 110 110-115 120-125 110 115 120 125 200 200 210-220 195 205 210 220

H-10 Mini Contactor Relays 4-pole J7KNA-AR ■ Engineering data and Characteristics Mini Contactor Relays Data according to IEC 947-5-1, VDE 0660, EN 60947-5-1 Auxiliary Contacts Ty p e J7KNA-AR... J7KNA-AR...D J7KNA-AR...VS J73KN-A... *1 *1 *1 *1 Rated insulation voltage Ui V AC 690 690 690 690

Thermal rated current Ith to 690V Ambient temperature 40°C A 10 10 10 10 60°C A 6 6 6 6

Power loss per pole at Ith W 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

Utilization category AC15

Rated operational current Ie 220-240V A 3 3 3 3 380-415V A 2 2 2 2 440V A 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6

500V A 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 660-690V A 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6

Utilization category DC13

Rated operational current Ie 60V A 2 2 2 2 110V A 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 220V A 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1

Maximum ambient temperature Operation open °C -40 to +60 (+90)*2 enclosed °C -40 to +40 Storage °C -40 to +90

Short circuit protection short-circuit current 1kA, contact welding not accepted max. fuse size gL (gG) A 20 20 20 20

Power consumption of coils AC operated inrush VA 25 - - - LVSG sealed VA 4 - 5 - - - W1.2 - - -

DC operated inrush W - 2.5 2.5 - sealed W - 2.5 2.5 -

Operation range of coils in multiples of control voltage Us 0.85 - 1.1 0.8 - 1.1 0.8 - 1.1 -

*3,*4 Switching time at control voltage Us ±10%

AC operated make time ms 15 - 25 - - - release time ms 8 - 25 - - - arc duration ms 10 -15 - - -

DC operated make time ms - 15 - 19 - - release time ms - 8 - 25 - - arc duration ms - 10 -15 - -

Mini Contactor Relays 4-pole J7KNA-AR H-11 Mini Contactor Relays Data according to IEC 947-5-1, VDE 0660, EN 60947-5-1 Auxiliary Contacts Ty p e J7KNA-AR... J7KNA-AR...D J7KNA-AR...VS J73KN-A... Cable cross-section all connectors solid mm² 0.75 - 2.5 0.75 - 2.5 0.75 - 2.5 0.75 - 2.5 flexible mm² 0.75 - 2.5 0.75 - 2.5 0.75 - 2.5 0.75 - 2.5 flexible with multicore cable end mm² 0.5 - 1.5 0.5 - 1.5 0.5 - 1.5 0.5 - 2.5

Clamps per pole 2 2 2 2

solid or stranded AWG 18 - 14 18 - 14 18 - 14 18 - 14

*1) Suitable at 690V for: earthed-neutral systems, overvoltage category I to IV, pollution degree 3 (standard-industry): Uimp = 8kV. Data for other conditions on request.

*2) With reduced control voltage range 0.9 up to 1.0 x Us and with reduced thermal rated current Ith to Ie/AC15 *3) Summary switching time = release time + arc duration *4) Release time of NC make time of NO increase when suppressor units for voltage peak protection are used (Varistor, RC-units, Diode units).

Mini Contactor Relays for North America Data according to UL508 Main Contacts (cULus) Ty p e J7KNA-AR... J73KN-A... Rated operational current "General Use" A 10 10

Rated operational power of three-phase motors 115V hp - - at 60Hz (3ph) 200V hp - - 230V hp - -

460V hp - - 575V hp - -

Rated operational power of of AC motors 115V hp - - at 60Hz (1ph) 200V hp - - 230V hp - -

Fuses A- - Suitable for use on a capability of delivering not more than rms A - - V- -

Rated voltage V AC 600 600

Auxiliary Contacts (cULus) heavy pilot duty AC A600 A600 standard pilot duty DC Q600 Q600

H-12 Mini Contactor Relays 4-pole J7KNA-AR ■ Dimensions AC and DC operated Auxiliary Contact Blocks with screw terminals J7KNA-AR... J73KN-A... LVSG

Mini Contactor Relays 4-pole J7KNA-AR H-13 ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS.

Cat. No. J507-E2-02 In the interest of product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice.

H-14 Mini Contactor Relays 4-pole J7KNA-AR Mini Motor Contactor

J7KNA )

Main contactor

• AC & DC operated • Integrated auxiliary contacts • Screw fixing and snap fitting (35 mm DIN rail) • Range from 4 to 5.5 kW (AC 3, 380/415V) • 4 -main pole version (4 kW AC and DC coil) • Auxiliary contacts suitable for electronic devices (DIN 19240) • Finger proof (VBG 4) Accessories

• 2 and 4 pole additional auxiliary contacts in different configurations • Mechanical interlock (in reversing contactor combination only) • RC Suppressors

Approved Standards

Standard Guide No (US,C) UL NLDX, NLDX7 ICE 947-5-1 VDE 0660 EN 60947-5-1

Ordering Information LVSG

■ 400: AC380-400V 50Hz, AC440V 60Hz Model Number Legend 415: AC400-415V 50Hz 1. Mini Motor Contactors Coil voltage (DC operated) J7KNA-##-##-#-##### 24D: DC24V 12345 48D: DC48V 60D: DC60V 1) Mini Contactor 110D: DC110V 2) Rated Motor Current (AC3 400V) 24VS: DC24V with diode 09: 9A 48VS: DC48V with diode 12: 12A 110VS: DC110V with diode 3) Integrated auxiliary contact 2. Aux. Contact Modules for Mini Motor Contactors 10: 1 NO 0 NC 01: 0 NO 1 NC J73KN-##-##-# 4: 4 main pole type (no aux contact) 1234 4) W: Reversing Contactor 1) Auxiliary Contact Modules 5) Coil voltage (AC operated)1) 24: AC24V 50/60Hz 2) AM: for mini motor contactor 48: AC48V 50Hz 3) Combination of NO/NC contacts 60: AC60V 50Hz 11: 1 NO 1 NC 110: AC110-115V 50Hz, AC120-125V 60Hz 02: 0 NO 2 NC 230: AC220-230V 50Hz, AC240V 60Hz 22: 2 NO 2 NC 240: AC230V-240V 50Hz 40: 4 NO 0 NC 4) for Reversing Contactors v: left side 1) RC-suppressor unit go to page H-29, section 6 or x: right side page H-35, suppressor units

Mini Motor Contactor J7KNA H-15 ■ System overview

Mini Motor Contactors AC Operated

Ratings Rated Current Aux. Contacts Type Pack Weight AC2, AC3 AC3 AC1 380V Accept 400V 660V Overlod Coil Voltage*1 415V 500V 690V 400V 690V Relay see 24 24V 50/60Hz kW kW kW A ANONCpage H-58 230 220-230V 50Hz pcs. kg/pc. 3-pole, With Screw Terminals 4 449201- J7TKN-A J7KNA-09-10-##### 10 0.16 5.5 5.5 5.5 12 20 1 - J7TKN-A J7KNA-12-10-##### 10 0.16

4 44920-1J7TKN-A J7KNA-09-01-##### 10 0.16 5.5 5.5 5.5 12 20 - 1 J7TKN-A J7KNA-12-01-##### 10 0.16

4-pole, With Screw Terminals 4 44920-- J7TKN-A J7KNA-09-4-##### 10 0.19

*1) Other coil voltages see page H-20

DC Solenoid Operated

Ratings Rated Current Aux. Contacts Type Pack Weight AC2, AC3 AC3 AC1 380V Accept 400V 660V Overlod DC Coil Voltage 415V 500V 690V 400V 690V Relay see 24D 24V 50/60Hz kW kW kW A ANONCpage H-58 24VS 24V 50/60Hz w. diode*1 pcs. kg/pc. 3-pole, With Screw Terminals 4 449201- J7TKN-A J7KNA-09-10-###D(-VS) 10 0.19 5.5 5.5 5.5 12 20 1 - J7TKN-A J7KNA-12-10-###D(-VS) 10 0.19

4 44920-1J7TKN-A J7KNA-09-01-###D(-VS) 10 0.19 5.5 5.5 5.5 12 20 - 1 J7TKN-A J7KNA-12-01-###D(-VS) 10 0.19

*1) with built-in coil suppressor (zener diode) Auxiliary contact blocks with screw terminals for contactors J7KNA-09... and J7KNA-12...

Contacts Rated Current Thermal Rated Current Type Pack Weight AC15 230V 400V NO NC A A A pcs. kg/pc. 1 1 3210 J73KN-AM-11 10 0.04 - 2 3210 J73KN-AM-02 10 0.04 2 2 3210 J73KN-AM-22 10 0.04

H-16 Mini Motor Contactor J7KNA ■ System overview

Mini Motor Contactors AC Operated

Wiring Diagrams Auxiliary Contact Blocks Contactor with Auxiliary Contact Block Contacts suitable for Electronic Circuits according to DIN 19240 Distinc. Number Distinc. Number for rated voltage 24V DC according to DIN according to DIN (test ratings 17V DC, 5mA) EN 50012 Type NO NC EN 50012 NO NC Positively guided contacts 3-pole, With Screw Terminals J73KN-AM-11 1121 21 Prefered combinations according 10 J73KN-AM-02 0212 12 to DIN EN 50012 J73KN-AM-22 2232 32 J73KN-A-11 11- 12 J73KN-A-02 02- 03Contacts according to 01 J73KN-A-40 40- 41DIN EN 50005 J73KN-A-22 22- 23 4-pole, With Screw Terminals J73KN-A-11 11- 11 1 3 5 7 A1 J73KN-A-02 02- 02Contacts according to 00 A2 J73KN-A-40 40- 40DIN EN 50005 2 4 6 8 J73KN-A-22 22- 22

DC Solenoid Operated

Prefered combinations according LVSG 10 J73KN-AM-02 0212 12 to DIN EN 50012 J73KN-AM-22 2232 32 J73KN-A-11 11- 12 J73KN-A-02 02- 03Contacts according to 01 J73KN-A-40 40- 41DIN EN 50005 J73KN-A-22 22- 23

Auxiliary contact blocks with screw terminals for contactors J7KNA-09... and J7KNA-12...

Wiring Diagrams Contacts suitable for Electronic Circuits according to DIN 19240 for rated voltage 24V DC (test ratings 17V DC, 5mA) J73KN-AM-11 J73KN-AM-02 J73KN-AM-22 J73KN-A-11 J73KN-A-02 J73KN-A-40 J73KN-A-22 Positively guided contacts

Mini Motor Contactor J7KNA H-17 ■ System overview

Mini Reversing Contactors, Mechanical Interlocked AC Operated

Ratings Rated Current Aux. Contacts Type Pack Weight AC2, AC3 AC3 AC1 380V Accept 400V 660V Overlod Coil Voltage*1 415V 500V 690V 400V 690V Relay see 24 24V 50/60Hz kW kW kW A ANONCpage H-58 230 220-230V 50Hz pcs. kg/pc. 3-pole, With Screw Terminals 4 44920-1J7TKN-A J7KNA-09-01-W-##### 10.32 5.5 5.5 5.5 12 20 - 1 J7TKN-A J7KNA-12-01-W-##### 10.32

*1) Other coil voltages see page H-20

DC Solenoid Operated

Ratings Rated Current Aux. Contacts Type Pack Weight AC2, AC3 AC3 AC1 380V Accept 400V 660V Overlod DC Coil Voltage 415V 500V 690V 400V 690V Relay see 24D 24V 50/60Hz kW kW kW A ANONCpage H-58 24VS 24V 50/60Hz w. diode*1 pcs. kg/pc. 3-pole, With Screw Terminals 4 44920-1J7TKN-A J7KNA-09-01-W-###D 10.38 5.5 5.5 5.5 12 20 - 1 J7TKN-A J7KNA-12-01-W-###D 10.38

*1) with built-in coil suppressor (zener diode) Auxiliary contact blocks with screw terminals for contactors J7KNA-09-01-W...(D) and J7KNA-12-01-W...(D)

Contacts Rated Current Thermal Rated Current Type Pack Weight AC15 230V 400V NO NC A A A pcs. kg/pc. 1 1 3210 J73KN-AM-11V 10 0.04 1 1 3210 J73KN-AM-11X 10 0.04

H-18 Mini Motor Contactor J7KNA ■ System overview

Mini Motor Contactors AC Operated

Wiring Diagrams Auxiliary Contact Blocks suitable for left hand side right hand side Contacts suitable for Electronic Contactor K1 Contactor K2 Circuits according to DIN 19240 Distinc. Number for rated voltage 24V DC according to DIN (test ratings 17V DC, 5mA) EN 50012 Ty p e N O N C Type NO NC Positively guided contacts 3-pole, With Screw Terminals J73KN-AM-11V 11J73KN-AM-11X 11

DC Solenoid Operated

Auxiliary contact blocks with screw terminals for contactors J7KNA-09-01-W...(D) and J7KNA-12-01-W...(D) LVSG

Wiring Diagrams Contacts suitable for Electronic Circuits according to DIN 19240 for rated voltage 24V DC (test ratings 17V DC, 5mA) J73KN-AM-11V J73KN-AM-11X Positively guided contacts 13 31 31 13

14 32 32 14

Mini Motor Contactor J7KNA H-19 Specifications

■ Coil Voltages

Suffix Voltage Marking Rated Control Voltage Us Suffix Voltage Marking Rated Control Voltage Us to contactor type range for to contactor type range for e.g. at the coil 50Hz 60Hz e.g. at the coil 50Hz 60Hz for 50Hz for 60Hz min max min max for 50Hz for 60Hz min max min max J7KNA-09-10-24 V V V. V. V. V. J7KNA-09-10 -230 V V V. V. V. V. 12 12 12 11 12 12 12 210 205-215 220-230 205 215 220 230 24 24 24 22 24 24 24 220 210-220 230-240 210 220 230 240 48 48-50 48 48 50 48 50 230 220-230 240 220 230 240 250 60 60 60 52 66 54 60 240 230-240 230 240 250 260 90 90-95 100-105 90 95 100 105 400 380-400 440 380 400 415 440 95 95-100 105-110 95 100 105 110 500 475-500 520-545 475 500 520 545 100 100 110-115 100 105 110 115 550 525-550 600 525 550 570 600 105 105-110 115-120 105 110 115 120 Standard voltages in bold type letters. Coil not exchangeable 110 110-115 120-125 110 115 120 125 200 200 210-220 195 205 210 220

H-20 Mini Motor Contactor J7KNA ■ Engineering data and Characteristics Mini Motor Contactors Data according to IEC 947-4-1, VDE 0660, EN 60947-4-1 Main Contacts Ty p e J7KNA-09-... J7KNA-12-... *1) ’1) Rated insulation voltage Ui V AC 690 690

Making capacity Ieff at Ue = 690V AC A 165 165

Breaking capacity Ieff 400V AC A 100 100 cosϕ = 0,65 500V AC A 90 90 690V AC A 80 80

Utilization category AC1 Switching of resistive load

Rated operational current Ie (=Ith) at 40°C, open A 20 20

Rated operational power of three-phase resistive loads 230V kW 7.9 7.9 50-60Hz, cosϕ = 1 240V kW 8.3 8.3 400V kW 13.8 13.8 415V kW 14.3 14.3

Rated operational current Ie (=Ithe) at 60°C, enclosed A 16 16

Rated operational power of three-phase resistive loads 230V kW 6.3 6.3 50-60Hz, cosϕ = 1 240V kW 6.7 6.7 400V kW 11 11 415V kW 11.5 11.5

Minimum cross-section of conductor at load with Ie (=Ith) mm² 2.5 2.5

Utilization category AC2 and AC3 Switching of three-phase motors

Rated operational current Ie 220V A 12 15 open and enclosed 230V A 11.5 14.5 240V A 11 14

380-400V A 9 12 415-440V A 8 11 LVSG 500V A 7 9 660-690V A 5 6.5

Rated operational power of three-phase motors 220-240V kW 3 4 50-60Hz 380-440V kW 4 5.5 500-690V kW 4 5.5

Utilization category AC4 Switching of squirrel cage motors, inching

Rated operational current Ie 220V A 12 15 open and enclosed 230V A 11.5 14.5 240V A 11 14

380-400V A 9 12 415-440V A 8 11 500V A 7 9 660-690V A 5 6.5

Rated operational power of three-phase motors 220-240V kW 3 4 50-60Hz 380-440V kW 4 5.5 500-690V kW 4 5.5

Mini Motor Contactor J7KNA H-21 Mini Motor Contactors Data according to IEC 947-4-1, VDE 0660, EN 60947-4-1 Main Contacts Ty p e J7KNA-09-... J7KNA-12-... Utilization category DC1 Switching of resistive load 1 pole 24V A 20 20 Time constant L/R ≤ 1ms 60V A 20 20

Rated operational current Ie 110V A 5 5 220V A 0.6 0.6

3 poles in series 24V A 20 20 60V A 20 20 110V A 20 20 220V A 16 16

Utilization category DC3 and DC5 Switching of shunt motors 1 pole 24V A 20 20 and series motors 60V A 5 5 Time constant L/R ≤ 15ms 110V A 1 1

Rated operational current Ie 220V A 0.15 0.15

3 poles in series 24V A 20 20 60V A 20 20 110V A 20 20 220V A 2 2

Maximum ambient temperature Operation open °C -40 to +60 (+90)*2 enclosed °C -40 to +40 with thermal overload relay open °C -25 to +60 enclosed °C -25 to +40 Storage °C -50 to +90

Short circuit protection for contactors without thermal overload relay

Coordination-type "1" according to IEC 947-4-1 Contact welding without hazard of persons max. fuse size gL (gG) A 40 40

Coordination-type “2” according to IEC 947-4-1 Light contact welding accepted max. fuse size gL (gG) A 25 25

Contact welding not accepted max. fuse size gL (gG) A 10 10

For contactors with thermal overload relay the device with the smaller admissible backup fuse (contactor or thermal overload relay) determines the fuse size.

Cable cross-sections for contactors without thermal overload relay main connector solid or stranded mm² 0.5 - 2.5 0.5 - 2.5 flexible mm² 0.5 - 2.5 0.5 - 2.5 flexible with multicore cable end mm² 0.5 - 1.5 0.5 - 1.5 Cables per clamp 2 2

solid or stranded AWG 18 - 14 18 - 14

H-22 Mini Motor Contactor J7KNA Mini Motor Contactors Data according to IEC 947-4-1, VDE 0660, EN 60947-4-1 Main Contacts Ty p e J7KNA-09-... J7KNA-12-... Frequency of operations z without load 1/h 10000 10000

Contactors without thermal overload relay AC3, Ie 1/h 600 700

AC4, Ie 1/h 120 150

DC3, Ie 1/h 600 700

Mechanical life AC operated S x 106 55 DC operated S x 106 15 15

Short time current 10s-current A 96 120

Power loss per pole at Ie/AC3 400V W 0.15 0.25

Resistance to shock according to IEC 68-2-27 Shock time 20ms sine-wave AC operated NO g 5 5 NC g 5 5

DC operated NO g 8 8 NC g 6 6

*1) Suitable at 690V for: earthed-neutral systems, overvoltage category I to IV, pollution degree 3 (standard-industry): Uimp = 8kV. Data for other conditions on request.

*2) With reduced control voltage range 0.9 up to 1.0 x Us and with reduced rated current Ie/AC1according to Ie/AC3 LVSG

Mini Motor Contactor J7KNA H-23 Mini Motor Contactors Data according to IEC 947-5-1, VDE 0660, EN 60947-5-1 J7KNA-09... J7KNA-09...D(VS) Auxiliary Contacts Ty p e J7KNA-12... J7KNA-12...D(VS) J73KN-A... *1 *1 *1 Rated insulation voltage Ui V AC 690 690 690

Thermal rated current Ith to 690V Ambient temperature 40°C A 10 10 10 60°C A 6 6 6

Power loss per pole at Ith W 0.5 0.5 0.5

Utilization category AC15

Rated operational current Ie 220-240V A 3 3 3 380-415V A 2 2 2 440V A 1.6 1.6 1.6

500V A 1.2 1.2 1.2 660-690V A 0.6 0.6 0.6

Utilization category DC13

Rated operational current Ie 60V A 2 2 2 110V A 0.4 0.4 0.4 220V A 0.1 0.1 0.1

Maximum ambient temperature Operation open °C -40 to +60 (+90)*2 enclosed °C -40 to +40 Storage °C -40 to +90

Short circuit protection short-circuit current 1kA, contact welding not accepted max. fuse size gL (gG) A 20 20 20

For contactors with thermal overload relay the device with the smaller admissible control fuse (contactor or thermal overload relay) determines the fuse size.

Power consumption of coils AC operated inrush VA 25 - - sealed VA 4 - 5 - - W1.2 - -

DC operated inrush W - 2.5 - sealed W - 2.5 -

Operation range of coils 19 - 30V DC in multiples of control voltage Us 0.85 - 1.1 0.8 - 1.1 -

*3,*4 Switching time at control voltage Us ±10%

AC operated make time ms 15 - 25 - - release time ms 8 - 25 - - arc duration ms 10 -15 - -

DC operated make time ms - 15 - 19 - release time ms - 8 - 25 - arc duration ms - 10 -15 -

H-24 Mini Motor Contactor J7KNA Mini Motor Contactors Data according to IEC 947-5-1, VDE 0660, EN 60947-5-1 J7KNA-09... J7KNA-09...D(VS) Auxiliary Contacts Ty p e J7KNA-12... J7KNA-12...D(VS) J73KN-A... Cable cross-section all connectors solid mm² 0.75 - 2.5 0.75 - 2.5 0.75 - 2.5 flexible mm² 0.75 - 2.5 0.75 - 2.5 0.75 - 2.5 flexible with multicore cable end mm² 0.5 - 1.5 0.5 - 1.5 0.5 - 2.5

Clamps per pole 2 2 2

solid or stranded AWG 18 - 14 18 - 14 18 - 14

*1) Suitable at 690V for: earthed-neutral systems, overvoltage category I to IV, pollution degree 3 (standard-industry): Uimp = 8kV. Data for other conditions on request.

Mini Contactors for North America Data according to UL508 Main Contacts (cULus) Ty p e J7KNA-09... J7KNA-12... J73KN-A... Rated operational current "General Use" A 15 20 10

Rated operational power of three-phase motors 115V hp 1½ 2 - at 60Hz (3ph) 200V hp 3 3 - 230V hp 3 3 -

460V hp 5 7½ - 575V hp 7½ 10 -

Rated operational power of of AC motors 115V hp ½ ¾ - at 60Hz (1ph) 200V hp 1 1½ - 230V hp 1½ 2 -

Fuses A3030- LVSG Suitable for use on a capability of delivering not more than rms A 5000 5000 - V 600 600 -

Rated voltage V AC 600 600 600

Auxiliary Contacts (cULus) heavy pilot duty AC A600 A600 A600 standard pilot duty DC Q600 Q600 Q600

Mini Motor Contactor J7KNA H-25 ■ Dimensions AC and DC operated Auxiliary Contact Blocks with screw terminals J7KNA-09... J73KN-A... J7KNA-12...

Reversing Contactors J7KNA-09-01-W... J7KNA-09-01-W... + J7TKN-A J7KNA-12-01-W... J7KNA-12-01-W...+ J7TKN-A

ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS.

Cat. No. J506-E2-02 In the interest of product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice.

H-26 Mini Motor Contactor J7KNA Motor Contactor J7KN

Main contactor

• AC & DC operated • Integrated auxiliary contacts • Screw fixing and snap fitting (35 mm DIN rail) up to 45 kW • Range from 4 to 110 kW (AC 3, 380/415V) • Finger proof (VBG 4) Accessories

• front mounted single pole additional auxiliary contacts (1 NO or 1 NC) • Side mounted additional auxiliary contacts (1 NO/1 NC) • Mechanical interlock • Suppressors (RC and varistor) • Pneumatic timer modules • Link modules MPCB - Motor contactor

Approved Standards

Standard Guide No (US,C) UL NLDX, NLDX7 ICE 947-4-1 VDE 0660 EN 60947-4-1 LVSG

Motor Contactor J7KN H-27 H-28 Motor Contactor J7KN Ordering Information

■ Model Number Legend 1. Motor Contactors 4. Accessories for Motor Contactors (Pneumatic Timers) J7KN-###-##-#### 1234 J74KN-#-## ### ## 12345 1) Motor Contactor 2) Rated Motor Current (AC3 400V) 1) Accessories for Motor Contactors 10: 10A 2) B: Motor Contactor (4-11kW) 14: 14A 3) TP: Pneumatic Timer 18: 18A 4) 40: 40 sec 22: 22A 180: 180 sec 24: 24A 32: 32A 5) DA: ON-delayed 40: 40A IA: OFF-delayed 50: 50A 62: 62A 5. Accessories for Motor Contactors (Mechanical Interlock) 74: 74A J74KN-#-## 85: 85A 123 110: 110A 150: 150A 1) Accessories for Motor Contactors 175: 175A 2) B: Motor Contactor (4-18.5kW) 200: 200A C: Motor Contactor (11-37kW) 3) Integrated auxiliary contact D: Motor Contactor (45-55kW) 10: 1NO 0NC 3) ML: Mechanical Interlock 01: 0NO 1NC 21: 2NO 1NC 6. Accessories for Motor Contactors (RC Suppressor units) 22: 2NO 2NC : 0NO 0NC J74KN-#-## ### 4) Coil voltage (AC operated) 1234 24: AC24V 50/60Hz 48: AC48V 50Hz 1) Accessories for Motor Contactors 110: AC110V 50Hz, AC110-120V 60Hz 2) A: for Mini Motor Contactor and Motor Contactor 180: AC180-210V 50Hz, AC200-240V 60Hz (4-18.5kW) 230: AC220-240V 50Hz, AC240V 60Hz (between DIN-rail and Contactor) 400: AC380-415V 50Hz, AC415-440V 60Hz B: for Mini Motor Contactor and Motor Contactor 500: AC500-550V 50Hz, AC550-600V 60Hz (4-55kW) C: for Motor Contactor (4-37kW) to snap on the contactor Coil voltage(DC operated)

3) RC: RC-surge suppressors LVSG 24D: DC24V 4) 48: 24 - 48 VAC/DC (A+B type) 48D: DC48V 230: 110 - 230 VAC/DC (A+B type) 110D: DC110V 400: 250 - 415 VAC/DC (A+B type) 125D: DC125V 24: 12 - 48 VAC/DC (C type) 2. Aux. Contact Modules for Motor Contactors 110: 48 - 127 VAC/DC (C type) 230: 110 - 250 VAC/DC (C type) J73KN-#-##-# 1234 7. Accessories for Motor Contactors (Varistor units)

1) Auxiliary Contact Modules J74KN-#-## ### 1234 2) B: for motor contactor (4-37kW) C: for motor contactor (11-37kW) 1) Accessories for Motor Contactors 3) Combination of NO/NC contacts 2) A: for Motor Contactor (4-11kW) to snap on 10: 1NO 0NC to coil terminals 01: 0NO 1NC B: for Motor Contactor (4-37kW) to snap on to contactor 11: 1NO 1NC 3) VG: Varistor Suppressors 4) S: side mounting : front mounting 4) 230: 110-230VAC/DC 400: 250-415VAC/DC 3. Accessories for Motor Contactors (Link Modules MPCB - Motor Contactor)

J74KN-##-## 123

1) Accessories for Motor Contactors 2) VD: Link module type HU: DIN-rail adapter type 3) 12: for motor contactor (4 - 7.5kW) 25: for motor contactor (11 - 15kW)

Motor Contactor J7KN H-29 ■ List of Models

Contactors 3-pole

• Up to 210A AC3 • Up to 350A AC1 • DIN-rail mounting up to AC3 74A • International Approvals • Data according to IEC 947 / EN 60947

Ratings AC3 400V Motor 10A 14A 18A 22A 24A 32A 40A 50A 62A 74A 380-400V 4kW 5,5kW 7,5kW 11kW 11kW 15kW 18,5kW 22kW 30kW 37kW 660-690V 5,5kW 7,5kW 10kW 10kW 15kW 18,5kW 18,5kW 30kW 37kW 45kW AC1 690V at 40°C 25A 25A 32A 32A 50A 65A 80A 110A 120A 130A Type J7KN- J7KN- J7KN- J7KN- J7KN-24 J7KN-32 J7KN-40 J7KN-50 J7KN-62 J7KN-74 10-10 14-10 18-10 22-10 Auxiliary contacts1NO1NO1NO1NO------Type J7KN- J7KN- J7KN- J7KN------10-01 14-01 18-01 22-01 Auxiliary contacts1NC1NC1NC1NC------Cable cross-section Solid mm2 0,75 - 6 1,5 - 25 4 - 50 Flexible mm2 1 - 4 2,5 - 16 10 - 35 Cables per clamp 2 1 + 1 1 + 1 Auxiliary contact

Ith 40°C A 16 - - AC15 230V A 12 - - 400V A 4 - - Power consumption of coils Inrush VA 33 - 45 90 - 115 140 - 165 Hold VA 7 - 10 9 - 13 13 - 18 Operation range of coils 0,85 - 1,1 0,85 - 1,1 0,85 - 1,1 Mounting 35mm DIN-rail or base Additional aux. contact blocks Front mounting Type J73KN-B-10 J73KN-B-01 contacts 1NO 1NC f. low level switching f. low level switching maximal 4 J73KN-B.. Additional aux. contact blocks Side mountingType---- J73KN-C-11S contacts 1NO+1NC f. low level switching max. 2 J73KN-C-11S Overload Relay (thermal) Single phase protection Temperature compensation Trip and alarm contacts

Type J7TKN-B J7TKN-A J7TKN-C J7TKN-D Setting Ranges Setting Ranges Setting Ranges 0,12 - 0,18A 1,8 - 2,7A 28 - 42A 20 - 28A 0,18 - 0,27A 2,7 - 4A 28 - 42A 0,27 - 0,4A 4 - 6A 40 - 52A 0,4 - 0,6A 6 - 9A 52 - 65A 0,6 - 0,9A 8 - 11A 60 - 74A 0,8 - 1,2A 10 - 14A 1,2 - 1,8A 13 - 18A

17 - (23)24A (22)23 - (30)32A

H-30 Motor Contactor J7KN Ratings AC3 400V Motor 85A 110A 150A 175A 210A 380-400V 45kW 55kW 75kW 90kW 110kW 660-690V 55kW 55kW 75kW 110kW 132kW AC1 690V at 40°C 150A 170A 200A 250A 350A Type J7KN- J7KN- J7KN- J7KN- J7KN-200- 85-22 110-22 150-11 175-11 22 Auxiliary contacts 2NO+2NC 2NO+2NC 1NO+1NC 1NO+1NC 2NO+2NC Type -----

Auxiliary contacts----- Cable cross-section Solid mm2 10 - 70 10 - 70 busbar busbar busbar Flexible mm2 16 - 50 16 - 50 18x5 18x5 22x4 Cables per clamp 1 1 1 1 1 Auxiliary contact

Ith 40°C A 16 10 AC15 230V A 12 3 400V A 6 2 Power consumption of coils Inrush VA 350 - 420 550 550 1100 hold VA 23 - 29 130 130 66 Operation range of coils 0,85 - 1,1 0,85 - 1,1 Mounting base Additional aux. contact blocks LVSG Front mounting Type contacts

Additional aux. contact blocks Side mounting Type - - - - - contacts

Overload Relay (thermal) Single phase protection Temperature compensation Trip and alarm contacts

Type J7TKN-E J7TKN-F Setting Ranges Setting Ranges 60 - 90A 100 - 150A 80 - 120A 140 - 220A

Busbar Sets J74TK-SU-175, J74TK-SU-200

Motor Contactor J7KN H-31 Contactors 3-pole AC Operated

Ratings Rated Aux. Contacts Type Pack Weight Current AC2, AC3 AC1 Built-in Additional 380V 500V 660V 690V see Coil Voltage*1 400V 690V page 34 24 24V 50/60Hz 415V 110 110V 50Hz kW kW kW A NO NC Ty p e 230 220-240V 50Hz pcs. kg/pc. 4 5.5 5.5 25 1 - max. 4 J7KN-10-10#### 10.23 4 5.5 5.5 25 - 1 J73KN-B J7KN-10-01#### 10.23 5.5 7.5 7.5 25 1 - J7KN-14-10#### 10.23 5.5 7.5 7.5 25 - 1 J7KN-14-01#### 10.23 7.5 10 10 32 1 - J7KN-18-10#### 10.23 7.5 10 10 32 - 1 J7KN-18-01#### 10.23 11 10 10 32 1 - J7KN-22-10#### 10.23 11 10 10 32 - 1 J7KN-22-01#### 10.23 11 15 15 50 - - max. 4 J7KN-24#### 10.48 15 18.5 18.5 65 - - J73KN-B + J7KN-32#### 10.48 2 J73KN- 18.5 18.5 18.5 80 - - C-11S J7KN-40#### 10.48

22 30 30 110 - - max. 4 J7KN-50#### 10.85 30 37 37 120 - - J73KN-B + J7KN-62#### 10.85 2 J73KN- 37 45 45 130 - - C11S J7KN-74#### 10.85

Ratings Rated Aux. Contacts Type Pack Weight Current AC2, AC3 AC1 Built-in 380V 500V 660V 690V Coil Voltage*1 415V 690V 230 220-230V 50Hz kW kW kW A NO NC 400 380-400V 50Hz pcs. kg/pc. 45 55 55 150 2 2 J7KN-85-22#### 11.8 55 75 55 170 2 2 J7KN-110-22#### 11.9

75 75 75 200 1 1 J7KN-150-11#### 15 90 90 90 250 1 1 J7KN-175-11#### 15 110 132 132 350 2 2 J7KN-200-22#### 17.3

*1) Coil voltage range and other coil voltages see page 37

H-32 Motor Contactor J7KN Contactors 3-pole DC Operated

Type Coil voltage Aux. Contacts Weight Accept Overload Busbar Set for Wiring Diagram Relay Overload Relay Built-in Additional*1) page 57 page 59 24 24V DC Coil Circuits see page 36 60 60V DC 110 110V DC 220 220V DC NO NC Ty p e kg/pc. Ty p e Ty p e Terminal Markings J7KN-10-10####D 1- max. 3 0.25 J7TKN-B --10 J7KN-10-01####D - 1J73KN-B 0.25J7TKN-A - J7KN-14-10####D 1 - 0.25 - J7KN-14-01####D - 1 0.25 - J7KN-18-10####D 1 - 0.25 - -01 J7KN-18-01####D - 1 0.25 - J7KN-22-10####D 1 - 0.25 - J7KN-22-01####D - 1 0.25 - J7KN-24####D --max. 3 0.55 J7TKN-B --11 --J73KN-B J7TKN-C - + J7KN-32####D - -2 J73KN- 0.55 - --C-11S - J7KN-40####D - - 0.55 - -21 -- - J7KN-50####D --max. 3 0.9 J7TKN-D J7KN-62####D --J73KN-B 0.9 J7KN-74####D + 212 J73KN- 1.6 C-11S

Type Coil voltage Aux. Contacts Weight Accept Overload Busbar Set for -22 Relay Overload Relay Built-in page H-59 page H-59

110 110V DC 220 220V DC NO NC kg/pc. Ty p e Ty p e LVSG J7KN-85-21####D 2 1 - 1.8 J7TKN-E J7KN-110-21####D 21- 1.9

J73TK-SU-175

J7TKN-F J73TK-SU-200

*1) Only 3 additional Aux. Contacts are possible! (See also the wiring diagrammms coil circuit DC operated page 36)

Motor Contactor J7KN H-33 Contactors 4-pole AC Operated

Ratings Rated Aux. Contacts Type Pack Weight Current AC2, AC1 AC1 AC3 Built-in Additional 380V 400V 690V see Coil Voltage*1 pcs. kg/pc. below 400V 24 24V 50/60Hz 415V 110 110V 50Hz kW kW A NO NC Ty p e 230 220-240V 50Hz 4 17.5 25 - - max. 4 J7KN-10-4#### 10.22 J73KN-B

*1) Coil voltage range and other coil voltages see page 37 Auxiliary Contact Blocks for contactors J7KN-10... to -74... type J73KN for low level switching*1

Front mounting Rated Operational Current Contacts Ty p e Pack Weight AC15 AC15 AC1 EM LB 230V 400V 690V

A A A NO NC pcs. kg/pc. 3 2 10 1 - - - J73KN-B-10 10 0.02 3 2 10 - 1 - - J73KN-B-01 10 0.02

Auxiliary Contact Blocks for contactors J7KN-24... to -74... type J73KN for low level switching*1

Side mounting Rated Operational Current Contacts Ty p e Pack Weight AC15 AC15 AC1 230V 400V 690V

A A A for side mounting NO NC pcs. kg/pc. 3 2 10 max. 2 1 1 J73KN-C-11S 10 0.02

Pneumatic Timer for contactors J7KN-10... to -22...

Function Time range Contacts Ty p e Pack Weight s pcs. kg/pc.

NO NC NO NC On-delay 0.1 - 40 1 1 - - J74KN-B-TP40DA 1 0.09 On-delay 10 - 180 1 1 - - J74KN-B-TP180DA 1 0.09 Off-delay 0.1 - 40 - - 1 1 J74KN-B-TP40IA 1 0.09 Off-delay 10 - 180 - - 1 1 J74KN-B-TP180IA 1 0.09

1. suitable according to DIN 19240 (test ratings 17V DC, 5mA) Technical data see page 51

H-34 Motor Contactor J7KN Mechanical Interlocks

Interlocks contactor with contactor Mounting Ty p e Pack Weight Ty p e + Ty p e pcs. kg/pc. J7KN10 - J7KN40 + J7KN10 - J7KN40 horizontal J74KN-B-ML 1 0.006 J7KN24 - J7KN74 + J7KN24 - J7KN74 horizontal J74KN-C-ML 1 0.010 J7KN85 - J7KN110 + J7KN85 - J7KN110 horizontal J74KN-D-ML 1 0.076

Suppressor Units

Voltage Range Mounting Ty p e Pack Weight V pcs. kg/pc. Varistor for contactors J7KN-10 to J7KN-22 110 - 230V AC/DC to snap on to coil terminals J74KN-A-VG230 10 0.01 250 - 415V AC/DC to snap on to coil terminals J74KN-A-VG400 10 0.01 Varistor for contactors J7KN-10 to J7KN-74 110 - 230V AC/DC to snap on the contactor J74KN-B-VG230 10 0.02 250 - 415V AC/DC to snap on the contactor J74KN-B-VG400 10 0.02 RC-unit for contactors J7KN-10 to J7KN-40, J7KNA 110 - 230V AC/DC between DIN-rail and contactor J74KN-A-RC230 1 0.036 RC-units for contactors J7KN-10 to J7KN-110 24 - 48V AC/DC universal (fixing band, adhesive strip) J74KN-B-RC48 5 0.02 110 - 230V AC/DC universal (fixing band, adhesive strip) J74KN-B-RC230 5 0.02 250 - 415V AC universal (fixing band, adhesive strip) J74KN-B-RC400 5 0.02 RC-units for contactors J7KN-10 to J7KN-74 12 - 48V AC (50/60Hz) & DC to snap on the contactor J74KN-C-RC24 10 0.02 48 - 127V AC (50/60Hz) & DC to snap on the contactor J74KN-C-RC110 10 0.036 110 - 250V AC (50/60Hz) & DC to snap on the contactor J74KN-C-RC230 10 0.036 LVSG

Motor Contactor J7KN H-35 ■ Wiring Diagrams Coil Circuit

AC operated DC operated with double winding coil*1 J7KN-10... J7KN-10...D to to J7KN-175... J7KN-22...D

J7KN-200... J7KN-24...D to J7KN-74...D

J7KN-85-...D to J7KN-110...D

*1) Only 3 additional Aux. Contacts are possible! (See also page 33)

H-36 Motor Contactor J7KN Specifications

■ Coil Voltages Type-suffix for contactor types J7KN-10... to J7KN-74...

Suffix Voltage Marking Rated Control Voltage Us to contactor at the coil range for type e.g. 50Hz 60Hz J7KN-10-10-24 for 50Hz for 60Hz min max min max V V V. V. V. V. 24 24 24 22 24 24 27 48 48 47 52 52 58 110 110 110-120 100 110 110 122 180 180-210 200-240 180 210 200 240 230 220-240 240 220 240 240 264 400 380-415 415-440 380 415 415 460 500 500-550 550-600 500 550 550 600 Standard voltages in bold type letter Type-suffix for contactor types J7KN-85... to J7KN-110...

Suffix Voltage Marking Rated Control Voltage Us to contactor at the coil range for type e.g. 50Hz 60Hz J7KN-85-22-24 for 50Hz for 60Hz min max min max V V V. V. V. V. 24 24 24 27 29 32 48 48 60 47 52 56 62 110 110-120 110 122 132 146 180 180-200 208-240 180 200 208 240 230 220-240 277 220 240 264 288 400 380-415 460-480 380 415 455 498 500 500-550 600-660 500 550 600 660 Standard voltages in bold type letter Type-suffix for contactor types J7KN-150... to J7KN-200...

Suffix Voltage Marking Rated Control Voltage Us to contactor at the coil range for LVSG type e.g. 50Hz 60Hz J7KN-150-110 for 50Hz for 60Hz min max min max V V V. V. V. V. 24 24 24 24 - - 48 48 48 48 - - 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 180 180 220 180 180 220 220 230 220-230 220 220 230 220 220 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 400 380-400 380 400 - - 440 440 - - 440 440 Standard voltages in bold type letter

Motor Contactor J7KN H-37 ■ Engineering data and characteristics

Approximate Values for three-phase Motors

Motor Full Load Currents Approximate values of motor F.L.C. and minimum „slow blow“ respectively „gL“ short-circuit fuse

Motor rating 220-230V Motor 240V Motor 380-400V Motor 415V Motor 500V Motor 660-690V Motor Range according to BS for 415V Value of fusing at Value of fusing at Value of fusing at Value of fusing at Value of fusing at Value of fusing at motor start motor start motor start motor start motor start motor start F. L . C . D.O.L. YD F. L . C . D.O.L. YD F. L . C . D.O.L. YD F. L . C . D.O.L. YD F. L . C . D.O.L. YD F. L . C . D.O.L. YD kW PS~hp hp cosϕ % A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 0.06 0.08 - 0.7 59 0.38 1 1 0.35 1 1 0.22 11- - -0.1611- - - 0.09 0.12 - 0.7 60 0.55 2 2 0.5 2 2 0.33 11- - -0.2411- - - 0.12 0.16 - 0.7 61 0.76 2 2 0.68 2 2 0.42 22- - -0.3311- - - 0.18 0.24 - 0.7 61 1.1 2 2 1 2 2 0.64 22- - -0.4611- - - 0.25 0.34 - 0.7 62 1.4 4 2 1.38 4 2 0.88 22- - -0.5922- - - 0.37 0.5 - 0.72 64 2.1 4 4 1.93 4 4 1.22 42- - -0.85220.722 0.55 0.75 - 0.75 69 2.7 4 4 2.3 4 4 1.5 42- - -1.2420.922 0.75110.8743.3643.1642 442441.48421.122 1.1 1.5 1.5 0.83 77 4.9 10 6 4.1 6 6 2.6 442.5442.1441.542 1.5 2 2 0.83 78 6.2 10 10 5.6 10 10 3.5 643.5642.644244 2.2 3 3 0.83 81 8.7 16 10 7.9 16 10 5 10 6 5 10 6 3.8 6 6 2.9 6 4 2.5 3.4 - 0.83 81 9.8 16 16 8.9 16 10 5.7 1010---4.366--- 3440.848111.6201610.620166.6 16 10 6.5 16 10 5.1 10 10 3.5 6 4 3.7550.848214.225201325168.2 16 10 7.5 16 10 6.2 16 10 - - - 4 5.5 - 0.84 82 15.3 25 20 14 25 20 8.5 16 10 - - - 6.5 16 10 4.9 10 6 5.5 7.5 7.5 0.85 83 20.6 35 25 18.9 35 25 11.5 20 16 11 20 16 8.9 16 10 6.7 16 10 7.510100.868527.4353524.8353515.5 25 20 14 25 16 11.9 20 16 9 16 10 8 11 - 0.86 85 28.8 50 35 26.4 35 35 16.7 25 20 - - - 12.7 20 16 - - - 11 15 15 0.86 87 39.2 63 50 35.3 50 50 22 35 25 21 35 25 16.7 25 20 13 25 16 12.5 17 - 0.86 87 43.8 63 50 40.2 63 50 25 35 35 - - - 19 35 25 - - - 15 20 20 0.86 87 52.6 80 63 48.2 80 63 30 50 35 28 35 35 22.5 35 25 17.5 25 20 18.5 25 25 0.86 88 64.9 100 80 58.7 80 63 37 63 50 35 50 50 28.5 50 35 21 35 25 20 27 - 0.86 88 69.3 100 80 63.4 80 80 40 63 50 - - - 30.6 50 35 - - - 22 30 30 0.87 89 75.2 100 80 68 100 80 44 63 50 40 63 50 33 50 50 25 35 35 25 34 - 0.87 89 84.4 125 100 77.2 100 100 50 80 63 - - - 38 63 50 - - - 30 40 40 0.87 90 101 125 125 92.7 125 100 60 80 63 55 80 63 44 63 50 33 50 35 37 50 50 0.87 90 124 160 160 114 160 125 72 100 80 66 100 80 54 80 63 42 63 50 40 54 - 0.87 90 134 160 160 123 160 160 79 100 100 - - - 60 80 63 - - - 45 60 60 0.88 91 150 200 160 136 200 160 85 125 100 80 100 100 64.5 100 80 49 63 63 51 70 - 0.88 91 168 200 200 154 200 200 97 125 100 - - - 73.7 100 80 - - - 55 75 - 0.88 91 181 250 200 166 200 200 105 160 125 - - - 79 125 100 60 80 63 59 80 80 0.88 91 194 250 250 178 250 200 112 160 125 105 160 125 85.3 125 100 - - - 75 100 100 0.88 91 245 315 250 226 315 250 140 200 160 135 200 160 106 160 125 82 125 100 90 125 125 0.88 92 292 400 315 268 315 315 170 250 200 165 200 200 128 160 160 98 125 125 110 150 150 0.88 92 358 500 400 327 400 400 205 250 250 200 250 250 156 200 200 118 160 125 129 175 175 0.88 92 420 500 500 384 500 400 242 315 250 230 315 250 184 250 200 - - - 132 180 - 0.88 92 425 500 500 393 500 500 245 315 250 - - - 186 250 200 140 200 160 147 200 200 0.88 93 472 630 630 432 630 500 273 315 315 260 315 315 207 250 250 - - - 160 220 - 0.88 93 502 630 630 471 630 630 295 400 315 - - - 220 315 250 170 200 200 184 250 250 0.88 93 590 800 630 541 630 630 340 400 400 325 400 400 259 315 315 - - - 200 270 - 0.88 93 626 800 800 589 800 630 370 500 400 - - - 278 315 315 215 250 250 220 300 300 0.88 93 700 1000 800 647 800 800 408 500 500 385 500 400 310 400 400 - - - 250 340 - 0.88 93 803 1000 1000 736 1000 800 460 630 500 - - - 353 500 400 268 315 315 257 350 350 0.88 93 826 1000 1000 756 1000 800 475 630 630 450 630 500 363 500 400 - - - 295 400 400 0.88 93 948 1250 1000 868 1000 1000 546 800 630 500 630 630 416 500 500 - - - 315 430 - 0.88 93 990 1250 1250 927 1250 1000 580 800 630 - - - 445 630 500 337 400 400 355 483 - 0.89 95 ------636 800 800 - - - 483 630 630 366 500 400 400 545 - 0.89 96 ------710 1000 800 - - - 538 630 630 410 500 500

The motor F.L.C. be valid for standard internal and surface cooled three-pole motors with 1500 min-1. The fuses values be valid for the motor F.L.C. shown in the table and D.O.L.-start: starting current max. 6x motor F.L.C., starting time max. 5s; star-delta-start: starting current max. 2x motor F.L.C., starting time max. 15s. For motors with higher F.L.C., higher starting current and / or longer starting time, larger short-circuit fuses are required. The maximum admissible value is dependent on the switchgear respectively thermal overload relay.

H-38 Motor Contactor J7KN Approximate values of motor F.L.C. according to CSA and UL

Motor Motor F.L.C. at 110-120V Motor F.L.C. at 220-240V*1 Motor F.L.C. at 440-480V Motor F.L.C. at 550-600V rating 1-phase 2-phase 3-phase 1-phase 2-phase 3-phase 1-phase 2-phase 3-phase 1-phase 2-phase 3-phase hp A A A A A A A A A A A A ½ 9.8 4.0 4.4 4.9 2.0 2.2 2.5 1.0 1.1 2.0 0.8 0.9 ¾ 13.8 4.8 6.4 6.9 2.4 3.2 3.5 1.2 1.6 2.8 1.0 1.3 1 16.0 6.4 8.4 8.0 3.2 4.2 4.0 1.6 2.1 3.2 1.3 1.7 1½ 20.0 9.0 12.0 10.0 4.5 6.0 5.0 2.3 3.0 4.0 1.8 2.4 2 24.0 11.8 13.6 12.0 5.9 6.8 6.0 3.0 3.4 4.8 2.4 2.7 3 34.0 16.6 19.2 17.0 8.3 9.6 8.5 4.2 4.8 6.8 3.3 3.9 5 56.0 26.4 30.4 28.0 13.2 15.2 14.0 6.6 7.6 11.2 5.3 6.1 7½ 80.0 38.0 44.0 40.0 19.0 22.0 21.0 9.0 11.0 16.0 8.0 9.0 10 100.0 48.0 56.0 50.0 24.0 28.0 26.0 12.0 14.0 20.0 10.0 11.0 15 135.0 72.0 84.0 68.0 36.0 42.0 34.0 18.0 21.0 27.0 14.0 17.0 20 - 94.0 108.0 88.0 47.0 54.0 44.0 23.0 27.0 35.0 19.0 22.0 25 - 118.0 136.0 110.0 59.0 68.0 55.0 29.0 34.0 44.0 24.0 27.0 30 - 138.0 160.0 136.0 69.0 80.0 68.0 35.0 40.0 54.0 28.0 32.0 40 - 180.0 208.0 176.0 90.0 104.0 88.0 45.0 52.0 70.0 36.0 41.0 50 - 226.0 260.0 216.0 113.0 130.0 108.0 56.0 65.0 86.0 45.0 52.0 60 - - - - 133.0 145.0 - 67.0 77.0 - 53.0 62.0 75 - - - - 166.0 192.0 - 83.0 96.0 - 66.0 77.0 100 - - - - 218.0 248.0 - 109.0 124.0 - 87.0 99.0 125-----312.0 - 135.0 156.0 - 108.0 125.0 150-----360.0 - 156.0 180.0 - 125.0 144.0 200-----480.0 - 208.0 240.0 - 167.0 192.0 250-----602.0 - - 302.0 - - 242.0 300------361.0--289.0 350------414.0--336.0 400------477.0--382.0 500------590.0--472.0

*1) Determine the motor current for 200V and 208V by increasing the values for 220-240V at 200V about 15% and for 208V about 10%. LVSG

Motor Contactor J7KN H-39 Contactors

Data according to IEC 947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1, VDE 0660

Main Contacts Type J7KN-10 J7KN-14 J7KN-18 J7KN-22 J7KN-24 J7KN-32 J7KN-40 J7KN-50 J7KN-62 J7KN-74 *1 Rated insulation voltage Ui V AC 690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690

Making capacity Ieff at Ue = 690V AC A 200 200 200 200 400 500 500 700 900 900

Breaking capacity Ieff 400V AC A 180 180 200 200 380 400 400 600 800 800 J7KN-10 to J7KN-22 cosϕ = 0,65 500V AC A 150 150 180 180 300 370 370 500 700 700 J7KN-24 to J7KN-72 cosϕ = 0,35 690V AC A 100 100 150 150 260 340 340 400 500 500 1000V ACA------Utilization category AC1 Switching of resistive load

Rated operational current Ie (=Ith) at 40°C, open A25253232506580110120130 Rated operational power 220V kW 9,5 9,5 12,2 12,2 19,0 24,7 30,4 41,9 45,7 49,5 of three-phase resistive loads 230V kW 9,9 9,9 12,7 12,7 19,9 25,9 31,8 43,8 47,7 51,7 50-60Hz, cosϕ = 1 240V kW 10,4 10,4 13,3 13,3 20,8 27,0 33,2 45,7 49,8 54,0 380V kW 16,4 16,4 21,0 21,0 32,9 42,7 52,6 72,3 78,9 85,5 400V kW 17,3 17,3 22,1 22,1 34,6 45,0 55,4 76,1 83,0 90,0 415V kW 17,9 17,9 23,0 23,0 35,9 46,7 57,4 79,0 86,2 93,3 440V kW 19,0 19,0 24,4 24,4 38,1 49,5 60,9 83,7 91,3 99,0 500V kW 21,6 21,6 27,7 27,7 43,3 56,2 69,2 95,2 103,8 112,5 660V kW 28,5 28,5 36,5 36,5 57,1 74,2 91,3 125,6 137,0 148,4 690V kW 29,8 29,8 38,2 38,2 59,7 77,6 95,5 131,3 143,2 155,2 1000VkW------

Rated operational current Ie (=Ithe) at 60°C, enclosed A 25 25 32 32 40 55 65 90 100 110 Rated operational power 220V kW 9,5 9,5 12,2 12,2 15,2 20,9 24,7 34,3 38,1 41,9 of three-phase resistive loads 230V kW 9,9 9,9 12,7 12,7 15,9 21,9 25,9 35,8 39,8 43,8 50-60Hz, cosϕ = 1 240V kW 10,4 10,4 13,3 13,3 16,6 22,8 27,0 37,4 41,5 45,7 380V kW 16,4 16,4 21,0 21,0 26,3 36,2 42,7 59,2 65,7 72,3 400V kW 17,3 17,3 22,1 22,1 27,7 38,1 45,0 62,3 69,2 76,1 415V kW 17,9 17,9 23,0 23,0 28,7 39,5 46,7 64,6 71,8 79,0 440V kW 19,0 19,0 24,4 24,4 30,4 41,9 49,5 68,5 76,1 83,7 500V kW 21,6 21,6 27,7 27,7 34,6 47,6 56,2 77,9 86,5 95,2 660V kW 28,5 28,5 36,5 36,5 45,7 62,8 74,2 102,8 114,2 125,6 690V kW 29,8 29,8 38,2 38,2 47,7 65,7 77,6 107,4 119,4 131,3 1000VkW------Minimum cross-section of conductor mm² 4 4 6 6 10 16 25 35 50 50 at load with Ie (=Ith) Utilization category AC2 and AC3 Switching of three-phase motors

Rated operational current Ie 220VA121518222430405063 74 open and enclosed 230V A 11,5 14,5 18 22 24 30 40 50 62 74 240VA11141822243240506274 380-400V A 10 14 18 22 24 32 40 50 62 74 415V A 9 14 18 22 23 30 40 50 62 74 440V A 9 14 18 22 23 30 40 50 62 74 500V A 7 9 9 9 17,5 21 21 33 42 42 660-690V A 6,5 8,5 8,5 8,5 17 20 20 31 40 40 1000VA------Rated operational power 220-230V kW 3 4 5 6 6 8,5 11 12,5 18,5 22 of three-phase motors 50-60Hz 240V kW 3 4 5 7 7 9 11,5 13,5 19 23 380-400V kW 4 5,5 7,5 11 11 15 18,5 22 30 37 415VkW4,56 8,512121620243340 440VkW4,56 8,512121620243340 500V kW 5,5 7,5 10 10 15 18,5 18,5 30 37 45 660-690V kW 5,5 7,5 10 10 15 18,5 18,5 30 37 45 1000VkW------Utilization category AC4 Switching of squirrel cage motors, inching

Rated operational current Ie (=Ith) 220VA121518182430405063 63 open and enclosed 230V A 11,5 14,5 18 18 24 30 40 50 62 62 240VA11141818243240506262 380-400VA10141818243240506262 415V A 9 14 18 18 23 30 37 45 60 60 440V A 9 14 18 18 23 30 37 45 55 55 500V A 9 12 16 16 17,5 21 21 33 42 42 660VA79 9 9 172020314040 690VA6,58,58,58,5172020314040 1000VA------

H-40 Motor Contactor J7KN Main Contacts Type J7KN-10 J7KN-14 J7KN-18 J7KN-22 J7KN-24 J7KN-32 J7KN-40 J7KN-50 J7KN-62 J7KN-74 Rated operational power 220-230V kW 3 4 5 5 6 8,5 11 12,5 18,5 18,5 of three-phase motors 240VkW34557911,513,51919 50-60Hz 380-400V kW 4 5,5 7,5 7,5 11 15 18,5 22 30 30 415V kW 4,5 6 8,5 8,5 12 16 20 24 33 33 440V kW 4,5 6 8,5 8,5 12 16 20 24 33 33 500V kW 5,5 7,5 10 10 15 18,5 18,5 30 37 37 660-690V kW 5,5 7,5 10 10 15 18,5 18,5 30 37 37 1000VkW------Utilization category AC 5a Switching of gas discharge lamps

Rated operational current Ie per pole at 220/230V Fluorescent lamps, uncompensated and serial compensated A 20 20 25 25 40 52 64 88 96 104 parallel compensated A 7 9 9 9 18 22 22 30 40 45 dual-connection A 22,5 22,5 28 28 45 58 72 98 108 117 Metal halide lamps*2, uncompensated A12151919303948667278 parallel compensated A 7 9 9 9 18 22 22 30 40 45 Mercury-vapour lamps*3, uncompensated A 22,5 25 28 28 45 58 72 99 108 117 parallel compensated A 7 9 9 9 18 22 22 30 40 45 Mixed light lamps*4 A202025254052648896104 Utilization category AC5b Switching of incandescent lamps*5

Rated operational current Ie per pole at 220/230V A 12,5 12,5 12,5 12,5 25 31 31 43 56 56 Utilization category AC6a Transformer primary switching at inrush n30303030303030303030

Rated operational current Ie 400V A 4,5 5,5 7,5 7,5 10,5 13,5 13,5 20 27 33 Rated operational power 220-230V kVA 1,8 2,2 3 3 4,2 5,4 5,4 8 10,7 13 dependent on inrush n 240V kVA 1,9 2,3 3,1 3,1 4,3 5,6 5,6 8,3 11,2 13,5 380-400V kVA 3,1 3,8 5,2 5,2 7,3 9,3 9,3 13,5 18,5 22,5 For different inrush-factors x 415-440V kVA 3,4 4,2 5,7 5,7 8 10,2 10,2 15 20,5 25 use the following formula: 500V kVA 3,9 4,8 6,5 6,5 9 11,5 11,5 17 23 28 Px=Pn*(n/x) 660-690V kVA 5,4 6,5 9 9 12,5 16 16 24 32 39 Utilization category AC6b Switching of three-phase capacitor banks Maximum inrush current (peak val- k35252020252525252520 ue) as multiple k of the capacitor rated current

Rated operational current Ie 500V A 8 12 15,5 15,5 23 32 32 45 60 70

Rated operational power 220-230V kVAr 3 4,5 6 6 8,5 12 12 17 24 28 LVSG (sinϕ→1) 240V kVAr 3,5 5 6,5 6,5 9,5 13 13 18,5 25 29 380-400V kVAr 5 7,5 10 10 15 20 20 29 39 46 For different multiples x 415-440V kVAr 5,5 8 11 11 16 22 22 32 43 50 use the following formula: 500VkVAr710131320262639 5058 Px=Pk*(k/x) 660-690V kVAr 7 10 13 13 20 26 26 40 50 58 Switching of detuned capacitors 1) Rated operational current Ie 690V A 8 13 18 20 28 36 42 48 72 105 Rated operational power 220-230V kVAr 2,9 5 7 7,5 11 14 16 20 28 33 240V kVAr 3,1 5,4 7 8 11 14 17 20 28 36 380-400V kVAr 5 9 12,5 13 20 25 27,5 33,3 50 75 1) 415-440V kVAr 5,5 9,5 13 14 22 27 30 36 53 75 1) 500VkVAr6111517253036406075 660-690V kVAr 8 15 20 22 33 41 48 55 82 100 Utilization category DC1 Switching of resistive load Time constant L/R ≤1ms

Rated operational current Ie 1 pole24V A 20 25 32 32 50 65 80 110 120 130 60V A 20 25 32 32 50 65 80 110 120 130 110V A 6 6 6 6 10 10 10 12 12 12 220V A 0,8 0,8 0,8 0,8 1,4 1,4 1,4 1,4 1,4 1,4 3 poles in series 24V A 20 25 32 32 50 65 80 110 120 130 60V A 20 25 32 32 50 65 80 110 120 130 110V A 20 25 32 32 50 65 80 110 120 130 220VA16202020303535638080

Motor Contactor J7KN H-41 Main Contacts Type J7KN-10 J7KN-14 J7KN-18 J7KN-22 J7KN-24 J7KN-32 J7KN-40 J7KN-50 J7KN-62 J7KN-74 Utilization category DC3 and DC5 Switching of shunt motors and series motors Time constant L/R ≤15ms

Rated operational current Ie 1 pole24V A 20 25 32 32 50 65 80 110 120 130 60V A 6 6 6 6 30 30 30 60 60 60 110V A 1,2 1,2 1,2 1,2 1,8 1,8 1,8 1,8 1,8 1,8 220V A 0,2 0,2 0,2 0,2 0,2 0,2 0,2 0,25 0,25 0,25 3 poles in series 24V A 20 25 32 32 50 65 80 110 120 130 60V A 20 25 32 32 40 40 40 80 80 80 110VA20202020404040808080 220V A 2,5 2,5 2,5 2,5 4 4 4 5 5 5 Maximum ambient temperature Operation open °C -40 to +60 (+90)*6 enclosed °C -40 to +40 with thermal overload relay open °C -25 to +60 enclosed °C -25 to +40 Storage °C -50 to +90 Short circuit protection for contactors without thermal overload relay Coordination-type "1" according to IEC 947-4-1 Contact welding without hazard of persons max. fuse size gL (gG) A 63 63 63 63 80 80 80 160 160 160 Coordination-type “2” according to IEC 947-4-1 Light contact welding accepted max. fuse size gL (gG) A 25 35 35 35 50 50 50 100 125 125 Contact welding not accepted max. fuse size gL (gG) A 16 16 16 16 25 35 35 50 63 63 For contactors with thermal overload relay the device with the smaller admissible backup fuse (contactor or thermal overload relay) determines the fuse size. Cable cross-sections for contactors without thermal overload relay main connector solid or stranded mm² 0,75 - 6 1,5 - 25 4 - 50 flexible mm² 1 - 4 2,5 - 16 10 - 35 flexible with multicore cable end mm² 0,75 - 4 1,5 - 16 6 - 35 Cables per clamp 2 1 1 solid or stranded mm² 6+(1-6) / 4+(0,75-4) 16+(2,5-6) / 10+(4-10) 50+4 / 35+6 / 25+(6-16) 2,5+(0,75-2,5) / 1,5+(0,75-1,5) 6+(4-6) / 4+(2,5-4) 16+(6-16) / 10+(6-16) flexible mm² 6+(1,5-6) / 4+(1-4) 16+(2,5-6) / 10+(4-10) 50+(4-10) / 35+(4-16) 2,5+(0,75-2,5) / 1,5+(0,75-1,5) 6+(4-6) / 4+(2,5-4) 25+(4-25) / 16+(4-16) Cables per clamp 2 2 2 main connector solid AWG 18 - 10 16 - 10 12 - 10 flexible AWG 18 - 10 14 - 4 10 - 0 Cables per clamp 2 1 1 solid AWG 10+(16-10) / 12+(18-12) 10+(16-10) / 12+(18-12) 10+(12-10) / 12+12 14+(18-14) / 16+(18-16) 14+(18-14) / 16+(18-16) flexible AWG 10+(14-10) / 12+(18-12) 4+(18-12) / 6+(18-8) 1+(12-10) / 2+(8-12) 14+(18-14) / 16+(18-16) 8+(18-8) / 10+(18-12) 3+(12-8) / 4+(10-6) Cables per clamp 2 2 2 Frequency of operations z Contactors without thermal overload relay without load 1/h 10000 10000 10000 10000 7000 7000 7000 7000 7000 7000

AC3, Ie 1/h 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 400 400 400

AC4, Ie 1/h 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120

DC3, Ie 1/h 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 400 400 400 Mechanical life AC operated S x 106 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 DC operated S x 106 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 Short time current 10s-current A 96 120 144 176 184 240 296 360 504 592

Power loss per pole at Ie/AC3 400V W 0,21 0,35 0,5 0,75 0,7 1,3 2 2,2 3,9 5,5 Resistance to shock acc. to IEC 68-2-27 Shock time 20ms sine-wave NO g 10 10 10 10 8 8 8 8 8 8 NCg6666------

*1) Suitable at 690V for: earthed-neutral systems, overvoltage I to IV, pollution degree 3 (standard-industry): Uimp = 8kV. Data for other conditions on request. *2) Metal halide lamps and sodium-vapour lamps (high- and low-pressure lamps) *3) High-pressure lamps *4) Blended lamps, containing a mercury high-pressure unit and a tungsten helix in a flourescent glass bulb (daylight lamps)

*5) Current inrush approx. 16 x Ie *6) With reduced control voltage range 0,9 up to 1,0 x Us and with reduced rated current Ie/AC1 according to Ie/AC3

H-42 Motor Contactor J7KN Main Contacts Type J7KN-85 J7KN-110 J7KN-150 J7KN-175 J7KN-200 *1 Rated insulation voltage Ui V AC 750 750 690 690 690

Making capacity Ieff at Ue = 690V AC A 1100 1200 1500 1800 1700

Breaking capacity Ieff 400V AC A 950 1100 1200 1400 1600 J7KN-10 to J7KN-22 cosϕ = 0,65 500V AC A 850 1000 1200 1400 1600 J7KN-24 to J7KN-72 cosϕ = 0,35 690V AC A 600 600 700 800 1200 1000V AC A - - - - - Utilization category AC1 Switching of resistive load

Rated operational current Ie (=Ith) at 40°C, open A 150 170 200 250 350 Rated operational power 220V kW 57 64 72 90 125 of three-phase resistive loads 230V kW 59 67 72 90 125 50-60Hz, cosϕ = 1 240V kW 62 70 75 94 130 380V kW 98 111 125 156 218 400V kW 103 117 125 156 218 415V kW 107 122 130 160 225 440V kW 114 129 144 180 250 500V kW 130 147 164 205 285 660V kW 171 194 216 270 380 690V kW 179 203 216 270 380 1000V kW - - - - -

Rated operational current Ie (=Ithe) at 60°C, enclosed A 100 125 160 200 280 Rated operational power 220V kW 38 47 60 76 106 of three-phase resistive loads 230V kW 40 49 63 79 111 50-60Hz, cosϕ = 1 240V kW 41 52 66 83 116 380V kW 65 82 105 131 184 400V kW 69 86 110 138 193 415V kW 71 89 115 143 201 440V kW 71 95 121 152 213 500V kW 86 108 138 173 242 660V kW 114 142 182 228 320 690V kW 119 149 191 239 334 1000V kW - - - - - Minimum cross-section of conductor mm² 50 70 95 120 185 at load with Ie (=Ith) Utilization category AC2 and AC3 Switching of three-phase motors

Rated operational current Ie 220V A 85 110 150 175 210 open and enclosed 230V A 85 110 150 175 210 240V A 85 110 150 175 210 380-400V A 85 110 150 175 210 LVSG 415V A 85 110 150 175 210 440V A 85 110 - - - 500V A 60 60 - - - 660-690V A 57,5 57,5 - - - 1000V A - - - - - Rated operational power 220-230V kW 25 33 40 50 60 of three-phase motors 50-60Hz 240V kW 27 35 45 55 65 380-400V kW 45 55 75 90 110 415V kW 49 63 80 95 115 440V kW 49 63 85 100 125 500V kW 55 75 75 100 132 660-690V kW 55 55 75 110 132 1000V kW - - - - - Utilization category AC4 Switching of squirrel cage motors, inching

Rated operational current Ie (=Ith) 220V A 85 98 55 63 85 open and enclosed 230V A 85 98 55 63 85 240V A 85 98 55 63 85 380-400V A 85 85 55 63 85 415V A 85 85 - - - 440V A 85 85 - - - 500V A 85 85 - - - 660V A 60 60 - - - 690V A 57,5 57,5 - - - 1000V A - - - - -

Motor Contactor J7KN H-43 Main Contacts Type J7KN-85 J7KN-110 J7KN-150 J7KN-175 J7KN-200 Rated operational power 220-230V kW 25 30 15 18,5 25 of three-phase motors 240V kW 27 32 15,5 19 26 50-60Hz 380-400V kW 45 45 25 30 45 415V kW 49 49 25 33 45 440V kW 49 49 30 34 48 500V kW 55 55 25 30 55 660-690V kW 55 55 25 30 55 1000VkW----- Utilization category AC 5a Switching of gas discharge lamps

Rated operational current Ie per pole at 220/230V Fluorescent lamps, uncompensated and serial compensated A 100 120 120 140 180 parallel compensated A 55 70 85 100 120 dual-connection A 112 144 120 140 180 Metal halide lamps*2, uncompensated A 85 90 95 110 140 parallel compensated A 55 70 75 85 110 Mercury-vapour lamps*3, uncompensated A 112 144 120 140 180 parallel compensated A 55 70 75 85 110 Mixed light lamps*4 A 100 120 100 120 160 Utilization category AC5b Switching of incandescent lamps*5

Rated operational current Ie per pole at 220/230V A 69 75 100 120 160 Utilization category AC6a Transformer primary switching at inrush n3030303030

Rated operational current Ie 400VA3850658090 Rated operational power 220-230V kVA 15 20 25 30 34 dependent on inrush n 240V kVA 15,5 20,5 27 33 37 380-400V kVA 26 34 45 55 60 For different inrush-factors x 415-440V kVA 29 38 46 57 63 use the following formula: 500VkVA3343556975 Px=Pn*(n/x) 660-690V 45 60 56 69 100 Utilization category AC6b Switching of three-phase capacitor banks Maximum inrush current (peak val- k2020202015 ue) as multiple k of the capacitor rated current

Rated operational current Ie 500V A 87 100 120 155 195 Rated operational power 220-230V kVAr 33 38 45 60 75 (sinϕ→1) 240V kVAr 36 42 52 62 78 380-400V kVAr 57 65 80 100 130 For different multiples x 415-440V kVAr 60 70 95 110 135 use the following formula: 500V kVAr 70 80 100 130 170 Px=Pk*(k/x) 660-690V kVAr 70 80 100 130 170 Switching of detuned capacitors

Rated operational current Ie 690V A 98 105 115 140 200 Rated operational power 220-230V kVAr 35 40 43 53 76 240V kVAr 39 43 45 55 80 380-400V kVAr 68 75 75 90 130 415-440V kVAr 71 77 80 100 140 500V kVAr 85 90 95 120 170 660-690V kVAr 110 120 125 150 200 Utilization category DC1 Switching of resistive load Time constant L/R ≤1ms

Rated operational current Ie 1 pole24V A 150 170 - - - 60V A 150 170 - - - 110V A 20 25 - - - 220V A 2 2,5 - - - 3 poles in series 24V A 150 170 200 250 350 60V A 150 170 200 250 350 110V A 150 170 150 170 250 220V A 100 160 80 100 150

H-44 Motor Contactor J7KN Main Contacts Type J7KN-85 J7KN-110 J7KN-150 J7KN-175 J7KN-200 Utilization category DC3 and DC5 Switching of shunt motors and series motors Time constant L/R ≤15ms

Rated operational current Ie 1 pole24V A 150 170 - - - 60V A 85 110 - - - 110V A 2 2,5 - - - 220V A 0,5 0,5 - - - 3 poles in series 24V A 150 170 - - - 60V A 100 110 - - - 110V A 100 110 - - - 220V A 7 8 - - - Maximum ambient temperature Operation open °C -40 to +60 (+90)*6 -25 to +55 (+70)*7 enclosed °C -40 to +40 -25 to +40 with thermal overload relay open °C -25 to +60 -25 to +55 enclosed °C -25 to +40 -25 to +40 Storage °C -50 to +90 -55 to +80 Short circuit protection for contactors without thermal overload relay Coordination-type "1" according to IEC 947-4-1 Contact welding without hazard of persons max. fuse size gL (gG) A 250 250 250 315 400 Coordination-type “2” according to IEC 947-4-1 Light contact welding accepted max. fuse size gL (gG) A 160 200 200 250 315 Contact welding not accepted max. fuse size gL (gG) A 100 125 160 200 250 For contactors with thermal overload relay the device with the smaller admissible backup fuse (contactor or thermal overload relay) determines the fuse size. Cable cross-sections for contactors without thermal overload relay main connector solid or stranded mm² 10 - 70*8 10 - 70*8 95 120 185 flexible mm² 6 - 50*8 16 - 50*8 screw screw screw flexible with multicore cable end mm² 10 - 35 10 - 35 M8 M8 M8 Cables per clamp solid or stranded mm²

flexible mm²

Cables per clamp main connector solid AWG 10 10 LVSG flexible AWG 6 - 0 6 - 0 Cables per clamp 1 1 solid AWG

flexible AWG

Cables per clamp Frequency of operations z Contactors without thermal overload relay without load 1/h 3000 3000 1200 1200 1200

AC3, Ie 1/h 300 300 - - -

AC4, Ie 1/h 120 120 - - -

DC3, Ie 1/h 300 300 - - - Mechanical life

AC operated S x 106 5510108

DC operated S x 106 5510108 Short time current 10s-current A 680 880 1200 1400 1800

Power loss per pole at Ie/AC3 400V W 4,3 6,0 8 11 8 Resistance to shock acc. to IEC 68-2-27 Shock time 20ms sine-wave NO g 7 7 - - - NC g 5 5 - - -

*1) Suitable at 690V for: earthed-neutral systems, overvoltage I to IV, pollution degree 3 (standard-industry):

Uimp = 8kV. Data for other conditions on request. *2) Metal halide lamps and sodium-vapour lamps (high- and low-pressure lamps) *3) High-pressure lamps *4) Blended lamps, containing a mercury high-pressure unit and a tungsten helix in a flourescent glass bulb (daylight lamps)

*5) Current inrush approx. 16 x Ie *6) With reduced control voltage range 0,9 up to 1,0 x Us and with reduced rated current Ie/AC1 according to Ie/AC3 *7) With reduced control voltage range 1,0 x Us and with reduced rated current Ie/AC1 according to Ie/AC3 *8) Maximum cable cross-section with prepared conductor

Motor Contactor J7KN H-45 Contactors

Data according to IEC 947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1, VDE 0660

Auxiliary Contacts Ty p e J7KN-10 J7KN-14 J7KN-18 J7KN-22 J7KN-24 J7KN-32 J7KN-40 J7KN-50 J7KN-62 J7KN-74 *1 Rated insulation voltage Ui V~ 690 690 690 690 ------

Thermal rated current Ith to 690V Ambient temperature 40°C A 16 16 16 16 ------60°CA12121212------Utilization category AC15

Rated operational current Ie 220-240V A 12 12 12 12 ------380-415V A 4 4 4 4 ------440V A 4 4 4 4 ------500V A 3 3 3 3 ------660-690V A 1 1 1 1 ------Utilization category DC13

Rated operational current Ie 60VA8888------110V A 1 1 1 1 ------220V A 0,1 0,1 0,1 0,1 ------Short circuit protection short-circuit current 1kA, contact welding not accepted max. fuse size gL (gG) A 25 25 25 25 ------For contactors with thermal overload relay the device with the smaller admissible control fuse (contactor or thermal overload relay) determines the fuse. Control Circuit Power consumption of coils AC operated inrush VA 33-45 90-115 140-165 sealed VA 7-10 9-13 13-18 W 2,6-3 2,7-4 5,4-7 DC operated inrush W 75 140 200 sealed W 2 2 6 Operation range of coils in multiples of control voltage Us AC operated 0,85-1,1 0,85-1,1 0,85-1,1 DC operated 0,8-1,1 0,8-1,1 0,8-1,1 *2 *3 Switching time at control voltage Us ±10% , AC operated make time ms 8-16 10-25 12-28 release time ms 5-13 8-15 8-15 arc duration ms 10-15 10-15 10-15 DC operated make time ms 8-12 10-20 12-23 release time ms 8-13 10-15 10-18 arc duration ms 10-15 10-15 10-15 Cable cross-section Auxiliary connector solid mm² 0,75-6 - - flexible mm² 1-4 - - flexible with multicore cable end mm² 0,75-4 - - Magnet coil solid mm² 0,75-2,5 0,75-2,5 0,75-2,5 flexible mm² 0,5-2,5 0,5-2,5 0,5-2,5 flexible with multicore cable end mm² 0,5-1,5 0,5-1,5 0,5-1,5 Clamps per pole 2 2 2 Auxiliary connector solid AWG 18 - 10 - - flexible AWG 18 - 10 - - Magnet coil solid AWG 14 - 12 14 - 12 14 - 12 flexible AWG 18 - 12 18 - 12 18 - 12 Clamps per pole 2 2 2

*1) Suitable for: earthed-neutral systems, overvoltage category I to IV, pollution degree 3 (standard-industry): Uimp = 8kV. Data for other conditions on request *2) Total breaking time = release time + arc duration *3) Values for delay of the release time of the making contact and the make time of the break contact will be increased, if magnet coils are protected against voltage peaks (varistor, RC-unit, diode-unit)

H-46 Motor Contactor J7KN Auxiliary Contacts Ty p e J7KN-85 J7KN-110 J7KN-150 J7KN-175 J7KN-200 *1 Rated insulation voltage Ui V~ 690 690 690 690 690

Thermal rated current Ith to 690V Ambient temperature 40°C A 16 16 10 10 10 60°C A 12 12 - - - Utilization category AC15

Rated operational current Ie 220-240V A 12 12 3 3 3 380-415V A 6 6 2 2 2 440V A 6 6 1,5 1,5 1,5 500V A 4 4 1,5 1,5 1,5 660-690V A 2 2 1 1 1 Utilization category DC13

Rated operational current Ie 60V A 8 8 - - - 110V A 1 1 0,5 0,5 1 220V A 0,1 0,1 0,2 0,2 0,5 Short circuit protection short-circuit current 1kA, contact welding not accepted max. fuse size gL (gG) A 25 25 10 10 10 For contactors with thermal overload relay the device with the smaller admissible control fuse (contactor or thermal overload relay) determines the fuse. Control Circuit Power consumption of coils AC operated inrush VA 280-350 350-420 550 550 1100 sealed VA 16 -23 23 -29 120 120 66 W 4-6 6-7,3 - - - DC operated inrush W 170 320 160 160 530 sealedW245521 Operation range of coils in multiples of control voltage Us AC operated 0,85-1,1 0,85-1,1 0,85-1,1 0,85-1,1 DC operated 0,8-1,1 0,85-1,1 0,85-1,1 0,85-1,1 *2 *3 Switching time at control voltage Us ±10% , AC operated make time ms 13-30 12-30 12-30 30-40 release time ms 8-15 15-40 15-40 15-45 arc duration ms 10-15 - - DC operated make time ms 20-30 - - -

release time ms 10-18 - - - LVSG arc duration ms 10-15 - - - Cable cross-section Auxiliary connector solid mm² 0,75-2,5 0,75-2,5 flexible mm² 0,75-2,5 0,75-2,5 flexible with multicore cable end mm² 0,5-1,5 - Magnet coil solid mm² 0,75-2,5 1-2,5 flexible mm² 0,5-2,5 1-2,5 flexible with multicore cable end mm² 0,5-1,5 - Clamps per pole 14 - 12 16 - 12 Auxiliary connector solid AWG 18 - 12 16 - 12 flexible AWG 14 - 12 16 - 12 Magnet coil solid AWG 18 - 12 16 - 12 flexible AWG 2 2 Clamps per pole 0,75-2,5 0,75-2,5 *1) Suitable for: earthed-neutral systems, overvoltage category I to IV, pollution degree 3

(standard-industry): Uimp = 8kV. Data for other conditions on request *2) Total breaking time = release time + arc duration *3) Values for delay of the release time of the making contact and the make time of the break contact will be increased, if magnet coils are protected against voltage peaks (varistor, RC-unit, diode-unit)

Motor Contactor J7KN H-47 Contactors for North America

Data according to UL508

Main Contacts (cULus) Ty p e J7KN-10 J7KN-14 J7KN-18 J7KN-22 J7KN-24 J7KN-32 J7KN-40 J7KN-50 J7KN-62 J7KN-74 Rated operational current A25253030506580110120130 "General Use" Rated operational power 110-120V hp 1½ 2 2 3 5 5 7½ 10 10 10 of three-phase motors 200V hp 3 3 5 5 7½ 10 10 15 20 25 at 60Hz (3ph) 220-240V hp 3 3 7½ 7½ 10 10 15 20 25 30 277V hp 3 5 7½ 7½ 7½ 10 15 20 25 30 380-415V hp 5 5 10 10 10 15 20 25 30 40 440-480V hp 5 7½ 10 15 15 20 25 30 40 50 550-600V hp 7½ 10 15 20 20 25 30 40 50 50 Rated operational power 110-120V hp ½ ¾ 1 1½ 1½ 2 3 3 5 7½ of AC motors 200V hp 1 1,5 2 3 3 5 7½ 7½ 10 15 at 60Hz (1ph) 220-240V hp 1½ 2 3 3 5 5 7½ 10 15 15 277V hp 2 3 3 5 5 7½ 10 10 15 15 380-415V hp 3 3 5 5 5 7½ 10 15 20 20 440-480V hp 3 5 5 7½ 7½ 10 15 20 25 25 550-600V hp 3 5 7½ 10 10 15 20 25 30 30 Rated operational power of 110-120V hp - - - - 2 3 - 3 5 - three-phase motors at 60Hz (3ph) 200V hp - - - - 3 5 - 7½ 10 - for elevators 220-240V hp - - - - 5 7½ - 7½ 10 - Demands according to ANSI A17.5 (500.000 operations) 440-480V hp - - - - 10 15 - 20 25 - 550-600V hp - - - - 10 20 - 25 30 - Rated operationalcurrent 600V A - - - - 15 22 - 27 37 - Fuses A 30 40 50 50 90 125 175 175 225 250 Suitable for use on a capability of delivering not more than rms A 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 V 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 Auxiliary Contacts (cULus) A600 A600 A600 A600 ------

Main Contacts (cULus) Ty p e J7KN-85 J7KN-110 J7KN-150 J7KN-175 J7KN-200 Rated operational current A 125 125 - - - "General Use" Rated operational power 110-120V hp 15 - - - - of three-phase motors 200V hp - 30 - - - at 60Hz (3ph) 220-240V hp 35 40 - - - 277V hp - - - - - 380-415V hp - - - - - 440-480V hp 65 75 - - - 550-600V hp 85 100 - - - Rated operational power 110-120V hp 8 10 - - - of AC motors 200V hp - 20 - - - at 60Hz (1ph) 220-240V hp 20 20 - - - 277V hp - - - - - 380-415V hp - - - - - 440-480V hp - 50 - - - 550-600V hp - 60 - - - Rated operational power of 110-120V hp - - - - - three-phase motors at 60Hz (3ph) 200V hp - - - - - for elevators 220-240V hp - - - - - Demands according to ANSI A17.5 (500.000 operations) 440-480V hp - - - - - 550-600V hp - - - - - Rated operationalcurrent 600V A - 62 - - - Fuses A-300--- Suitable for use on a capability of delivering not more than rms A 10000 10000 - - - V 600 600 - - - Auxiliary Contacts (cULus) A600 A600 - - -

H-48 Motor Contactor J7KN Contactors

Data according to IEC 947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1, VDE 0660 Contact Life For selection of the suitable contactor-type according to supply volt- For contactors frequently used under AC3/AC4-mixed service condi- age, power rating and application (utilization category AC1, AC3 or tions calculate contact life with the formula: AC4) use contact life characteristic diagram. AC3 For the most common supply voltages four scales of power ratings P M = ------n %AC4 AC3 are provided for each utilization category. 1 + ------x ------– 1 100 AC4 Select contactor-type according to utilization category AC3 (breaking M = Contact life (switching cycles) for AC3/AC4-mixed operations current Ia = Ie) using the motor rating scales to the right, according AC3 = Contact life (switching cycles) for AC3 operations (normal switching to utilization category AC4 (breaking current Ia = 6 x Ie) using the motor rating scales to the left.*1 conditions). Breaking current Ia = rated motor current In. Select contactor-type according to utilization category AC1 (breaking AC4 = Contact life (switching cycles) for AC4 operations (inching). *1 current Ia = Ie/AC1) using the breaking current scale. Breaking current Ia= multiples of rated motor current In. %AC4 = Percents of AC4-operations related to the total cycles. 1. Pay attention to the approved rated values of the selected contactor according to the national approvals

Motor Rating Motor Rating Breaking Current

Pn/AC4 Pn/AC3 Ia (=Ie/AC1) A

J7KN-74 J7KN-62 J7KN-50 J7KN-40 J7KN-32 J7KN-24 J7KN-22 J7KN-18 J7KN-14 J7KN-12 J7KN-10 J7KN-09 LVSG

millions of operations

Motor Contactor J7KN H-49 Motor Rating Motor Rating Breaking Current

Pn/AC4 Pn/AC3 Ia (=Ie/AC1) A

J7KN-200 J7KN-175 J7KN-150 J7KN-110 J7KN-85

millions of operations

H-50 Motor Contactor J7KN Contactors

Utilization Categories For easier choice of devices and in order to make the comparison of control circuit devices and switching elements according to IEC 947-5- different products simplier are utilization categories for contactors and 1 and VDE 0660 Part 200 determind. The table offers different utiliza- motor-starters according to IEC 947-4-1 and VDE 0660 Part 102 ,for tion categories, typical applications and assorted test conditions.

Ty p e o f Cate- Typical applications Rated operational Test conditions for the number of Test conditions for current gory current on-load operating cycles making and breaking capacities Make Break Make Break I/Ie U/Ue cosϕ Ic/Ie Ur/Ue cosϕ I/Ie U/Ue cosϕ Ic/Ie Ur/Ue cosϕ AC1 Non-inductive or all values 1 1 0.95 1 1 0.95 1.5 1.05 0.8 1.5 1.05 0.8 slightly inductive loadsre- sistance furnaces AC2 Slip-ring motors: all values 2.5 1 0.65 2.5 1 0.65 4 1.05 0.65 4 1.05 0.65 starting, switching off AC3 Squirrel-cage motors: 17A< Ie≤ 17A 6 1 0.65 1 0.17 0.65 10 1.05 0.45 8 1.05 0.45 starting, switching off mo- ≤ tors during running Ie 100A 6 1 0.35 1 0.17 0.35 10 1.05 0.45 8 1.05 0.45 Ie> 100A 6 1 0.35 1 0.17 0.35 10 1.05 0.35 8 1.05 0.35 Alternating Current AC4 Squirrel-cage motors: 17A< Ie≤ 17A 6 1 0.65 6 1 0.65 12 1.05 0.45 10 1.05 0.45 starting, plugging, inching Ie≤ 100A 6 1 0.35 6 1 0.35 12 1.05 0.45 10 1.05 0.45 Ie> 100A 6 1 0.35 6 1 0.35 12 1.05 0.35 10 1.05 0.35 AC5a Switching of electric dis- all values ------3 1.05 0.45 3 1.05 0.45 charge lamp controls AC5b Switching of incandes- all values------1.51.05 1)41.05 1) cent lamps AC6a Switching of transformers Ie≤ 100A ------4.5 1.05 0.45 3.6 1.05 0.45 Ie> 100A ------4.5 1.05 0.35 3.6 1.05 0.35 AC6b Switching of capacitor ------2) 2) banks AC7a Slightly inductive loads in all values------1.51.050.81.51.050.8 household appliances and similar applications AC7b Motor loadsfor household Ie≤ 100A ------8 1.05 0.45 6 1.05 0.45 applications Ie>100A------81.050.3561.050.35 AC8a Hermetic refrigerant com- Ie≤ 100A ------6 1.05 0.45 6 1.05 0.45 pressor motor control with manualresetting of over- Ie>100A------61.050.3561.050.35 load releases AC8b Hermetic refrigerant com- Ie≤ 100A ------6 1.05 0.45 6 1.05 0.45 pressor motor control with automatic resetting of Ie>100A------61.050.3561.050.35 overload releases AC12 Control of resistive loads all values------110.9110.9 and solid state loads with

isolation by opto couplers LVSG AC13 Control of solid state all values ------10 1.1 0.65 1.1 1.1 0.65 loads with transformer isolation AC14 Control of small electro------61.10.761.10.7 magnetic loads (<=72VA) AC15 Control of - 10 1 0.7 1 1 0.4 10 1.1 0.3 10 1.1 0.3 electromagnetic load (>72VA) Make L/R Break L/R Make L/R Break L/R I/Ie U/Ue [ms] Ic/Ie Ur/Ue [ms] I/Ie U/Ue [ms] Ic/Ie Ur/Ue [ms] DC1 Non-inductive or all values1111111.51.0511.51.051 slightly inductive loads resistance furnaces DC3 Shunt-motors: starting, all values 2.5 1 2 2.5 1 2 4 1.05 2.5 4 1.05 2.5 plugging, inching dynamic braking of d.c. motors

Direct Current DC5 Series-motors: all values 2.5 1 7.5 2.5 1 7.5 4 1.05 15 4 1.05 15 starting, plugging, inching dynamic braking of d.c. motors DC6 Switching of incandes- all values------1.51.05 1)41.05 1) cent lamps DC12 Control of resistive loads all values------111111 and solid state loads with isolation by opto couplers DC13 Control of electromagnets all values 1 1 ≤300 1 1 ≤300 1.1 1.1 ≤300 1.1 1.1 ≤300 DC14 Control of electromagnet- all values------101.115101.115 ic loads having economy resistors in circuit

Ue Rated operational voltage, U Voltage before make, Ur Recovery voltage, Ie Rated operational current, I Current make, Ic Current broken 1) Test with incandescent lamps 2) Test conditions according to standard

Motor Contactor J7KN H-51 Accessories

Data according to IEC 947-5-1, EN 60947-5-1, VDE 0660

Auxiliary Contacts Ty p e J73KN-B J73KN-C J73KN-B-TP... *1 Rated insulation voltage Ui V~ 690 690 690

Thermal rated current Ith to 690V Ambient temperature 40°C A 10 10 10 60°C A 6 6 - Frequency of operations z 1/h 3000 3000 1200 Mechanical life S x 10 10 1 106

Power loss per pole at Ie/AC1 W 0,5 0,5 - Utilization category AC15

Rated operational current Ie 220-240V A 3 3 4 380-400V A 2 2 3 440V A 1,6 1,6 2 500V A 1,2 1,2 2 660-690V A 0,6 0,6 2 Utilization category DC13

Rated operational current Ie 60V A 2 2 2,5 110V A 0,4 0,4 1,5 220V A 0,1 0,1 0,2 Short circuit protection short-circuit current 1kA, contact gL (gG) A 20 20 10 welding not accepted max. fuse size For contactors with thermal overload relay or auxiliary contacts the device with the smaller admissible control fuse (contactor or thermal overload relay) determines the fuse size. Cable cross-sections solid or stranded mm² 0,75-2,5 0,75-2,5 1-2,5 flexible mm² 0,75-2,5 0,75-2,5 0,75-2,5 flexible with multicore cable end mm² 0,5-1,5 0,5-1,5 0,75-2,5 Cables per clamp 2 2 2 *1) Suitable for: earthed-neutral systems, overvoltage category I to IV, pol-

lution degree 3 (standard-industry): Uimp = 8kV. Data for other conditions on request Data according to CSA, UL and CUL

Auxiliary Contacts Ty p e J73KN-B J73KN-C J73KN-B-TP... Rated operational current A10 10 10 „General Use“ Rated operational voltage max. V AC 600 600 600 Auxiliary Contacts A600 A600 A600 Contactors and Accessories

Wiring diagrams Auxiliary contact blocks Pneumatic timer J73KN-B-10 J73KN-B-01 J73KN-C-11S*1 on-delayed off-delayed (left side) (right side) J74KN-B-TP...DA J74KN-B-TP...IA 53 61 71 83

54 62 72 84 *1) Correct terminal marking is given by mounting

H-52 Motor Contactor J7KN ■ Dimensions AC operated DC operated J7KN-10... J7KN-10...D J7KN-10-4 J7KN-14...D J7KN-14... J7KN-18...D J7KN-18... J7KN-22...D J7KN-22...

J7KN-24... J7KN-24...D J7KN-32... J7KN-32...D J7KN-40... J7KN-40...D

J7KN-50... J7KN-50...D J7KN-62... J7KN-62...D LVSG J7KN-74... J7KN-74...D

Motor Contactor J7KN H-53 AC operated J7KN-85... J7KN-200... J7KN-110...

J7KN-150... J7KN-175...

Auxiliary contact blocks J73KN-B-01 J73KN-C-11S J73KN-B-10

H-54 Motor Contactor J7KN Pneumatic timer J74KN-B-TP...

Auxiliary contact blocks J74KN-A-VG J74KN-A-RC LVSG

J74KN-B-VG J74KN-B-RC

Motor Contactor J7KN H-55 Position of Terminals AC operated J7KN-10-10 J7KN-10-01 J7KN-24 J7KN-50 J7KN-85-22 to to J7KN-32 J7KN-62 J7KN-110-22 J7KN-22-10 J7KN-22-01 J7KN-40 J7KN-74

J7KN-150-11 J7KN-200-22 J7KN-175-11

DC operated with double winding coil J7KN-10-10...D J7KN-10-01...D J7KN-24...D J7KN-50...D J7KN-81-21...D J7KN-14-10...D J7KN-14-01...D J7KN-32...D J7KN-62...D J7KN-110-21...D J7KN-18-10...D J7KN-18-01...D J7KN-40...D J7KN-74...D J7KN-22-10...D J7KN-22-01...D

ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS.

Cat. No. J505-E2-02 In the interest of product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice.

H-56 Motor Contactor J7KN Thermal Overload Relay

J7TKN )

Thermal Overload Relay

• Direct and separate mounting • Single phasing sensivity according to IEC 947-4-1 • Finger proof (VBG 4) Accessories

• Busbar sets • Set for single mounting

Approved Standards

Standard Guide No (US,C) UL NKCR, NKCR7 ICE 947-4-1 VDE 0660 EN 60947-4-1

Ordering Information

■ Model Number Legend LVSG

1. Thermal Overload Relay 2. Accessories for Thermal Overload Relay

J7TKN-#-### J74TK-##-### 123 123

1) Thermal Overload Relay 1) Accessories for Thermal Overload Relay 2) A: for mini motor contactor and motor contactor (4-11 kW) 2) SM: Single mounting for J7TKN-B Types (4-32 kW) B: for motor contactor (4-15 kW) SU: Busbar sets C: for motor contactor (18.5 kW) 3) 175: for J7TKN-F Types (75-90 kW) D: for motor contactor (22-37 kW) 200: for J7TKN-F Types (110 kW) E: for motor contactor (45-55 kW) F: for motor contactor (75-110 kW) 3) Setting range (examples) E16: 0.12-0.16 A E27: 0.18-0.27 A ... 2E7: 1.8-2.7 A ... 11: 8-11 A

Thermal Overload Relay J7TKN H-57 ■ System overview

Thermal Overload Relays for plug-in mounting Setting Range Type Pack Weight D.O.L. (A) Star Delta (A) pcs. kg/pc.

For contactors J7KNA-09..., J7KNA-12..., J7KN-10... to J7KN-22...

0.12 - 0.18 - J7TKN-A-E18 10.10 0.18 - 0.27 - J7TKN-A-E27 10.10 0.27 - 0.4 - J7TKN-A-E4 10.10 0.4 - 0.6 - J7TKN-A-E6 10.10 0.6 - 0.9 - J7TKN-A-E9 10.10 0.8 - 1.2 - hand reset J7TKN-A-1E2 10.10 1.2 - 1.8 - J7TKN-A-1E8 10.10 1.8 - 2.7 - J7TKN-A-2E7 10.10 2.7 - 4 - J7TKN-A-4 10.10 4-6 7 - 10.5 J7TKN-A-6 10.10 6-9 10.5 - 15.5 J7TKN-A-9 10.10 8-11 14 - 19 J7TKN-A-11 10.10 10 - 14 18 - 24 J7TKN-A-14 10.10 13 - 18 23 - 31 J7TKN-A-18 10.10 17 - 23 30 - 40 J7TKN-A-23 10.10 22 - 30 38 - 52 J7TKN-A-30 10.10

For contactors J7KN-10... to J7KN-40...

0.12 - 0.18 - J7TKN-B-E18 10.14 0.18 - 0.27 - J7TKN-B-E27 10.14 0.27 - 0.4 - J7TKN-B-E4 10.14 0.4 - 0.6 - J7TKN-B-E6 10.14 0.6 - 0.9 - J7TKN-B-E9 10.14 0.8 - 1.2 - hand- and auto reset J7TKN-B-1E2 10.14 1.2 - 1.8 - J7TKN-B-1E8 10.14 1.8 - 2.7 - J7TKN-B-2E7 10.14 2.7 - 4 - J7TKN-B-4 10.14 4-6 7 - 10.5 J7TKN-B-6 10.14 6-9 10.5 - 15.5 J7TKN-B-9 10.14 8-11 14 - 19 J7TKN-B-11 10.14 10 - 14 18 - 24 J7TKN-B-14 10.14 13 - 18 23 - 31 J7TKN-B-18 10.14 17 - 24 30 - 41 J7TKN-B-24 10.14 23 - 32 40 - 55 J7TKN-B-32 10.14

For contactors J7KN-24... to J7KN-40...

28 - 42 48 - 73 J7TKN-C-42 10.30

H-58 Thermal Overload Relay J7TKN Setting Range Type Pack Weight D.O.L. (A) Star Delta (A) pcs. kg/pc.

For contactors J7KN-50...-J7KN-74...

40 - 52 70 - 90 J7TKN-D-52 10.40 52 - 65 90 - 112 J7TKN-D-65 10.40 60 - 74 104 - 128 J7TKN-D-74 1 0.40

Thermal Overload relays for separate mounting Setting Range Type Pack Weight D.O.L. (A) Star Delta (A) pcs. kg/pc.

For contactors J7KN-85... to J7KN-150...

60 - 90 104 - 156 J7TKN-E-90 10.90 80 - 120 140 - 207 J7TKN-E-120 10.90

hand reset

For contactors J7KN-175... to J7KN-200...

100 - 150 175 - 260 J7TKN-F-150 11.5 140 - 220 240 - 380 J7TKN-F-210 11.5 busbar sets see accessories hand reset

Accessories Type Pack Weight for overload relays for contactors pcs. kg/pc.

Busbar Sets

J7TKN-F-175 J7KN-150, J7KN-175 J74TK-SU-175 10.6 LVSG J7TKN-F-210 J7KN-200 J74TK-SU-200 10.7 busbars must be installed by users

Cable Cross-section to clamp (mm²) Type Pack Weight flex. with multicore for overload relay solid or stranded flexible cable end pcs. kg/pc.

Sets for single mounting

J7TKN-B0.75-60.75-40.5-4J74TK-SM 1 0.035

Thermal Overload Relay J7TKN H-59 Specifications

■ Engineering data and Characteristics

Thermal Overload Relays, tripping times for selection to motors of protection degree EEx e Relays With Standard Tripping Characteristic All tripping times of overload relays J7TKN-A are shorter than the

Setting Range Tripping time depending on the multiple of the minimum values of the tE time for motors of protection degree EEx e current setting from cold condition (tolerance acc. to EN 50019 and therefore are suitable for all motors of protec- ±20% of the tripping time) tion degree EEx e. For these overload relays the selection on basis

IA/IN IA/IN IA/IN IA/IN IA/IN IA/IN of tripping curves is thereby not necessary. A A 34567,28 J7TKN-A-... ssssss Typical tripping curve for overload 0,12 - 0,18 18,5 10,4 7,2 5,5 4,3 3,6 relay J7TKN-A 0,18 - 0,27 16,7 9,8 6,5 5 4,1 3,5 0,27 - 0,4 19,4 12,1 8,2 5,9 4,9 4,2 Minimum values of 0,4 - 0,6 18,7 11,2 8 6 4,9 4,1 tE time (motor) 0,6 - 0,9 19,7 11,6 8,1 6,1 4,9 4,2 acc. to EN50019 0,8 - 1,2 22,9 13,6 10 7,3 6 5,2 1,2 - 1,8 22,2 13,2 9,2 7,6 5,8 5,3 1,8 - 2,7 23 13,7 9,3 7,6 5,7 5,1 2,7 - 4 24 14,4 9,9 7,8 5,9 5,1 4-6 24,7 13,8 9,9 7,3 5,6 4,8 ratio IA/IN 6-9 22 13,4 8 5,7 4,1 3,5 Labels of tripping curves for each setting range, sized 148x105mm 8-11 17,4 9,2 5,9 4,1 2,9 2,3 (self-adhesive) are available on request. 10 - 14 26,4 12,9 7,6 5,2 3,5 2,8 Specify type and setting range. 13 - 18 14,7 7,7 4,8 3,2 2,3 1,7 17 - 23 16,2 8,4 5 3,6 2,4 1,8 22 - 30 16,8 8,5 5 3,6 2,3 1,9

J7TKN-C-42 ssssss

28 - 42 25,2 13,3 8 5,5 4 3,1

J7TKN-D-... ssssss

40 - 52 18,3 9,2 5,6 3,9 2,8 2,2 52 - 65 17,8 8,7 5,2 3,4 2,5 1,9 60 - 74 19,5 13,5 11 10 9,5 8,5

J7TKN-E-... ssssss

60 - 90 19,5 13,5 11 10 9,5 8,5 80 - 120 18 11 10 9 8,5 8

J7TKN-F-... ssssss

100 - 150 34 26 24 20,5 19 18 140 - 210 30 24 21 18,5 17 16

When selecting a standard overload, refer to the tripping curve.

Determine the values of the starting current ratio IA/IN and the time tE which is marked on the label of the motor. The overload must trip within the tE time, which means that the tripping curve from cold condition must be (20% due to tolerance) below the coordination point IA/ IN and the time tE.

IA= Starting current of motor

IN = Rated current of motor tE = tE-time of motor

H-60 Thermal Overload Relay J7TKN Fuses for J7TKN-A; J7TKN-B; J7TKN-C; J7TKN-D; J7TKN-E; J7TKN-F Type Setting Range Max. Fuse Size According to Coordination-type Fuse UL "2"*1 "1"*1 DOL Star Delta quick slow, slow, aM gL(gG) gL(gG) A AA AAAA

J7TKN-A 0.12 - 0.18 -0.5*2 0.5*2 25 - 15 J7TKN-B 0.18 - 0.27 -1.0*2 1.0*2 25 - 15 0.27 - 0.4 -2225-15 0.4 - 0.6 -2225-15 0.6 - 0.9 -4425-15 0.8 - 1.2 -44252 15 1.2 - 1.8 -66252 15 1.8 - 2.7 -1010254 15 2.7 - 4 -161025415 4-6 7 - 10.5 20 16 25 6 15 6-9 10.5 - 15.5 35 25 35 10 25 8-11 14-193525351630 10 - 14 18-2450356316 40 13 - 18 23-3150356320 50 17 - (23)24 30 - (40)41 63 50 63 25 60 (22)23 - (30)32 (38)40 - (52)55 80 63 80 35 70

J7TKN-C 28 - 42 48 - 73 100 80 150 50 110

J7TKN-D 40 - 52 70 - 90 160 100 150 63 200 52 - 65 90 - 112 160 125 150 80 250 60 - 74 104 - 128 160 125 150 80 250 For short circuit protecting overload relays with J7TKN-E 60 - 90 104 - 156current transformer use fuse according to the 300 80 - 120 140 - 2077contactor of the combination. - J7TKN-F all ranges -

*1) Coordination-type according to IEC 947-4-1: „2“: Light contact welding accepted. Thermal overload relay must not be damaged. „1“: Welding of contactor and damage of the thermal overload relay allowed. LVSG *2) Miniature fuse

Thermal Overload Relay J7TKN H-61 Tripping Characteristics for J7TKN-A, J7TKN-B, J7TKN-C, J7TKN-D Detailed tripping times for each range see table page 60 with three-phase load with two-pole load

Tripping time Tripping time min. s min. s Average value of Typical tolerance typical tolerance curve from cold curves from cold condition condition Proceeding from Proceeding from service conditions service conditions the times decrease the times decrease to 70-80% of the to 20-30% of the characteristic values characteristic values

K= Imax/Ie

Imax = max. phase current Ie = max. scale value

F.L.C. multiplication factor K

Tripping Characteristics for J7TKN-E Detailed tripping times for each range see table page 60 with three-phase load with two-pole load

K= Imax/Ie

Imax = max. phase current Ie = max. scale value

F.L.C. multiplication factor K

H-62 Thermal Overload Relay J7TKN Tripping Characteristics for J7TKN-F Detailed tripping times for each range see table page 60 with three-phase load with two-pole load

K= Imax/Ie

Imax = max. phase current Ie = max. scale value

F.L.C. multiplication factor K

Position of Terminals

J7TKN-A J7TKN-B J7TKN-C; J7TKN-D LVSG

Thermal Overload Relay J7TKN H-63 Thermal Overload Relays Data according to IEC 947-4-1, IEC 947-5-1, VDE 0660, EN 60947-4-1, EN 60947-5-1 Type J7TKN-A J7TKN-B J7TKN-C J7TKN-D J7TKN-E J7TKN-F *1 Rated insulation voltage Ui V~ 690 690 690 690 750 690

Permissible ambient temperature operation open °C -25 to +60 storage °C -50 to +70

Trip class according to IEC 947-4-1 10A 10A 10A 10A 20 20

Cable cross-section main connector solid or stranded mm² 0.75-6 + 0.75-6 0,75-10 4-35*2 *3 *4 0.75-2.5*2 flexible mm² 0.75-4 + 1-4 0,75-6 6-25*2 0.5-2.5*2 flexible with multicore cable end mm² 0.5-2.5 + 0.75-4 0.75-6 4-25 0.5-1.5 Cables per clamp number 1+1 2 2 1 auxiliary connector solid mm² 0.75-2.5*2 flexible mm² 0.5-2.5*2 flexible with multicore cable end mm² 0.5-1.5 Cables per clamp number 2

Auxiliary contacts *1 Rated insulation voltage Ui same potential V~ 690 690 690 690 different potential V~ 440 440 250 440

Utilization category AC15 *5 Rated operational current Ie 24V A 5 3 4 5 230V A 3 2 2.5 3 400V A 2 1 1.5 2 690V A 0.6 0.5 0.6 0.6

Utilization category DC13

Rated operational current Ie 24V A 1.2 1 1.2 1.2 110V A 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 220V A 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1

Short circuit protection (without welding 1kA) highest fuse rating gL (gG) A 6 4 6 6

Setting range A to 23 all 28-42 52-65 all -

Power loss per current path (max.) minimum setting value W 1.1 1.1 1.3 2.9 1.1 - maximum setting value W 2.3 2.3 3.3 4.5 2.5 -

*1) Suitable for: earthed-neutral systems, overvoltage category I to III, pollution degree 3 (standard-industry: Uimp = 4kV (at 440V), 6kV (at 690V). Data for other conditions on request. *2) Maximum cable cross-section with prepared conductor *3) Without terminals, suitable for bushing one connector 70mm² (stranded) per phase *4) Busbar sets see accessories page 59 *5) Switching capacity of the start contact: AC15 300VA, max. 1.5A, DC13 (max. 220V) 30W, max. 1.5A

H-64 Thermal Overload Relay J7TKN Data according to CULUS Type J7TKN-A J7TKN-B J7TKN-C J7TKN-D J7TKN-E Rated insulation voltage V~ 600 600 600 600 600 Rated current A2332427485

Auxiliary contacts Rated voltage same potential V AC 600 600 600 600 600 different potential V~ 150 150 150 150 150

Switching capacity AC VA 500 500 600 600 600 of aux. contacts A42444

Temperature Compensation In case of higher ambient temperature use the following formula: (Ambient temperature - 20) x 0.125 = correction factor in % of the full load motor current Example: Ambient temperature 70°C, full load motor current 7A (70 - 20) x 0.125 = 6.25% Setting value: 7A + 6,25% = 7.44A LVSG

Thermal Overload Relay J7TKN H-65 ■ Dimensions J7KNA-09 + J7TKN-A J7KN-10 + J7TKN-B J7KNA-12 J7KN-14 J7KN-18 J7KN-22

J7KN-10 + J7TKN-A J7KN-24 + J7TKN-B J7KN-14 J7KN-32 J7KN-18 J7KN-40 J7KN-22

H-66 Thermal Overload Relay J7TKN J7KN-24 + J7TKN-C J7KN-50 + J7TKN-D J7KN-32 J7KN-62 J7KN-40 J7KN-74

J7KN-85 + J7TKN-E J7KN-150 + J7TKN-F J7KN-110 J7KN-175 LVSG

J7KN-200 + J7TKN-210

Thermal Overload Relay J7TKN H-67 ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS.

Cat. No. J509-E2-02 In the interest of product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice.

H-68 Thermal Overload Relay J7TKN Motor Protection Circuit Breaker (MPCB)

J7MN )

MPCB system (motor protection CLASS 10)

• Rotary and switch types • Rated operational current = 12 A, 25 A, 50 A and 100 A • Switching capacity up to 12.5 A = 100 kA/400 V

• Fixed short-circuit release = 13 x Iu

• Overload release adjustable 0.7 - 1 x Iu • Single phasing sensivity Auxiliary contact modules

• ON/OFF indication for MPCB front mounting and side mounting • Trip indication for MPCB side mounting Accessories

• Undervoltage release • Shunt release • Three phase busbar system up to 5 MPCB • Moulded plastic enclosures (IP55) • Moulded plastic front plates (IP55) • Door coupling rotary mechanisms (black and red/yellow) Approved Standards

Standard Guide No (US,C) UL see page 95 ICE 947-5-1 LVSG VDE 0660 EN 60947-5-1

Motor Protection Circuit Breaker (MPCB) J7MN H-69 Ordering Information

■ Model Number Legend 1. Motor Protection Circuit Breaker (MPCB) 3. Accessories for MPCB

J7MN-##-### J74MN-#-## 123 123

1) Motor Protection Circuit Breaker (MPCB) 1) Accessories for MPCB 2) Type 2) S: Shunt release 12: Switch type (0.16 - 12 A) U: Under voltage release 25: Rotary type (0.16 - 25 A) 3) N1: 230 V 50 Hz / 240 V 60 Hz 50: Rotary type (25 - 40 A) N2: 210 - 230 V 50/60 Hz 100: Rotary type (45 - 100 A) 3) Setting range (examples) E16: 0.11 - 0.16A J74MN-## ## E2: 0.14 - 0.2A 123 16: 10 - 16 A ... 1) Accessories for MPCB 2. Aux. Contacts for MPCB 2) PF: Enclosure IP55 P: Module plastic front plate J73MN-### PH: Holder for front plate 123 3) 12: Switch type 25: Rotary type 1) Aux. Contact for MPCB 2) 11: 1 NO 1 NC 3) S: side mounting J74MN-##-## F: front mounting 123 1) Accessories for MPCB J73MN-#-## # 2) DC: Door coupling rotary mechanism 1234 3) B: black / gray RY: red / yellow 1) Aux. Contact for MPCB 2) T: Trip indicating contact 3) 11: 1 NO 1 NC J74MN-##-#/# 123 4) S: side mounting 1) Accessories for MPCB 2) L3: 3-phase busbar system (45 mm modular spacing) DS: Shroud for unused terminal 3) 1/2: for 2 circuit breakers 1/3: for 3 circuit breakers 1/4: for 4 circuit breakers 1/5: for 5 circuit breakers

J74MN-## ## 123

1) Accessories for MPCB 2) TC: Line side terminal 3) 12: for switch type 25: for rotary type

J74MN-## ### 123

1) Accessories for MPCB 2) TB: Terminal block for UL/cUL type E 3) 25: for rotary type up to 25A 100: for rotary type up to 100A

H-70 Motor Protection Circuit Breaker (MPCB) J7MN ■ System overview

Motor Protection Circuit Breaker (MPCB) Rated Suitable Current setting range Short-circuit Type Pack Weight current for Thermal Instantaneous breaking approx. motors*1 overload short-circuit capacity In 3~400V release release at 3~400V A kW A A kA pcs. kg/pcs. Circuit-Breakers J7MN-12 0.16 - 0.11 – 0.16 2.1 100 J7MN-12-E16 10.21 0.2 - 0.14 – 0.2 2.6 100 J7MN-12-E2 10.21 0.25 0.06 0.18 – 0.25 3.3 100 J7MN-12-E25 10.21 0.32 0.09 0.22 – 0.32 4.2 100 J7MN-12-E32 10.21 0.4 - 0.28 – 0.4 5.2 100 J7MN-12-E4 10.21 0.5 0.12 0.35 – 0.5 6.5 100 J7MN-12-E5 10.21 0.63 0.18 0.45 – 0.63 8.2 100 J7MN-12-E63 10.21 0.8 - 0.55 – 0.8 10 100 J7MN-12-E8 10.21 1 0.25 0.7 – 1 13 100 J7MN-12-1 10.21 1.25 0.37 0.9 – 1.25 16 100 J7MN-12-1E25 10.21 1.6 0.55 1.1 – 1.6 21 100 J7MN-12-1E6 10.21 2 0.75 1.4 – 2 26 100 J7MN-12-2 10.21 2.5 - 1.8 – 2.5 33 100 J7MN-12-2E5 10.21 3.2 1.1 2.2 – 3.2 42 100 J7MN-12-3E2 10.21 4 1.5 2.8 – 4 52 100 J7MN-12-4 10.21 5 - 3.5 – 5 65 100 J7MN-12-5 10.21 6.3 2.2 4.5 – 6.3 82 100 J7MN-12-6E3 10.21 8 3 5.5 – 8 104 50 J7MN-12-8 10.21 10 4 7 – 10 130 50 J7MN-12-10 10.21 12 5.5 9 – 12 156 50 J7MN-12-12 10.21 *1) Recommended values for standard motors *2) max. motor current 95A LVSG

Motor Protection Circuit Breaker (MPCB) J7MN H-71 Rated Suitable Current setting range Short-circuit Type Pack Weight current for Thermal Instantaneous breaking approx. motors*1 overload short-circuit capacity In 3~400V release release at 3~400V A kW A A kA pcs. kg/pcs. Circuit-Breakers J7MN-25 0.16 - 0.11 – 0.16 2.1 100 J7MN-25-E16 10.32 0.2 - 0.14 – 0.2 2.6 100 J7MN-25-E2 10.32 0.25 0.06 0.18 – 0.25 3.3 100 J7MN-25-E25 10.32 0.32 0.09 0.22 – 0.32 4.2 100 J7MN-25-E32 10.32 0.4 - 0.28 – 0.4 5.2 100 J7MN-25-E4 10.32 0.5 0.12 0.35 – 0.5 6.5 100 J7MN-25-E5 10.32 0.63 0.18 0.45 – 0.63 8.2 100 J7MN-25-E63 10.32 0.8 - 0.55 – 0.8 10 100 J7MN-25-E8 10.32 1 0.25 0.7 – 1 13 100 J7MN-25-1 10.32 1.25 0.37 0.9 – 1.25 16 100 J7MN-25-1E25 10.32 1.6 0.55 1.1 – 1.6 21 100 J7MN-25-1E6 10.32 2 0.75 1.4 – 2 26 100 J7MN-25-2 10.32 2.5 - 1.8 – 2.5 33 100 J7MN-25-2E5 10.32 3.2 1.1 2.2 – 3.2 42 100 J7MN-25-3E2 10.32 4 1.5 2.8 – 4 52 100 J7MN-25-4 10.32 5 - 3.5 – 5 65 100 J7MN-25-5 10.32 6.3 2.2 4.5 – 6.3 82 100 J7MN-25-6E3 10.32 8 3 5.5 – 8 104 100 J7MN-25-8 10.32 10 4 7 – 10 130 100 J7MN-25-10 10.32 12.5 5.5 9 – 12.5 163 100 J7MN-25-12E5 10.32 16 7.5 11 – 16 208 50 J7MN-25-16 10.32 20 - 14 – 20 260 50 J7MN-25-20 10.32 22 - 17 – 22 286 50 J7MN-25-22 10.32 25 11 20 – 25 325 50 J7MN-25-25 10.32 Circuit-Breakers J7MN-50 25 11 18 – 25 325 50 J7MN-50-25 10.96 32 15 22 – 32 416 50 J7MN-50-32 10.96 40 18.5 28 – 40 520 50 J7MN-50-40 10.96 45 – 36 – 45 585 50 J7MN-50-45 10.96 50 22 40 – 50 650 50 J7MN-50-50 10.96

Circuit-Breakers J7MN-100 63 30 45 – 63 819 50 J7MN-100-63 12.1 75 37 57 – 75 975 50 J7MN-100-75 12.1 90 – 70 – 90 1170 50 J7MN-100-90 12.1 100 45 80 – 100*2 1235 50 J7MN-100-100 12.1

*1) Recommended values for standard motors *2) max. motor current 95A

H-72 Motor Protection Circuit Breaker (MPCB) J7MN Accessories Description Version for circuit Type Pack Weight breaker approx. pcs. kg/pcs. Transverse auxiliary contact block Contact block 1NO + 1NC all J73MN-11F 10 0.02

Auxiliary contact block for left hand side mounting (max 1pc. per circuit breaker) Contact block 1NO + 1NC 9 mm all J73MN-11S 10 0.03

Signalling switch for left hand side mounting (max 1pc. per circuit breaker) Signalling switch 1NO + 1NC each J7MN-25 J73MN-T-11S 10.07 Individual tripped and J7MN-50 short-circuit signalling

Auxiliary releases for right hand side mounting (max 1pc. per circuit breaker) Undervoltage release AC 50 Hz AC 60 Hz Trips the circuit-breaker 230 V 240 V all J74MN-U-N1 10.12 when the voltage is interrupted. Prevents the motor from being restarted accidentally when the voltage is restored, suitable for EMERGENCY STOP acc. to VDE 0113 Shunt release 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz, DC Trips the circuit-breaker 100% ON 5sec ON when the release coil 210-240 V 190-330 V all J74MN-S-N2 10.11 energized. LVSG Enclosures and Front Plates Description Version for circuit Type Pack Weight breaker approx. pcs. kg/pcs. Front Plates Moulded plastic front for actuation of circuit-breakers J7MN-12 J74MN-P12 10.08 plate with actuator dia- in any enclosure phragm and holder for protection degree IP55 circuit breaker Moulded plastic front for actuation of circuit-breakers J7MN-25 J74MN-P25 10.08 plate with rotary operat- in any enclosure J7MN-50 ing mechanism protection degree IP55 lockable Holder for front plate Holder is mounted on front J7MN-25 J74MN-PH 10.12 J74MN-P25 plate, circuit-breaker (with accessories) is snapped on Enclosures Moulded plastic protection degree IP55 enclose with actuator with N- and PE- terminal diaphragm (+ aux. contact + release) J7MN-12 J74MN-PF12 10.27 knockouts for J7MN-25 sealable

Motor Protection Circuit Breaker (MPCB) J7MN H-73 Description Version for circuit Type Pack Weight breaker approx. pcs. kg/pcs. Moulded plastic protection degree IP55 enclose with rotary with N- and PE- terminal operating mechanism (+ aux. contact + release) J7MN-25 J74MN-PF25 10.30 knockouts for J7MN-25 lockable

Door-coupling mechanisms The door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms consist of a knob, a coupling driver and a extension shaft (5 mm x 5 mm). The door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms are designed for degree of protection IP 65. The door locking device prevents accidental opening of the cubicle door in the ON position of the circuit-breaker. The OFF position can be locked with up to 3 padlocks. Door-coupling rotary extension shaft 330 mm J7MN-25 to J74MN-DC-B 10.3 mechanism black with supporting bracket J7MN-50 Emergency-Stop extension shaft 330 mm J7MN-25 to J74MN-DC-RY 10.3 Door-coupling rotary with supporting bracket J7MN-50 mechanism red/yellow Busbars Description Version for circuit Type Pack Weight breaker approx. pcs. kg/pcs. Insulated 3-phase busbar systems For feeding several modular circuit-breakers on standard mounting rails, insulated, shock-protected. Rated operational voltage max. 690 V 3-phase busbars for 2 circuit-breakers J7MN-12 J74MN-L3-1/2 1 0.03 modular spacing 45 mm for 3 circuit-breakers J7MN-25 J74MN-L3-1/3 1 0.05 for 4 circuit-breakers J74MN-L3-1/4 1 0.07 for 5 circuit-breakers J74MN-L3-1/5 1 0.10 For connecting the 3-phase busbars from circuit-breakers different sizes. Clamping together J7MN-12 and J7MN-25 circuit-breakers is not possible due to the different modular spacings and the different heights of the terminals. Line side terminal Conductor cross-section J7MN-12 J74MN-TC12 1 0.04 3-pole, connection solid or stranded 6- 25 mm² J7MN-25 J74MN-TC25 1 0.04 from top with ferrule 4-16 mm²

Shroud for unused terminals J7MN-12 J74MN-DS 20 - J7MN-25

Mounting Parts for Fuseless Load Feeders Description Version for circuit Type Pack Weight breaker approx. pcs. kg/pcs. DIN-rail adapters Adapter 35 mm-DIN-rail J7MN... J74MN-HU 10 0.05 for mechanical fixing of (DIN EN50022) circuit-breaker and or screw mounting contactor

Link modules for electrical connection between circuit-breaker and contactor Link module up to 20 A J7MN... J74MN-VD-12 10 - up to 32 A J74MN-VD-25 10 -

Terminal block with increased creepage distances and clearances acc. to cULus Type „E“ Terminal block up to 600 V acc. to UL 489 J7MN-25 J74MN-TB25 1 0.12 not for transverse aux. contact J7MN-100 J74MN-TB100 1 0.15 block

H-74 Motor Protection Circuit Breaker (MPCB) J7MN Specifications

■ Engineering data and Characteristics

Components for Fuseless Load Feeders, DIN-Rail Mounting

Type of coordination „1“ 3 x 415 V 10 kA (other conditions on request) Motor Setting range Circuit-breaker Contactor Link DIN-rail 3~400V page 72 220-230V 50Hz module adapter kW A Ty p e Ty p e Type Type - 0.11– 0.16 J7MN-25-E16 J7KN-10-10 230 J74MN-VD-12 J74MN-HU - 0.14– 0.2 J7MN-25-E2 J7KN-10-10 230 J74MN-VD-12 J74MN-HU 0.06 0.18– 0.25 J7MN-25-E25 J7KN-10-10 230 J74MN-VD-12 J74MN-HU 0.09 0.22– 0.32 J7MN-25-E32 J7KN-10-10 230 J74MN-VD-12 J74MN-HU - 0.28– 0.4 J7MN-25-E4 J7KN-10-10 230 J74MN-VD-12 J74MN-HU 0.12 0.35– 0.5 J7MN-25-E5 J7KN-10-10 230 J74MN-VD-12 J74MN-HU 0.18 0.45– 0.63 J7MN-25-E63 J7KN-10-10 230 J74MN-VD-12 J74MN-HU - 0.55– 0.8 J7MN-25-E8 J7KN-10-10 230 J74MN-VD-12 J74MN-HU 0.25 0.7– 1 J7MN-25-1 J7KN-10-10 230 J74MN-VD-12 J74MN-HU 0.37 0.9– 1.25 J7MN-25-1E25 J7KN-10-10 230 J74MN-VD-12 J74MN-HU 0.55 1.1– 1.6 J7MN-25-1E6 J7KN-10-10 230 J74MN-VD-12 J74MN-HU 0.75 1.4– 2 J7MN-25-2 J7KN-10-10 230 J74MN-VD-12 J74MN-HU - 1.8– 2.5 J7MN-25-2E5 J7KN-10-10 230 J74MN-VD-12 J74MN-HU 1.1 2.2– 3.2 J7MN-25-3E2 J7KN-10-10 230 J74MN-VD-12 J74MN-HU 1.5 2.8– 4 J7MN-25-4 J7KN-10-10 230 J74MN-VD-12 J74MN-HU - 3.5– 5 J7MN-25-5 J7KN-10-10 230 J74MN-VD-12 J74MN-HU 2.2 4.5– 6.3 J7MN-25-6E3 J7KN-10-10 230 J74MN-VD-12 J74MN-HU 3 5.5– 8 J7MN-25-8 J7KN-10-10 230 J74MN-VD-12 J74MN-HU 4 7– 10 J7MN-25-10 J7KN-10-10 230 J74MN-VD-12 J74MN-HU 5.5 9– 12.5 J7MN-25-12E5 J7KN-14-10 230 J74MN-VD-12 J74MN-HU 7.5 11– 16 J7MN-25-16 J7KN-18-10 230 J74MN-VD-12 J74MN-HU - 14– 20 J7MN-25-20 J7KN-22-10 230 J74MN-VD-25 J74MN-HU - 17– 22 J7MN-25-22 J7KN-22-10 230 J74MN-VD-25 J74MN-HU 11 20– 25 J7MN-25-25 J7KN-22-10 230 J74MN-VD-25 J74MN-HU LVSG

Motor Protection Circuit Breaker (MPCB) J7MN H-75 Technical Data according to IEC/EN 60947-1, 60947-2, 60947-4-1 and VDE 0660

This table shows the rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity Icu If the short-circuit current exceeds the rated short-circuit breaking and the rated service short-circuit breaking capacity Ics of the J7MN capacity of the circuit-breaker specified in the tables at the circuit-breakers with different operational voltages as a function of installation point, a back-up fuse is to be used. the rated current In of the circuit-breakers. The maximum rated current for the back-up fuse is specified in the The circuit-breakers can be fed at the top or bottom supply terminals tables. These fuses are only suitable for the short-circuit-currents as without any reduction of the rated data. indicated on the fuses.

Circuit- Rated up to AC 240V*1) up to AC 400V*1) up to AC 440V*1) up to AC 500V*1) up to AC 690V*1) breaker current In up to AC 415V*2) up to AC 460V*2) up to AC 525V*2)

Type AIcu Ics max. Icu Ics max. Icu Ics max. Icu Ics max. Icu Ics max. fuse fuse fuse fuse fuse (gL/gG) (gL/gG) (gL/gG) (gL/gG) (gL/gG) kA kA A kA kA A kA kA A kA kA A kA kA A J7MN-12 0.16 to 0.8 100 100 -- 100 100 -- 100 100 -- 100 100 -- 100 100 -- 1 100 100 -- 100 100 -- 100 100 -- 100 100 -- 100 100 -- 1.25 100 100 -- 100 100 -- 100 100 -- 100 100 -- 2 2 20 1.6 100 100 -- 100 100 -- 100 100 -- 100 100 -- 2 2 20 2 100 100 -- 100 100 -- 100 100 -- 10 10 35 2 2 35 2.5 100 100 -- 100 100 -- 100 100 -- 10 10 35 2 2 35 3.2 100 100 -- 100 100 -- 10 10 40 3 3 40 2 2 40 4 100 100 -- 100 100 -- 10 10 40 3 3 40 2 2 40 5 100 100 -- 100 100 -- 10 10 50 3 3 50 2 2 50 6.3 100 100 -- 100 100 -- 10 10 50 3 3 50 2 2 50 8 100 100 -- 50 12.5 80*3) 10 10 63 3 3 63 2 2 63 10 100 100 -- 50 12.5 80*3) 10 10 63 3 3 63 2 2 63 12 100 100 -- 50 12.5 80*3) 10 10 80 3 3 80 2 2 80 J7MN-25 0.16 to 1.25 100 100 -- 100 100 -- 100 100 -- 100 100 -- 100 100 -- 1.6 100 100 -- 100 100 -- 100 100 -- 100 100 -- 100 100 -- 2 100 100 -- 100 100 -- 100 100 -- 100 100 -- 8 8 25 2.5 100 100 -- 100 100 -- 100 100 -- 100 100 -- 8 8 25 3.2 100 100 -- 100 100 -- 100 100 -- 100 100 -- 8 8 32 4 100 100 -- 100 100 -- 100 100 -- 100 100 -- 6 3 32 5 100 100 -- 100 100 -- 100 100 -- 100 100 -- 6 3 32 6.3 100 100 -- 100 100 -- 100 100 -- 100 100 -- 6 3 50 8 100 100 -- 100 100 -- 50 25 63*3 42 21 63 6 3 50 10 100 100 -- 100 100 -- 50 25 80*3 42 21 63 6 3 50 12.5 100 100 -- 100 100 -- 50 25 80*3 42 21 80 6 3 63 16 100 100 -- 50 25 100*3) 20 10 80 10 5 80 4 2 63 20 100 100 -- 50 25 125*3) 20 10 80 10 5 80 4 2 63 22 100 100 -- 50 25 125*3) 20 10 100 10 5 80 4 2 63 25 100 100 -- 50 25 125*3) 20 10 100 10 5 80 4 2 63 J7MN-50 25 100 100 -- 50 25 125*3) 30 15 100 12 6 80 5 3 63 32 100 100 -- 50 25 125*3) 30 15 125 10 5 100 4 2 63 40 100 100 -- 50 25 160*3) 30 15 125 10 5 100 4 2 63 45 100 100 -- 50 25 160*3) 30 15 125 10 5 100 4 2 63 50 100 100 -- 50 25 160*3) 30 15 125 10 5 100 4 2 80 J7MN-100 63 100 100 -- 50 25 160*3) 40 20 160 12 6 125 6 3 80 75 100 100 -- 50 25 160*3) 40 20 160 8 4 125 5 3 100 90 100 100 -- 50 25 160*3) 40 20 160 8 4 125 5 3 125 100 100 100 -- 50 25 160*3) 40 20 160 8 4 125 5 3 125

*1) 10% overvoltage *2) 5% overvoltage *3) Back-up fuse required if short-circuit current at installation point > 50 kA -- No back-up fuse required.

H-76 Motor Protection Circuit Breaker (MPCB) J7MN Technical Data according to IEC/EN 60947-1, 60947-2, 60947-4-1 and VDE 0660 Main Circuit Type J7MN-12 J7MN-25 J7MN-50 J7MN-100 Number of poles 3333 Max. rated current Inmax (=max. rated operational current Ie) A122550100 Permissible ambient temperature Storage/transport °C -50 to +80 Operation °C -20 to +70*1) Permissible rated current at temperature inside cubicle of: +60 °C % 100 +70 °C% 87 Circuit-breaker inside enclosure Permissible rated current at temperature inside enclosure of: +60 °C % 100 +70 °C% 87 Rated operational voltage Ue V 690*2) Rated frequency Hz 50/60 Rated insulation voltage Ui V 690 Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 6 Utilization category IEC 60 947-2 (circuit-breaker) A IEC 60 947-4-1 (motor starter) AC-3 Class acc. to IEC 60 947-4-1 10 DC short-circuit breaking capacity (time constant t = 5 ms) 1 conducting path DC 150 V kA 10 2 conducting paths in series DC 300 V kA 10 3 conducting paths in series DC 450 V kA 10 Power loss Pv per circuit-breaker In -> to 1.25 A W 5 - - - dependent on rated current In In -> 1.6 to 6.3 A W 6 - - - (upper setting range) In -> 8 to 12 A W 7 - - - R per conducting path = P/(I² × 3) In -> 1 to 6.3 A W - 6 - - In -> 8 to 16 A W - 7 - - In -> 20 to 25 A W - 8 - - In -> to 25 A W - - 12 - In -> 32 A W - - 15 -

In -> 40 to 50 A W - - 20 - LVSG In -> to 63 A W---20 In -> 75 to 90 AW---30 In -> to 100 A W ---38 Shock resistance acc. to IEC 68 Part 2-27 g 25 25 25 25 Degree of protection acc. to IEC 60 529 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20*3) IP 20*3) Shock hazard protection acc. to DIN VDE 0106 Part 100 safe against finger touch Temperature compensation acc. to IEC 60 947-4-1 °C -20 to +60 Phase failure sensitivity acc. to IEC 60 947-4-1 yes Explosion protection acc. to EC Directive 94191 EC yes*4) Isolator characteristics acc. to IEC 60 947-3 yes Main and EM. STOP switch characteristics acc. to IEC 60 204-1 (VDE 0113) yes*5) Safe isolation between main and auxiliary acc. to DIN VDE 0106 Part 101 circuits up to 400 V + 10 % yes up to 415 V+ 5 % yes Mechanical endurance operating cycles 100 000 100 000 50 000 50 000 Electrical endurance 100 000 100 000 25 000 25 000 Max. operating frequency per hour (motor starts) 1/h 15 15 15 15 Permissible mounting position any. acc. to IEC 60 447 start command “I” right-hand side or top *1) Over +60°C current reduction *2) 500 V with moulded-plastic enclosure *3) Terminal compartment IP00 *4) KEMA-test certification on request *5) With appropriate accessories

Motor Protection Circuit Breaker (MPCB) J7MN H-77 Technical Data according to IEC/EN 60947-1, 60947-2, 60947-4-1 and VDE 0660 Conductor cross-sections for main Circuit Type J7MN-12 J7MN-25 J7MN-50 J7MN-100 Terminal type Screw-type Screw-type Box terminal Box terminal Terminal screw Pozidriv size 2 Pozidriv size 2 Pozidriv size 2 Allen screw 4 mm Tightening torque Nm 0.8 to 1.2 2 to 2.5 3 to 4.5 4 to 6 Conductor cross-sections solid mm² 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) 2 x (1 to 2.5) 2 x (0.75 to 16) 2 x (2.5 to 16) mm² 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) 2 x (2.5 to 6) – – mm² 1 x (0.5 to 4) finely stranded with end ferrule mm² 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) 2 x (1 to 2.5) 2 x (0.75 to 16) 2 x (2.5 to 35) mm² 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) 2 x (2.5 to 6) 1 x (0.75 to 25) 1 x (2.5 to 50) mm² 1 x (1 to 10) stranded mm² 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) 2 x (1 to 2.5) 2 x (0.75 to 25) 2 x (10 to 50) mm² 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) 2 x (2.5 to 6) 1 x (0.75 to 35) 1 x (10 to 70) mm² 1 x (0.5 to 4) 1 x (1 to 10) AWG-wires, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (18 to 14) 2 x (14 to 10) 2 x (18 to 3) 2 x (10 to 1/0) AWG – – 1 x (18 to 2) 1 x (10 to 2/0) conductor bar (number x width x thick) mm – – 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8) 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8) mm – – – 18 x 10 mm² – – – up to 2 x 70

Technical Data according to IEC/EN 60947-1, 60947-2, 60947-4-1 and VDE 0660 Auxiliary switches Switching capacity Control voltage Front transverse auxiliary switch with 1 NO + 1 NC Rated operational voltage Ue AC V 24 230 Rated operational current Ie/AC-15 A 2 0.5 Rated operational current Ie/AC-12 Ith A 2.5 2.5 Rated operational voltage Ue DC L/R 200 ms V 24 48 60 Rated operational current Ie/DC-13 A 1 0.3 0.15 Lateral auxiliary switch and signalling switch Rated operational voltage Ue AC V 24 230 400 690 Rated operational current Ie/AC-15 A 6 6 3 1 Rated operational current Ie/AC-12 Ith A 10 10 10 10 Rated operational voltage Ue DC L/R 200 ms V 24 110 220 440 Rated operational current Ie/DC-13 A 2 0.5 0.25 0.1 Undervoltage release Power consumption during pick-up VA/W 20.2/13 uninterrupted duty VA/W 7.2/2.4 Response voltage trip V 0.7 to 0.35 × Us pick-up V 0.85 to 1.1 × Us Max. opening time ms 20 Shunt release Power consumption during pick-up AC VA/W 20.2/13 DC W 13 to 80 Response voltage acc. to IEC 60 947-1, trip V 0.7 to 1.1 × Us Max. opening time ms 20 Short-circuit protection for auxiliary and control circuits Fuse gL/gG A 10 Miniature circuit breaker C-characteristic A 6*1) Conductor cross-sections for auxiliary and control circuits Screw-type Pozidriv size 2 solid mm² 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) / 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) finely stranded with ferrule mm² 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) / 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) stranded mm² 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) / 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) AWG-wires, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (18 to 14) *1) Prospective short-circuit current < 0.4 kA.

H-78 Motor Protection Circuit Breaker (MPCB) J7MN Description J7MN circuit-breakers are compact, current-limiting circuit-breakers Short-circuit protection which are optimised for load feeders. The circuit-breakers are used for switching and protecting three-phase induction motors of up to The short-circuit releases of J7MN circuit-breakers disconnect the 18,5 kW at AC 400 V and for loads with rated currents of up to 40 A. faulty load feeder from the system in the event of a short circuit and thus prevent any further damage. Construction Circuit-breakers with a short-circuit breaking capacity of 50 kA or The circuit-breakers are available in three sizes: 100 kA at a voltage of 400 V AC are practically short-circuit-proof at this voltage, as higher short-circuit currents are not usually encoun- J7MN-12 overall width 45 mm. Max. rated current 12 A. Suitable for tered at the installation point. 3-phase induction motors of up to 5.5 kW at voltages of 400 V AC. J7MN-25 overall width 45 mm. Max. rated current 25 A. Suitable for Back-up fuses are only necessary if the short-circuit current at the 3-phase induction motors of up to 11 kW at voltages of 400 V AC. installation point exceeds the rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity of the circuit-breakers. J7MN-50 overall width 55 mm. Max. rated current 40 A. Suitable for 3-phase induction motors of up to 18,5 kW at voltages of 400 V AC. Motor protection Releases The tripping characteristics of J7MN circuit-breakers are designed mainly to protect three-phase induction motors. The circuit-breakers Circuit-breakers J7MN are equipped with bimetallic-based, inverse- are therefore also referred to as motor circuit-breakers. The current time delayed overload releases and with instantaneous overcurrent of the motor to be protected is set with the aid of the scale. releases (electromagnetic short-circuit releases). Circuit-breakers with thermal overload releases are normally The overload releases can be set in accordance with the load cur- designed in accordance with release Class 10. rent. The overcurrent releases are permanently set to a value 13 times the rated current and thus enable trouble-free start-up of Line protection motors. J7MN circuit-breakers for motor protection are also suitable for line The scale cover can be sealed to prevent unauthorized adjustments protection. In order to prevent premature tripping due to phase failure to the set current. sensitivity, the three conducting paths must always be uniformly loaded. The conducting paths must be connected in series in the Operating mechanisms case of single-phase loads. circuit-breakers J7MN-12 are actuated via a switch operating mecha- The J7MN circuit-breakers meet the isolation conditions of nism and circuit-breakers J7MN-25 and J7MN-50 via a rotary operat- IEC 60 947-3 as well as the additional test conditions for circuiting mechanism. If the circuit-breaker trips, the rotary operating breakers with isolation characteristics specified in IEC 60 947-2. Tak- mechanism switches to the tripped position to indicate this. Before ing IEC 60 204-1 into consideration, they can thus be implemented the circuit-breaker is reclosed, the rotary operating mechanism must as main and EMERGENCY STOP switches. be reset to the 0 position by hand, in order to prevent the former from Door-coupling rotary operating mechanism do not fulfil the isolation closing by mistake before the fault has been cleared. characteristics specified in IEC 60 947-2. Door-coupling rotary oper- In the case of circuit-breakers with rotary operating mechanisms, ating mechanism according isolation characteristics specified in there is an electrical signal via a signalling switch to indicate that the IEC 60 947-2 on request. circuit-breaker has tripped. All operating mechanisms can be locked in the 0 position with a padlock (shackle diameter 3.5 to 4.5 mm). The J7MN circuit-breakers fulfil the isolation characteristics specified in IEC 60 947-2. LVSG Operating conditions Circuit-breakers J7MN are suitable for use in any climate. They are designed for operation in enclosed rooms under normal conditions (e. g. no dust, corrosive vapours or harmful gases). Suitable enclosures must be provided for installation in dusty or damp rooms. Circuit-breakers J7MN can also be fed from below. The standards in accordance with which the circuit-breakers are constructed, the permissible ambient temperatures, the maximum making and breaking capacities, the tripping currents and other boundary conditions can be found in the technical data and tripping characteristics. Since the operational currents, starting currents and current peaks vary as a result of the inrush current, even in the case of motors with identical output ratings, the values specified for these output ratings in the selection tables are intended as a guide only. The specific rated and start-up data of the motor to be protected is always para- mount to the choice of the most suitable circuit-breaker. In order to prevent premature tripping due to phase failure sensitivity, the circuit-breakers should always be connected in such a way that current flows through all three main conducting paths.

Motor Protection Circuit Breaker (MPCB) J7MN H-79 Characteristics

The time/current characteristic, the current limiting characteristics Opening Time and the I²t characteristics were determined in accordance with DIN VDE 0660 and IEC 60 947. The tripping characteristic of the inverse-time delayed overload releases (thermal overload releases or ’a’ releases) for DC and AC with a frequency of 0 to 400 Hz also apply to the time/current characteristic. The characteristics apply to the cold state. At operating temperature, the tripping times of the thermal releases are reduced to approximately 25 %. Under normal operating conditions, all three poles of the device must 3-pole be loaded. The three main conducting paths must be connected in load series in order to protect single-phase or DC loads. Class 10 With 3-pole loading, the maximum deviation in the tripping time for 3 times the setting current and upwards is ± 20 % and thus in accor- 2-pole dance with DIN VDE 0165. load The tripping characteristics for the instantaneous, electromagnetic Class 10 overcurrent releases (short-circuit releases or ’n’ releases) are based on the rated current In, which is also the maximum value of the setting range for circuit-breakers with adjustable overload releases. If the current is set to a lower value, the tripping current of the ’n’ release is increased by a corresponding factor. The characteristics of the electromagnetic overcurrent releases apply to frequencies of 50/60 Hz. Appropriate correction factors must be used for lower frequencies up to 16 2/3 Hz, for higher frequencies up to 400 Hz and for DC. The characteristic shown here is a schematic representation of circuit-breakers for all ranges. Time/current characteristics, current limiting characteristics and I²t characteristics are available on request. Current ■ Wiring diagrams Circuit-breaker Transverse auxiliary contact block Lateral auxiliary contact block J7MN J73MN-11F J73MN-11S

Signalling switch Undervoltage release Shunt release J73MN-T-11S J74MN-U J74MN-S

H-80 Motor Protection Circuit Breaker (MPCB) J7MN ■ Dimensions Circuit-breaker J7MN-12 Circuit-breaker J7MN-25

Circuit-breaker J7MN-50 1) Lateral aux. contact 2) Signalling contact 3) Auxiliary release 4) Transverse aux. contact 7) Mounting holes 8) 35mm DIN-rail 9) 35mm DIN-rail 15mm high or 75mm DIN-rail 10) 4mm hexagon socket screw 11) Lockable in 0-position with shackle diameter max.5mm

Circuit-breaker J7MN-100

1) Lateral aux. contact 2) Signalling contact

3) Auxiliary release LVSG 4) Transverse aux. contact 7) Mounting holes 8) 35mm DIN-rail 9) 35mm DIN-rail 15mm high or 75mm DIN-rail 10) 4mm hexagon socket screw 11) Lockable in 0-position with shackle diameter max.5mm

Motor Protection Circuit Breaker (MPCB) J7MN H-81 Moulded plastic front plate J74MN-P12 Moulded plastic front plate J74MN-P25

Moulded plastic enclosure J74MN-PF12

Door-coupling rotary operating mechanism J74MN-DC

1) Max. for shackle diameter for padlock 8 mm

3-phase busbar J74MN-L3-#/# 3-phase line-side terminal J74MN-TC12 and J74MN-TC25 for J7MN-12 and J7MN-25, modular spacing 45 mm

ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS.

Cat. No. J508-E2-02 In the interest of product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice.

H-82 Motor Protection Circuit Breaker (MPCB) J7MN Appendix

● Precautions

■ Notice Use under rated condition, otherwise contactors will not only cause Do not use a contactor or thermal relay which has been dropped or malfunction, but also cause a fire or damage the contactor. dismantled. Doing so may cause malfunction or a fire. Life period of contactor depends on the operating application. Please Make sure to shut off power supply to contactors before wiring or check the electrical life under real application in advance. replacing. If you continue to use malfunctioning contactor, a fire or breakdown Do not operate the actuator of a contactor manually. Doing so may may occur. cause contact welding by chattering or burn out by arc. Do not miss-wire or miss-charge the power supply, otherwise the contactor does not work correctly. Do not operate in places with explosive or flammable gas, otherwise Unless otherwise stated in the catalogue, a fire or explosion may occur by arc or heating from contactor. modifications, especially those of stated values, Make sure to use the circuit well considered about safety, in case sizes and weights are subject to alternation. there is any possibility to cause secondary disaster by contact trouble (welding, faulty contact). Diagrams and tables are subject to alternation and Do not supply short-circuit current to electromagnetic switch (contac- not to be regarded as binding drawings. tor with thermal relay). Doing so may result failure in heater of thermal relay. Please use short-circuit protection like fuse or protective circuit breaker. ■ Correct use

General use Circuit design Unexpected malfunction may occur in real application. Please carry out as many tests as possible. Supplied voltage waveform for input Ratings in this catalogue measured under the condition according to Make sure to apply and remove the voltage instantly. Do not use IEC unless otherwise specified. In cases of check by real application, under the condition that the coil voltage waveform increases or please carry out the test under the same condition as expected in the decreases gradually. actual application.

In case of DC contactor use (input voltage LVSG Selection ripple) Please use DC contactor input voltage with a ripple ratio less than Coil specification 5%. Excessive ripple (pulsating current) may cause contact welding. Please select suitable coil to circuit design, otherwise malfunction may occur or coil may have a burn out by overvoltage etc. Fluctuation of input voltage Make sure to supply sufficient voltage to actuate contactors properly. Type Continuous supply of insufficient voltage results in excessive heating and may cause burn out of coil. Please check contact ratings, switching capacity, thermal characteristics etc. when selecting product type. Maximum applied voltage Thermal relay Do not supply the voltage over the maximum rated voltage, otherwise burn out or insulation failure may occur. Motor current differs by supplier, type, number of poles, frequency. Please confirm operational current level. The temperature inside control panel has much influence to the coil temperature, so make sure not to exceed the specified value in the Coil surge suppressor catalogue. Basically rated voltage should be supplied to coil. To supply higher Coil surge suppressor type should be selected by contactor type, voltage than rated would result in shorter electrical life, even if it is auxiliary relay type and applied voltage. Make sure to use defined lower than the maximum rated voltage. each contactor. In case of installing coil surge suppressor, please check the actual circuit because the release time will be delayed. Reverse Make sure to use reversible contactors for reverse operation. Electrical life expectancy Make sure to use interlock device in reverse operation by two contac- Electrical life expectancy tests in this catalogue are based on IEC. tors, otherwise short circuit current may burn out or give damage to contactors and motors.

Appendix H-83 Installation Operation ambience

Mounting Dust Make sure to use specified wire size, mounting screw size, mounting Dust on the surface of the contacts could result in contact malfunc- screw number, and DIN rail size. tioning. Take countermeasure in excessive dusty surrounding. Tightening Screw Temperature, humidity Tighten each screw securely by specified tightening torque. Loose Use contactors within the temperature and humidity conditions spec- tightening may cause a fire by excessive heating. ified in datasheet. To use or store contactor in excessive temperature or humidity may result in malfunction of contact by organic film com- Combination posed by sulfication and oxidation on the surface of the contacts. Please use only OMRON product combinations in case of thermal Use contactors within the temperature and humidity conditions spec- relay, timer block and auxiliary contact block etc. ified in the datasheet, to prevent contactors from insulation resistance failure by condensation or insulation resistance deterioration Wrong-combinations may result in damage to contactors. by tracking. Mounting direction Gas Some products have a defined specific mounting direction. Please NH3, H2S, SO2, CI2, Si and NO2 have bad effects on a contactor. refer to datasheet before use. With these gases, a corrosive metal film ist generated on the surface of the contacts and could result in contact malfunctioning. Use a contactor in low humidity and no corrosive gas surroundings. Oil Do not use a contactor in places where oil is sprayed onto the contactor. It will cause cracks on polymer parts. Shock and vibration Do not use a contactor in places where there is excessive shock or vibration. It may cause malfunctioning. Storage Store contactors in a place with no direct sunshine or ultraviolet rays. It will cause crack on polymer parts. When contactors are to be stored for a long time, they must be stored with care. Though it generally depends where contactors are stored, deterioration of contacts may occur after long storage. Please check the characteristics before use after long time storage.

H-84 Appendix ● European Standards

■ IEC 947, EN 60947 European Standards for Low-Voltage Switchgear For Europe and most other industrial countries of the world, the new Since 1993, all low-voltage switchgear purchased in Europe had to IEC 947 and EN 60 947 specifications for low-voltage switchgear satisfy the EN 60 947 European Standard. Installations in existence have unified the regulations which previously varied from nation to prior to 1993 are not affected by the standard and need not to be nation. refitted with new devices. Devices constructed and tested to the IEC This required the introduction of new terms, and new test methods standards and EN standards can be used worldwide, with the excep- and utilization categories. The new specifications are aimed tion of the USA and Canada. In these countries UL and CSA specifi- primarily at manufacturers. However, the user also will come across cations continue to apply. Switchgear which conforms to IEC 947 and EN 60 947 and which has, in addition, UL- and CSA approvals, new technical terms and data in the manufacturers’ catalogues in the meantime has entered the market. Such ‘world market’ devices and on the devices themselves which are important for the selection offer the advantage that they can be used throughout the world, and application of the devices. The present paper deals with the cur- including the USA and Canada. rently published specifications. Further specifications and supplements are in preparation.

IEC 947 IEC 947-1 General rules IEC 947-2 Circuit-breakers IEC 947-3 Switches, disconnectors, switch-disconnectors and fuse-combination units IEC 947-4-1 Connectors and motor-starters IEC 947-5-1 Control circuit devices and switching elements IEC 947-6-1 Multiple function equipment, Automatic transfer switching equipment IEC 947-6-2 Multiple function equipment, Control and protective switching devices (or equipment) (CPS) IEC 947-7-1 Ancillary equipment

Conditions for compliance with Conditions for compliance with

Type 1 coordination Type 2 coordination LVSG (Extract from IEC 947-4-1) (Extract from IEC 947-4-1) - The contactor or the starter must not endanger - The contactor or the starter must not endanger personnel or equipment in the event of a short personnel or equipment in the event of a short circuit circuit - The contactor or the starter does not need to be - The contactor or the starter must be suitable for suitable for continued operation without repair and further use replacement of parts - No damage may occur to the overload relay or - Damage to the contactor and the overload relay is other parts, with the exception of welding of the permissible contactor or starter contacts, provided they can be separated easily without any significant deformation (e.g. using a screwdriver)

Rated conditional Rated operation current le Rated uninterrupted current lu (to IEC 947-1) short-circuit current lq - The rated operational current le for - The rated conditional short-circuit the starter is the current when the - The rated uninterrupted current lu of current lq indicates the max. short- starter is in the On position a unit is a current, specified by the circuit breaking capacity of the starter manufacturer, which the unit can carry without interruption

Appendix H-85 Overview The following table shows in summarized form both the previous and the new IEC, EN and DIN VDE standards.

Previous specification New specification Content IEC DIN VDE IEC EN 60947 DIN VDE 60947-1 Low-voltage switchgear, - - 947-1 0660, Part 100 General rules 60947-2 Low-voltage switchgear, 157 0660, Part 101 947-2 0660, Part 101 Circuit-breakers Low-voltage switchgear, Switches, 60947-3 406 0660, Part 107 947-3 Disconnectors, 0660, Part 107 Switch-disconnectors, Fuse-combination units 158 0660, Part 102 292-1 0660, Part 104 60947-4-1 Low-voltage switchgear, 947-4-1 292-2 0660, Part 106 0660, Part 102 Control circuit devices and switching elements 292-3 0660, Part 301 Low-voltage switchgear, 60947-5-1 337 0660 Part 200 to Part 205 947-5-1 Multiple-function equipment, 0660, Part 200 Automatic transfer switching equipment Low-voltage switchgear, 60947-6-1 - - 947-6-1 Multiple-function equipment, 0660, Part 114 Control and protective switching devices (CPS) 60947-7-1 Low-voltage switchgear, - 0611 Part 1 and 2 947-7-1 0611, Part 1 Ancillary equipment (e.g. terminal blocks)

Switches, disconnectors, switch-disconnectors and fuse combination units (IEC 947-3, EN 60947-3) These devices must now be labelled with the product function designated by the manufacturer. This means placing clearly visible symbols on the device itself. Devices with an isolating function are subject to special safety requirements. They must for example have greater creepage distances and clearances across the opened contacts than is necessary for other devices. Device functions and corresponding symbols

Making/breaking Making/breaking Isolating + isolating

Switch Disconnector Switch-disconnector

Switch-fuse Disconnector-fuse Switch-disconnector-fuse

Fuse-switch Fuse-disconnector Fuse switch-disconnector

OMRON equipment is designed for the world’s markets It is manufactured and tested in accordance with national and international specifications, the most important of which are listed below: IEC 947-..., EN 60947: Low-voltage switch gear and control gear IEC 664: Insulation co-ordination including clearances and creepage distances for equipment IEC364: Electrical installations of buildings IEC 204-..., EN 60204-...: Electrical equipment of industrial machines DIN VDE 0105: Operation of electrical power installations IEC 536: Protection against electric shock

H-86 Appendix Utilization categories for contactors to IEC 947-4-1 and EN 60947 Typical examples of application Verification of electrical endurance Verification of rated making and breaking capacities I = current made, I = current broken c Make Break Make Break Type of Utilization Ie = rated operational current current category U = voltage before make Ie I U Ic Ur Ie I U Ic Ur ϕ ϕ ϕ ϕ Ue = rated operational voltage - - cos - - cos - - cos - - cos Ur = recovery voltage A Ie Ue Ie Ue A Ie Ue Ie Ue Non-inductive or slightly inductive loads, resistance AC-1 All values 1 1 0.95 1 1 0.95 All values 1.5 1.05 0.8 1.5 1.05 0.8 furnaces AC-2 Slip-ring motors: starting, switching off All values 2.5 1 0.65 2.5 1 0.65 All values 4 1.05 0.65 4 1.05 0.65 ≤ ≤ Squirrel-cage motors: starting, switching off motors Ie 17 6 1 0.65 1 0.17 0.65 Ie 100 10 1.05 0.45 8 1.05 0.45 AC-3 4 during running Ie > 17 6 1 0.35 1 0.17 0.35 Ie > 100 10 1.05 0.35 8 1.05 0.35 I ≤ 17 6 1 0.65 6 1 0.65 I ≤ 100 12 1.05 0.45 10 1.05 0.45 AC-4 Squirrel-cage motors: starting, plugging, inching e e Ie > 17 6 1 0.35 6 1 0.35 Ie > 100 12 1.05 0.35 10 1.05 0.35 AC-5A Switching of electric discharge lamp controls ------3.0 1.05 0.45 3.0 1.05 0.45 AC-5B Switching of incandescent lamps ------1.52 1.05 2)1.52 1.05 2) AC AC-6A3 Switching of transformers As given by the manufacturer ------AC-6B3 Switching of capacitor banks As given by the manufacturer ------Slightly inductive loads in household appliances and AC-7A As given by the manufacturer - 1.5 1.05 0.8 1.5 1.05 0.8 similar applications AC-7B Motor-loads for household applications As given by the manufacturer - 8.0 1.05 1)8.01.051) Hermetic refrigerant compressor motor control with AC-8A As given by the manufacturer - 6.0 1.05 1)6.01.051) manual resetting of overload releases5 Hermetic refrigerant compressor motor control with AC-8B As given by the manufacturer - 6.0 1.05 1)6.01.051) automatic resetting of overload releases5

Ie I U L/R Ic Ur L/R Ie I U L/R Ic Ur L/R ------A Ie Ue ms Ie Ue ms A Ie Ue ms Ie Ue ms Non-inductive or slightly inductive loads, resistance DC-1 All values 1 1 1 1 1 1 All values 1.5 1.05 1 1.5 1.05 1 furnaces Shunt motors: starting, plugging, inching, dynamic DC-3 All values 2.5 1 2 2.5 1 2 All values 4 1.05 2.5 4 1.05 2.5 braking DC Series motors: starting, plugging, inching, dynamic DC-5 All values 2.5 1 7.5 2.5 1 7.5 All values 4 1.05 15 4 1.05 15 braking 1.5 1.5 DC-6 Switching of incandescent lamps ------1.05 2) 1.05 2) 2) 2) Note 1: cos ϕ = 0.45 for Ie ≤ 100 A; cos ϕ = 0.35 for Ie > 100 A. 4: AC-3 category may be used for occasional inching (jogging) or plugging for limited 2: The tests are to be carried out with an incandescent light load. time periods such as machine set-up; during such limited time periods the number 3: The test data are to be derived from the test values for AC-3 or AC-4 according to of such operations should not exceed five per minute or more than ten in a ten Table VIIb, EN 60947-4-1. minute period. 5: A hermetic refrigerant compressor motor is a combination consisting of a compressor and a motor, both of which are enclosed in the same housing, with no external shaft or shaft seals, the motor operating in the refrigerant. Utilization categories for control switches to IEC 947-5-1 and EN 60947 Typical examples of application Normal conditions of use Abormal conditions of use I = current made, I = current broken c Make Break Make Break Ie = rated operational current U = rated operational voltage Type of Utilization e

U = recovery voltage LVSG current category r I U I U I U I U U = voltage before make c r c r - - ϕ ϕ - ϕ ϕ t = time in ms to reach 95 % of the steady-state cos - - cos - cos - - cos 0.95 I U I U I U I U current e e e e e e e e P = Ue x Ie = rated power consumption in watts Control of resistive and solid state loads as in opto- AC AC-12 110.9110.9 ------coupler input circuits AC-13 Control of solid state loads with transformer isolation 2 1 0.65 1 1 0.65 10 1.1 0.65 1.1 1.1 0.65 AC-14 Control of small electromagnetic loads (≤ 72 VA) 6 1 0.3 1 1 0.3 6 1.1 0.7 6 1.1 0.7 AC-15 Control of electromagnetic loads (> 72 VA) 10 1 0.3 1 1 0.3 10 1.1 0.3 10 1.1 0.3

I U Ic Ur I U Ic Ur - - t0.95 - - t0.95 - - t0.95 - - t0.95 Ie Ue Ie Ue Ie Ue Ie Ue Control of resistive and solid state loads as in opto- DC DC-12 111 ms111 ms ------coupler input circuits DC-13 Control of electromagnets 1 1 6xP1)1 1 6xP1)1.11.16xP1)1.11.16xP1) Control of electromagnetic loads having economy DC-14 10 1 15 ms 1 1 15 ms 10 1.1 15 ms 10 1.1 15 ms resistors in circuits

Note 1: The value “6 x P” results from an empirical relationship which is found to represent most DC magnetic loads to an upper limit of P = 50 W, viz 6 x P = 300 ms. Loads having power consumption greater than 50 W are assumed to consist of smaller loads in parallel. Therefore, 300 ms is to be an upper limit, irrespective of the power consumption value. Utilization categories for switches, disconnectors, switch-disconnectors, and fuse combination units to IEC 947-3 and EN 60947 Typical applications Verification of electrical endurance Verification of switching capacity I = current made, I = current broken c Make Break Make Break Type of Utilization Ie = rated operational current current category U = voltage before make Ie I U Ic Ur Ie I U Ic Ur ϕ ϕ ϕ ϕ Ue = rated operational voltage - - cos - - cos - - cos - - cos Ur = recovery voltage A Ie Ue Ie Ue A Ie Ue Ie Ue AC-20 Connecting and disconnecting under no-load condi- AC All values 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) All values 1)1.051) 1)1.051) A(B)2 tions AC-21 Switching of resistive loads, including moderate All values 1 1 0.95 1 1 0.95 All values 1.5 1.05 0.95 1.5 1.05 0.95 A(B)2 overloads AC-22 Switching of mixed resistive and inductive loads, in- All values 1 1 0.8 1 1 0.8 All values 3 1.05 0.65 3 1.05 0.65 A(B)2 cluding moderate overloads

Appendix H-87 Utilization categories for switches, disconnectors, switch-disconnectors, and fuse combination units to IEC 947-3 and EN 60947 Typical applications Verification of electrical endurance Verification of switching capacity I = current made, I = current broken c Make Break Make Break Type of Utilization Ie = rated operational current current category U = voltage before make Ie I U Ic Ur Ie I U Ic Ur ϕ ϕ ϕ ϕ Ue = rated operational voltage - - cos - - cos - - cos - - cos Ur = recovery voltage A Ie Ue Ie Ue A Ie Ue Ie Ue ≤ AC-23 Switching of motor loads or other highly inductive Ie 100 10 1.05 0.45 8 1.05 0.45 2 All values110.65110.65 A(B) loads Ie > 100 10 1.05 0.35 8 1.05 0.35

Ie I U L/R Ic Ur L/R Ie I U L/R Ic Ur L/R ------A Ie Ue ms Ie Ue ms A Ie Ue ms Ie Ue ms DC-20 Connecting and disconnecting under no-load condi- DC All values 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1)All values1)1.051) 1)1.051) A(B)2 tions DC-21 Switching of resistive loads, including moderate All values111111All values1.51.0511.51.051 A(B)2 overloads DC-22 Switching of mixed resistive and inductive loads, in- All values112112All values41.052.541.052.5 A(B)2 cluding moderate overloads (e.g. shunt motors) DC-23 Switching of highly inductive loads (e.g. series mo- All values 1 1 7.5 1 1 7.5 All values 4 1.05 15 4 1.05 15 A(B)2 tors)

Note 1: If the switching device has a making and/or breaking capacity, the figures for the current and the power factor (time constants) must be stated by the manufacturer. 2: A: frequent operation, B: infrequent operation. Protection against electrical shock, to IEC 536 Damp heat, constant, to IEC 68 Part 2-3 IEC 536 covers the setting up of electrical apparatus, and its In this test, the effects of a constant high level of humidity arrangement in electrical installations with rated voltages up to 1000 (93 +2/-3%) and a constant temperature (40 ±2)°C over a prescribed VAC and 1500 VDC, with regard to protection against direct contact duration, are observed. where operating elements such as push-buttons and switches are located in the vicinity of live parts. Damp heat, cyclic, to IEC 68 Part 2 - 30, Test Db “Finger-proofing” relates only to the operating device, and only in the This test is used to assess the suitability of electrical products for normal direction of operation. A clearance of at least 30 mm radius operation and storage at high relative humidity levels, in conjunction from the centre point of the device to any live parts, must be ensured. with cyclic temperature fluctuation. A test cycle consists of 12 hours The IP 20 degree of protection is superior to “finger-proofing” in that at 40 ±2°C, with relative humidity of 93 ±3%, and 12 hours at it embodies protection against contact with electrical apparatus in 25 ±3°C, with the relative humidity of at least 95%. any direction. Devices which are “finger-proof” and of IP 00 degree of protection can be provided with further protection against contact in Ambient temperature the form of shrouding, if so desired. Ambient temperature is the temperature of the room (e.g. factory bay or switchgear room), in which the open or enclosed device is installed, a prerequisite being that this temperature is not significantly influenced by the heat losses from the device.

H-88 Appendix ● Glossary of standard terms

This Glossary offers brief expIanations of some of the standard Reference is therefore made aIongside each such term to the reIev- terms used in this catalogue. However, it must not be regarded as a ant section of the standard, e.g. IEC 947-1 in addition, IEV numbers substitute for the actual text of the standard, especially where the are given to enable you to find foreign language equivalents in the new terms used in IEC 947 are concerned. International EIectrotechnicaI Vocabulary (IEG 50), if required.

Rated conditional short-circuit current Iq Rated operational current Ie (IEC 947-1; 2.5.29/IEV 441-17-20) (IEC 947-1; 4.3.2.3) The prospective current which a switching device, e.g. a circuit- The current which an equipment is capabIe of carrying taking into breaker, protected by a short-circuit protective device such as a account the rated operational current, duration of operation, utiliza- motor-protective circuit-breaker, can carry for the duration of the pro- tion category and ambient temperature. tective device tripping time. Rated uninterrupted current Iu Mininum command time (IEC 947-1; 4.3.2.4) Minimum duration for a trip-initiating factor (controI puIse, short cir- The vaIue of current which an equipment can carry in uninterrupted cuit) to effect the corresponding reaction, e.g. the short-circuit dura- duty (i.e. for weeks, months or years). tion necessary to initiate tripping. Rated making capacity Rated breaking capacity (IEC 947-1; 4.3.5.2) (IEC 947-1; 4.3.5.3) The vaIue of current which an equipment is capabIe of switching On The r.m.s. value of current which a switching device is capable of in accordance with the utilization category and at the rated opera- breaking according to its utiIization category. The rated breaking tional voltage. capacity is stated by reference to the rated operational voltage and the rated operational current. Rated frequency The equipment must be capable of breaking any value of current up (IEC 847-1; 4,3.3) to and incIuding its rated breaking capacity stated. The frequency for which an equipment is designed and to which the other characteristic vaIues are referred. Rated actuating voltage Uc (rated control circuit voltage) Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking (IEC 947-1; 4.5.1) capacity Icu The voltage which is applied to the actuating make contact in a con- (IEC 947-2; 4.3.5.2.1) trol circuit. Due to the presence in the controI circuit of transformers or resistors, this voltage may differ from the rated control supply volt- The maximum prospective fault current which a circuit-breaker is age. capable of interrupting (test cycIe: O - CO; previously P-1)

Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity Ics LVSG (IEC 947-2; 4.3.5.2.2) Rated insulation voltage Ui (IEG 947-1; 4.3.1 .2) The prospective short-circuit current which, depending on the rated operationaI voltage, a circuit-breaker is capable of breaking repeat- The voltage to which insulation tests and creepage distances of an edly (test cycle: O - CO - CO; previousIy P-2). After interrupting this equipment are referred. The maximum operationaI voltage must not current vaIue, the circuit-breaker must be capable, despite its own in any case exceed the rated insulation voltage. thermal level having increased, of continuing to carry and disconnect in the event of overIoading, the rated uninterrupted current. Rated short-circuit breaking capacity Icn (IEC 947-1; 4.3.6.3) Rating or rated power The maximum value of current which an equipment is capable of (IEC 947-1; 4.3.2.3) switching Off at rated operational voItage and rated frequency, and The rated operational power which an equipment is capable of without sustaining damage. It is expressed as r.m.s. value. switching at the associated rated operational voItage in accordance with the utilization category. Motor rating For example: (IEC 947-1; 4.3.2.3) motor contactor utilization category AC-3: 37 kW at 400 V. Power output of a motor at the associated operational voltage.

Rated operational voltage Ue Rated control supply voltage Us (IEC 947-1; 4.3.1.1) (IEC 947-1; 4.5.1) The voItage to which the characteristics of an equipment are The voltage applied to the input terminals of the control circuit of an referred. The rated operational current must not in any case exceed equipment. Due to the presence of transformers or resistors in the the rated insulation voltage. control circuit, this may differ from the rated actuating (control circuit) voltage.

Appendix H-89 Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp Finger proof (IEC 947-1; 4.3.1 .3) An equipment whose live parts cannot be touched by the operator Measures the stability of the internal clearances of an equipment during actuation is termed finger proof. This also affects operator against overvoltage peaks. The utilization of suitable switchgear can activity on neighbouring switching devices. The finger proof area of a ensure that overvoltages are prevented from transferring from the push-actuated operating medium is a circular area of at least 30 mm mains to deenergized system sections within it. radius around the actuating element, and vertical to the direction of actuation.

Rated current In Within this circular area, touch-critical parts must be located at not (of a circuit-breaker) less than 80 mm depth under the actuating level. (IEC 947-2; 4.3.2.3) Utilization category For circuit-breakers, this current value is equal to the uninterrupted (IEC 947-1; 2.1 .18/IEV 441-17-19) current and the conventional free air thermaI current. A combination of specified requirements relating to the condition in Protection against direct contact which the switching device or the fuse fulfills its purpose, selected to represent a characteristic group of practical applications. The speci- Design measures incorporated into equipment in order to prevent fied requirements may concern, e.g. the values of making capacities, direct contact, i.e. without tools, with live parts of a system (finger breaking capacities and other characteristic values, data concerning proof, back-of-hand proof). associated circuits, and the relevant conditions of use and behaviour. Control circuit reliability (IEC 947-2; 4.4) For circuit-breakers, the utilization category denotes whether the Measures the probability of switching states arising during the equipment is designed for selectivity using time delay (category B) or lifespan of a contact, which would be interpreted as faults by down- not (category A). stream electronic controllers (PLCs). Control circuit reliability is expressed in values based on tests using standard limit values for signal inputs. Back-of-hand proof An equipment whose live parts cannot be touched by a sphere of Damp heat, constant 50 mm diameter, is regarded as back-of-hand proof. This test subjects the equipment to an ambient temperature of 40°C at a constant humidity of 93%. At set intervals during the test, the Altitude electrical and mechanical function of the equipment are examined. The density of air decreases with increasing altitude, and this reduces its insulating capacity as well as its heat transfer capability. Damp heat, cyclic The rated operational voltage and current of switching devices, conductors and motors as well as the tripping behaviour of thermal over- This test subjects the equipment to cyclically changing climatic con- load relays are affected by this. ditions: a cycle applies 40°C ambient temperature at 93% relative humidity for 12 hours, followed by 12 hours of 25°C at 95% relative Upon request, OMRON ELECTRONICS will supply information as to humidity. At set intervals during the test, the electrical and mechani- the suitability or otherwise of switchgear for operation at altitudes cal function of the equipment are examined. above the 2000 m limit specified by the standard. Conventional free air thermal current (IEC 947-1; 4.3.2.1) The maximum value of current which an equipment is capable of carrying for a minimum of eight hours without thermal overloading. As a rule, it corresponds to the maximum operational current. Creepage path (IEC 947-1; 2.5.51/IEV 151-03-37) The shortest distance along the surface of the insulating material between two conductive parts. The creepage distance is determined by the rated insulation voltage, the pollution degree and the creepage current resistance of the material used. Clearance (IEC 947-1; 2.5.46/IEV 441-17-31) The distance between two conductive parts along a string stretched the shortest way between these conductive parts. The clearance in air is determined by the rated impulse withstand voltage, overvoltage category and pollution degree.

H-90 Appendix Emergency-stop switching device Overvoltage category Switching device within an emergency-stop circuit which is intended (IEC 947-1; 2.5.60) to prevent danger to persons, damage to machinery or working Conventional number for prospective overvoltages at the point of materials. installation, as might be caused for example by the effect of lightning or switching processes. The overvoltage category applicable to Opening delay industrial switchgear is III. The applicability of switchgear according (IEV 441-17-36) to the overvoltage categories is defined as follows: The interval of time between the specified instant of initiation of the Overvoltage category IV: opening operation and the instant when the arcing contacts have Use allowed directly at the termination point of the installation separated in all poles. The opening time is the sum of the tripping (directly affected by any lightning), e.g. at an overhead line connec- time and the inherent delay of the contacts. tion point. Closing delay Overvoltage category III: Operating media with special requirements as to the serviceability for The interval of time between the instant of command and the first connection in fixed installations, which are protected by overvoltage make operation of the contacts of the first pole to close. The closing diversion measures, e.g. circuit-breakers in low-voltage distribution delay is made up of the response delay and the closing time. systems or in control systems for industrial use. Shock resistance Overvoltage category II: The capacity of an equipment to withstand pulse-like motions without Power consumers for connection to fixed installations, e. g. house- changing its operating status or sustaining damage. No contact lifting hold appliances, electrical tools. must take place on devices in the On position, the main contacts Overvoltage category I: must not knock against each other in the Off position. A safety switch must not trip, and control circuit switches must not change their Operating media for connection to circuits containing overvoltage switching status. protection schemes, e.g. electronic devices. Safe isolation Ambient temperature, open (IEC 536, DIN VDE 0106 Part 101) (IEV 441-11-13) Isolation of circuits not carrying dangerous voltages (e.g. protective Room temperature for example of the workshop or switch room in extra-low voltage) from circuits in which dangerous voltages flow. which the switching device is located. Such isolation is achieved by means of reinforced or double insulation which reliably prevents voltage transfer from one circuit to Ambient temperature, enclosed another. This might otherwise take place between main circuits and (IEV 441-11-13) control circuits in switching devices or between transformer primary and secondary. ”Safe isolation” is a priority requirement for safety cir- Temperature at which the switching device is capable of being oper- cuits and functional low-voltage circuits. ated within a closed housing. For this purpose, it must be taken into account that the heat losses of the device will add to the internal tem- Isolating function perature rise within the enclosure. (IEC 947-1; 2.1.19) Losses Equipments are deemed to possess this isolating function provided (IEV 151-03-18) their switching contacts when in the open position, achieve the sepa- LVSG ration distance prescribed for the isolation of electrical circuits, and The difference between the input power and the output power of a their creepage paths and clearance distances are of the required device. The main type of loss in electrical power distribution switch- size. The power supply to the entire installation or a section of the gear and operating media is current heat loss. installation can thus be cut off for safety reasons, e.g. during maintenance. Pollution degree (IEC 947-1; 6./1.3.2) Tamper proof Conventional number for the prospective quantities of conductive An emergency-stop switching device is regarded as tamper proof dust and humidity which can lead to a reduction in the control circuit provided it cannot be reset without tools or via a prescribed proce- reliability of a device. The pollution degree is described by the follow- dure, after tripping has taken place. The device latches in the tripped ing influencing factors: position. Accidental or deliberate manipulation (inching) is thus ruled out. Pollution degree 1: No pollution or only dry, non-conductive pollution occurs. The pollution does not affect the control circuit reliability. Pollution degree 2: Usually, only non-conductive pollution. However, transient conductivity through condensation is to be expected. Pollution degree 3: (switchgear for industrial use) Conductive pollution or dry, non-conductive pollution which is rendered conductive through condensation. Pollution degree 4: The pollution leads to long-term conductivity, e.g. pollution by conductive dust, rain or snow.

Appendix H-91 Coordination type vided they are mechanically linked in such a way as to ensure that normally open and normally closed contacts can never be closed Status of a switchgear combination (motor starter) during and after simultaneously. testing at rated conditional current: This arrangement must also ensure that minimum contact separation Coordination Type “1“: of 0.5 mm is maintained over the entire lifespan of the device, even - No risk to persons or installations during a fault, e.g. the welding of one contact. - No requirement for immediate readiness for renewed operation The relevant German Trade Association requires the use of contac- - Damage to the starter is permissible tors with interlocked opposing contacts for control systems on power presses in the metal processing industry. Coordination type “2“: - No risk to persons or installations Positive/enforced - Starter is capable of renewed operation operation/actuation - No damage to the starter with the exception of a slight welding of the contacts, provided they can be separated without significant This describes an arrangement where a link between the actuator deformation. and the switching element ensures that the force exerted on the actuator is transferred directly, i.e. without the intervention of sprung Positive opening operation parts, onto the switching element. (IEC 947-1; 2.4.11/IEV 441-16-12) Positive opening This opening operation is designed to ensure that auxiliary contacts (IEC 947-1; 2.4.10/IEV 441-16-11) of a switching device are always in the respective positions corresponding to the open or closed position of the main contacts. The An opening operation which ensures that the main contacts of a contacts of a contactor are interlocked opposing contacts, pro- mechanical switching device have attained the open position when the actuator is in the Off-position.

Symbols used in Technical Data and Formulae

DF Duty factor Ith Conventional free air thermal current

Icn Rated short-circuit breaking capacity Ithe Conventional thermal current of enclosed devices

Ics Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity Iu Rated uninterrupted current

Icu Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity SNT Transformer rating

Ie Rated operational current Uc Rated actuating voltage

I”sc Transformer initial short-circuit current AC Ue Rated operational voltage

In Rated current Ui Rated insulation voltage

INT Rated transformer current Uimp Rated impulse withstand voltage

Iq Rated conditional short-circuit current uk Transformer short-circuit voltage

Ir Set value of overcurrent release Us Rated control voltage

Irm Response value of non-delayed short-circuit release

H-92 Appendix ● Additional ordering information for contactors

CE-Marking The manufacturer has to sign his products with the CE-Marking. With Attached you find the EEC Directives concerning our products. the CE-Marking the manufacturer confirms the accordance with the Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC) different EEC Directives. The CE-Marking is absolutely necessary to sell the products in the EEC. EMC Directive (89/336/EEC) Declarations of Conformity art. no. D586.. on request. Test Authorities, Registration Mark, Approvals OMRON Low voltage switchgear is built and tested to national and OMRON Low voltage switchgear is also suitable for applications in international specifications. All devices suit all important specifica- marine environments. tions without any test obligation, like VDE, BS and also relative to They are classified in "Lloyd`s Register of Shipping" and in the "Mari- IEC Recommendations and to European Standards like IEC 947 and time Register of Shipping" (GUS). The "American Bureau of Ship- EN 60947. ping" does not claim a general approval for single components, the It is for this reason OMRON Low voltage switchgear is used all over complete electrical equipment on board has to be approved. The the world. In order to provide special versions, limitations to the max. devices should have UL- and CSA-approvals. Further information for voltages, currents and power ratings or special markings are some- Guide-No. and File-No. (CSA, UL) you will find on page 95. times necessary. For approved values see technical data of the devices.State deputy

Country Canada USA Switzer- Den- Norway Sweden Finland Poland Slowa- Czech Hun- land mark kia garia State deputy or private examination CSA UL UL SEV DEMKO NEMKO SEMKO SETI SEP SKTC EZU MEEI (state admitted) Label marking of ex- *1 amination boards

or R No approval since 1.1.1994 Approval of Our devices are according to the harmonised Duty of approvals All switchgear switchgear European Standards e.g. EN 60947 (IEC 947, commendable VDE 0660) and can be used generally UL is authorised for approvals Marking with approbation label is no longer Specification acc. to Canadian Standards necessary *1) CSA-approvals are replaced by UL-approvals valid for USA and Canada. From 1. 1. 2000 switchgear will be marked with the combined approval. UL-mark or only.

Explanations for choice and supply of low voltage switchgears in Canada and USA LVSG Marking of auxiliary contacts At several devices in UL-data are two voltages for auxiliary contacts Low voltage switchgear for auxiliary circuits (e. g. contactor relays, mentioned (e. g.: 600 volts at same potential, 150 volts at different control units, auxiliary contacts in general) usually approved for potentials). That means, if the voltage is higher than 150 volts, the con- "Heavy Duty" or "Standard Duty" UL and besides these marked with trol voltage applied to input terminals must be at the same potential the admissible max. voltage or with short codes (see table).

Marking of Max. rated values per pole Contact Marking of Max. rated values per pole Contact auxiliary Voltage Current Cont. Rating auxiliary Voltage Current Cont. Rating contacts Make Break Current Code contacts Make Break Current Code according to Designa- according to Designa- CSA and UL V A A A tion CSA and UL V A A A tion Heavy Duty AC 120 60 6 10 A150 - AC 120 15 1,5 2,5 C150 (HD or HVY DTY) AC 240 30 3 10 A300 AC 240 7,5 0,75 2,5 C300 AC 480 15 1,5 10 A600 AC 480 3,75 0,375 2,5 C600 AC 600 12 1,2 10 A600 AC 600 3 0,3 2,5 C600 DC 125 2,2 2,2 10 N150 DC 125 0,55 0,55 2,5 Q150 DC 250 1,1 1,1 10 N300 DC 250 0,27 0,27 2,5 Q300 DC 600 0,4 0,4 10 N600 DC 600 0,1 0,1 2,5 Q600 Standard Duty AC 120 30 3 5 B150 - AC 120 3,6 0,6 1 D150 (SD or STD DTY) AC 240 15 1,5 5 B300 AC 240 1,8 0,3 1 D300 AC 480 7,5 0,75 5 B600 DC 125 0,22 0,22 1 R150 AC 600 6 0,6 5 B600 DC 250 0,11 0,11 1 R300 DC 125 1,1 1,1 5 P150 - AC 120 1,8 0,3 0,5 E150 DC 250 0,55 0,55 5 P300 DC 600 0,2 0,2 5 P600

Appendix H-93 Discernment at UL-Standards

Recognized Component Industrial Control Equipment Listed Industrial Control Equipment UL issues yellow "Guide cards" with Guide- and File-No. UL issues white "Guide cards" with Guide- and File-No. Devices have permission to be marked with on the label Devices have to be marked with the "UL-Listing Mark" Devices as components approved for "factory wiring": Devices approved for "field wiring", devices for employment in control panels, when they are selected, a) devices for employment in control panels, when they are mounted mounted and wired according to the charging conditions by skilled work- and wired by skilled worker. er. b) devices for retail in USA Valid UL-Standards: Valid UL-Standards: UL 508„Standard for Industrial Control Equipment“ UL 508„Standard for Industrial Control Equipment“ (partly limited) (unlimited) UL 486"Standard for Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs"

Are devices approved as "Listed Equipment" the approval is also valid for using as "Recognized Component" R. Approvals

Country USA, Canada Switzerland Europe Register of Shipping CENELEC UL SEV CB-Certificates Great Britain GUS Italy Type LRS MRS RINA Mini Contactors J7KNA and Accessories J7KNA-AR..(D) o--o---o J7KNA-09..(D) o--o---o J7KNA-12..(D) o--o---- J73KN-A..., J73KN-AM o--o---o Contactors Series J7KN J7KN-10...(D) o--o---o J7KN-14...(D) o--o---o J7KN-18...(D) o--o---o J7KN-22...(D) o--o---o J7KN-24...(D) o--o---o J7KN-32...(D) o--o---o J7KN-40...(D) o--o---o J7KN-50...(D) o--o---o J7KN-62...(D) o--o---o J7KN-74...(D) o--o---o J7KN-85...(D) o--o---o J7KN-110...(D) o--o---o J7KN-150... ---o---- J7KN-175... ---o---- J7KN-200... ---o---- Accessories J73N-KB... o--o---o J73N-KC-115 o--o---x J74KN-B-PT... o--o---- J74KN-A-VG... o--o---- J74KN-B-VG ---o---- Thermal Overload Relays J7TKN-B o--o---x J7TKN-C o--o---x J7TKN-D o--o---x J7TKN-A o--o---o J7TKN-E o--o---o J7TKN-F ---o---- o In Standard version approved x In Test - Not provided for test until now

H-94 Appendix and R-Guide- and File-No. These data are important for UL-inspecting

Devices Guide-No.

Kanada USA Kanada USA Contactors NLDX7 NLDX NLDX8 NLDX2 Accessories NKCR7 NKCR NKCR8 NKCR2 Thermal Overload Relays NKCR7 NKCR - - Circuit Breakers J7MN NLRV7 NLRV - - as Manual Motor Controller Circuit Breakers J7MN NKJH7 NKJH - - as Combination Motor Controller J7MN Bus Bar Assemblies NLRV7 NLRV - - J7MN Accessories NKCR7 NKCR - - LVSG

Appendix H-95 ■ Technical information

Degree of protection acc. to EN60947

Protection ratings are prefixed by the internationally agreed letters IP nd followed by two digits. 2 Short description Definition digit st 1 digit: Pertains to solid objects 1 Protected against- Dripping water (vertically falling drops) 2nd digit: Pertains to water. dripping water shall have no harmful effect.

st 2 Protected against Vertically dripping water shall have no 1 Short description Definition dripping water harmful effect when the enclosure is tilt- digit when tilted up to ed at any angle up to 15° from its nor- 1 Protected against Excludes solid objects exceeding 15° mal position. solid objects great- 50 mm in diameter and protects against 3 Protected against Water falling as a spray at an angle up er than 50 mm contact with live and moving parts by a spraying water to 60° from the vertical shall have no large body surface such as a hand (but harmful effect. not against deliberate access). 4 Protected against Water splashed against the enclosure 2L Protected against Excludes solid objects exceeding splashing water from any direction shall have no harm- solid objects great- 12,5 mm in diameter and protects ful effect. er than 12,5 mm against contact with live and moving and against contact parts by a standard test finger or similar 5 Protected against Water protected by a nozzle against the by standard test objects not exceeding 80 mm in length. water jets enclosure from any direction shall have finger no harmful effect. 3 Protected against Excludes solid objects exceeding 6 Protected against Water from heavy seas or water pro- solid objects great- 2,5 mm in diameter or thickness. heavy seas jected in powerful jets shall not enter er than 2,5 mm the enclosure in harmful quanties. 4 Protected against Excludes solid objects exceeding 1 mm 7 Protected against Ingress of water in a harmful quantity solid objects great- in diameter or thickness. the effects of im- shall not be possible when the enclo- er than 1 mm mersion sure is immersed in water under standard conditions of pressure and time. 5 Dust protected Prevents ingress of dust in quantities and locations that would interfere with 8 Protected against No ingress of water. the intended operation of the equip- submersion ment. 6 Dust tight Prevents ingress of dust.

Terminal markings acc. to EN50011 Resistance to climatic conditions acc. to IEC 68 Auxiliary contacts of AC contactors and contacts of contactor relays Open-type devices are climate-resistant in the constant climate and thermal overload relays are particularly marked. The terminal according to IEC 68-2-3 (this is a climate with an ambient tempera- markings of normally-open contacts are printed as positive figures, ture of 40°C and an atmospheric humidity of 90 to 95%). they of normally-closed contacts as negative figures. Enclosed devices are climate-resistant in an alternating climate This gives a clear indication of the function of the contacts. according to IEC 68-2-30 (this is a moist alternating climate with a 24-hour cycle between climates with an ambient temperature of The figure below illustrates the determination of terminal markings 25°C, and an atmospheric humidity of 95 to 100% and an ambient for contactors with auxiliary contact blocks. temperature of 40°C, and an atmospheric humidity of 90 to 96% in the presence of condensation during rises in temperature). Sequence number Data are valid up to an altitude of 2000m above sea level. Short circuit protection Function number Back up fuses should be used to protect contactors and starters against short circuits. For starters the device with the smaller admissible fuse at the main and at the control circuit (contactor or thermal overload) determines the fuse size. The complete terminal marking according After a short circuit devices have to be checked for correct operation. to EN 50011 and EN 50012 results from the sequence numbers on the contactor relay Disconnect power before proceeding with any work on the equipment! or ac contactor (2., 3.) and the function numbers on the auxiliary contact blocks (e. g. .1, .2, or .3, .4).

H-96 Appendix Mounting positions of contactors

J7KNA-AR... and J7KNA-12... J7KN-10 to J7KN-74, J7KN-85 to J7KN-110 J7KN-150... to J7KN-200

Terminal screws Devices Kind of connection Devices Kind of connection Screw with Screw with Screw with Screw with Type Type washer clamp box washer clamp box Mini Contactors Coil conductor All conductors J7KN-10... to J7KN-110... M3,5 - J7KN-AR...; J7KNA-09...; Accessories M3,5 - J7KNA-12... J73KNA(M)... M3,5 - Contactors J73KN-B, J73KN-C M3,5 - Main conductor Thermal Overload Relays J7KN-10... to J7KN-22... M3,5 - Main conductor J7KN-24... to J7KN-40... - M5 J7TKN-A M4 - J7KN-50... to J7KN-74... - M6 J7TKN-B M3,5 - J7KN-85..., J7KN-110... - M8 J7TKN-C M5 - Auxiliary conductor J7TKN-D - M6 J7KN-10... to J7KN-22... M3,5 - Auxiliary conductor J7KN-85... to J7KN-110 M3,5 - All devices M3,5 -

Terminal screws in relation to screwdriver sizes and tightening torques

Terminal screws Pozidriv Screw driver Tightening torque Version Size Nm lb. inch Screw with Pozidriv and slot M3 Pz 1 Size 1 0,6 - 1,2 5 - 11

M3,5 Pz 2 Size 2, 3 0,8 - 1,4 7 - 12 LVSG M4 Pz 2 Size 3, 4 1,2 - 1,8 11 - 16 M5 Pz 2 Size 3, 4, 5 2,5 - 3 22 - 26 M6 Pz 3 Size 4, 5 3,5 - 4,5 31 - 40 Screw or M8 - - 6 - 10 53 - 88 nut with hexagonal-head

Appendix H-97 ● General technical information

■ Current carrying capacities of PVC insulated 600/1000 Volt cables with copper or aluminium conductors. In accordance with the 16th edition of the “Wiring Regulations for Electrical Installations“. Basic assumptions: Ambient temperature of 30°C. Circuit of protected by a OMRON circuit-breaker to IEC 947-2, or a fuse to BS 88 or BS 1361. Figures must be adjusted by the correction factors for ambient temperature and/or cable grouping as detailed in the IEE regs.

Clipped to surface or cable tray, Fixed to vertical surface of wall or open Conductor In conduit or trunking (enclosed) bunched, embedded in plaster cable trench with 20 mm separation size (unenclosed) between cables and wall Single-phase Three-phase Single-phase Three-phase Single-phase Three-phase mm² Cu [A] Al [A] Cu [A] Al [A] Cu [A] Al [A] Cu [A] Al [A] Cu [A] Al [A] Cu [A] Al [A] Single core, PVC insulated cable non-armoured, copper or aluminium conductors. 1.0 13.5 - 12.0 - 15.5 - 14.0 - ---- 1.5 17.5 - 15.5 - 20.0 - 18.0 - ---- 2.5 24.0 - 21.0 - 27.0 - 25.0 - ---- 4.0 32.0 - 28.0 - 37.0 - 33.0 - ---- 6.0 41.0 - 36.0 - 47.0 - 43.0 - ---- 10.0 57.0 - 50.0 - 65.0 - 59.0 - ---- 16.0 76.0 - 68.0 - 87.0 - 79.0 - ---- 25.0 101.0 - 89.0 - 114.0 - 104.0 - 126.0 - 112.0 - 35.0 125.0 - 110.0 - 141.0 - 129.0 - 156.0 - 141.0 - 50.0 151.0 118.0 134.0 104.0 182.0 134.0 167.0 123.0 191.0 144.0 172.0 132.0 70.0 192.0 150.0 171.0 133.0 234.0 172.0 214.0 156.0 246.0 185.0 223.0 169.0 95.0 232.0 181.0 207.0 161.0 284.0 210.0 261.0 194.0 300.0 225.0 273.0 206.0 120.0 296.0 210.0 239.0 186.0 330.0 245.0 303.0 226.0 349.0 261.0 318.0 240.0 150.0 300.0 234.0 262.0 204.0 381.0 283.0 349.0 261.0 404.0 301.0 369.0 277.0 185.0 341.0 266.0 296.0 230.0 436.0 324.0 400.0 299.0 463.0 344.0 424.0 317.0 240.0 400.0 312.0 346.0 269.0 515.0 384.0 472.0 354.0 549.0 407.0 504.0 375.0 300.0 458.0 358.0 394.0 306.0 594.0 444.0 545.0 410.0 635.0 469.0 584.0 435.0 400.0 546.0 - 467.0 - 694.0 - 634.0 - 732.0 - 679.0 - 500.0 626.0 - 533.0 - 792.0 - 723.0 - 835.0 - 778.0 - 630.0 720.0 - 611.0 - 904.0 - 826.0 - 953.0 - 892.0 - Twin and multi-core PVC insulated cable, non-armoured, copper or aluminium conductors. 1.0 11.0 - 11.5 - 15.0 - 13.5 - 17.0 - 14.5 - 1.5 14.0 - 15.0 - 19.5 - 17.5 - 22.0 - 18.5 - 2.5 18.5 - 20.0 - 27.0 - 24.0 - 30.0 - 25.0 - 4.0 25.0 - 27.0 - 36.0 - 32.0 - 40.0 - 34.0 - 6.0 32.0 - 34.0 - 46.0 - 41.0 - 51.0 - 43.0 - 10.0 43.0 - 46.0 - 63.0 - 57.0 - 70.0 - 60.0 - 16.0 57.0 54.0 62.0 48.0 85.0 66.0 76.0 59.0 94.0 73.0 80.0 61.0 25.0 75.0 71.0 80.0 62.0 112.0 83.0 96.0 73.0 119.0 89.0 101.0 78.0 35.0 92.0 86.0 99.0 77.0 138.0 103.0 119.0 90.0 148.0 111.0 126.0 96.0 50.0 110.0 104.0 118.0 92.0 168.0 125.0 144.0 110.0 180.0 135.0 153.0 117.0 70.0 139.0 131.0 149.0 116.0 213.0 160.0 184.0 140.0 232.0 173.0 196.0 150.0 95.0 167.0 157.0 179.0 139.0 258.0 195.0 261.0 170.0 282.0 210.0 238.0 183.0 120.0 192.0 - 206.0 160.0 299.0 245.0 259.0 197.0 328.0 - 276.0 212.0 150.0 219.0 - 225.0 184.0 344.0 283.0 299.0 227.0 379.0 - 319.0 245.0 185.0 248.0 - 255.0 210.0 392.0 324.0 341.0 259.0 434.0 - 364.0 280.0 240.0 291.0 - 297.0 248.0 461.0 384.0 403.0 305.0 514.0 - 430.0 330.0 300.0 334.0 - 339.0 258.0 530.0 444.0 464.0 351.0 593.0 - 497.0 381.0 400.0 --402.0 - 634.0 - 557.0 - 715.0 - 597.0 -

H-98 Appendix ■ Overall diameter of cables (Copper) The dimensions are based on BS specification or the average values as given by the manufacturers. The overall diameters given are for cables of 600/1000 V grade.

Number and nominal Approx. overall diameter in mm Number and nominal Approx. overall diameter in mm area of cables (mm2) PVC/SWA PVCarea of cables (mm2) PVC/SWA PVC 1 x 1.0 - 4.5 2 x 1.0 - - 1 x 1.5 - 4.9 2 x 1.5 11.7 7.2 1 x 2.5 - 5.8 2 x 2.5 13.1 8.6 1 x 4.0 - 6.8 2 x 4.0 15.1 10.7 1 x 6.0 - 7.4 2 x 6.0 16.5 12.0 1 x 10.0 - 8.8 2 x 10.0 20.1 14.9 1 x 16.0 - 10.5 2 x 16.0 21.9 17.2 1 x 25.0 - 12.5 2 x 25.0 23.0 18.4 1 x 35.0 - 13.5 2 x 35.0 24.9 20.1 1 x 50.0 19.1 15.1 2 x 50.0 27.8 22.8 1 x 70.0 21.1 16.9 2 x 70.0 30.4 25.5 1 x 95.0 23.4 19.4 2 x 95.0 35.5 29.3 1 x 120.0 26.3 21.0 2 x 120.0 38.0 31.8 1 x 150.0 28.3 23.2 2 x 150.0 41.3 35.1 1 x 185.0 30.8 25.8 2 x 185.0 46.4 39.1 1 x 240.0 34.1 29.0 2 x 240.0 51.2 43.9 1 x 300.0 37.0 32.1 2 x 300.0 56.4 48.7 1 x 400.0 42.0 35.8 2 x 400.0 61.9 54.2 1 x 500.0 45.6 39.6 --- 1 x 630.0 49.7 43.8 ---

Number and nominal Approx. overall diameter in mm Number and nominal Approx. overall diameter in mm area of cables (mm2) PVC/SWA PVCarea of cables (mm2) PVC/SWA PVC 3 x 1.0 - - 4 x 1.0 - - 3 x 1.5 12.3 7.6 4 x 1.5 13.0 8.3 3 x 2.5 13.6 9.1 4 x 2.5 14.5 10.0 3 x 4.0 15.8 11.5 4 x 4.0 17.8 12.6

3 x 6.0 18.0 12.8 4 x 6.0 19.2 14.2 LVSG 3 x 10.0 21.2 15.8 4 x 10.0 22.8 17.7 3 x 16.0 23.1 19.7 4 x 16.0 26.3 20.6 3 x 25.0 25.0 20.4 4 x 25.0 27.8 22.9 3 x 35.0 27.3 22.4 4 x 35.0 30.5 25.4 3 x 50.0 30.5 25.5 4 x 50.0 35.4 29.2 3 x 70.0 35.0 28.7 4 x 70.0 39.2 33.0 3 x 95.0 39.3 33.3 4 x 95.0 44.3 38.3 3 x 120.0 42.2 36.3 4 x 120.0 49.3 41.8 3 x 150.0 47.5 40.0 4 x 150.0 53.6 46.3 3 x 185.0 51.9 44.6 4 x 185.0 59.0 61.3 3 x 240.0 57.8 50.1 4 x 240.0 65.7 58.0 3 x 300.0 63.2 55.6 4 x 300.0 72.0 64.6 3 x 400.0 69.6 62.2 4 x 400.0 81.3 72.0

Appendix H-99 ■ Conversion table To convert Multiply by Conversion table for: Inches to millimeters (mm) 25.4 Centigrade/Fahrenheit Millimeters to inches (In.) 0.03937 BP-212 100 Feet to meters (m) 0.3048 meters to feet (ft) 3.2808 200 90 Yards to meters (m) 0.9144 190 meters to yards (yd) 1.0936 180 Miles to kilometers (km) 1.6093 80 170 Kilometers to miles (mil.) 0.6214 Square inches to square millimeters (mm2) 645.16 160 70 Square millimeters to square inches (inch2) 0.00155 150 Square yards to square meters (m2) 0.8361 140 60 2 1.196 Square meters to square yards (yd ) 130 Cubic inches to cubic centimeters (cm3) 16.387 50 120 Cubic centimeters to cubic inches (inch3) 0.06102 110 Pounds to kilogrammes (kg) 0.4536 40 Kilogrammes to pounds (lb) 2.2046 100 Tons (2,240 lb) to kilogrammes (kg) 1,016.05 90 30 Kilogrammes to tons (240 lb) 0.0009842 80 Ounces (avoirdpois) to grammes (g) 28.3495 20 Grammes to ounces 0.0353 70 Gallons to litres (l) 4.561 60 10 Litres to gallons 0.220 50 Force N (newtons) to lbft 0.225 40 1 N = 1 kg (mass) accelerated at 1 metre/sec. FP- 0 1 Nm = 1 J (joule) to calorie 0.239 30 Horse-power to kilowatts (kW) 0.7458 20 10 Kilowatts to horse-power (h.p.) 1.3408 1 W (watt) = 1J/s 10 Atmospheres to lb per square inch (lb/inch2) 0 20 14.68 1 bar = 1 kg/cm2 = 735.6 mm Hg = 14.2 lb/inch2 F C

Conversion table for mm²/AWG cable sizes mm2 AWG 0.75 18 1.0 17 1.5 16 2.5 13 4.0 12 6.0 10 10.0 8

H-100 Appendix ■ Rated currents of 3-phase motors (approx. figures for squirrel-cage motors)

Minimum fuse size for protection of 3-phase motors The maximum size is determined by the requirements of the switchgear or overload relay. The rated motor currents are for standard 1500 r.p.m. 3-phase enclosed ventilated and totally enclosed fan-cooled motors. D.O.L. starting: Maximum starting current 6 x rated motor current. Maximum starting time 5 s. Y/D starting: Maximum starting current 2 x rated motor current. Maximum starting time 15 s. Set overload relay in the phase lead to 0.58 x rated motor current. Rated fuse currents for Y/D starting are also valid for 3-phase motors with slip-ring motors. For higher rated currents, starting currents and/or longer starting times, larger fuses are required. Table is valid for “slow” and/or “gL” fuses (DIN VDE 0636). For NH fuses with aM characteristics, fuses = rated current is selected. 230 V400 V415 V Motor rating Rated Fuse Rated Fuse Rated Fuse motor starting Y/∆ motor starting Y/∆ motor starting Y/∆ current D.O.L. current D.O.L. current D.O.L. kW cos ϕη %AAAAAAAA, BSA, BS 0.06 0.7 58 0.37 2.0 - 0.21 2.0 - 0.21 2.0 2 0.09 0.7 60 0.54 2.0 - 0.31 2.0 - 0.30 2.0 2 0.12 0.7 60 0.72 4.0 2 0.41 2.0 - 0.40 2.0 2 0.18 0.7 62 1.04 4.0 2 0.6 2.0 - 0.58 2.0 2 0.25 0.7 62 1.4 4.0 2 0.8 4.0 2 0.8 4.0 2 0.37 0.72 66 2.0 6.0 4 1.1 4.0 2 1.1 4.0 2 0.55 0.75 69 2.7 10.0 4 1.5 4.0 2 1.5 6.0 4 0.75 0.79 74 3.2 10.0 4 1.9 6.0 4 1.8 6.0 4 1.1 0.81 74 4.6 10.0 6 2.6 6.0 4 2.6 10.0 6 1.5 0.81 74 6.3 16.0 10 3.6 6.0 4 3.5 16.0 10 2.2 0.81 78 8.7 20.0 10 5.0 10.0 6 4.8 16.0 10 3.0 0.82 80 11.5 25.0 16 6.6 16.0 10 6.4 20.0 16 4.0 0.82 83 14.8 32.0 16 8.5 20.0 10 8.2 20.0 16 5.5 0.82 86 19.6 32.0 25 11.3 25.0 16 10.9 25.0 20 7.5 0.82 87 26.4 50.0 32 15.2 32.0 16 14.6 35.0 25 11.0 0.84 87 38.0 80.0 40 21.7 40.0 25 20.9 50.0 32 15.0 0.84 88 51.0 100.0 63 29.3 63.0 32 28.2 80.0 40 18.5 0.84 88 63.0 125.0 80 36.0 63.0 40 35.0 80.0 50 LVSG 22.0 0.84 92 71.0 125.0 80 41.0 80.0 50 40.0 80.0 50 30.0 0.85 92 96.0 200.0 100 55.0 100.0 63 53.0 100.0 80 37.0 0.86 92 117.0 200.0 125 68.0 125.0 80 65.0 125.0 80 45.0 0.86 93 141.0 250.0 160 81.0 160.0 100 78.0 125.0 80 55.0 0.86 93 173.0 250.0 200 99.0 200.0 125 96.0 160.0 100 75.0 0.86 94 233.0 315.0 250 134.0 200.0 160 129.0 250.0 160 90.0 0.86 94 279.0 400.0 315 161.0 250.0 200 155.0 250.0 160 110.0 0.86 94 342.0 500.0 400 196.0 315.0 200 189.0 315.0 200 132.0 0.87 95 401.0 630.0 500 231.0 400.0 250 222.0 355.0 250 160.0 0.87 95 486.0 630.0 630 279.0 400.0 315 269.0 355.0 315 200.0 0.87 95 607.0 800.0 630 349.0 500.0 400 337.0 450.0 355 250.0 0.87 95 ---437.0 630.0 500 421.0 500.0 450 315.0 0.87 96 ---544.0 800.0 630 525.0 630.0 560 400.0 0.88 96 ---683.0 1000.0 800 --- 450.0 0.88 96 ---769.0 1000.0 800 --- 500.0 0.88 97 ------560.0 0.88 97 ------630.0 0.88 97 ------

Appendix H-101 Minimum fuse size for protection of 3-phase motors The maximum size is determined by the requirements of the switchgear or overload relay. The rated motor currents are for standard 1500 r.p.m. 3-phase enclosed ventilated and totally enclosed fan-cooled motors. D.O.L. starting: Maximum starting current 6 x rated motor current. Maximum starting time 5 s. Y/D starting: Maximum starting current 2 x rated motor current. Maximum starting time 15 s. Set overload relay in the phase lead to 0.58 x rated motor current. Rated fuse currents for Y/D starting are also valid for 3-phase motors with slip-ring motors. For higher rated currents, starting currents and/or longer starting times, larger fuses are required. Table is valid for “slow” and/or “gL” fuses (DIN VDE 0636). For NH fuses with aM characteristics, fuses = rated current is selected. 500 V 600 V Motor rating Rated Fuse Rated Fuse motor starting Y/∆ motor starting Y/∆ current D.O.L. current D.O.L. kW cos ϕη %AAAAAA 0.06 0.7 58 0.17 2.0 - 0.12 2.0 - 0.09 0.7 60 0.25 2.0 - 0.18 2.0 - 0.12 0.7 60 0.33 2.0 - 0.24 2.0 - 0.18 0.7 62 0.48 2.0 - 0.35 2.0 - 0.25 0.7 62 0.70 2.0 - 0.50 2.0 - 0.37 0.72 66 0.90 2.0 2 0.70 2.0 - 0.55 0.75 69 1.20 4.0 2 0.90 4.0 2 0.75 0.79 74 1.50 4.0 2 1.10 4.0 2 1.1 0.81 74 2.1 6.0 4 1.5 4.0 2 1.5 0.81 74 2.9 6.0 4 2.1 6.0 4 2.2 0.81 78 4.0 10.0 4 2.9 10.0 4 3.0 0.82 80 5.3 16.0 6 3.8 10.0 4 4.0 0.82 83 6.8 16.0 10 4.9 16.0 6 5.5 0.82 86 9.0 20.0 16 6.5 16.0 10 7.5 0.82 87 12.1 25.0 16 8.8 20.0 10 11.0 0.84 87 17.4 32.0 20 12.6 25.0 16 15.0 0.84 88 23.4 50.0 25 17.0 32.0 20 18.5 0.84 88 28.9 50.0 32 20.9 32.0 25 22.0 0.84 92 33.0 63.0 32 23.8 50.0 25 30.0 0.85 92 44.0 80.0 50 32.0 63.0 32 37.0 0.86 92 54.0 100.0 63 39.0 80.0 50 45.0 0.86 93 65.0 125.0 80 47.0 80.0 63 55.0 0.86 93 79.0 160.0 80 58.0 100.0 63 75.0 0.86 94 107.0 200.0 125 78.0 160.0 100 90.0 0.86 94 129.0 200.0 160 93.0 160.0 100 110.0 0.86 94 157.0 250.0 160 114.0 200.0 125 132.0 0.87 95 184.0 250.0 200 134.0 250.0 160 160.0 0.87 95 224.0 315.0 250 162.0 250.0 200 200.0 0.87 95 279.0 400.0 315 202.0 315.0 250 250.0 0.87 95 349.0 500.0 400 253.0 400.0 315 315.0 0.87 96 436.0 630.0 500 316.0 500.0 400 400.0 0.88 96 547.0 800.0 630 396.0 630.0 400 450.0 0.88 96 615.0 800.0 630 446.0 630.0 630 500.0 0.88 97 ---491.0 630.0 630 560.0 0.88 97 ---550.0 800.0 630 630.0 0.88 97 ---618.0 800.0 630

H-102 Appendix

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

% < % % " % % % + " ! % $ % $ ! 3 * + $ * + 3 ! # , - # # % % $ % 7 + ! " % $ % 3 %) ! ! ! + > ' '% . % # / ( % % .# % $ ! % # 7 " % % $ = % % ! ! # # D # ! " ! % $ % > %! & ! % ! ! # % % . % 8 ! 3 ! ! # ! + # 3 ! %) # $ 2 & % ! 3 8 8 % # % # ! % 8 % # % % ! ! $ A&F&? <& D& ?-<( 6? A '7(7A 7AF'F7A$ &?7< ?7@ '76& ? ? &?B >7D< &AD'& D *&&A -&7$A&- --?& D& ?7@! A- D D& &''&?+ ?-<( 7 ? &?'B ?&- A- 7A''&- 6? D& 7A&A-&- <& >7D7A D& F&?'' &E<7 ;&A ? B&; B C / E 12 111# # 3 @ / B 2 C 2" / 4 #

! 56 # # ! % 11,:,5 # ! % 11,25

! " # ( -# 992 ; # $ % " =GG % ! 7' 415, ! ;* 2F9 < " =GG G $)$*)+,, $%&'&&$&( ( " =GG 6 < 3 = ,,((&&)&&

Cat. No. J7cntctr 09/04 Specifications subject to change without notice Printed in USA Subminiature Basic Switch SS-P

SS Series Compatible Mounting with a Simple Construction and Easy-to-Use Design Concept

• Insert molded base and improved case-to-base seal provides enhanced resistance to flux. • Switch rating of 3 A at 125 VAC possible with a single-leaf movable spring. Models for micro loads with gold crossbar contact are also available. • Long mechanical life. • Internal lever provides increased durability and sensitivity. • Solder, quick-connect terminals (#110), and PCB terminals are available, including even-pitched PCB terminals.

Ordering Information

■ Model Number Legend

SS-@@@P@ 1 2 3 4

1. Ratings 3: 3 A at 125 VAC 01: 0.1 A at 30 VDC 2. Contact Gap G: 0.5 mm 3. Actuator None: Pin plunger L: Hinge lever L13: Simulated roller lever 4. Terminals None: Solder terminals T: Quick-connect terminals (#110) D: PCB terminals (Uneven pitch) B: PCB terminals (Even pitch)

Subminiature Basic Switch SS-P 1 ■ List of Models Stock Note: Shaded items are normally stocked.

Terminals Solder terminals Quick-connect PCB terminals terminals (#110) Rating Actuator Uneven pitch Even pitch 3 A Pin plunger SS-3GP SS-3GPT SS-3GPD SS-3GPB Hinge lever SS-3GLP SS-3GLPT SS-3GLPD SS-3GLPB

Simulated roller lever SS-3GL13P SS-3GL13PT SS-3GL13PD SS-3GL13PB

0.1 A Pin plunger SS-01GP SS-01GPT SS-01GPD SS-01GPB Hinge lever SS-01GLP SS-01GLPT SS-01GLPD SS-01GLPB

Simulated roller lever SS-01GL13P SS-01GL13PT SS-01GL13PD SS-01GL13PB

Specifications

■ Ratings

Model SS-3P SS-01P Rated voltage Item Resistive load 125 VAC 3 A 0.1 A 30 VDC 3 A 0.1 A Note: 1. The rating values apply under the following test conditions. Ambient temperature: 20±2°C Ambient humidity: 65±5% Operating frequency: 30 operations/min 2. Contact your OMRON representative for information on models for other loads.

2 Subminiature Basic Switch SS-P ■ Characteristics

Operating speed 0.1 mm to 1 m/s (for pin plunger models) Operating frequency Mechanical: 300 operations/min Electrical: 30 operations/min Insulation resistance 100 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC) Contact resistance (initial value) SS-3P: 50 mΩ max. SS-01P: 100 mΩ max. Dielectric strength (See note 2) 1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of the same polarities 1,500 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between current-carrying metal parts and ground, and between each terminal and non-current-carrying metal parts Vibration resistance (See note 3) Malfunction: 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude Shock resistance (See note 3) Destruction: 1,000 m/s2 {approx. 100 G} max. Malfunction: 300 m/s2 {approx. 30 G} max. Durability (See note 4) Mechanical: 1,000,000 operations min. (60 operations/min) Electrical: SS-3P: 70,000 operations min. (20 operations/min, 125 VAC) 100,000 operations min. (20 operations/min, 30 VDC) SS-01P: 200,000 operations min. (20 operations/min) Degree of protection IEC IP40 Degree of protection against electrical shock Class I Proof Tracking Index (PTI) 175 Ambient operating temperature −25°C to 85°C (at ambient humidity of 60% max.) (with no icing) Ambient operating humidity 85% max. (for 5°C to 35°C) Weight Approx. 1.6 g (for pin plunger models) Note: 1. The data given above are initial values. 2. The dielectric strength shown in the table indicates a value for models with a Separator. 3. For the pin plunger models, the above values apply for both the free position and total travel position. For the lever models, the values apply at the total travel position. Contact opening or closing time is within 1 ms. 4. Contact your OMRON sales representative for testing conditions. ■ Approved Standards UL, CSA, and EN approval projected for September 2003. ■ Contact Specifications

Item Model SS-3P SS-01P Contact Specification Rivet Crossbar Material Silver alloy Gold alloy Gap 0.5 mm (standard value) Minimum applicable load (See note) 160 mA at 5 VDC 1 mA at 5 VDC

Note: For more information on the minimum applicable load, refer to Using Micro Loads on page 6. ■ Contact Form

SPDT

COM NO NC

Subminiature Basic Switch SS-P 3 Dimensions

■ Terminals Unit: mm Note: Terminal plate thickness is 0.5 mm for all models. Solder Terminals Quick-connect Terminals (#110)

7.55±0.2 7.55±0.2

7.3 11 3.3±0.1 7.1 3.3±0.1 2.15 8.55 0.5 Three, 1.6-dia. holes 15.5 3-2.8 0.5

7.6±0.2 7.6±0.2

PCB Terminals (Uneven pitch) PCB Terminals (Even pitch)

7.55±0.2 7.55±0.2 (5.25) (4.82)

1.8 3.9 1.8 3.9

3.3±0.1 3.3±0.1 1.85 3-1.2 1.3 3-1.2 1.3 8.8±0.2 3-0.8 0.5 3-0.8 0.5 16.1±0.2 7.62±0.2 7.62±0.2

PCB Mounting Dimensions (Reference) PCB Mounting Dimensions (Reference)

7.62±0.1 7.62±0.1 16.1±0.1 Three, 1.35 to 1.5 dia. 8.8±0.1 Three, 1.35 to 1.5 dia.

■ Mounting Holes

Two, 2.4-dia. mounting holes or M2.3 screw holes

9.5±0.1

4 Subminiature Basic Switch SS-P ■ Dimensions and Operating Characteristics Unit: mm Pin Plunger Models

SS-3GP 7.55±0.2 3.5 SS-01GP PT 2 Model SS-3GP SS-01GP 2.5±0.07 dia. 2.35+0.075 dia. A −0.05

+0.075 OF max. 1.50 N 2.35 −0.05 OP 6.9 7.7 RF min. 0.2 N

3.3±0.1 7.3 PT max. 0.6 mm OT min. 0.4 mm 2.15 8.55 0.5 MD max. 0.15 mm Three, 1.6 dia. holes 15.5 6.4±0.2 OP 8.4±0.3 mm 5.15 9.5±0.1 19.8±0.2

Hinge Lever Models

SS-3GLP t=0.3 Stainless-steel lever SS-01GLP 14.5 A 2.5±0.07 dia. Model SS-3GLP SS-01GLP

+0.075 2.35 − FP OF max. 0.5 N 0.05 7.7 OP 6.9 RF min. 0.05 N 3.3±0.1 7.3 OT min. 1.0 mm +0.075 2.35 −0.05 dia. MD max. 0.8 mm 2.15 8.55 0.5 Three, 1.6 dia. holes 15.5 FP max. 13.6 mm 6.4±0.2 5.15 9.5±0.1 OP 8.8±0.8 mm 19.8±0.2

Simulated Roller Lever Models

SS-3GL13P t=0.3 Stainless-steel lever 15.8 A SS-01GL13P R1.2 2.5±0.07 dia. Model SS-3GL13P SS-01GL13P

+0.075 FP 2.35 −0.05 OP OF max. 0.5 N 6.9 7.7 RF min. 0.05 N 3.3±0.1 7.3 OT min. 1.0 mm +0.075 2.35 −0.05 dia. MD max. 0.8 mm 2.15 8.55 0.5 Three, 1.6 dia. holes 15.5 FP max. 15.5 mm 6.4±0.2 5.15 9.5±0.1 OP 10.7±0.8 mm 19.8±0.2

Note: 1. The above illustrations and drawings are for solder terminal models. Refer to page 4 for details on models with quick-connect terminals (#110) or PCB terminals. 2. Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ±0.4 mm applies to all dimensions. 3. The operating characteristics are for operation in the A direction (➡ ).

Subminiature Basic Switch SS-P 5 Precautions

■ Cautions

Connecting to Solder Terminals Operating Stroke Setting When soldering the lead wire to the terminal, first insert the lead wire Take particular care in setting the operating stroke for the pin plunger conductor through the terminal hole and then solder. models. Make sure that the operating stroke is 60% to 90% of the rated OT distance. Do not operate the actuator exceeding the OT dis- Make sure that the temperature at the tip of the soldering iron is 350 tance, otherwise the life expectancy of the Switch may be shortened. to 400°C. Do not take more than 3 seconds to solder the switch terminal, and do not impose external force on the terminal for 1 min after soldering. Improper soldering involving an excessively high tem- Using Micro Loads perature or excessive soldering time may deteriorate the characteristics of the Switch. Using a model for ordinary loads to open or close the contact of a micro load circuit may result in faulty contact. Use models that operate in the following range. However, even when using micro load Connecting to Quick-connect models within the operating range shown below, if inrush current Terminals occurs when the contact is opened or closed, it may increase contact wear and so decrease life expectancy. Therefore, insert a contact Wire the quick-connect terminals (#110) with receptacles. Insert the protection circuit where necessary. terminals straight into the receptacles. Do not impose excessive The minimum applicable load is the N-level reference value. This force on the terminal in the horizontal direction, otherwise the termi- value indicates the malfunction reference level for the reliability level nal may be deformed or the housing may be damaged. −6 of 60% (λ60). The equation, λ60 = 0.5 × 10 /operations indicates that the estimated malfunction rate is less than 1/2,000,000 operations Connectors with a reliability level of 60%. Use the following quick-connect connector made by Nippon Tanshi or Tyco Electronics. This connector is not sold by OMRON. Contact the 0.16 mA 26 mA 100 mA following Nippon Tanshi or Tyco Electronics office to purchase this 30 connector. Voltage (V)

This connector is for use with the SS-P and the terminal direction is 24 90° different from the SS Series. Individual quick connect receptacles are common to both types. Operating range Operating range for Nippon Tanshi Co., Ltd. Japan Tel: (81)463-30-1150 for micro load models SS-01P general- Hong Kong Tel: (852)2191-2727 load models SS-3P Connector part number 9880-4203 12 Quick connect part number 171587-M2 Inoperable range 5 Tyco Electronics AMP Japan Tel: (81)44-844-8111 1 mA 100 mA 160 mA

U.S.A. Tel (1)800-522-6752 0 Website www.amp.com 0.1 1 10 100 1,000 Quick connect part number 63202 Current (mA) Connecting to PCB Terminal Boards ■ Separators When using automatic soldering baths, we recommend soldering at 260±5°C within 5 seconds. Make sure that the liquid surface of the Thickness Model solder does not flow over the edge of the board. 0.18 mm Separator for SS0.18 When soldering by hand, as a guideline, solder with a soldering iron with a tip temperature of 350 to 400°C within 3 seconds, and do not 0.4 mm Separator for SS0.4 apply any external force for at least 1 minutes after soldering. When applying solder, keep the solder away from the case of the Switch and do not allow solder or flux to enter the case. Separator for SS@ ■ Correct Use

Mounting Separator Turn OFF the power supply before mounting or removing the Switch, wiring, or performing maintenance or inspection. Failure to do so may Note: The material is EAVTC (Epoxide Alkyd Varnished Tetron Cloth) result in electric shock or burning. and its heat-resisting temperature is 130°C. Use M2.3 mounting screws with plane washers or spring washers to securely mount the Switch. Tighten the screws to a torque of 0.23 to 0.26 N·m {2.3 to 2.7 kgf·cm}. Mount the Switch onto a flat surface. Mounting on an uneven surface may cause deformation of the Switch, resulting in faulty operation or breakage in the housing.

6 Subminiature Basic Switch SS-P OMRON Switches for Integration in Machinery

Miniature Basic Switches (V-size)

V D3V VX D2MV K D2RV

D2MC

Subminiature Basic Switches (S-size)

SS SS-P SSG D2S D3M

Ultra Subminiature Basic Switches (J-size)

D2MQ D2F J

Sealed Basic Switches

D2VW D2SW D2HW D2FW-G D2JW

Door Switches

D2D D2T D3D

Miniature Detection Switches

D2A D3C D3K D2X

Subminiature Basic Switch SS-P 7 Certain Terms and Conditions of Sale

1. Offer; Acceptance. These terms and conditions (these "Terms") are deemed 12. Warranties. (a) Exclusive Warranty. Seller's exclusive warranty is that the part of all catalogs, manuals or other documents, whether electronic or in writ- Goods will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of ing, relating to the sale of goods or services (collectively, the "Goods") by twelve months from the date of sale by Seller (or such other period expressed Omron Electronics LLC and its subsidiary companies ("Seller"). Seller hereby in writing by Seller). Seller disclaims all other warranties, express or implied. objects to any terms or conditions proposed in Buyer's purchase order or other (b) Limitations. SELLER MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, documents which are inconsistent with, or in addition to, these Terms. Please EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ABOUT NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABIL- contact your Omron representative to confirm any additional terms for sales ITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE GOODS. from your Omron company. BUYER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT IT ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE 2. Prices. All prices stated are current, subject to change without notice by GOODS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR Seller. Buyer agrees to pay the price in effect at time of shipment. INTENDED USE. Seller further disclaims all warranties and responsibility of 3. Discounts. Cash discounts, if any, will apply only on the net amount of any type for claims or expenses based on infringement by the Goods or other- invoices sent to Buyer after deducting transportation charges, taxes and wise of any intellectual property right. (c) Buyer Remedy. Seller's sole obliga- duties, and will be allowed only if (i) the invoice is paid according to Seller's tion hereunder shall be to replace (in the form originally shipped with Buyer payment terms and (ii) Buyer has no past due amounts owing to Seller. responsible for labor charges for removal or replacement thereof) the non- 4. Orders. Seller will accept no order less than $200 net billing. complying Good or, at Seller's election, to repay or credit Buyer an amount 5. Governmental Approvals. Buyer shall be responsible for, and shall bear all equal to the purchase price of the Good; provided that in no event shall Seller costs involved in, obtaining any government approvals required for the impor- be responsible for warranty, repair, indemnity or any other claims or expenses tation or sale of the Goods. regarding the Goods unless Seller's analysis confirms that the Goods were 6. Taxes. All taxes, duties and other governmental charges (other than general properly handled, stored, installed and maintained and not subject to contami- real property and income taxes), including any interest or penalties thereon, nation, abuse, misuse or inappropriate modification. Return of any goods by imposed directly or indirectly on Seller or required to be collected directly or Buyer must be approved in writing by Seller before shipment. Seller shall not indirectly by Seller for the manufacture, production, sale, delivery, importation, be liable for the suitability or unsuitability or the results from the use of Goods consumption or use of the Goods sold hereunder (including customs duties in combination with any electrical or electronic components, circuits, system and sales, excise, use, turnover and license taxes) shall be charged to and assemblies or any other materials or substances or environments. Any remitted by Buyer to Seller. advice, recommendations or information given orally or in writing, are not to be 7. Financial. If the financial position of Buyer at any time becomes unsatisfactory construed as an amendment or addition to the above warranty. to Seller, Seller reserves the right to stop shipments or require satisfactory 13. Damage Limits; Etc. SELLER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL, INDI- security or payment in advance. If Buyer fails to make payment or otherwise RECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, LOSS OF PROFITS OR PRODUC- comply with these Terms or any related agreement, Seller may (without liability TION OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE and in addition to other remedies) cancel any unshipped portion of Goods sold GOODS, WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED IN CONTRACT, WARRANTY, hereunder and stop any Goods in transit until Buyer pays all amounts, includ- NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY. Further, in no event shall liability of ing amounts payable hereunder, whether or not then due, which are owing to it Seller exceed the individual price of the Good on which liability is asserted. by Buyer. Buyer shall in any event remain liable for all unpaid accounts. 14. Indemnities. Buyer shall indemnify and hold harmless Seller, its affiliates and 8. Cancellation; Etc. Orders are not subject to rescheduling or cancellation its employees from and against all liabilities, losses, claims, costs and unless Buyer indemnifies Seller fully against all costs or expenses arising in expenses (including attorney's fees and expenses) related to any claim, inves- connection therewith. tigation, litigation or proceeding (whether or not Seller is a party) which arises 9. Force Majeure. Seller shall not be liable for any delay or failure in delivery or is alleged to arise from Buyer's acts or omissions under these Terms or in resulting from causes beyond its control, including earthquakes, fires, floods, any way with respect to the Goods. Without limiting the foregoing, Buyer (at strikes or other labor disputes, shortage of labor or materials, accidents to its own expense) shall indemnify and hold harmless Seller and defend or settle machinery, acts of sabotage, riots, delay in or lack of transportation or the any action brought against Seller to the extent that it is based on a claim that requirements of any government authority. any Good made to Buyer specifications infringed intellectual property rights of 10. Shipping; Delivery. Unless otherwise expressly agreed in writing by Seller: another party. a. Shipments shall be by a carrier selected by Seller; 15. Property; Confidentiality. The intellectual property embodied in the Goods is b. Such carrier shall act as the agent of Buyer and delivery to such carrier the exclusive property of Seller and its affiliates and Buyer shall not attempt to shall constitute delivery to Buyer; duplicate it in any way without the written permission of Seller. Notwithstand- c. All sales and shipments of Goods shall be FOB shipping point (unless oth- ing any charges to Buyer for engineering or tooling, all engineering and tooling erwise stated in writing by Seller), at which point title to and all risk of loss of shall remain the exclusive property of Seller. All information and materials the Goods shall pass from Seller to Buyer, provided that Seller shall retain a supplied by Seller to Buyer relating to the Goods are confidential and propri- security interest in the Goods until the full purchase price is paid by Buyer; etary, and Buyer shall limit distribution thereof to its trusted employees and d. Delivery and shipping dates are estimates only. strictly prevent disclosure to any third party. e. Seller will package Goods as it deems proper for protection against normal 16. Miscellaneous. (a) Waiver. No failure or delay by Seller in exercising any right handling and extra charges apply to special conditions. and no course of dealing between Buyer and Seller shall operate as a waiver 11. Claims. Any claim by Buyer against Seller for shortage or damage to the of rights by Seller. (b) Assignment. Buyer may not assign its rights hereunder Goods occurring before delivery to the carrier must be presented in writing to without Seller's written consent. (c) Amendment. These Terms constitute the Seller within 30 days of receipt of shipment and include the original transporta- entire agreement between Buyer and Seller relating to the Goods, and no pro- tion bill signed by the carrier noting that the carrier received the Goods from vision may be changed or waived unless in writing signed by the parties. Seller in the condition claimed. (d) Severability. If any provision hereof is rendered ineffective or invalid, such provision shall not invalidate any other provision. (e) Setoff. Buyer shall have no right to set off any amounts against the amount owing in respect of this invoice. (f) As used herein, "including" means "including without limitation".

Certain Precautions on Specifications and Use

8 Subminiature Basic Switch SS-P Complete “Terms and Conditions of Sale” for product purchase and use are on Omron’s website at www.omron.com/oei – under the “About Us” tab, in the Legal Matters section.

ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527.

Cat. No. B108-E3-01 1/04 Specifications subject to change without notice Printed in USA

Subminiature Basic Switch SS-P 9 Snap Action Switch SS

Subminiature Snap Action Switch I Economical, subminiature snap action switch offers long service life (30 million operations minimum) I All models are free from overtravel restrictions, permit easy setting I Wide switching capacity range from microvoltage/current loads (1 mA at 5 VDC to high-capacity loads 10.1 A at 250 VAC) I Standard operating force, low force or super-low force models available Ordering Information

I STANDARD TYPE Microvoltage/microcurrent load 0.1 A max. (Bifurcated crossbar contacts)

Part number Contact PCB Terminal Soldered Tab (#110) Actuator OF Straight Vertical Parallel to Left Parallel to Right Terminal Terminal Pin plunger 25 g SS-01-ED Ð Ð SS-01-E SS-01-ET 50 g SS-01-FD Ð Ð SS-01-F SS-01-FT 150 g SS-01D SS-01D1 SS-01D2 SS-01 SS-01T Hinge lever 8 g SS-01GL-ED Ð Ð SS-01GL-E SS-01GL-ET 16 g SS-01GL-FD Ð Ð SS-01GL-F SS-01GL-FT 50 g SS-01GLD SS-01GLD1 SS-01GLD2 SS-01GL SS-01GLT Simulated roller 8 g SS-01GL13-ED Ð Ð SS-01GL13-E SS-01GL13-ET lever 16 g SS-01GL13-FD Ð Ð SS-01GL13-F SS-01GL13-FT 50 g SS-01GL13D Ð Ð SS-01GL13 SS-01GL13T Formed hinge lever 8 g Ð Ð Ð SS-01GL14-E SS-01GL14-ET 16 g SS-01GL14-FD Ð Ð SS-01GL14-F Ð 50 g SS-01GL14D Ð Ð SS-01GL14 SS-01GL14T Hinged roller lever 8 g SS-01GL2-ED Ð Ð SS-01GL2-E SS-01GL2-ET 16 g SS-01GL2-FD Ð Ð SS-01GL2-F SS-01GL2-FT 50 g SS-01GL2D Ð Ð SS-01GL2 SS-01GL2T

65 SS SS

I GENERAL-PURPOSE 5 A max. (Standard rivet contacts)

Part number Contact PCB Terminal Soldered Tab (#110) Actuator OF Straight Vertical Parallel to Left Parallel to Right Terminal Terminal Pin plunger 50 g SS-5-FD SS-5-FD1 SS-5-FD2 SS-5-F SS-5-FT 150 g SS-5D SS-5D1 SS-5D2 SS-5 SS-5T Hinge lever 16 g SS-5GL-FD SS-5GL-FD1 SS-5GL-FD2 SS-5GL-F SS-5GL-FT 50 g SS-5GLD SS-5GLD1 SS-5GLD2 SS-5GL SS-5GLT Simulated roller 16 g SS-5GL13-FD — SS-5GL13-FD2 SS-5GL13-F SS-5GL13-FT lever 50 g SS-5GL13D SS-5GL13D1 SS-5GL13D2 SS-5GL13 SS-5GL13T Formed hinge lever 16 g SS-5GL14-FD SS-5GL14-FD1 — SS-5GL14-F SS-5GL14-FT 50 g SS-5GL14D SS-5GL14D1 SS-5GL14D2 SS-5GL14 SS-5GL14T Hinge roller lever 16 g SS-5GL2-FD SS-5GL2-FD1 SS-5GL2-FD2 SS-5GL2-F SS-5GL2-FT 50 g SS-5GL2D SS-5GL2D1 SS-5GL2D2 SS-5GL2 SS-5GL2T

10.1 A max. (Standard rivet contacts)

Part number Contact PCB Terminal Soldered Tab (#110) Actuator OF Straight Vertical Parallel to Left Parallel to Right Terminal Terminal Pin plunger 150 g SS-10D — — SS-10 SS-10T Hinge lever 50 g SS-10GLD — — SS-10GL SS-10GLT Simulated roller 50 g SS-10GL13D — — SS-10GL13 SS-10GL13T lever Formed hinge lever 50 g — — — SS-10GL14 — Hinge roller lever 50 g SS-10GL2D — — SS-10GL2 SS-10GL2T Specifications

I CHARACTERISTICS

Switch type General-purpose Operating speed (see note 3) 0.1 mm to 1 m/second (0.004 to 39.4 in/second) Operating frequency Mechanical 400 operations per minute (pin plunger actuator type) Electrical 60 operations per minute (pin plunger actuator type) Insulation resistance 100 MΩ at 500 VDC Dielectric strength Crossbar contact type 600 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute (see note 1) Others 1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between terminals of same polarity 1,500 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between current-carrying parts and ground and between each terminal and noncurrent-carrying metal parts Vibration Malfunction durability 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude Shock Mechanical durability Low-OF type 500 m/s2 min. (approx. 50 g) Others 1,000 m/s2 min. (approx. 100 g) Malfunction durability Standard type 300 m/s2 min. (approx. 30 g) Low-OF type 200 m/s2 min. (approx. 20 g) Lever type at TTP Contact gap, 1 ms max. Ambient temperature Operating -25° to 85°C with no icing Humidity 85% RH max. Service life Mechanical 30 million operations minimum (OT: rated value) (see note 4) Electrical 200,000 operations minimum (rated load) (see note 2) Weight Approx. 1.6 g pin plunger type

Note: 1. SS-10 series only. 2. 50,000 operations minimum for the SS-10 series. 3. Applies to the pin plunger type (at the pin plunger of the lever type). 66 4. 10 million operations for the SS-10 series. 5. Data shown are of initial value. SS SS

I OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS

Part number SS-01-F SS-01 Characteristics SS-01-E SS-5-F SS-5 SS-10 SS-01GL-E OF max. 25 g 50 g 150 g 150 g 8 g RF min. 2 g 4 g 25 g 25 g 1 g PT max. 0.5 mm (0.020 in) 0.5 mm (0.020 in) 0.5 mm (0.020 in) 0.6 mm (0.024 in) 1.2 mm (0.047 in) OT min. 0.5 mm (0.020 in) 0.5 mm (0.020 in) 0.5 mm (0.020 in) 0.4 mm (0.016 in) 0.8 mm (0.032 in) MD max. 0.1 mm (0.004 in) 0.1 mm (0.004 in) 0.1 mm (0.004 in) 0.12 mm (0.005 in) 13.6 mm (0.535 in) OP 8.4 ± 0.5 mm 8.4 ± 0.5 mm 8.4 ± 0.5 mm 8.4 ± 0.5 mm 8.8 ± 0.8 mm (0.331 ± 0.020 in) (0.331 ± 0.020 in) (0.331 ± 0.020 in) (0.331 ± 0.020 in) (0.346 ± 0.032 in)

Part number

SS-01GL-F SS-01GL SS-01GL13-F Characteristics SS-5GL-F SS-5GL SS-10GL SS-01GL13-E SS-5GL13-F OF max. 16 g 50 g 50 g 8 g 16 g RF min. 2 g 6 g 6 g 1 g 2 g OT min. 1.2 mm (0.047 in) 1.2 mm (0.047 in) 1.0 mm (0.039 in) 1.2 mm (0.047 in) 1.2 mm (0.047 in) MD max. 0.8 mm (0.032 in) 0.8 mm (0.032 in) 1.0 mm (0.039 in) 0.8 mm (0.032 in) 0.8 mm (0.032 in) FP max. 13.6 mm (0.535 in) 13.6 mm (0.535 in) 13.6 mm (0.535 in) 15.5 mm (0.610 in) 15.5 mm (0.610 in) OP 8.8 ± 0.8 mm 8.8 ± 0.8 mm 8.8 ± 0.8 mm 10.7 ± 0.8 mm 10.7 ± 0.8 mm ± (0.346 ± 0.032 in) (0.346 ± 0.032 in) (0.346 ± 0.032 in) (0.421 0.032 in) (0.421 ± 0.032 in)

Part number

SS-01GL13 SS-01GL14-F SS-01GL14 Characteristics SS-5GL13 SS-10GL13 SS-01GL14-E SS-5GL14-F SS-5GL14 OF max. 50 g 50 g 8 g 16 g 50 g RF min. 6 g 6 g 1 g 2 g 6 g OT min. 1.2 mm (0.047 in) 1.0 mm (0.039 in) 1.2 mm (0.047 in) 1.2 mm (0.047 in) 1.2 mm (0.047 in) MD max. 0.8 mm (0.032 in) 1.0 mm (0.039 in) 0.8 mm (0.032 in) 0.8 mm (0.032 in) 0.8 mm (0.032 in) FP max. 15.5 mm (0.610 in) 15.5 mm (0.610 in) 14.9 mm (0.587 in) 14.9 mm (0.587 in) 14.9 mm (0.587 in) OP 10.7 ± 0.8 mm 10.7 ± 0.8 mm 10.1 ± 0.8 mm 10.1 ± 0.8 mm 10.1 ± 0.8 mm (0.421 ± 0.032 in) (0.421 ± 0.032 in) (0.398 ± 0.032 in) (0.398 ± 0.032 in) (0.398 ± 0.032 in)

Part number

SS-01GL2-F SS-01GL2 Characteristics SS-10GL14 SS-01GL2-E SS-5GL2-F SS-5GL2 SS-10GL2 OF max. 50 g 8 g 16 g 50 g 50 g RF min. 6 g 1 g 2 g 6 g 6 g OT min. 1.0 mm (0.039 in) 1.2 mm (0.047 in) 1.2 mm (0.047 in) 1.2 mm (0.047 in) 1.0 mm (0.039 in) MD max. 1.0 mm (0.039 in) 0.8 mm (0.032 in) 0.8 mm (0.032 in) 0.8 mm (0.032 in) 1.0 mm (0.039 in) FP max. 14.9 mm (0.587 in) 19.3 mm (0.760 in) 19.3 mm (0.760 in) 19.3 mm (0.760 in) 19.3 mm (0.760 in) OP 10.1 ± 0.8 mm 14.5 ± 0.8 mm 14.5 ± 0.8 mm 14.5 ± 0.8 mm 14.5 ± 0.8 mm (0.398 ± 0.032 in) (0.571 ± 0.032 in) (0.571 ± 0.032 in) (0.571 ± 0.032 in) (0.571 ± 0.032 in)

67 SS SS

I RATINGS Microvoltage/microcurrent load type

General purpose/resistive load Bifurcated crossbar contacts Contact form NC NO 125 VAC 0.1 A 0.1 A 30 VDC 0.1 A 0.1 A Inrush current 1 A max. 1 A max.

Standard type general purpose

Rivet contacts Resistive load Lamp load Inductive load Motor load Switch series: SS-5 SS-10 SS-5 and SS-10 SS-5 and SS-10 SS-5 and SS-10 Contact form NC NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC NO 125 VAC 5 A 5 A 10.1 A 10.1 A 1.5 A 0.7 A 3 A 3 A 2.5 A 1.3 A 250 VAC 3 A 3 A 10.1 A 10.1 A 1 A 0.5 A 2 A 2 A 1.5 A 0.8 A 8 VDC 5 A 5 A 10.1 A 10.1 A 2 A 2 A 5 A 4 A 3 A 3 A 14 VDC 5 A 5 A 10.1 A 10.1 A 2 A 2 A 4 A 4 A 3 A 3 A 30 VDC 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 2 A 2 A 3 A 3 A 3 A 3 A 125 VDC 0.4 A 0.4 A 0.4 A 0.4 A 0.05 A 0.05 A 0.4 A 0.4 A 0.05 A 0.05 A 250 VDC 0.2 A 0.2 A 0.2 A 0.2 A 0.03 A 0.03 A 0.2 A 0.2 A 0.03 A 0.03 A Inrush current 20 A max. 10 A max. 20 A max. 15 A max. (both non-inductive and inductive loads)

Note: 1. The above current ratings are the values of the steady-state current. 2. Inductive load has a power factor of 0.4 min. (AC) and a time constant of 7 milliseconds max. (DC). The inductive load applicable to the SS-10 series must have a power factor of 0.75 min. 3. Lamp load has an inrush current of 10 times the steady-state current. 4. Motor load has an inrush current of 6 times the steady-state current. 5. If the switch is used in a DC circuit and is subjected to inrush current or surge, connect a surge suppressor across the switch.

I CONTACT RESISTANCE (mΩ max., initial)

SS-01I SS-5I SS-10I Contact rating: 0.1 A 3 A or 5 A 10.1 A Normal operating force models (SS-I) 50 mΩ 30 mΩ 30 mΩ Low operating force models (SS-I-F) 100 mΩ 50 mΩ – Super-low operating force models (SS-I-E) 150 mΩ –– Lead wire models (all OF types) 100 mΩ 50 mΩ –

I CONTACT FORM SPDT SPST-NC* SPST-NO* (common throughout the series) (standard models rated at 0.1 to 0.5 A) (standard models rated at 0.1 to 5 A)

Sealed lead wire terminal models have color-coded leads.

* Consult Omron for SPST-NC and SPST-NO contact form types ordering information.

68 SS SS

I APPROVALS UL (File No. E41515), CSA (File No. LR21642), SS-5/SS-10: EN conforms 61058-1

Type Rating SS-10 series General-purpose type 10.1 A, 250 VAC SS-5 series General-purpose type 5 A, 125 V, 3 A 250 VAC SS-01 series Super-low force type 0.1 A, 125 VAC, 30 VDC

VDE (File No. 5861-3221)

Type Rating SS-5 series General-purpose type 5 A, 250 VAC

SEMKO (File Nos. 43-8614026/43-891609)

Type Rating SS-10 series General-purpose type 10 A, 250 VAC SS-5 series General-purpose type 5 A, 250 VAC

operations)

Service (x10 life

Overtravel (mm) Rated operating current (A)

69 SS SS

Dimensions Unit: mm (inch) I PIN PLUNGER SS-01 (-E, -F) SS-5 (-F) SS-10

I HINGE LEVER SS-01GL (-E, -F) SS-5GL (-F) SS-10GL

I SIMULATED ROLLER LEVER SS-01GL13 (-E, -F) SS-5GL13 (-F) SS-10GL13

I FORMED HINGE LEVER SS-01GL14 (-E, -F) SS-5GL14 (-F) SS-10GL14

Note: 1. Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ± 0.4 mm applies to all dimensions. 2. Straight vertical PCB terminal models are shown above. Soldered terminal, Tab (#10) terminal, lead wire terminal, PCB 70 terminal parallel to left and PCB terminal parallel to right are shown in the Terminals section. SS SS

I HINGE ROLLER LEVER SS-01GL2 (-E, -F) SS-5GL2 (-F) SS-10GL2

Note: Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ±0.4 mm applies to all dimensions.

I MOUNTING HOLES

Standard types Mounting holes below are for reference only.

Note: Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ± 0.4 mm applies to all dimensions.

71 SS SS

Unit: mm (inch) I TERMINALS

General-Purpose Type PCB terminal, straight vertical (D)

PCB terminal, parallel to left (D1) PCB terminal, parallel to right (D2)

4.45 4.45 (0.18) (0.18) 0.5R 0.5R 0.5 1.3 (0.02) (0.05) 5.1 5.1 (0.20) (0.20)

0.5 0.5R 1.3 (0.02) 0.5R 3.2 3.2 (0.05) (0.13) 1.6 1.6 (0.13) 7.4 (0.06) (0.06) 7.4 (0.29) (0.29) 6.4 6.4 (0.25) (0.25)

Note: Thickness of all the terminals is 0.5 mm.

Soldered terminal (blank) Quick-connect tab (#110) terminal (T)

72 SS SS

NOTE: DIMENSIONS ARE SHOWN IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters to inches divide by 25.4.

Cat. No. GC SW6 04/01 Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in the U.S.A. High-temperature Basic Switch TZ

Stable Operation at an Ambient Temperature of 400°C

Incorporates a ceramic insulator, cobalt-alloy spring, and special-alloy contact, thus ensuring high contact reliability at high ambient temperature. Smoothly operates at an ambient temperature of 400°C.

Ordering Information Model Number Legend: TZ-1Gj 123

1. Rating Actuator Model 1: 1 A, 250 VAC Pin plunger TZ-1G 2. Contact Gap Hinge lever TZ-1GV G: 0.5 mm 3. Actuator Short hinge roller lever TZ-1GV22 None: Pin plunger V: Hinge lever Hinge roller lever TZ-1GV2 V2: Hinge roller lever V22: Short hinge roller lever Specifications Ratings Ratedaed Non-inductive load (A) Inductive load (A) voltagelt Resistive load Lamp load Inductive load Motor load NC NO NC NO NC NO NC NO 125 VAC 1 0.9 0.45 1 1.5 0.75 250 VAC 1 0.45 0.3 1 0.45 0.3 8 VDC 1 0.9 0.45 1 1.5 1.5 14 VDC 1 0.9 0.45 1 1.5 1.5 30 VDC 1 0.9 0.45 1 1.5 1.5 125 VDC 0.4 0.05 0.05 0.4 0.05 0.05

Note: 1. The above current ratings are the values of the steady-state current. 2. Inductive load has a power factor of 0.4 min. (AC) and a time constant of 7 ms max. (DC). 3. Lamp load has an inrush current of 10 times the steady-state current. 4. Motor load has an inrush current of 6 times the steady-state current. 5. The above ratings are tested under the following conditions. 1. Ambient temperature: 20±2 °C 2. Ambient humidity: 65±5%

1 TZ TZ

3. Switching frequency: 20 times/min Characteristics Operating speed 0.05 mm to 1 m/s (see note 1) Operating frequency Mechanical: 60 operations/min Electrical: 20 operations/min Insulation resistance 100 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC) Contact resistance 100 mΩ max. (initial value) Dielectric strength 1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of same polarity 1,500 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between current-carrying metal parts and ground and between each terminal and non-current-carrying metal parts Vibration resistance Malfunction: 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude (see note 2) Shock resistance Destruction: 500 m/s2 {50G} max. Malfunction: 300 m/s2 {30G} max. (see note 2) Life expectancy Mechanical: 100,000 operations min. Electrical: 50,000 operations min. Degree of protection IP00 Electric shock protection Class I Ambient temperature Operating: –65°C to 400°C (with no icing) Ambient humidity 85% max. Weight Approx. 45 to 54 g

Note: 1. This operating speed applies to switches with pin-type pushbuttons. 2. This refers to a malfunction period of 1 ms max. Contact Specifications Item CoContact ac Specification Cross bar Material Platinum alloy Gap (standard value) 0.5 mm Inrushus current cu e NC 9 A max. NO 4.5 A max.

Nomenclature

Ceramic Fixed contact pushbutton Bracket Movable spring

Movable contact Ceramic terminal block Fixed contact

2 TZ TZ

Precautions Handling Operation The Switch has a ceramic casing. Do not drop the Switch from a Do not modify the Actuator and change the operating position. height of 30 cm or more. Doing so will break the casing. Make sure that the switching speed is not extremely slow or do not Mounting use the Switch so that the pushbutton will be set to a position between the FP and OP. Be sure to turn OFF the power supply to the Switch before mounting, dismounting, wiring, or working on the Switch for maintenance. Make sure that the pin-type pushbutton and the switching stroke are Not doing so may result in an electric shock or the Switch may burn. on the same vertical line. Mount the switch with M3.5 stainless-steel screws with flat washer Make sure that the switching frequency or speed is within the speci- and spring washers securely. fied range. Use M3.5 stainless-steel screws with flat washers and spring wash- 1. If the switching speed is extremely slow, the contact may not ers to mount the Switch. Tighten each mounting screw securely to a be switched smoothly, which may result in a contact failure or torque of 0.69 to 0.98 N S m {7 to 10 kgf S cm}. contact welding. 2. If the switching speed is extremely fast, switching shock may Two, 3.56-dia. mounting holes or M3.5 screw holes damage the Switch soon. If the switching frequency is too high, the contact may not catch up with the speed. The rated permissible switching speed and frequency indicate the switching reliability of the Switch. 25.4 ± 0.1 The life of a Switch is determined at the specified switching speed. The life varies with the switching speed and frequency even when they are within the permissible ranges. In order to determine the life Mounting Dimensions of a Switch model to be applied to a particular use, it is best to con- Connect nickel-plated solderless terminals to the TZ. Each terminal duct an appropriate life expectancy test on some samples of the must be secured on the TZ with M3.5 nut. model under actual conditions. Make sure that the ceramic case is free of metal powder or other im- Make sure that the actuator travel does not exceed the permissible purities. OT position. The operating stroke must be set to 70% to 100% of the rated OT.

ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527.

3 Certain Terms and Conditions of Sale

1. Offer; Acceptance. These terms and conditions (these "Terms") are deemed 12. Warranties. (a) Exclusive Warranty. Seller's exclusive warranty is that the part of all catalogs, manuals or other documents, whether electronic or in writ- Goods will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of ing, relating to the sale of goods or services (collectively, the "Goods") by twelve months from the date of sale by Seller (or such other period expressed Omron Electronics LLC and its subsidiary companies ("Seller"). Seller hereby in writing by Seller). Seller disclaims all other warranties, express or implied. objects to any terms or conditions proposed in Buyer's purchase order or other (b) Limitations. SELLER MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, documents which are inconsistent with, or in addition to, these Terms. Please EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ABOUT NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABIL- contact your Omron representative to confirm any additional terms for sales ITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE GOODS. from your Omron company. BUYER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT IT ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE 2. Prices. All prices stated are current, subject to change without notice by GOODS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR Seller. Buyer agrees to pay the price in effect at time of shipment. INTENDED USE. Seller further disclaims all warranties and responsibility of 3. Discounts. Cash discounts, if any, will apply only on the net amount of any type for claims or expenses based on infringement by the Goods or other- invoices sent to Buyer after deducting transportation charges, taxes and wise of any intellectual property right. (c) Buyer Remedy. Seller's sole obliga- duties, and will be allowed only if (i) the invoice is paid according to Seller's tion hereunder shall be to replace (in the form originally shipped with Buyer payment terms and (ii) Buyer has no past due amounts owing to Seller. responsible for labor charges for removal or replacement thereof) the non- 4. Orders. Seller will accept no order less than $200 net billing. complying Good or, at Seller's election, to repay or credit Buyer an amount 5. Governmental Approvals. Buyer shall be responsible for, and shall bear all equal to the purchase price of the Good; provided that in no event shall Seller costs involved in, obtaining any government approvals required for the impor- be responsible for warranty, repair, indemnity or any other claims or expenses tation or sale of the Goods. regarding the Goods unless Seller's analysis confirms that the Goods were 6. Taxes. All taxes, duties and other governmental charges (other than general properly handled, stored, installed and maintained and not subject to contami- real property and income taxes), including any interest or penalties thereon, nation, abuse, misuse or inappropriate modification. Return of any goods by imposed directly or indirectly on Seller or required to be collected directly or Buyer must be approved in writing by Seller before shipment. Seller shall not indirectly by Seller for the manufacture, production, sale, delivery, importation, be liable for the suitability or unsuitability or the results from the use of Goods consumption or use of the Goods sold hereunder (including customs duties in combination with any electrical or electronic components, circuits, system and sales, excise, use, turnover and license taxes) shall be charged to and assemblies or any other materials or substances or environments. Any remitted by Buyer to Seller. advice, recommendations or information given orally or in writing, are not to be 7. Financial. If the financial position of Buyer at any time becomes unsatisfactory construed as an amendment or addition to the above warranty. to Seller, Seller reserves the right to stop shipments or require satisfactory 13. Damage Limits; Etc. SELLER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL, INDI- security or payment in advance. If Buyer fails to make payment or otherwise RECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, LOSS OF PROFITS OR PRODUC- comply with these Terms or any related agreement, Seller may (without liability TION OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE and in addition to other remedies) cancel any unshipped portion of Goods sold GOODS, WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED IN CONTRACT, WARRANTY, hereunder and stop any Goods in transit until Buyer pays all amounts, includ- NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY. Further, in no event shall liability of ing amounts payable hereunder, whether or not then due, which are owing to it Seller exceed the individual price of the Good on which liability is asserted. by Buyer. Buyer shall in any event remain liable for all unpaid accounts. 14. Indemnities. Buyer shall indemnify and hold harmless Seller, its affiliates and 8. Cancellation; Etc. Orders are not subject to rescheduling or cancellation its employees from and against all liabilities, losses, claims, costs and unless Buyer indemnifies Seller fully against all costs or expenses arising in expenses (including attorney's fees and expenses) related to any claim, inves- connection therewith. tigation, litigation or proceeding (whether or not Seller is a party) which arises 9. Force Majeure. Seller shall not be liable for any delay or failure in delivery or is alleged to arise from Buyer's acts or omissions under these Terms or in resulting from causes beyond its control, including earthquakes, fires, floods, any way with respect to the Goods. Without limiting the foregoing, Buyer (at strikes or other labor disputes, shortage of labor or materials, accidents to its own expense) shall indemnify and hold harmless Seller and defend or settle machinery, acts of sabotage, riots, delay in or lack of transportation or the any action brought against Seller to the extent that it is based on a claim that requirements of any government authority. any Good made to Buyer specifications infringed intellectual property rights of 10. Shipping; Delivery. Unless otherwise expressly agreed in writing by Seller: another party. a. Shipments shall be by a carrier selected by Seller; 15. Property; Confidentiality. The intellectual property embodied in the Goods is b. Such carrier shall act as the agent of Buyer and delivery to such carrier the exclusive property of Seller and its affiliates and Buyer shall not attempt to shall constitute delivery to Buyer; duplicate it in any way without the written permission of Seller. Notwithstand- c. All sales and shipments of Goods shall be FOB shipping point (unless oth- ing any charges to Buyer for engineering or tooling, all engineering and tooling erwise stated in writing by Seller), at which point title to and all risk of loss of shall remain the exclusive property of Seller. All information and materials the Goods shall pass from Seller to Buyer, provided that Seller shall retain a supplied by Seller to Buyer relating to the Goods are confidential and propri- security interest in the Goods until the full purchase price is paid by Buyer; etary, and Buyer shall limit distribution thereof to its trusted employees and d. Delivery and shipping dates are estimates only. strictly prevent disclosure to any third party. e. Seller will package Goods as it deems proper for protection against normal 16. Miscellaneous. (a) Waiver. No failure or delay by Seller in exercising any right handling and extra charges apply to special conditions. and no course of dealing between Buyer and Seller shall operate as a waiver 11. Claims. Any claim by Buyer against Seller for shortage or damage to the of rights by Seller. (b) Assignment. Buyer may not assign its rights hereunder Goods occurring before delivery to the carrier must be presented in writing to without Seller's written consent. (c) Amendment. These Terms constitute the Seller within 30 days of receipt of shipment and include the original transporta- entire agreement between Buyer and Seller relating to the Goods, and no pro- tion bill signed by the carrier noting that the carrier received the Goods from vision may be changed or waived unless in writing signed by the parties. Seller in the condition claimed. (d) Severability. If any provision hereof is rendered ineffective or invalid, such provision shall not invalidate any other provision. (e) Setoff. Buyer shall have no right to set off any amounts against the amount owing in respect of this invoice. (f) As used herein, "including" means "including without limitation".

Certain Precautions on Specifications and Use

High Temperature Basic Switch TZ 4 Complete “Terms and Conditions of Sale” for product purchase and use are on Omron’s website at www.omron.com/oei – under the “About Us” tab, in the Legal Matters section.

ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527.

OMRON ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS LLC OMRON CANADA, INC. OMRON ON-LINE 55 East Commerce Drive, Suite B 885 Milner Avenue Global - http://www.omron.com Schaumburg, IL 60173-5302 Toronto, Ontario M1B 5V8 USA - http://www.omron.com/oei 847-882-2288 416-286-6465 Canada - http://www.omron.ca

Cat. No. B102-E1-01 1/04 Specifications subject to change without notice Printed in USA

5 High Temperature Basic Switch TZ Snap Action Switch VX

Miniature Snap Action Switch I Compact snap action switch with low force operation I Internal hinge lever mechanism assures outstanding contact reliability

Ordering Information Part number Rated Current Actuator Connect Terminal OF max. 5 A 0.1 A Pin plunger A 25 g VX-5-1A2 VX-01-1A2 50 g VX-5-1A3 VX-01-1A3 C2 25 g VX-5-1C22 VX-01-1C22 50 g VX-5-1C23 VX-01-1C23 Short hinge lever A 50 g VX-51-1A3 VX-011-1A3 C2 50 g VX-51-1C23 VX-011-1C23 Hinge lever A 30 g VX-52-1A3 VX-012-1A3 C2 30 g VX-52-1C23 VX-012-1C23 Long hinge lever A 15 g VX-53-1A3 VX-013-1A3 C2 15 g VX-53-1C23 VX-013-1C23 Simulated roller lever A 30 g VX-54-1A3 VX-014-1A3 C2 30 g VX-54-1C23 VX-014-1C23 Short hinge roller lever A 50 g VX-55-1A3 VX-015-1A3 C2 50 g VX-55-1C23 VX-015-1C23 Hinge roller lever A 30 g VX-56-1A3 VX-016-1A3 C2 30 g VX-56-1C23 VX-016-1C23

Note: Connect terminal: A -- solder/187 tab common terminal; C2 -- tab terminal (187)

83 VX VX

Specifications

I CHARACTERISTICS

VX-5 VX-01 Operating speed 0.1 mm to 1 m/second (0.004 to 39.4 in/second) at pin plunger Operating frequency Mechanical 600 operations per minute Electrical 60 operations per minute Contact resistance 30 mΩ max. 50 mΩ max. Insulation resistance 100 MΩ min. at 500 VDC Dielectric strength (VAC) 1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between non-continuous terminals 1,500 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between each terminal and ground Vibration (see note 2) Malfunction durability 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude Shock (see note 2) Durability 400 m/s2 min. (approx. 40 g) Malfunction durability 100 m/s2 min. (approx. 10 g) Ambient temperature -25° to 80°C (with no icing) Humidity 85% RH max. Service life Mechanical 50,000,000 operations minimum 10,000,000 operations minimum Electrical 500,000 operations minimum 1,000,000 operations minimum Weight Approx. 6.2 g

Note: 1. Data shown are of initial value. 2. The values indicated here are of the pin plunger type.

I OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS

Part number Characteristics VX-5-1I2 VX-5-1I3 VX-01-1I2 VX-01-1I3 VX-51-1I3 VX-011-1I3 OF max. 25 g 50 g 25 g 50 g 50 g RF min. 3 g 5 g 3 g 5 g 4 g PT max. 1.2 mm (0.05 in) 1.6 mm (0.06 in) OT min. 1.0 mm (0.04 in) 0.8 mm (0.03 in) MD max. 0.3 mm (0.01 in) 0.5 mm (0.02 in) OP 14.7±0.4 mm 15.2±0.5 mm (0.58±0.02 in) (0.60±0.02 in)

Part number Characteristics VX-52-1I3 VX-012-1I3 VX-53-1I3 VX-013-1I3 VX-54-1I3 VX-014-1I3 OF max. 30 g 20 g 60 g RF min. Ð Ð 4 g PT max. 4.0 mm (0.16 in) 9.0 mm (0.35 in) 1.6 mm (0.06 in) OT min. 1.6 mm (0.06 in) 3.2 mm (0.13 in) 0.8 mm (0.03 in) MD max. 0.8 mm (0.03 in) 2.0 mm (0.08 in) 0.5 mm (0.02 in) OP 15.2±1.2 mm 15.2±2.6 mm 20.7±0.6 mm (0.60±0.05 in) (0.60±2.10 in) (0.81±0.02 in)

Part number Characteristics VX-55-1I3 VX-015-1I3 VX-56-1I3 VX-016-1I3 OF max. 60 g 30 g RF min. 4 g Ð PT max. 1.6 mm (0.06 in) 4.0 mm (0.16 in) OT min. 0.8 mm (0.03 in) 1.6 mm (0.06 in) MD max. 0.5 mm (0.02 in) 0.8 mm (0.03 in) OP 20.7±0.6 mm 20.7±1.2 mm (0.81±0.02 in) (0.81±0.05 in)

84 VX VX

I RATINGS

Non-inductive load (A) Inductive load (A) Resistive load Lamp load Inductive load Motor load Type Rated load NC NO NC NO NC NO NC NO 5 A 250 VAC 5 5 0.5 0.5 44ÐÐ 8 VDC553344ÐÐ 30 VDC553344ÐÐ 125 VDC 0.4 0.4 0.1 0.1 0.4 0.4 Ð Ð 250 VDC 0.3 0.3 0.05 0.05 0.2 0.2 Ð Ð 0.1 A 125 VAC 0.1 0.1 ÐÐÐÐÐÐ 8 VDC0.10.1ÐÐÐÐÐÐ 30 VDC0.10.1ÐÐÐÐÐÐ Inrush current Standard type (VX-5): 15 A max. Standard type (VX-5): 15 A max.

I CONTACT FORM SPDT SPST-NC SPST-NO (Standard) (Consult Omron for ordering information) (Consult Omron for ordering information)

I APPROVALS

UL (File No. E32667), CSA (File No. LR21642), IEC 1058-1

Rating 5 A, 250 VAC 0.1 A, 125 VAC

Note: The rated values approved by each of the safety standards (e.g. UL, CSA) may be different from the performance characteristics individually defined in this catalog.

85 VX VX

Engineering Data Mechanical service life VX-5 VX-01

)

ations (x10

Number of operations (x10

Number of oper

Overtravel (mm) Overtravel (mm) Electrical service life VX-5 VX-01

) )

ations (x10

Number of oper

Switching current (A) Switching current (A)

86 VX VX

Dimensions Unit: mm (inch) I PIN PLUNGER VX-5-1I2 VX-5-1I3 VX-01-1I2 VX-01-1I3

I SHORT HINGE LEVER VX-51-1I3 VX-011-1I3

I HINGE LEVER VX-52-1I3 VX-012-1I3

I LONG HINGE LEVER VX-53-1I3 VX-013-1I3

87 VX VX

Unit: mm (inch) I SIMULATED ROLLER LEVER VX-54-1I3 VX-014-1I3

I SHORT HINGE ROLLER LEVER VX-55-1I3 VX-015-1I3

I HINGE ROLLER LEVER VX-56-1I3 VX-016-1I3

Note: 1. Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ± 0.4 mm applies to all dimensions. 2. Letters and numbers depend on the type of terminal put in I shown above. A: Solder/quick connect common terminal (187) C2: Quick connect terminal (187) 3. For smaller mounting holes, please consult OMRON.

88 VX VX

I TERMINALS Solder/quick connect common Quick connect terminal terminals (#187) (A terminal) (#187) (C2 terminal)

Bottom terminal

Solder/quick connect common Quick connect terminal terminals (#187) (A terminal) (#187) (C2 terminal)

Terminal position

Precautions

I MOUNTING When mounting, make sure there is sufficient insulation distance between the switch and its mounting panel. If it is Mount the switch by tightening the two M3 screws with a insufficient, install an insulation guard or separator. Always matching driver, using appropriate torque (4 to 6 kg-cm). install an insulation guard or separator when mounting the microswitch on a metallic body. Contact your OMRON Switch protection representative for information about insulation guards and separators. Do not use where there are toxic gases (such as near an oil- burning stove), nor in a dusty or humid environment. I Depending on environmental conditions, the switch should be OPERATION rechecked about 3 to 6 months after it has been assembled. Keep the operation control completely separate from the Mounting hole dimensions actuator of the switch, and push it down fully when starting operation. Do not displace the operating position of the actuator when machining. Consult OMRON in advance if the operating speed is to be extremely slow, or if the pushbutton is to be set somewhere between the free position and operating position. Mount pin pushbutton switches so that stroke of the pushbutton and the stroke of the operating control overlap on a vertical line. The stroke of the switch, after operation, should be set to 60- Quickly finish the soldering of the lead wire to its terminal. Use 90% that of standard OT (MIN operation). a soldering iron rated at 60W and preferably complete the soldering within 5 seconds. Excess wattage or prolonged heating can deteriorate the characteristics of the switch.

89 VX VX

NOTE: DIMENSIONS ARE SHOWN IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters to inches divide by 25.4.

Cat. No. GC SW6 04/01 Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in the U.S.A. Snap Action Switch A

General Purpose Snap Action Switch ■ High-capacity switch capable of handling 20 A loads with large inrush currents ■ Direct switches such loads as motors, halogen lamps, and solenoids ■ Same shape as OMRON snap action switch Model Z except pin plunger position, yet endures inrush currents as large as 75 A

Ordering Information

Part number Actuator Solder terminal Screw terminal Pin plunger A-20G A-20G-B

Short spring plunger A-20GD A-20GD-B

Panel mount plunger A-20GQ A-20GQ-B

Panel mount roller plunger A-20GQ22 A-20GQ22-B

Panel mount cross roller plunger A-20GQ21 A-20GQ21-B

Short hinge lever A-20GV21 A-20GV21-B

Hinge lever A-20GV A-20GV-B

Short hinge roller lever A-20GV22 A-20GV22-B

Hinge roller lever A-20GV2 A-20GV2-B

Note: Models conforming to UL and CSA are so marked. However, those conforming to SEV are not marked. The mark “SEV” can be inscribed on request (in this case, however, neither “UL” nor “CSA” can be inscribed.)

31 A A

Specifications

■ CHARACTERISTICS

Operating speed 0.01 mm to 1 m/second (.0004 to .39 in./second) at pin plunger Operating frequency Mechanical 240 operations per minute Electrical 20 operations per minute (under rated load) Contact resistance 15mΩ max. (initial) Insulation resistance 100 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC) Dielectric strength 1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between non-continuous terminals 2,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between each terminal and between noncurrent carrying part and ground Vibration Malfunction durability 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude Shock Mechanical durability 1,000 m/s2 min. (approx. 100 g min.) Malfunction durability 300 m/s2 min. (approx. 30 g min.) Ambient temperature Operating -25° to 80°C (non-condensing) Humidity 35% to 85% RH Service life Mechanical 1,000,000 operations min. (at rated OT value) Electrical 500,000 operations min. (under rated load) Weight Approx. 23 to 58 g

Note: Data shown are of initial value.

■ OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS

Characteristics Part number A-20G-B A-20GD-B A-20GQ-B A-20GQ22-B A-20GQ21-B A-20GV21-B OF 400 to 625 g 630 g 160 g RF min. 285 g 280 g 42 g PT max. 1.3 mm (0.05 in) 6.5 mm (0.26 in) OT min. 0.25 mm (0.01 in) 3 mm (0.12 in) 5.6 mm (0.22 in) 3.58 mm (0.14 in) 1.2 mm (0.05 in) MD max. 0.2 mm (0.01 in) 0.35 mm (0.01 in) 1.2 mm (0.05 in) FP max. — — — OP 16.3 ± 0.4 mm 26.2 ± 0.5 mm 21.8 ± 0.8 mm 33.4 ± 1.2 mm 19 ± 0.8 mm (0.64 ± 0.02 in) (1.03 ± 0.02 in) (0.86 ± 0.03 in) (1.31 ± 0.05 in) (0.75 ± 0.03 in)

Characteristics Part number A-20GV-B A-20GV22-B A-20GV2-B OF 70 g 160 g 90 g RF min. 14 g 42 g 14 g PT max. 15.9 mm (0.63 in) 6.3 mm (0.25 in) 12 mm (0.47 in) OT min. 4 mm (0.16 in) 1.2 mm (0.05 in) 2.4 mm (0.09 in) MD max. 2.4 mm (0.09 in) 1.2 mm (0.05 in) 2.2 mm (0.09 in) FP max. — — — OP 19 ± 0.8 mm 29.8 ± 0.8 mm 30.2 ± 0.8 mm (0.75 ± 0.03 in) (1.17 ± 0.03 in) (1.19 ± 0.03 in)

32 A A

■ RATINGS

Non-inductive load (A) Inductive load (A) Restive load Lamp load Inductive load Motor load Rated Voltage NC NO NC NO NC NO NC NO 125 VAC 20 20 7.5 7.5 20 20 12.5 12.5 250 VAC 20 20 7.5 7.5 20 20 8.3 8.3 500 VAC 15 15 4 4 10 10 2 2 8 VDC 20 20 3 1.5 20 20 12.5 12.5 14 VDC 20 20 3 1.5 15 15 12.5 12.5 30 VDC6631.55555 125 VDC 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 250 VDC 0.2 0.2 0.25 0-.25 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 Inrush current NC: 75 A max. NO: 75 A max. NC: 75 Approx. NO: 75 A max.

■ CONTACT FORM

■ APPROVALS UL (File No. E41515) / CSA (File No. LR21642) / SEV (File No. D3, 21/114a)

Type Rating A-20 Series 20 A, 125 VAC/250 VAC/480 VAC 10 A, 125 VAC “L” (TUNGSTEN) 1/2 A, 125 VDC 1/4 A, 250 VDC 1 HP 125 VAC 2 HP 250 VAC

Note: The rated values approved by each of the safety standards (e.g. UL, CSA) may be different from the performance characteristics individually defined in this catalog. Engineering Data

Mechanical service life Electrical service life

operations)

Service life (x10

Overtravel (mm) Rated operating current (A) 33 A A

Dimensions Unit: mm (inch) ■ PIN PLUNGER A-20G-B

*Stainless steel plunger

■ SHORT SPRING PLUNGER A-20GD-B

*Stainless steel plunger

■ PANEL MOUNT PLUNGER A-20GQ-B

* Stainless steel plunger ** Do not use both M12 mounting screw and mounting holes at the same time.

■ PANEL MOUNT ROLLER PLUNGER A-20GQ22-B

* Stainless steel roller ** Do not use both M12 mounting screw and mounting holes at the same time.

■ PANEL MOUNT CROSS ROLLER PLUNGER A-20GQ21-B

* Stainless steel roller ** Do not use both M12 mounting screw and mounting holes at the same time. 34 A A

■ SHORT HINGE LEVER A-20GV21-B

* Stainless steel lever

■ HINGE LEVER A-20GV-B

* Stainless steel lever

■ SHORT HINGE ROLLER LEVER A-20GV22-B

■ HINGE ROLLER LEVER A-20GV2-B

Mounting holes Panel mount roller plunger Panel cutout Panel mount plunger

Note: 1. Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ± 0.4 mm applies to all dimensions. 2. All drawings show the switches with screw terminals. For solder terminals, remove the “-B” from the end of the part number.

35 A A

Unit: mm (inch)

■ TERMINALS Solder terminal (blank) Screw terminal (B)

Three M4 x 5.5 dia. Terminal screws (with tooth washers)

36 A A

NOTE: DIMENSIONS ARE SHOWN IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters to inches divide by 25.4.

Cat. No. GC SW6 04/01 Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in the U.S.A. Snap Action Switch V

General Purpose Snap Action Switch I Industry standard design with 10/15 A ratings I Long service life of 50,000,000 operations minimum (mechanical)

Ordering Information

I THERMOSET MATERIAL (¥: standard. ¥: available on request) Common Terminal Contact Gap Terminal Shape (see note) OF max. Part Remarks Ratings position 1 mm 0.5 mm A C2 C B E 15 25 100 200 400 number Mounted with 2.9 mm dia. 15 A, 250 V Bottom ¥ ¥¥¥¥ ¥ ¥ ÐÐ¥ ¥ ¥ V-15 screws. The switch unit is 10 A, 250 V Bottom ¥ ¥¥¥¥ ¥ ¥ ÐÐ¥¥ÐV-10 housed in a thermoset case, and has high versatility in applications.

Note: 1. A: Solder/quick connect terminal (#187) C2: Quick connect terminal (#187) C: Quick connect terminal (#250) B: Screw terminal E: Short solder terminal

(This section continues on next page)

73 V V

Ordering Information - continued from previous page

Part Number Common Rated Current Terminal Contact Connect 15 A 10 A Actuator Position Form Terminal 200 grams 200 grams 100 grams Pin plunger Bottom SPDT A V-15G-1A5-K V-10G-1A5-K V-10G-1A4-K C2 V-15G-1C25-K V-10G-1C25-K V-10G-1C24-K C V-15G-1C5-K —— B V-15G-1B5-K V-10G-1B5-K V-10G-1B4-K E V-15G-1E5-K — V-10G-1E4-K SPST-NC A V-15G-2A5-K V-10G-2A5-K V-10G-2A4-K C2 V-15G-2C25-K V-10G-2C25-K V-10G-2C24-K SPST-NO A V-15G-3A5-K V-10G-3A5-K V-10G-3A4-K C2 V-15G-3C25-K V-10G-3C25-K V-10G-3C24-K C V-15G-3C5-K —— Side SPDT A V-15G-4A5-K V-10G-4A5-K V-10G-4A4-K SPST-NC A — V-10G-5A5-K V-10G-5A4-K SPST-NO A V-15G-6A5-K V-10G-6A5-K V-10G-6A4-K Short hinge lever Bottom SPDT A — V-10G1-1A5-K V-10G1-1A4-K C2 V-15G1-1C25-K V-10G1-1C25-K V-10G1-1C24-K B — V-10G1-1B5-K V-10G1-1B4-K E V-15G1-1E5-K V-10G1-1E5-K V-10G1-1E4-K Hinge lever Bottom SPDT A V-15G2-1A5-K V-10G2-1A5-K V-10G2-1A4-K C2 V-15G2-1C25-K V-10G2-1C25-K V-10G2-1C24-K B — V-10G2-1B5-K V-10G2-1B4-K E V-15G2-1E5-K V-10G2-1E5-K — Long hinge lever Bottom SPDT A V-15G3-1A5-K V-10G3-1A5-K V-10G3-1A4-K C2 V-15G3-1C25-K V-10G3-1C25-K V-10G3-1C24-K B V-15G3-1B5-K V-10G3-1B5-K V-10G3-1B4-K E — V-10G3-1E5-K V-10G3-1E4-K Simulated roller lever Bottom SPDT A V-15G4-1A5-K V-10G4-1A5-K V-10G4-1A4-K C2 V-15G4-1C25-K V-10G4-1C25-K V-10G4-1C24-K B — V-10G4-1B5-K V-10G4-1B4-K E — V-10G4-1E5-K V-10G4-1E4-K Short hinge roller lever Bottom SPDT A V-15G5-1A5-K V-10G5-1A5-K V-10G5-1A4-K C2 V-15G5-1C25-K V-10G5-1C25-K V-10G5-1C24-K B V-15G5-1B5-K V-10G5-1B5-K V-10G5-1B4-K Hinge roller lever Bottom SPDT A V-15G6-1A5-K V-10G6-1A5-K V-10G6-1A4-K C2 V-15G6-1C25-K — V-10G6-1C24-K B V-15G6-1B5-K V-10G6-1B5-K V-10G6-1B4-K E V-15G6-1E5-K V-10G6-1E5-K V-10G6-1E4-K

Note: 1. For SPST-NC and SPST-NO with levers consult Omron. 2. An insulation barrier is available upon request for thermoplastic types.

74 V V

Specifications

I CHARACTERISTICS

V-15 V-10 Operating speed 0.1 mm to 1 m/second (0.004 to 39.4 in/second) at pin plunger Operating frequency Mechanical 600 operations per minute Electrical 60 operations per minute Contact resistance 15 mΩ max. (initial) 30 mΩ max. (initial) Insulation resistance 100 MΩ min. at 500 VDC Dielectric strength (VAC) 1,000 VAC, between non-continuous terminals 1,500 VAC, between each terminal and ground Vibration (see note 2) Malfunction durability 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude Shock (see note 2) Mechanical durability 1,000 m/s2 min. (approx. 100 g) Malfunction durability 300 m/s2 min. (approx. 30 g) 200 m/s2 min. (approx. 20 g) Ambient temperature Operating -25° to 80°C Humidity Operating 85% RH max. Service life Mechanical 50,000,000 operations min. Electrical 100,000 operations min. 300,000 operations min. Weight Approx. 6.2 g (pin plunger type)

Note: 1. Data shown are of initial value. 2. The values indicated here are of the pin plunger type.

I OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS

Part number V-15G-1I5-K V-15G1-1I5-K V-15G2-1I5-K Characteristics V-10G-1I5-K V-10G-1I4-K V-10G1-1I5-K V-10G1-1I4-K V-10G2-1I5-K V-10G2-1I4-K OF max. 200 g 100 g 200 g 100 g 125 g 60 g RF min. 50 g 20 g 50 g 15 g 14 g 6 g PT max. 1.2 mm (0.05 in) 1.5 mm (0.06 in) 3.3 mm (0.13 in) OT min. 1.3 mm (0.05 in) 1.0 mm (0.04 in) 2.3 mm (0.09 in) MD max. 0.3 mm (0.01 in) 0.5 mm (0.02 in) 0.8 mm (0.03 in) +2.6 OP 14.7±0.4 mm 15.2±0.5 mm 15.2 -3.2 mm 15.2±1.2 mm +0.10 (0.58±0.02 in) (0.60±0.02 in) (0.60-0.13 in) (0.60±0.05 in)

Part number V-15G3-1I5-K V-15G4-1I5-K V-15G5-1I5-K Characteristics V-10G3-1I5-K V-10G3-1I4-K V-10G4-1I5-K V-10G4-1I4-K V-10G5-1I5-K V-10G5-1I4-K OF max. 70 g 35 g 125 g 60 g 240 g 120 g RF min. 6 g Ð 14 g 6 g 50 g 15 g PT max. 9.0 mm (0.35 in) 7.6 mm (0.30 in) 3.3 mm (0.13 in) 1.5 mm (0.06 in) OT min. 3.0 mm (0.12 in) 3.2 mm (0.13 in) 2.3 mm (0.09 in) 1.0 mm (0.04 in) MD max. 2.0 mm (0.08 in) 0.8 mm (0.03 in) 0.5 mm (0.02 in) OP 15.2±2.6 mm 18.7±1.2 mm 20.7±0.6 mm (0.60±0.10 in) (0.74±0.05 in) (0.81±0.02 in)

Part number V-15G6-1I5-K Characteristics V-10G6-1I5-K V-10G6-1I4-K OF max. 125 g 60 g RF min. 14 g 6 g PT max. 3.3 mm (0.13 in) OT min. 2.3 mm (0.09 in) MD max. 0.8 mm (0.03 in) OP 20.7±1.6 mm (0.81±0.06 in) 75 V V

I OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS - V SERIES ACCESSORIES

Part number VAL VAL2 VAV VAV2 VAM VAM-1 Switch V-15G-1A5-K OF max. 230 g 35 g 75 g 200 g 300 g RF min. 50 g 4 g 9 g 30 g 40 g OT max. 0.8 mm (0.03 in) 3.6 mm (0.14 in) 1.5 mm (0.06 in) 7 mm (0.28 in) 5 mm (0.20 in) MD min. 0.4 mm (0.02 in) 4.7 mm (0.19 in) 1.2 mm (0.05 in) 7 mm (0.28 in) 6 mm (0.24 in) FP max. 17 mm (0.67 in) 22.6 mm (0.89 in) ÐÐ 45 mm (1.78 in) 47 mm (1.85 in) OP 14.9±0.5 mm 20.5±0.5 mm Approx. 10.6 mm 18.6±1.6 mm 20±9 mm 30±5 mm (0.59±0.02 in) (0.81±0.02 in) (0.42 in) (0.73±0.06 in) (0.79±0.35 in) (1.18±0.20 in)

I RATINGS

Non-inductive load (A) Inductive load (A) Inrush current Rated Resistive load Lamp load Inductive load Motor load Non-inductive & Inductive Type voltage NC NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC/NO 15 A 250 VAC 15 15 2 2 10 10 3 3 36 A max. 125 VDC 0.1 0.1 —————— 10 A 250 VAC 10 10 1.5 1.5 662224 A max. 125 VDC 0.1 0.1 ——————

I CONTACT FORM Application load range Common terminal Contact form position SPDT SPST-NC* SPST-NO*

Bottom type

100 Side type

Current (mA) 30

The SPST-NC and SPST-NO contact form types listed in the ordering information tables * 10 are for Pin Plunger models only. For information concerning lever models consult Omron.

0.1 0.16 0.5 1 5 10 50 100 160 500

Current (mA)

76 V V

I APPROVALS

UL (File No. E41515), CSA (File No. LR21642) IEC 1058-1, EN conforms 61058-1

Thermoset material OF max. V-15 V-10 100 g UL UL CSA CSA 200 g UL UL CSA CSA 400 g UL Ð CSA Ð

Note: 1. The rated values approved by each of the safety standards (e.g. UL, CSA) may be different from the performance characteristics individually defined in this catalog. 2. Models approved by DEMKO, NEMKO, BEAB and SETI are also available. Consult OMRON for detailed information. Engineering Data

Mechanical service life Electrical service life Electrical service life V-15, V-10 V-15 V-10

) ) )

6 3 3

Service life (x10

Service life (x10 Service life (x10

Overtravel (mm) Rated operating current (A) Rated operating current (A)

77 V V

Dimensions Unit: mm (inch)

The following figures show the models having quick connect terminals in the #250 series at the bottom of the case. For other terminals, please refer to “Terminals.”

Note: Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ± 0.4 mm applies to all dimensions.

I PIN PLUNGER V-15G-1I5-K V-10G-1I5-K V-10G-1I4-K

I SHORT HINGE LEVER V-15G1-1I5-K V-10G1-1I5-K V-10G1-1I4-K

I HINGE LEVER V-15G2-1I5-K V-10G2-1I5-K V-10G2-1I4-K

I LONG HINGE LEVER V-15G3-1I5-K V-10G3-1I5-K V-10G3-1I4-K

I SIMULATED ROLLER LEVER V-15G4-1I5-K V-10G4-1I5-K V-10G4-1I4-K

78 V V

I SHORT HINGE ROLLER LEVER V-15G5-1I5-K V-10G5-1I5-K V-10G5-1I4-K

I HINGE ROLLER LEVER V-15G6-1I5-K V-10G6-1I5-K V-10G6-1I4-K

I TERMINALS

General purpose type Solder terminal (A) (or quick connect terminals Quick connect terminal (C2) Quick connect terminal (C) #187 series) (#187 series) (#250 series)

Common terminal position

*Indicates the length to the center of the 1.6 dia. holes.

Bottom type

79 V V

Unit: mm (inch) General purpose type

Side type

Common terminal position Short solder terminal (E) Screw terminal (B)

Bottom terminal

Accessory Dimensions

I ACTUATOR ACCESSORIES Three series of actuators are optionally available: VAL, VAM, and VAV series. The actuators in the VAL series are designated for rotary cam operations. The VAM series actuators are highly resistive to vibration and shock; so, they are ideal for machine tools and automatic doors where the switches are subject to heavy vibration or shock. The VAV series actuators are highly sensitive to force. Therefore, they should be used in an application where the operating force to be applied to the switch is critical. All these actuators can be mounted on all OMRON snap action switches having the following dimensions.

Note: 1. Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ± 0.4 mm applies to all dimensions. 2. The operating characteristics above apply when the actuator is attached to V-15-1A5-K basic switch. For any other models, consult OMRON.

I LEAF SPRING VAL

80 V V

I ROLLER LEAF SPRING VAL2

I LONG HINGE LEVER VAV

I HINGE ROLLER LEVER VAV2

I REVERSE-OPERATION, LONG HINGE LEVER VAM

81 V V

Unit: mm (inch)

I REVERSE-OPERATION, SIMULATED ROLLER LEVER VAM-1

Precautions

I MOUNTING I OPERATION

The switch is mounted with two M3 screws. When doing so, use Make sure that the operating body pushes the switch actuator an appropriate screwdriver and tighten the screws at a torque with an adequate force when the switch is to be operated, and of 4 to 6 kg-cm. that it does not touch the actuator when the switch is released. To solder the lead to the terminal, apply a soldering iron rated Do not change the operating position by modifying the actuator. at 60 W max. quickly (within 5 seconds) with the actuator at the Do not use the switch in a application where the operating free position. speed is extremely slow or the actuator is set in the midpoint Note that applying a soldering iron for too long a time or using between the free position and operating position. one that is rated at more than 60 W may degrade the switch Install the pin plunger switch so that the operating force is characteristics. applied in alignment with the stroke of the actuator. The switch should be set so that its stroke is in the range of 60 to 90% of the rated OT (minimum value) when the switch has been operated.

82 V V

NOTE: DIMENSIONS ARE SHOWN IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters to inches divide by 25.4.

Cat. No. GC SW6 04/01 Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in the U.S.A. Snap Action Switch X

General Purpose Snap Action Switch

I Direct current switch with built-in magnetic blowout I Incorporates a small permanent magnet in the contact mechanism to deflect the arc to effectively extinguish it I Ideal for switching DC circuits I Wide variety of actuators for a wide scope of applications I Same shape as OMRON Model Z snap action switch

Ordering Information

Part number Actuator Solder Terminal Screw Terminal Pin plunger X-10G X-10G-B

Spring plunger X-10GS X-10GS-B

Short spring plunger X-10GD X-10GD-B

Panel mount plunger X-10GQ X-10GQ-B

Panel mount roller plunger X-10GQ22 X-10GQ22-B

Panel mount cross roller plunger X-10GQ21 X-10GQ21-B

Leaf spring X-10GL X-10GL-B

Short hinge lever X-10GW21 X-10GW21-B

Hinge lever X-10GW X-10GW-B

Low force hinge lever X-10GW4 X-10GW4-B

Short hinge roller lever X-10GW22 X-10GW22-B

Hinge roller lever X-10GW2 X-10GW2-B

Reverse action hinge lever X-10GM X-10GM-B

Reverse action short hinge roller lever X-10GM22 X-10GM22-B

Reverse action hinge roller lever X-10GM2 X-10GM2-B

Note: 1. With reverse action type actuators, the plunger is always held down by the action of the compression coil spring, and operates the switch when released from the down position by the action of the lever. Since the plunger is held down with the actuator in the free state, the switch has excellent resistance to vibration and shock. 2. Models conforming to UL and CSA are so marked. However, those conforming to SEV are not marked. The mark “SEV” can be inscribed on request (in this case, however, neither “UL” nor “CSA” can be inscribed). 91 X X

Specifications

I CHARACTERISTICS

Operating speed 0.1 mm to 1 m/second (0.004 to 39.4 in/second) at pin plunger Operating frequency Mechanical 240 operations per minute Electrical 20 operations per minute Contact resistance 15 mΩ max. (initial) Insulation resistance 100 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC) Dielectric strength (VAC) 1,500 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between non-continuous terminals, between each terminal and noncurrent-carrying part and between each terminal and ground Vibration Malfunction durability 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude Shock Mechanical durability 1,000 m/s2 min. (approx. 100 g) Malfunction durability 300 m/s2 min. (approx. 30 g) Ambient temperature Operating -25° to 80°C (with no icing) Humidity 35% to 85% RH Service life Mechanical 1,000,000 operations minimum (at rated OT value) Electrical 100,000 operations minimum (under rated load) Weight Approx. 27 to 63 g

Note: Data shown are of initial value.

I OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS

Part number Characteristics X-10G-B X-10GS-B X-10GD-B X-10GQ-B X-10GQ22-B X-10GQ21-B OF max. 510 g RF min. 114 g PT max. 0.9 mm (0.04 in) OT min. 0.13 mm (0.01 in) 1.6 mm (0.06 in) 5.5 mm (0.22 in) 3.6 mm (0.14 in) MD max. 0.18 mm (0.01 in) OP 15.9±0.4 mm 28.2±0.5 mm 21.2±0.5 mm 21.2±0.8 mm 33.4±1.2 mm (0.63±0.02 in) (1.11±0.02 in) (0.83±0.02 in) (0.83±0.03 in) (1.31±0.05 in)

Part number Characteristics X-10GL-B X-10GW21-B X-10GW-B X-10GW4-B X-10GW22-B X-10GW2-B OF max. 200 g 250 g 110 g 25 g 220 g 145 g RF min. 14 g 32 g 14 g 5 g 35 g 21 g PT max. 5.4 mm* (0.21 in) 5.6* mm (0.22 in) 14.3* mm (0.56 in) 14.3 mm (0.56 in) 5.7 mm* (0.22 in) 9.1 mm* (0.35 in) OT min. 1.6 mm** (0.06 in) 2.1 mm (0.08 in) 4.8 mm (0.19 in) 2.4 mm (0.09 in) 4 mm (0.16 in) MD max. 2.3 mm (0.09 in) 1.7 mm (0.07 in) 3.9 mm (0.15 in) 1.7 mm (0.07 in) 3 mm (0.12 in) FP max. 22.1 mm (0.87 in) 25.5 mm (1.00 in) 34.6 mm (1.36 in) — 37.1 mm (1.46 in) 40.5 mm (1.59 in) OP 17.4±0.8 mm 20.7±0.8 mm 21.1±0.8 mm 32.2±0.8 mm 32.2±0.8 mm (0.69±0.03 in) (0.81±0.03 in) (0.83±0.03 in) (1.27±0.03 in) (1.27±0.03 in)

Part number Characteristics X-10GM-B X-10GM22-B X-10GM2-B OF max. 220 g 700 g 320 g RF min. 25 g 150 g 50 g PT max. 6.5 mm* (0.26 in) 4.7 mm* (0.19 in) 6 mm* (0.24 in) OT min. 5.5 mm (0.22 in) 2 mm (0.08 in) 4 mm (0.16 in) MD max. 2.1 mm (0.08 in) 0.75 mm (0.03 in) 1.5 mm (0.06 in) FP max. 26.8 mm (1.06 in) 36.1 mm (1.42 in) 37.4 mm (1.47 in) OP 21.1±0.8 mm 32.2±0.8 mm 32.2±0.8 mm (0.83±0.03 in) (1.27±0.03 in) (1.27±0.03 in)

* Reference value 92 ** Be certain to use switch at the rated OT of 1.6 mm (0.06 in). X X

I LEVER/PLUNGER OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS - X SERIES ACCESSORIES

Part number Characteristics XAA-1 with X-10G XAA-2 with X-10G ZAQ-3 with X-10G ZAQ-2 with X-10G ZAQ-1 with X-10G OF max. 500 g 550 g RF min. 170 g 144 g RT max. 7.2 mm* (0.28 in) 7.3 mm* (0.29 in) 1 mm (0.04 in) OT min. 12.7 mm (0.50 in) 4.5 mm (0.18 in) 20.4 mm (0.80 in) MD max. 3.3 mm (0.13 in) 0.2 mm (0.01 in) FP 32.9±1.6 mm 44.5±1.6 mm — (1.30±0.06 in) (1.75±0.06 in) OP 28.9±1.6 mm 40.4±1.6 mm 27.8±1.5 mm 53.2±1.5 mm 69.1±1.5 mm (1.14±0.06 in) (1.59±0.06 in) (1.09±0.06 in) (2.09±0.06 in) (2.72±0.06 in)

I RATINGS

Non-inductive load (A) Inductive load (A) Lamp load Inductive load Motor load Rated voltage Resistive load NC NO NC NO NC NO 8 VDC 10 3 3 10 10 5 2.5 14 VDC 10 3 3 10 10 5 2.5 30 VDC 10 3 3 10 10 5 2.5 125 VDC 10 3 1.5 7.5 6 5 2.5 250 VDC 3 1.5 0.75 2 1.5 2 1.5 Inrush current NC: 30 A max. NO: 15 A max. NC: 30 A max. NO: 15 A max.

Note: 1. Inductive load has a power factor of 0.4 min. (AC) and a time constant of 7 milliseconds max. (DC). 2. Lamp load has an inrush current of 10 times the steady-state current, while motor load has an inrush of 6 times the steady- state current. 3. The UL and CSA listed marks are stamped on all standard products. The SEV approval mark may be stamped on request. In such a case, however, the UL and CSA markings will not be provided on the requested product.

I CONTACT FORM

I APPROVALS

UL (File No. E41515)/CSA (File No. LR21642)/LLOYD (File No. KOB-412171/SEV (File No. D3, 21/115a) X-10G: IEC 1058-1 X-10Gw: EN Conforms 61058-1

Type Ratings X-10 series 10 A, 125 VDC 3 A, 250 VDC

Note: The rated values approved by each of the safety standards (e.g. UL, CSA) may be different from the performance characteristics individually defined in this catalog.

93 X X

Engineering Data

Mechanical service life Electrical service life

Dimensions Unit: mm (inch) I PIN PLUNGER X-10G-B

I SPRING PLUNGER X-10GS-B

I SHORT SPRING PLUNGER X-10GD-B

94 X X

I PANEL MOUNT PLUNGER X-10GQ-B

I PANEL MOUNT ROLLER PLUNGER X-10GQ22-B

I PANEL MOUNT CROSS ROLLER PLUNGER X-10GQ21-B

I LEAF SPRING X-10GL-B

Note: 1. All drawings show the switches with screw terminals. For solder terminals, remove the “-B” from the end of the part number. 2. Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ± 0.4 mm applies to all dimensions. 95 X X

Unit: mm (inch)

I SHORT HINGE LEVER X-10GW21-B

I HINGE LEVER X-10GW-B

I LOW FORCE HINGE LEVER X-10GW4-B

I SHORT HINGE ROLLER LEVER X-10GW22-B

I HINGE ROLLER LEVER X-10GW2-B

96 Note: 1. All drawings show the switches with screw terminals. For solder terminals, remove the “-B” from the end of the part number. 2. Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ± 0.4 mm applies to all dimensions. X X

I REVERSE ACTION HINGE LEVER X-10GM-B

I REVERSE ACTION SHORT HINGE ROLLER LEVER X-10GM22-B

I REVERSE ACTION HINGE ROLLER LEVER X-10GM2-B

I MOUNTING HOLES

Panel cutout Panel mount roller Panel mount pin plunger pin plunger

97 X X

Unit: mm (inch) Accessory Dimensions Hinge lever Hinge roller lever Panel mount plunger XAA-1 XAA-2 Short ZAQ-3 Medium ZAQ-2 Long ZAQ-1

I HINGE LEVER XAA-1

I HINGE ROLLER LEVER XAA-2

Note: 1. Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ± 0.8 mm applies to all dimensions. 98 X X

I PANEL MOUNT PLUNGER ZAQ-3

I PANEL MOUNT PLUNGER ZAQ-2

I PANEL MOUNT PLUNGER ZAQ-1

Note: 1. Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ± 0.8 mm applies to all dimensions. 99 X X

Unit: mm (inch)

I TERMINALS Solder terminal (blank) Screw terminal (B)

Three M4 x 5.5 dia. Terminal screws (with tooth washers)

Precautions

I HANDLING Since the switch incorporates a permanent magnet, attention must be paid to the following points: Use M4 screws in combination with plane washers or spring 1. Avoid mounting the switch directly onto a magnetic washers to securely mount the switch. Tighten the screws at a substance. torque of 12 to 15 kg-cm. 2. Do not subject the switch to severe shocks. When mounting the panel-mount model (the one having a suffix 3. Avoid placing the switch in a strong magnetic field. “-Q” in its model number) on a panel, tighten the hexagon nut of the actuator at a torque of 50 kg-cm maximum. 4. Be sure to prevent iron dust or iron chips from adhering to the built-in magnet or the magnetic blowout function of the To solder the lead to the terminal, apply a soldering iron rated switch will be adversely affected. at 60 W max. quickly (within 5 seconds) with the actuator at the free position. 5. do not apply thermal shock to the switch, or the magnetic flux will be diminished. Note that applying a soldering iron for too long a time or using one that is rated at more than 60 W may degrade the switch characteristics. Since the arc quenching capability of the magnetic blowout is I I governed by the amount of current to be switched, the arching PANEL-MOUNT MODEL (X-10GQ ) time may not be uniform in the event of highly inductive loads with small currents. When the time constant L/R of 0.6 to 1.2 A To side-mount the panel-mount switch to the panel with screws, loads exceeds 7 milliseconds, use of an arc suppressor circuit remove the hexagon nut from the actuator. In this case, exercise care that no impulsive force is applied to the actuator. is required. As an example of arc suppressor circuit consisting of resistance R and capacitance C in series, obtain the opti- Pay special attention to the impulsive force when the switch is mum condition by combining R and C within the range of R = 5 to be released because such force may damage the switch. to 100 Ω and C = 0.05 to 1 µF. Then connect the RC circuit Too large a dog angle and too fast operating speed may between the switch terminals or load terminals so as to produce damage the switch when the switch is side-mounted on the satisfactory results. (Consult OMRON for further details.) panel. Too fast operating speed and too long overtravel of the roller plunger switch may result in damage to the switch.

100 X X

NOTE: DIMENSIONS ARE SHOWN IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters to inches divide by 25.4.

Cat. No. GC SW6 04/01 Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in the U.S.A. Snap Action Switch Z

General Purpose Snap Action Switch

I High precision basic switch in a variety of styles I Wide margins of operating conditions increase the operating speed range I Available in general purpose and drip- proof types

Ordering Information

I GENERAL PURPOSE TYPE Standard

Operating Part number Actuator Characteristics Solder Terminal Screw Terminal Pin plunger — Z-15G Z-15G-B

Slim spring plunger — Z-15GS Z-15GS-B

Short spring plunger Low OP Z-15GD Z-15GD-B

Panel mount plunger Middle OP Z-15GQ Z-15GQ-B

Panel mount roller plunger — Z-15GQ22 Z-15GQ22-B

Panel mount cross roller plunger — Z-15GQ21 Z-15GQ21-B

Hinge lever Low OF Z-15GW Z-15GW-B

Low-force hinge lever — Z-15GW4 Z-15GW4-B

Short hinge roller lever — Z-15GW22 Z-15GW22-B

Hinge roller lever Parallel Z-15GW2 Z-15GW2-B

Unidirectional short hinge roller lever Low OF Z-15GW2277 Z-15GW2277-B

101 Z Z

I GENERAL PURPOSE TYPE High-sensitivity

Operating Part number Actuator Characteristics Solder Terminal Screw Terminal Pin plunger — — Z-15H-B

Low-force hinge lever — — Z-15HW24-B

Low-force, wire hinge lever Low OF Z-15HW78 Z-15HW78-B

Short hinge roller lever — — Z-15HW22-B

I DRIP PROOF TYPE Standard

Operating Part number Actuator Characteristics Solder Terminal Screw Terminal Slim spring plunger — Z-15GS55 Z-15GS55-B

Short spring plunger — Z-15GD55 Z-15GD55-B

Spring plunger Middle OP Z-15GK55 Z-15GK55-B

High OP Z-15GK355 Z-15GK355-B

Panel mount plunger Middle OP Z-15GQ55 Z-15GQ55-B

Panel mount roller plunger — — Z-15GQ2255-B

Panel mount cross roller plunger — — Z-15GQ2155-B

Hinge lever Low OF Z-15GW55 Z-15GW55-B

Short hinge roller lever — Z-15GW2255 Z-15GW2255-B

Hinge roller lever Parallel Z-15GW255 Z-15GW255-B

Flexible rod High OF Z-15GNJ55 Z-15GNJ55-B

102 Z Z

High-sensitivity

Operating Part number Actuator Characteristics Solder Terminal Screw Terminal Panel mount plunger Middle OP — Z-15HQ55-B

Flexible rod High OF — Z-15HNJS55-B

Note: For smaller mounting hole types, please consult OMRON. Specifications

I CHARACTERISTICS

Standard Standard flexible rod types (except flexible rod types) (coil spring and steel wire type) Operating speed 0.01 mm to 1 m/second (see note 2) 1 mm to 1 m/second Operating frequency Mechanical 240 operations/min. 120 operations/min. Electrical 20 operations/min. 20 operations/min. Insulation resistance 100 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC) Contact resistance 50 mΩ max. (initial) 15 mΩ max. (initial) Dielectric strength (VAC) G contact gap model 1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between terminals of same polarity H contact gap model 600 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute 2,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between current carrying metal parts and ground and between each terminal and non-current carrying metal parts Vibration Malfunction 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm 10 to 20 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude (see note 4) double amplitude Shock Mechanical durability 1,000 m/s2 min. (approx. 100 g) Malfunction 300 m/s2 min. (approx. 30 g) (see note 3) 50 m/s2 min. (approx. 5 g) Degree of Protection General purpose: IP00, Drip-proof: IP62 Ambient temperature Standard types -25° to 80°C (with no icing) Drip-proof types -15° to 80°C (with no icing) Humidity Standard types 35% to 85% RH Drip-proof types 35% to 95% RH Service life Mechanical G, H contact gap models 1,000,000 operations min. 20,000,000 operations min. (see note 4) Electrical G, H contact gap models 100,000 operations min. 500,000 operations min. (see note 2) Weight Approx. 22 to 58 g Approx. 42 to 48 g

Note: 1. Data shown are of initial value. 2. Apply to the pin plunger models or the pin plunger of the lever models. 3. Apply to Z-15G. 4. Apply to the pin plunger models.

103 Z Z

I OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS

Part number Characteristics Z-15G-B Z-15H-B Z-15GS-B Z-15GD-B Z-15GQ-B Z-15GQ22-B Z-15GQ21-B OF 250 to 350 g 200 to 280 g 250 to 350 g RF min. 114 g PT max. 0.4 mm (0.02) 0.3 mm (0.01) 0.4 mm (0.02) OT min. 0.13 mm (0.01) 1.6 mm (0.06) 5.5 mm (0.22) 3.58 mm (0.14) MD max. 0.05 mm (0.002) 0.025 mm (0.001) 0.05 mm (0.002) OP 15.9 ± 0.4 mm 28.2 ± 0.5 mm 21.5 ± 0.5 mm 21.8 ± 0.8 mm 33.4 ± 1.2 mm (0.63 ± 0.02) (1.1 ± 0.02) (0.85 ± 0.02) (0.86 ± 0.03) (1.31 ± 0.05)

Part number Characteristics Z-15GW-B Z-15GW4-B Z-15HW24-B Z-15HW78-B Z-15GW22-B Z-15HW22-B Z-15GW2-B OF 70 g 28 g 6 g 4 g 160 g 150 g 100 g RF min. 14 g 3.5 g 0.5 g 0.3 g 42 g 22 g PT max. 5.6 mm (0.22) 10 mm (0.39) 19.8 mm (0.78) 10 mm (0.39) 2.4 mm (0.09) 4 mm (0.16) OT min. 1.27 mm (0.05) 5.6 mm (0.22) 10 mm (0.39) 6 mm (0.24) 0.5 mm (0.02) 0.45 mm (0.02) 1.02 mm (0.04) MD max. 28.2 mm (1.11) 1.27 mm (0.05) 2 mm (0.08) 3 mm (0.12) 32.5 mm (1.28) 36.5 mm (1.44) OP 19 ± 0.8 mm 20 ± 1 mm 30.2 ± 0.4 mm (0.75 ± 0.03) (0.79 ± 0.04) (1.19 ± 0.02)

Part number Characteristics Z-15GW2277-B Z-15GS55-B Z-15GD55-B Z-15GK55-B Z-15GK355-B Z-15GQ55-B Z-15HQ55-B OF 170 g 540 g 540 g 400 g RF min. 42 g 114 g 114 g PT max. 2.4 mm (0.09) 1.9 mm (0.07) 1.8 mm (0.07) 2.3 mm (0.09) 2.4 mm (0.09) 1.8 mm (0.07) 1.7 mm (0.07) OT min. 0.51 mm (0.02) 1.6 mm (0.06) 3.5 mm (0.14) 5.5 mm (0.22) MD max. 43.6 mm (1.72) 0.06 mm (0.002) 0.04 mm (0.002) OP 41.3 ± 0.8 mm 28.2 ± 0.5 mm 21.5 ± 0.5 mm 28.2 ± 0.5 mm 37.8 ± 1.2 mm 21.8 ± 0.8 mm (1.63 ± 0.03) (1.11 ± 0.02) (.85 ± 0.02) (1.11 ± 0.02) (1.49 ± 0.05) (0.86 ± 0.03)

Part number Characteristics Z-15GQ2255-B Z-15GQ2155-B Z-15GW55-B Z-15GW2255-B Z-15GW255-B Z-15GNJ55-B Z-15HNJ55-B OF 540 g 100 g 200 g 130 g 50 g 15 g RF min. 114 g 14 g 42 g 21 g Ð Ð PT max. 1.8 mm (0.07) 5.6 mm (0.22) 2.44 mm (0.10) 4 mm (0.16) 20 mm* (0.79) 25 mm* (0.98) OT min. 3.58 mm (0.14) 2 mm (0.08) 0.8 mm (0.03) 1.6 mm (0.06) Ð Ð MD max. 0.06 mm (0.002) 28.2 mm (1.11) 32.9 mm (1.30) 36.5 mm (1.44) Ð Ð OP 33.4 ± 1.2 mm 19 ± 0.8 mm 30.2 ± 0.4 mm 30.2 ± 0.8 mm Ð Ð (1.31 ± 0.05) (0.75 ± 0.03) (1.19 ± 0.02) (1.19 ± 0.03) * Reference value

I OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS - Z SERIES ACCESSORIES (LEVERS/PLUNGERS) Part number Characteristics ZAA-1 w/Z-15G-B ZAA-2 w/Z-15G-B ZAQ-3 w/Z-15G-B ZAQ-2 w/Z-15G-B ZAQ-1 w/Z-15G-B OF max. 500 g 550 g RF min. 170 g 144 g PT max. — 1 mm (0.04 in) OT min. 12.7 mm (0.50 in) 4.5 mm (0.18 in) 20.4 mm (0.80 in) MD max. 2.2 mm (0.09 in) 0.2 mm (0.01 in) FP max. 34.5 mm (1.36 in) 46.1 mm (1.81 in) Ð OP 28.9±1.6 mm 40.4±1.6 mm 27.8±1.5 mm 53.2±1.5 mm 69.1±1.5 mm (1.14±0.06 in) (1.60±0.06 in) (1.09±0.06 in) (2.09±0.06 in) (2.72±0.06 in)

104 Z Z

I TERMINAL ENCLOSURES - STANDARD MODELS

Material Mounting method For solder terminal For screw terminal Remarks Phenolic resin Side mounting AP-A AP-B — Metal AP1-A AP1-B Use in conjunction with AP-A and AP-B Polyvinyl chloride AP-Z AP-Z Excels in safety and dust-proofing property

I CONTACT INFORMATION

Type Contact gap Features General purpose H: 0.25 mm Pin plunger and lever types available. (high sensitivity) Drip-proof and flexible rod types are also available. G: 0.5 mm (standard) Drip-proof H: 0.25 mm The pin plunger is sealed from the other switch mechanisms by a resilient rubber, (high sensitivity) and the case and cover are sealed by adhesive so that the switch is resistant to G: 0.5 mm (standard) humidity, oil and dust. The degree of protection conforms to IEC IP63.

I RATINGS Standard type (except flexible rod types)

Non-inductive load (A) Inductive load (A) Contact Rated Resistive load Lamp load Inductive load Motor load gap voltage NC NC NO NC/NO NC NO G,H 125 VAC 15 (10) 3 1.5 15 (10) 5 2.5 250 VAC 15 (10) 2.5 1.25 15 (10) 3 1.5 500 VAC 10 1.5 0.75 6 1.5 0.75 G 8 VDC 15 3 1.5 15 5 2.5 14 VDC 15 3 1.5 10 5 2.5 30 VDC 6 3 1.5 552.5 125 VDC 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.05 0.05 0.05 250 VDC 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.03 0.03 0.03 H 8 VDC 15 3 1.5 15 5 2.5 14 VDC 15 3 1.5 10 5 2.5 30 VDC 2 2 1.4 111 125 VDC 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.03 0.03 0.03 250 VDC 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.02 0.02 0.02

Note: Figures in parenthesis are for Z15HW78(-B), AC ratings for this part number are 125/250 V only. Standard flexible rod types

Non-inductive load (A) Inductive load (A) Rated Resistive load Lamp load Inductive load Motor load voltage NC NC NO NC/NO NC NO 125 VAC 15 2 1 72.52 250 VAC 15 1 0.5 51.51 8 VDC 15 2 1 731.5 14 VDC 15 2 1 731.5 30 VDC 2 2 1 110.5 125 VDC 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.03 0.03 0.03 250 VDC 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.02 0.02 0.02

Note: 1. The above current ratings are the values of the steady-state current. 2. Inductive load has a power factor of 0.4 min. (AC) and a time constant of 7 ms max. (DC). 3. Lamp load has an inrush current of 10 times the steady-state current. 4. Motor load has an inrush current of 6 times the steady-state current. 5. The AC ratings of molded terminals are 125 and 250 V only. 6. The ratings values apply under the following test conditions: Ambient temperature: 20±2¼C Ambient humidity: 65±5% Operating frequency: 20 operations/min. 105 Z Z

I CONTACT FORM

I APPROVALS UL (File No. E41515)/CSA (File No. LR21642)/SEV (File No. S20/163) EN: conforms 6105P-1

Type Rating Z-15 Series 15 A 125, 250 or 480 VAC 1/2 A 125 VDC, 1/4 A 250 VDC 1/8 HP 125 VAC, 1/4 A 250 VAC

Note: The rated values approved by each of the safety standards (e.g. UL/CSA) may be different from the performance characteristics individually defined in this catalog.

I CONSTRUCTION Drip-proof type

Rubber cap protects the built-in switch from water and dust

Fixed contact (NC)

Glued surface (adhesive is filled between case and cover)

Moveable contact

Spring pivot Fixed contact (NC) Moveable spring

Engineering Data

Mechanical service life Electrical service life Z-15G Z-15G

)

ations (x10

Number of oper

Overtravel (mm) Switching current (A)

106 Z Z

Dimensions Unit: mm (inch) I PIN PLUNGER Z-15G-B, Z-15H-B

I SLIM SPRING PLUNGER Z-15GS-B

I SHORT SPRING PLUNGER Z-15GD-B

I PANEL MOUNT PLUNGER Z-15GQ-B

*Stainless steel plunger **Two hexagonal nuts (2t x 14 width across flats) ***Two lock nuts (2t x 15.6 width across flats)

Note: 1. Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ± 0.4 mm applies to all dimensions. 2. For smaller diameter mounting holes, please consult OMRON. 3. All drawings show the switches with screw terminals. For solder terminals, remove the “-B” from the end of the part number. 107 Z Z

Unit: mm (inch) I PANEL MOUNT ROLLER PLUNGER Z-15GQ22-B

* Stainless steel roller ** Two hexagonal nuts (3t x 17 width across flats)

I PANEL MOUNT CROSS ROLLER PLUNGER Z-15GQ21-B

* Stainless steel roller ** Two hexagonal nuts (3t x 17 width across flats)

I HINGE LEVER Z-15GW-B

I LOW FORCE HINGE LEVER Z-15GW4-B

108 Z Z

I LOW FORCE HINGE LEVER Z-15HW24-B

I LOW FORCE WIRE HINGE LEVER Z-15HW78-B

I SHORT HINGE ROLLER LEVER Z-15GW22-B, Z-15HW22-B

I HINGE ROLLER LEVER Z-15GW2-B

Unit: mm (inch) I UNIDIRECTIONAL SHORT HINGE ROLLER LEVER Z-15GW2277-B

I SLIM SPRING PLUNGER Z-15GS55-B

I SHORT SPRING PLUNGER Z-15GD55-B

I SPRING PLUNGER Z-15GK55-B

110 Z Z

I SPRING PLUNGER Z-15GK355-B

I PANEL MOUNT PLUNGER Z-15GQ55-B, Z-15HQ55-B

*Stainless steel plunger **Two hexagonal nuts (2t x 14 width across flats) ***Two lock nuts (2t x 15.6 width across flats)

I PANEL MOUNT ROLLER PLUNGER Z-15GQ2255-B

* Stainless steel roller ** Two hexagonal nuts (3t x 17 width across flats)

I PANEL MOUNT CROSS ROLLER PLUNGER Z-15GQ2155-B

* Stainless steel roller ** Two hexagonal nuts (3t x 17 width across flats)

Note: 1. Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ± 0.4 mm applies to all dimensions. 2. For smaller diameter mounting holes, please consult OMRON. 111 3. All drawings show the switches with screw terminals. For solder terminals, remove the “-B” from the end of the part number. Z Z

Unit: mm (inch) I HINGE LEVER Z-15GW55-B

I SHORT HINGE ROLLER LEVER Z-15GW2255-B

I HINGE ROLLER LEVER Z-15GW255-B

I FLEXIBLE ROD Z-15GNJ55-B

112 Z Z

I FLEXIBLE ROD Z-15HNJS55-B

I MOUNTING HOLES Side mounting Panel mounting plunger type Roller plunger type

I TERMINALS Solder terminal (blank) Screw terminal (B)

Three M4 x 5.5 dia. Terminal screws (with tooth washers)

I MOLDED TERMINAL TYPE -MII ORDERING INFORMATION Lead outlet directions (L, R, D, F, H) The solder terminal type can be supplied with molded terminals with a choice of five different lead Mold thickness outlet directions. When placing your order for the (No symbol)…a = 12 mm molded terminal type, add the following code to the with VSF model number. 19…a = 19 mm with VCT

Note: 1. Standard leads are single-core vinyl cords (VSF) with a nominal cross sectional area of 1.25 mm2. 2. Standard vinyl cord lengths are 1 m, 3 m, and 5 m. 3. Mold thickness will be 19 mm when using VCT cords. 4. Standard unit has three lead outlets in the same direction. 5. Connect the black lead to the COM terminal, white lead to the NO terminal, and red lead to the NC terminal, respectively. 113 Z Z

I DIRECTIONS OF LEAD OUTLETS

The following diagrams show the molded terminal version of sealed type Z-15GW2255, with a mold thickness of 12 mm. Z-15GW2255-ML Z-15GW2255-MR Z-15GW2255-MD (left-hand) (right-hand) (underside)

Note: Respective directions of lead outlets are determined with the plunger viewed on your left.

I LEAD WIRE SPECIFICATIONS

Nominal cross- Finished outer Connection to Type sectional area (mm2) diameter (mm) terminal Length (m) VSF (single-core, vinyl cord) 1.25 Approx. 3.1 Black-COM 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 5 VCT (vinyl-insulated cable) Approx. 9.6 (2-core) White-NO (standard) Approx. 10.5 (3-core) Red-NC

I ACCESSORIES (order separately) Unit: mm (inch) Hinge lever Hinge roller lever ZAA-1 ZAA-2

Panel mount plunger ZAQ-3

114 Z Z

Panel mount plunger ZAQ-2

Note: Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ± 0.8 mm applies to all dimensions.

Panel mount plunger ZAQ-1

Note: Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ± 0.8 mm applies to all dimensions.

AP-A (for solder terminal) AP1-A (for solder terminal) AP-B (for screw terminal)

115 Z Z

AP1-B AP-Z

Note: Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ± 0.4 mm applies to all dimensions.

I CABLE OUTLET DIMENSIONS

A-A section B-B section

Note: The cable outlet is provided with two stepped openings (6 dia. and 8 dia.) to permit the use of either opening according to the finished OD of the cable to be connected. Precautions

I MOUNTING I OPERATION

Use M4 mounting screws with plain washers or spring washers High sensitivity switch (Z-15H) to mount the switch. Tighten the screws at a torque of 12 to 15 kg-cm. When using the switch in a DC circuit, be sure to provide an arc suppressor as well because the small contact gap of the switch Solder the lead to the terminal by applying a soldering iron may result in contact troubles. rated at 60 W max. quickly (within 5 seconds). Note that applying a soldering iron for too long a time or using one that is In an application where a high repeat accuracy is required, limit the current that flows through the switch to within 0.1 A. Also, rated at more than 60 W may degrade the switch characteristics. use a relay to control a high-capacity load if the switch is connected to such a load. (In this case, the current of the relay Panel mount type (Z-15IQ) coil is the load of the switch.) Do not apply a force of 2 kg or higher to the pin plunger. When mounting a panel mount type switch (the one having a suffix “-Q” in its model number) to a panel, tighten the hexagon Exercise care that the environment conditions such as nut of the actuator at a torque of 50 kg-cm or less. temperature and humidity do not change abruptly. When mounting a panel mount type switch on its side, remove Drip-proof type (Z-I55) the hexagon nut from the actuator and carefully adjust the dog angle and operating speed because too large a dog angle or The switch is not perfectly oil-tight; so, do not dip it in oil or too high an operating speed may damage the switch. Especially water. be careful not to apply an impulsive force to the actuator when Depending on the environments, the materials of the rubber operating it. By the same token, too high an operating speed boots must be selected. Oil-tight, cold-resistive, and heat- and too long an overtravel may damage a panel mount switch resistive rubbers are available from OMRON. with a roller pin plunger. Do not use mounting holes of the switch body when mounting Flexible rod type (Z-15INJI55) (drip-proof type) on panel with M12 mounting nut. When the rod is fully swung, the switch may operate when the lever returns, causing chattering. Use a circuit that compensates for chattering wherever possible. Do not switch the rod to the fullest extent when the switch is to break a power circuit because such a practice may cause metal 116 deposition to occur between the mating contacts of the switch. Z Z

NOTE: DIMENSIONS ARE SHOWN IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters to inches divide by 25.4.

Cat. No. GC SW6 04/01 Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in the U.S.A. Jog Lever Switch DISCONTINUED B6J

Miniature Three-Way Switch Features Tactile Feedback in All Directions

• Tactile feedback for push and slide functions simplifies operation; conventional switches offer feedback for push action only. • Accepts customer-designed key-tops to match product design. • Compact size allows high-density components mounting. • Surface-mount design suitable for reflow soldering. • Ideal for mobile devices such as PDAs, music players/ recorders and cell phones.

Ordering Information

Description Switching capacity Model Three-way jog lever switch 10 mA, 5 VDC B6J-1110P ■ Typical Applications • Cell Phone • PDA • Portable audio player

Specifications

Item Specification Operating force Push direction 3.3±0.6N Slide lever 1.2±0.4N Switching capacity 5 VDC, 10 mA (resistive load) Contact resistance 300 mΩ max. (rated 20 mA, 5 VDC) Chattering 10 ms max. Ambient temperature -10° to 60°C (14° to 140°F) with no icing Ambient humidity (operating) 35 to 85% RH Insulation resistance 100 MΩ min. at 100 VDC Dielectric strength 100 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min Vibration resistance 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude for two hours each in X,Y and Z axes. Shock resistance Malfunction 100 m/s2 min. Destruction 735 m/s2 min. Life expectancy 100,000 operations min.

Jog Lever Switch B6J DISCONTINUED 1 Connections

■ Circuit / Terminal

Push Circuit

Push

Side Circuit

CCW CW Angle

15° 0° 15° Terminal (9°) (9°)

19COMMON

23CCW

78CW 46DUMMY

Dimensions

Unit: mm (inch)

2.3 (0.09) CCW CW 11.5±0.5 (0.45±0.02) 0.04±0.3 9.4 (0.15±0.01) (0.37) 1 PUSH 8.2 (0.04) (0.32) 2.2 0.05 3.1 (0.09) (0.002) 0.8 (0.03) (0.12)

11.45±0.4 (0.45±0.02)

8.5 R0.35 (0.33) (0.02) 7.95 5.9 (0.31) (0.23) 1 9 3.55 2.7 5.2 (0.14) (0.11) (0.20) 2.55 (0.10) 2 8

345 67 R4 0.03 (0.02) 2.1 (0.001) (0.08) MAX 0.3 2.9 0.5 27° 0.7 (0.01) (0.11) (0.02) 10 (0.03) (0.34) P.C. Board mounting face 12 (0.47)

12.4 (0.49)

0.1±0.05 (0.00±0.002)

2 - 1±0.08 4±0.1 (0.03±0.003) (0.15±0.00)

2 Jog Lever Switch B6J DISCONTINUED ■ PCB Mounting

1 dia.1.1±0.1 (0.39) 4 0. ±0.04 (0.16) (0.04 )

1.1 (0.40)

1.6 (0.06) 3 (0.11) 1.6 (0.06)

0.8 (0.03) 1 (0.39) 1 (0.39) 0.8 (0.03) 2.4 (0.09)

4.6 (0.2)

7.8 (0.31)

11 (0.43)

Note: Unless specified tolerance is ± 0.05 (0.002). ■ Tape Packaging Dimensions Note: One reel contains 1,350 pieces.

+0.1 +1 Tape carrying hole dia.1.5 25 cover tape: 0 ±0.15 0 16 polyester film (0.06+0.004) (0.63±0.006) (0.98+0.039) 1.75±0.1 Pitch = 4±0.1 (0.069±0.004) (0.16±0.004) 2±0.05 (0.08±0.002) carrier tape: polystyrene

dia.13 (0.51) 4 ±0.1 (0.16) Tape drawing direction +0.3 11.5 10.6 dia.80 24 ±0.004 -0.1 (0.45 ) (0.42) (3.15) (0.94+0.01 -0.004)

11.9 0.4 1.6 0.8±0.1 (0.47) (0.02) (0.06) (0.03±0.004) tape reel

dia.380±2 ±0.08 label (15 ) 12.6 2 (0.08) 2 (0.50) (0.08)

±0.1 4.8 0.4 ±0.004 8° (0.19 ) (0.02) X A M

3.6±0.1 (0.14±0.004)

Jog Lever Switch B6J DISCONTINUED 3 Precautions

■ Correct Use

Reflow Soldering Attach a thermocouple to one side of the terminal with solder having a high melting point. Then set the Reflow furnace to a peak terminal of 250°C. The optimum heating curve is shown below.

(°C) 250 Peak: 250°C 230°C

200 Pre-heating zone 180°C

150 150°C Temperature 90±30 s 100 30 - 40 Soldering zone 50 Heating time

Note: The above heating curve applies if the thickness of the circuit board is 1.6 mm. Soldering Iron Method

Bit temperature: 350±10° C Application time of soldering iron: 3+1 seconds Do not apply excessive pressure to the terminal Caution The B6J switch is not sealed, so it cannot be washed or cleaned by solvent after soldering. Flux or PCB powder can enter the switch, causing contact failure, if the switch is treated under dirty conditions such as when PCBs are piled up or PCBs are depaneled by hands wearing dirty gloves with PCB powder on them.

ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters into inches, divide by 25.4

OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC OMRON CANADA, INC. OMRON ON-LINE One East Commerce Drive 885 Milner Avenue Global - http://www.omron.com Schaumburg, IL 60173 Toronto, Ontario M1B 5V8 USA - http://www.omron.com/oei 847-882-2288 416-286-6465 Canada - http://www.omron.com/oci

Cat. No. A01WAD2 11/02 Specifications subject to change without notice Printed in USA

4 Jog Lever Switch B6J DISCONTINUED